Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutR2020-083 2020-05-04 RESOLUTION NO. R2020-83 A Resolution of the City Council of the City of Pearland, Texas, awarding a construction services contract for the Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation Project, to R & B Group, Inc., in the amount of $768,600.00. BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS: Section 1. That competitive bids for construction of the Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation Project have been reviewed and tabulated. Section 2. That the City Council hereby awards the bid to R & B Group, Inc., in the amount of$768,600.00. Section 3. The City Manager or his designee is hereby authorized to execute a construction services contract for the Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation Project. PASSED, APPROVED and ADOPTED this the 4th day of May, A.D., 2020. c TOM REID MAYOR AT ST: y�- C STAL ROAN, RMC, CMC QF-p`... /VO° � ".,�, CITY SECRETARY :p;. 1.. it( VW 1 wi APPROVED AS TO FORM: 0\ ek,4"--.-- GX--', "1'4,4,441.1100%0S DARRIN M. COKER CITY ATTORNEY P-2620-25, Proj ect Manual for: Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation __ TEXAS COP Project No. : WW 1903 Bid No: 0220-27 March, 2020 Prepared By: AR KKENGINEERS .oF.relzbar Pit err »......r. .. ARKK Engineers, LLC •»w»•......» ............ �, 7322 So'rthwes; Freeway, Suite 1040 a3.00\ C62„�} �.....� Houst )n,TX 77074 t' '�F`'/.9ENse?../0 TX PE 1-i;.rti No. 1387 .s /OKAL EIA ‘..' (713)--40”-:t755 office (713)-400-2754 fax 3- 3- 1.� Project Manual for: Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation COP Project No. : WW 1903 Bid No. : 0220-27 March, 2020 Prepared By: ARKK ENGINEERS, LLC TX PE Firm No. 13872 CITY OF PEARLAND CULLEN REGIONAL LIFT STATION REHABILITATION BRAZORIA COUNTY,TEXAS TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE DIVISION 0—BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 00100 Invitation to Bid 00200 Instructions to Bidders 00300 Bid Proposal 00500 Standard Form of Agreement 00505 Texas House Bill 89 Verification Form 00610 Performance Bond 00611 Payment Bond 00612 One-Year Maintenance Bond 00615 Partial Waiver of Lien 00700 General Conditions of Agreement 00800 Special Conditions of Agreement 00811 Wage Scale for Engineering Construction ARKK ENGINEERS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 —GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 Summary of Work 3 01140 Contractor's Use Of Premises 4 01200A Special Provision to Measurement And Payment 3 01200 Measurement And Payment 3 01290 Change Order Procedures 4 01310 Coordination And Meetings 3 01350 Submittals 6 01380 Construction Photographs 3 01420 Reference Standards 5 01450 Testing Laboratory Services 3 01500 Temporary Facilities And Controls 10 01560 Filter Fabric Fence 3 01562 Waste Material Disposal 3 01564 Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 8 01566 Source Controls for Erosion and Sedimentation 5 01600 Material and Equipment 3 01630 Product Options And Substitutions 3 01730 Operations and Maintenance Data 3 01750 Starting Systems 2 01760 Project Record Documents 2 00010- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TABLE OF CONTENTS 01770 Contract Closeout 2 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 02613 Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings 3 02634 Ductile Iron Pipe 5 02770 Lift Station Wall Liner 8 02790 Bypass Pumping 3 02910 Topsoil 3 02922 Sodding 4 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 Cast In Place Concrete 38 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09915 Painting and Protective Coatings 15 09920 Recoating of Lift Station Piping 7 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11311 Submersible Wastewater Pumps 13 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 2 15053 Pump Station Piping 5 15101 Valves and Gates for Pump Stations 6 15140 Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Restraints 2 BAIRD, GILROY, & DIXON ELECTRICAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16012 Electrical Work 4 16060 Electrical Demolition 3 16100 Basic Materials and Methods 22 16110 Raceways and Boxes 31 16119 Underground Ducts and Pull Boxes 5 16122 600-volt Power Cable 4 16126 Instrumentation Cable 5 16131 Device, Pull and Junction Boxes 3 16140 Wiring Devices 3 16150 Electric Motors 7 16170 Grounding and Bonding 6 16195 Electrical Identification 8 16211 Natural Gas Engine Generator and Controls 11 00010-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TABLE OF CONTENTS 16475 Overcurrent Protection Devices 7 16496 Automatic Transfer Switch 7 16980 Natural Gas Service Entrance 3 16982 Natural Gas Distribution for Generators 19 END OF SECTION 00010 -3 of3 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Section 00100 INVITATION TO BID CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Lowest Responsible Bidder Sealed Electronic Bids will be accepted for the following project, in the City's E-bid System. Electronic bids shall be submitted through the City's web site at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. All interested Bidders are required to register as a "supplier" on the City's E-bid System at the above web address and clicking on "Supplier Registration". Registration provides automatic access to any changes to the Plans, Specifications or Bid time and date. However, submission of an E-bid requires completing a short registration questionnaire found on this web site. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services,New(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Heavy(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Trade (New Construction) For more information regarding registration instructions, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200, included in the project bid documents viewable on the web site. Questions regarding electronic bidding should be directed to City Purchasing Officer at ebids(a,pearlandtx.gov. All Bids submitted electronically will remain confidential until the opening date and time when they will be opened and read into the public record. Bids, shall be submitted on the form provided in the E-bid System and submitted electronically through this system to the City Purchasing Officer, City of Pearland, City Hall Annex located at 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. Electronic bids will be accepted until 2:00 p.m., Thursday, March 26, 2020. All Bids shall reference the following project information in the appropriate locations in provided electronic format. All properly submitted bids shall be publicly "opened" and read aloud into the public record following the closing of the acceptance period for the construction of: Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation City of Pearland, Texas COP PN: WW1903 BID NO.: 0220-27 A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held at the City of Pearland City Hall Annex at 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581 at 3:00 p.m. on March 18, 2020. The project area is located on the west side of Cullen Boulevard, just north of Broadway, on a tract situated between a US Post Office and Exxon gas station, in the City of Pearland. The project involves the rehabilitation of an existing wastewater lift station, and all labor, equipment, materials, and incidentals required for the project. Upon award of a contract, the successful Bidder will be required to utilize the City's web based project management software, "Pro-Trak" for the administration of the construction project, 02-2020 00100 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID including but not limited to, all transmittals and material submittals, RFI's, RFC's, Change Orders, Applications for Payment and all project communications with the City, its Construction Manager and Engineer. This system has certain hardware, internet access and operation requirements that form the basis for all project communications, documentation and records for the project. For more information, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200. Electronic Bid Documents: including Contract Documents, Plans and Technical Specifications are available for download on the City's Website at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx upon registration. The documents are NOT viewable without registration. These same documents are also available at the following locations. Amtek Plan Room (713) 956-0100 4001 Sherwood Houston, TX 77092 The Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. (713) 334-7100 2400 Augusta, Suite 350 Houston, TX 77057 Virtual Builders Exchange (832) 613-0201 7035 W. Tidwell Building J, Suite 112 Houston, TX 77092 McGrawHill Construction—Dodge Reports 1-800-393-6343 No plan fees or deposits are required for plans and bid documents obtained through the City's E- bid System. BIDDERS MUST REGISTER AS A SUPPLIER ON THE CITY'S E-BID SYSTEM IN ORDER TO SUBMIT A BID EVEN IF BID DOCUMENTS ARE OBTAINED VIA ONE OF THE PLAN HOUSES. Bidders accept sole responsibility for downloading all of the required documents, plans, specifications bid forms and addenda required for bidding. No bid may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of ninety (90) days subsequent to the bid opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)"shall mean calendar day(s). Bid Security and Bonds: Bid Security in the form of Cashier's Check, Certified Check, or Bid Bond payable to the City of Pearland in the amount of 5% of the total base bid price must accompany each proposal. Bidders submitting bids electronically through the E-bid System shall scan and up-load a copy of the sealed Bid Bond as an attachment to their bid. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two bidders and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the Bid Opening. Bid Security shall be delivered to: Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. 02-2020 00100-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID The successful Bidder must furnish Performance and Payment Bonds as required by Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code or other applicable law, as amended, upon the form included in the Contract Documents, in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, such bonds to be executed by a corporate surety duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and named in the current list of "Treasury Department Circular No. 570", naming the City of Pearland, Texas as Obligee. Additionally, the successful bidder shall be required to provide a one year Maintenance Bond for the improvements installed as part of this work, as provided in the Special Conditions of Agreement. Equal Opportunity: All responsible bidders will receive consideration for award of contract without regard to race, color,religion, sex, or national origin. Nondiscrimination: The City, in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252, 42 U.S.C. 2000d to 2000d-4 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Transportation, Subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally- Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such Act, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in consideration for an award. DBE/SBE Goal: The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) goal for this project is 0%. The Small Business Enterprise (SBE) goal for this project is 0%. DBEs and SBEs selected must be TxDOT approved. Race neutral participation is encouraged and can be achieved through various supplier and subcontracting opportunities. Selection Criteria: The Contract is to be awarded on the basis of Lowest Responsible Bidder. In identifying this criteria the City will consider: 1) lowest total bid price for all work listed and specifically requested, including but not limited to: Base Bid, Extra Work items and selected Alternates. The City of Pearland reserves the right to award a contract based on any combination of the above considered to be in its best interests or to reject any or all bids. A bid that has been "opened" may not be changed for the purposes of correcting an error in the bid price. Young Lorfing, TRMC City Secretary, City of Pearland First Publication date March 4, 2020 Second Publication date March 11, 2020 02-2020 00100-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Section 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. Defined Terms 1.1 The term "Owner" hereinafter is defined as the City of Pearland and is used interchangeably with the term "the City". Both terms are synonymous and refer to the City. 1.2 The term "Bidder" means one who submits a Bid Proposal directly to Owner, as distinct from a sub-bidder, who submits a bid to a Bidder. The term "Successful Bidder" means the lowest responsible Bidder to whom the Owner(on the basis of Owner's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. The term "Bid Documents" includes the Invitation to Bidders, Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Proposal, and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipts of bids). 1.3 The term "E-bid System" refers to the City's electronic bidding system. This is a web- based system that provides all Bid Documents electronically to potential Bidders and forms the pathway for interested Bidders to submit bids in response to advertisement and invitation. The term "e-bid" and/ or "electronic bid" means the Bidders' electronic response submitted on the electronic Bid Proposal to the Owner by way of the E-bid System. The terms "electronic bid" or "e-bid" are used inter-changeably to describe the above bid process to submit an authorized bid to the City in response to an Invitation to Bidders. 1.4 The term "Pro-Trak" means the City's web-based contract administration and construction records management system used by involved parties to administer the project. This system serves as the web accessed centralized information distribution hub for communications and document management, pay application processing and record retention for all project documentation. Operational instructions for this system will be issued to the successful Bidder at the pre-Construction Meeting. 1.5 All other definitions set out in the Contract Documents are applicable to terms used in the Bidding Documents. 1.6 Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean consecutive calendar day(s). 2. Registration for E-bid System 2.1 The Owner's E-bid System is accessible via the City's web site at https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. Bid documents can be viewed by simply selecting a specific project from the BID OPPORTUNITIES list and clicking on that project AFTER registration as a Supplier. Potential Bidders MUST REGISTER as a "Supplier" by clicking on the Supplier Registration button and completing the registration form. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services,New(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Heavy(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Trade (New Construction) 12-2014 00200- 1 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Select the appropriate Time Zone for the Bidder's location and whether that location observes Daylight Savings time. Complete the registration information providing all required contact information and establish password security for the E-bid System. Once complete, "suppliers" will receive emails notifying of bid opportunities. Downloading any project bid data will automatically place the bidder's contact information on the list of plan holders list and the E-bid System will automatically send any and all updates, changes or addenda associated with that project. 2.2 The electronic Bid Proposal can only be submitted through this system. The form can be printed for Bidder's use, but the Bid Proposal MUST be submitted on the electronic form within the E-bid System. 2.3 Questions regarding use of the E-bid System may be directed by email to: ebids@pearlandtx.gov. 3. Copies of Bidding Documents 3.1 Complete sets of "electronic" Bidding Documents are available for download to registered Bidders at No Cost from the City's E-bid System at: https://pearland.ionwave.net. Interested Bidders must register as a "Supplier" on this site in order to receive the Bid Documents, and all Addenda or other notifications of changes, including communications from the Owner or Engineer. All Bid Documents are available to download and print. 3.2 The Bidder accepts sole responsibility for ensuring that he obtains a full set of these documents by completing the registration and executing a full and complete download of the project documents. Downloading of Bid Documents automatically ensures receipt of any and all subsequent communications from the City or its Engineer. 3.2 Copies of Bidding Documents are available or may be viewed at any of the Plan Houses listed in the Invitation to Bidders. It is recommended that all interested Bidders,whether bidding directly to the Owner or Sub-bidders bidding to a Bidder, register as a Supplier and download the project Bid Documents. 3.3 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bid Proposals; neither Owner nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents including,but not limited to all Addenda issued prior to bid. 3.4 Owner and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bid Proposals on the Work, and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. 4. Qualifications of Bidders 4.1 In determining to whom to award a contract, the City of Pearland may consider, in addition to the other selection criteria identified in section 16 of these Instructions to Bidders, 12-2014 00200-2 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS the following Qualifications of Bidder, and each Bidder must be prepared to submit within two (2) days of Owner's request any or all of such Qualifications requested: 1) A brief narrative of previous experience of the Bidder with projects of a similar nature and scope; 2) A list, including owner name and project location, of on-going projects and contracts for construction of projects of the Bidder which are not yet substantially complete; 3)A list of proposed subcontractors and suppliers for the project being bid; 4)A list of name,address and telephone number of references for projects completed by Bidder; and 5)A Financial Statement of Bidder,consisting of the balance sheet and annual income statement of Bidder for the Bidder's last fiscal year end preceding the submission of the Bid Proposal, which has been audited or examined by an independent certified public accountant. The Financial Statement of Bidder shall be used to determine a Bidder's net working capital, which is defined as current assets less current liabilities. A Bidder's net working capital shall be considered evidence of the Bidder's ability to provide sufficient financial management of the project being bid. The Bidder's Financial Statement shall be clearly and conspicuously marked as "confidential", and shall be deemed and treated as confidential and excepted from the Public Information disclosure requirements of Texas Government Code Section 552.001 et seq., as such information, if released, would give advantage to a competitor or bidder, and/or would cause substantial competitive harm to Bidder. 5. Examination of Contract Documents and Site 5.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid Proposal, to (a) examine the Bidding Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may affect cost,progress,performance or furnishing of the Work, (c)consider federal, state and local laws and regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work,(d)study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and (e) notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors, omissions or discrepancies in the Contract Documents,(f)to recognize and plan for use of the City's"Pro-Trak"software to administer the construction process and perform the work of the project. 5.2 Any reports of explorations and tests of conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents will be made available to Bidders for review,but such reports are not part of the Contract Documents. Bidder may not and should not rely upon the accuracy of the data contained in such reports, interpretations or opinions contained therein, or the completeness thereof, for the purposes of bidding or construction. 5.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to underground utilities, equipment or other underground facilities at or contiguous to the site is based upon information and data furnished to Owner and Engineer by owners of such underground facilities or others, and Owner does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof. 5.4 Before submitting a Bid Proposal, each Bidder will, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations,investigations,explorations,tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and underground facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, 12-2014 00200-3 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS progress, performance or furnishing of the Work and which Bidder deems necessary to determine its Bid Proposal prices for performing and furnishing the Work in accordance with the Contract Time, Contract Price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 5.5 On request in advance, Owner will provide each prospective Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests as each prospective Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid Proposal. Prospective Bidders shall fill all holes, clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations. 5.6 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands, access thereto or contractual arrangements for use by the Contractor required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by Owner unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 5.7 The submission of a Bid Proposal will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4,that without exception the Bid Proposal is premised upon performing and furnishing all of the Work required by the Contract Documents and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in, required by or reasonably inferred from the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 6. Interpretations and Addenda 6.1 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda delivered or transmitted by electronic means to all registered Bidders in the City's E-bid System. Questions received less than five (5) days prior to the date for opening of Bid Proposals may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 6.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by Owner or Engineer. Addenda will automatically be made available to all registered Bidders that have downloaded Bid Documents from the City's E-bid System. 7. Bid Security 7.1 Each Bid Proposal must be accompanied by bid security made payable to Owner in an amount of five percent (5%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid Proposal price, in the form of a certified check, cashier's check or a Bid Bond ("Bid Security"). 7.2 Bidders submitting bids through the E-bid System shall scan and up-load a copy of their Bid Security(sealed Bid Bond,Certified Check or Cashier's Check)as an attachment to their electronic bid. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two bidders and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of 12-2014 00200-4 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS the Bid Opening. Bid Security shall be delivered to: Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, 2nd Floor City Hall, 3519 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. 7.3 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such time as Bidder has executed the Standard Form of Agreement,and furnished the required Performance and Payment Bonds, whereupon the Bid Security of both bidders will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Standard Form of Agreement and furnish the required performance and payment bonds within ten (10) days after the Notice of Award, Owner may annul the Notice of Award and shall be entitled to make a claim against the Bid Security. The Bid Security of other Bidders will be retained until the Contract is awarded and the Standard Form of Agreement becomes effective, or all bids are rejected, whereupon Bid Security furnished by all such Bidders will be returned. 8. Contract Time 8.1 The number of days in which the Work is to be Substantially Completed, as set forth in the Bid Proposal form and the Standard Form of Agreement, subject to such extension of time as may be due under the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents ("Contract Time"). All references to "time" or"days" shall be interpreted as consecutive calendar days. 9. Liquidated Damages and Early Completion Bonus 9.1 Provisions for liquidated damages and early completion bonus, if any,are set forth in the Standard Form of Agreement. 10 Substitute or "Or-Equal" Items 10.1 The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of the selected materials and equipment described in the Plans or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or-equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Plans or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or-equal" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by the Contractor if acceptable to Engineer, application for such acceptance will not be considered by Engineer until after the Agreement becomes effective. All "or-equal" references shall be interpreted to mean "or approved equal". The procedure for submission of any such application by Contractor and consideration by Engineer is set forth in the Contract Documents. 11. Bid Form 11.1 The Bid Proposal form (Section 00300 — Bid Proposal) is included with the Bidding Documents when downloaded. This Document must be printed and signed, as required below, and then uploaded as an Attachment to the Bid. All E-bids must be submitted on the City's official E-bid System Bid Proposal document. All blanks on the Bid Proposal form must be completed or filled in. The Bidder shall bid all Alternates, if any. Incomplete Bid Proposals may be cause for rejection. 11.2 Bid Proposals by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president(or other corporate officer accompanied be evidence of authority to sign)and the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The 1 2-20 14 00200-5 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature. Once executed the document is to be uploaded as an attachment to the Bid. 11.3 Bid Proposals by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title must appear under the signature, and if a corporate general partner, executed as required above for corporations and the official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature. All names must be typed or printed below the signature. Once executed the document is to be uploaded as an attachment to the Bid. 11.4 The Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of all Addenda (the number of which must be filled in on the Bid Proposal form). 11.6 The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid Proposal must be shown on the Bid Proposal form. 12. Submission of Bid Proposals 12.1 The place, date and/or time designated for opening Bid Proposals may be changed in accordance with applicable laws, codes and ordinances. Any such changes to the Bid Schedule shall be made by Addenda. 12.2 Electronic Bids shall be submitted per the requirements, instructions, terms and conditions as stated in the registration and submittal instructions of the City's E-bid System electronic bidding software. All Bidders utilizing this system MUST register as a potential supplier, (Bidder). E-Bids are submitted directly via the City's Web based system located at https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. Bid Proposals submitted after the bid date and time will be rejected. 13. Modification and Withdrawal of Bid Proposals 13.1 Prior to submission, E-bid Bid Proposals may be modified or withdrawn without prejudice. 13.2 Once submitted, Bid Proposals may only be modified by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid Proposal must be executed) and delivered to Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, 2nd Floor City Hall, 3519 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581 and submitted any time prior to the opening of Bid Proposals. 13.3 A Bidder may not modify or withdraw its Bid Proposal by facsimile or verbal means. A withdrawn Bid Proposal may be resubmitted prior to the designated time for opening Bid Proposals. No bid may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of ninety(90) days subsequent to the bid opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. 13.4 If, within twenty-four(24)hours after Bid Proposals are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed, written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material mistake in the preparation of its Bid Proposal, that Bidder may request to withdraw its Bid Proposal and the bid security may be returned or, at the discretion of the Owner, Owner may make a claim against the bid security. Thereafter,that 12-2014 00200-6 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Project to be provided under the Contract Documents. 14. Opening of Bid Proposals 14.1 Bid Proposals will be opened and(unless obviously non-responsive)read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the base Bid Proposals and major alternates (if any) will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bid Proposals. Bid Proposals, in their entirety, shall be open for public inspection after the contract is awarded, with the exception of any trade secrets or confidential information contained therein, provided Bidder has expressly identified any specific information contained therein as being trade secrets or confidential information. 15. Bid Proposals to Remain Subject to Acceptance 15.1 All Bid Proposals will remain subject to acceptance for ninety(90) days after the day of the Bid Proposal opening, but Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid Proposal and return the bid security prior to that date. 16. Award of Contract 16.1 Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bid Proposals, to waive any and all informalities not involving price, time or changes in the Work and to negotiate contract terms with the Successful Bidder. Owner may reject a bid as non-responsive if: 1) Bidder fails to provide required Bid Security; 2) Bidder improperly or illegibly completes or fails to complete all information required by the Bidding Documents; 3) Bidder fails to sign the Bid Proposal or improperly signs the Bid Proposal; 4) Bidder qualifies its Bid Proposal; 5) Bidder tardily or otherwise improperly submits its Bid Proposal; 6) Bidder fails to submit the Qualifications of Bidder as required under section 3 of these Instructions to Bidders; or 7) Bid Proposal is otherwise non-responsive. Contracts are awarded on the basis of one of the following criteria: A)provision of the"Best Value"or B) Lowest Responsible Bidder 16.2 Best Value. In determining the best value for the Owner, and in determining to whom to award a contract, Owner may consider: 1) purchase price; 2) reputation of the Bidder and Bidder's goods or services;3)quality of Bidder's goods or services;4)extent to which the goods or services meet the Owner's needs; 5)Bidder's past relationship with the Owner; 6) impact on the ability of Owner to comply with laws and rules relating to contracting with historically underutilized businesses and nonprofit organizations employing persons with disabilities; 7) total long-term cost to Owner to acquire Bidder's goods or services; 8) the Qualifications of Bidder; and 9) any other relevant criteria specifically listed in the Bidding Documents. A contract to be awarded to the Bidder offering the Best Value may be let on either a lump sum basis or a unit cost basis dependent on the Bid Proposal format. 16.3 Lowest Responsible Bidder. In determining Lowest Responsible Bidder, Owner will consider: Lowest Total Bid price for all work including Base Bid, Extra Work and Alternates, if any, and any other cost criteria. Additional evaluation criteria may include: the Qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bid Proposals comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates,unit prices and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Proposal form or prior 12-2014 00200-7 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS to the Notice of Award. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. A contract to be awarded to the Lowest Responsible Bidder may be let on either a lump sum basis or a unit cost basis dependent on the Bid Proposal format. Acceptance of any and all bids may be conditioned on compliance with the requirement for attendance of the mandatory pre-bid meeting. 16.4 In either case, Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid Proposal and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, to Owner's satisfaction, within the Contract Time. 17. Contract Security 17.1 When the Successful Bidder delivers the executed Standard Form of Agreement to Owner, it must be accompanied by the Performance, Payment, Maintenance and Surface Correction Bonds required by the Contract Documents. Bonds may be on the forms provided herein or an equal form containing no substantive changes, as determined by Owner. 18. Signing of Agreement 18.1 When Owner gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Standard Form of Agreement, and the required Performance and Payment Bond forms. Within ten (10) days thereafter Contractor shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Standard Form of Agreement to Owner with the required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter, Owner shall deliver one fully signed counterpart to Contractor. There shall be no contract or agreement between Owner and the Successful Bidder until proper execution and attestation of the Standard Form of Agreement by authorized representatives of the Owner. 19. Pre-bid Conference 19.1 A pre-bid conference will be held as indicated in the Invitation to Bid. 20. Retainage 20.1 Provisions concerning retainage are set forth in the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 12-2014 00200-8 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND BID PROPOSAL Section 00300 BID PROPOSAL Lowest Responsible Bid Date: April 2, 2020 Bid of A& B Group, Inc. , an individual proprietorship /a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas/a partnership consisting of , for the construction of: Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WW 1903 BID NO.: 0220-27 (Submitted in Electronic format) To: The Honorable Mayor and City Council of Pearland City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, Texas 77581 Pursuant to the published Invitation to Bidders, and Instructions to Bidders, the undersigned Bidder hereby proposes to perform all the work and furnish all necessary superintendence, labor, machinery, equipment, tools and materials, and whatever else may be necessary to complete all the work described in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents for the construction of the Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation project with all related appurtenances, complete, tested, and operational, in accordance with the Plans and Specifications prepared by ARKK Engineers, LLC, 7322 Southwest Fwy. Ste. 1040 Houston TX 77074, for the unit prices or applicable prices set forth in Exhibit "A", the electronic bid form as contained in the City's E-bid system, which, once fully executed and submitted shall constitute a legal and executable proposal from the Bidder. It is understood that, in the event any changes are ordered on any part of the Work, the applicable unit prices bid shall apply as additions to or deductions from the total prices for the parts of the Work so changed. The Bid Security required under the Instructions to Bidders is included and has been uploaded as an attachment within the E-bid system and, that a fully executed, signed and sealed hard copy has been delivered to the Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. The Bidder agrees to submit to the Owner the Qualifications of Bidder, including the Financial Statement of Bidder, as required by the Instructions to Bidders if requested to do so as a condition of the Bid process. The Bidder binds himself, upon acceptance of his proposal, to execute the Standard Forth of Agreement and furnish an acceptable Performance and Payment Bond and Maintenance Bond, each in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the total Contract Price, according to the forms included in the Contract Documents, for performing and completing the said work within the time stated and for the prices stated in Exhibit A of this proposal along with all required insurance in the required amounts. Bidder's Initial's: 10-2017 00300- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND BID PROPOSAL The undersigned Bidder agrees to commence work within 10 days of the date of a written Notice to Proceed. It is understood that the Work is to be Substantially Complete within 180 calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed. Time for Substantial Completion shall begin on the date established by the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor will pay liquidated damages in the amount(s) specified in Section 00500 — Standard Form of Agreement, in the event the Work is not Substantially Complete within the Contract Time. The undersigned agrees that the amounts bid in this Bid Proposal will not be withdrawn or modified for ninety (90) days following date of Bid Proposal opening, or such longer period as may be agreed to in writing by the City of Pearland and Bidder. It is understood that in the event the Successful Bidder fails to enter into the Standard Form of Agreement and/or to furnish an acceptable Performance and Payment Bond and Maintenance Bond, each in the amount of one hundred (100) percent of the Contract Price, along with all required insurance in the stated amounts within ten (10) days of the Notice of Award, the Successful Bidder will forfeit the Bid Security as provided in the Instructions to Bidders. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). The Bidder acknowledges that the following Addenda have been received. The modifications to the Bidding Documents noted therein have been considered and all costs thereto are included in the Bid Proposal prices. Addendum No.: One Date: 3-16-20 Addendum No.: Three Date: 3-30-20 Addendum No.: Two Date: 3-20_2n Addendum No.: Four Date: 3-31-20 Bidder hereby represents that the only person or parties interested in this offer as principals are those named. Bidder has not directly or indirectly entered into any agreement, participated in any collusion, or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding. Firm Name: R & B Group, Inc. By: Brian D. Morrison Title: CEO/ President Address: 1213 N. Durham Dr., Houston, Texas 77008 Phone No: 713-306-6827 ATTEST: Elizabete Morse (Seal, if Bidder is a Corporation) (Tor Printed Name) Signature Date: April 2, 2020 END OF SECTION Bidder's Initial's: ] 10-2017 00300-2 of 2 EXHIBIT IID FORM (Bid Form must bi tted electronically) Project Name: Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation Bid No: 0220-27 Quantity UOM Description Spec Reference Unit Price r Total PKHD 1 Base Bid 1 General Items PKLN 1 Base Bid 1 LS Mobilization(Not to exceed 3%of total bid) 01505 $20,000.00 $20,000.00 PKHD 2 Base Bid 2 Lift Station Items Lift Station Rehabilitation Items:Replace three(3)existing submersible pumps,discharge elbows,power cord,guide rails,pump discharge 11311,15053, PKLN 2 Base Bid 1 LS piping,valves,air release valve,pipe supports,brackets,hardware,wet 15101,09915, $ 390,000.00 $ 390,000.00 well vents,protective coatings,pipe recoatings,safety grates,bypass 09920,02790 pumping,Complete in Place,the Sum of: Install a new Vapex Nano odor control unit as shown on the design PKLN 3 Base Bid 1 LS drawings,including water line extension,exhaust and vent piping, 15050 $ 100,000.00 $100,000.00 tubing,nozzles,and all items required for a complete and working system,Complete in Place,the Sum of: Site electrical improvements,including but not limited to,wiring, PKLN 4 Base Bid 1 LS conduit,service to Vapex unit,electrical service improvements,panel Div 16 $40,000.00 $40,000.00 modifications,generator integration,for a complete and operational electrical installation,Complete in Place,the sum of: Natural Gas Generator,transfer switch,concrete pad,generator wiring, PKLN 5 Base Bid 1 LS generator conduit,for a complete and operational auxilairy powered Div 16 $80,000.00 $80,000.00 generator installation,Complete in Place,the sum of: Add Lift Station PKHD 3 3 Alternate 1 Wall Liner Rehabilitation of Lift Station Wet Well Walls and Roof,100% Add calcium aluminate liner per specifications at minimum 1.5"thickness, PKLN 6 Alternate 1,540 SF bypass pumping,cleaning and debris removal,removal of existing T- 02770,02790 $ 90.00 $ 138,600.00 1 Lock embedded platic wall liner,Install floor fillet,Complete in place, the sum of: BID SUMMARY BASE BID PART I -GENERAL ITEMS: $ 20,000.00 BASE BID PART 2-LIFT STATION ITEMS: $ 610,000.00 TOTAL BASE BID(BASE BID PARTS I+2): $ 630,000.00 ADD ALTERNATE 1 BID: $ 138,600.00 Cullen Regional Lift Station Bid Form Page 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT Section 00500 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is by and between City of Pearland (hereinafter called OWNER or City) and R&B Group, Inc. (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR). OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: Article 1. WORK CONTRACTOR shall complete all work as specified or indicated in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents (hereinafter the"Work"). The Work is generally described as follows: Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation City of Pearland, Texas COP PN: WW 1903 BID NO.: 0220-27 Article 2. ENGINEER The Work has been designed by David Kasper, P.E. with ARKK Engineers, LLC located at 7322 Southwest Fwy,. Suite 1040,Houston,TX 77074 who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who is to assume all duties and responsibilities and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Article 3. CONTRACT TIME 3.1 The Work will be Substantially Complete (as defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions) within 180 days (including weekends and holidays) from the date when the Contract Time commences to run as provided in paragraph 5.01 of the General Conditions (as revised in the Special Conditions if applicable), and completed and ready for Final Payment within Two Hundred and Ten(210)days from the date when the Contract Time commences to run. No work will be allowed on Sundays. 3.2 Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 3.1 above,plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 5 of the General Conditions. OWNER and CONTRACTOR also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration preceding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay(but not as a penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER four hundred dollars ($400.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in paragraph 3.1 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. After Substantial Completion, 4-2015 00500- 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT if CONTRACTOR shall neglect, refuse or fail to complete the remaining Work within the time set out in the Certificate of Substantial Completion or any proper extension thereof granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER four hundred dollars ($400.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in the Certificate of Substantial Completion for completion and readiness for Final Payment. 3.3 Inspection Time. Working hours for the Pearland Inspection personnel are from 7:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, excluding City approved holidays. The Contractor shall notify the OWNER of any required inspection overtime work at least 48 hours in advance and shall pay the overtime wages for the required City inspections. Article 4. CONTRACT PRICE 4.1 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds $768,600.00 (the"Contract Price"). The Contract Price includes the Base Bid and Alternate 1, as accepted by OWNER as shown in Document 00300—Bid Proposal. Article 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES CON TRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Section 6.0 "Measurement and Payment" of the General Conditions. Application for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 5.1 Progress Payments. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Application for Payment as recommended by ENGINEER as provided below. All progress payments will be on the basis of the progress of the Work and actual quantity of Work completed, in accordance with Article 6 "Measurement and Payment" of the General Conditions. 5.1.1 Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage or actual quantity of Work complete, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with the General Conditions. The OWNER shall make payment within 30 days of receipt of application for payment by the ENGINEER. 5.1.2 Each progress payment shall be less retainage as specified in Paragraph 6.06 of the General Conditions, and further less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement. It is understood,however,that in case the whole work be near to completion and some unexpected and unusual delay occurs due to no fault or neglect on the part of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may upon written recommendation of the ENGINEER pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage to the CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR at the OWNER's option,may be relieved of the obligation to fully complete the 4-2015 00500-2of7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT Work and, thereupon, the CONTRACTOR shall receive payment of the balance due him under the contract subject only to the conditions stated under "Final Payment." 5.2 Final Payment. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with paragraph 6.09 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said paragraph 6.09. Article 6. INTEREST Interest on any overdue payment from OWNER to CONTRACTOR shall be paid in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2251.025 of the Texas Government Code, as amended. Article 7. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: 7.1 CONTRACTOR has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost,progress,performance,or furnishing of the Work. 7.2 CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all available surveys, assessments, reports of explorations, investigations, and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions of the site. Such technical reports and drawings are not Contract Documents, and Owner makes no representations or warranties as to the accuracy of such documents or information, or to whether or not they are complete, comprehensive, or all-inclusive. 7.3 CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying)all such examinations,investigations,explorations, tests, reports, and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in paragraphs 7.2 above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, and CONTRACTOR assumes the risk of such subsurface and physical conditions, and shall furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes. 7.4 CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract documents with respect to existing underground facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said underground facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data in respect of said underground facilities are or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform 4-2015 00500-3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT and finish the Work at the Contract Price,within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.5 CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.6 CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor knew or should have known, and CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including any written resolution of any such conflict, error or discrepancy by ENGINEER. In the event of a conflict that was not brought to the OWNER's or ENGINEER's attention prior to the bid, the CONTRACTOR is assumed to have bid the most expensive alternative. Article 8. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents, which comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work, consist of the following, each of which are incorporated herein by reference: 8.1 Standard Form of Agreement(Section 00500). 8.2 Performance, Payment, and/or Maintenance Bonds (Sections 00610, 00611, and 00612). 8.3 General Conditions of Agreement (Section 00700), including Attachment No. 1 Workers' Compensation Insurance Coverage,Attachment No.2 Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, and Attachment No. 3 Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor. 8.4 Special Conditions of Agreement(Section 00800). 8.5 Plans, consisting of sheets numbered 1 through 16 inclusive with attachments with each sheet bearing the following general title: Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation. 8.6 Instructions to Bidders and CONTRACTOR's Bid Proposal, including any Addenda referenced therein. 8.7 Technical Specifications for the Work. 8.8 The following, which may be delivered or issued after this Agreement becomes effective: Any Change Orders or other documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents in accordance with the General Conditions. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 8. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in the 4-2015 00500-4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT General Conditions. Article 9. MISCELLANEOUS 9.1 Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Section 1, "Definitions and Interpretations" of the General Conditions will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 9.2 No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but without limitation moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment,no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. 9.3 OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representative to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect of all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 9.4 CONTRACTOR agrees to warranty the Work for a period of one (1) year from Substantial Completion against defects in materials and workmanship. CONTRACTOR agrees to repair or replace any defective work within this warranty period immediately unless such repairs require long lead time materials and equipment in which case CONTRACTOR shall provide an agreeable schedule for repairs at no additional cost to OWNER. 9.5 The Work will be completed according to the Contract Documents and in accordance with codes, ordinances, and construction standards of the City of Pearland, and all applicable laws, codes and regulations of governmental authorities. 9.6 In the event any notice period required under the Contract Documents is found to be shorter than any minimum period prescribed by applicable law, the notice period required shall be construed to be the minimum period prescribed by applicable law. 9.7 This Contract and the Contract Documents, insofar as they relate in any part or in any way to the Work undertaken therein, constitute the entire agreement between the parties hereto, and it is expressly understood and agreed that there are no agreements or promises by and between said parties, except as aforesaid, and that any additions thereto or changes shall be in writing. 9.8 The provisions of this Contract shall be applied and interpreted in a manner consistent with each other so as to carry out the purposes and the intent of the parties, but if for any reason any provision is unenforceable or invalid, such provisions shall be deemed severed from this Contract and the remaining provisions shall be carried out with the same force and effect as if the severed provision had not been part of this Contract. 4-2015 00500-5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT 9.9 The headings of the paragraphs are included solely for the convenience of reference and if there is any conflict between the headings and the text of this Contract, the Contract text shall control. 9.10 The waiver of any breach hereof shall not constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach of the same or any other provision hereof Failure by the OWNER in any instance to insist upon observance or performance by CONTRACTOR shall not be deemed a waiver by CON I RACTOR of any such observance or performance. No waiver will be binding upon OWNER unless in writing and then will be for the particular instance only. Payment of any sum by OWNER to CONTRACTOR with knowledge of any breach or default will not be deemed a waiver of such breach or default or any other breach or default. 9.11 The CONTRACTOR acknowledges that the OWNER(through its employee handbook) considers the following to be misconduct that is grounds for termination of an employee of the OWNER: Any fraud, forgery, misappropriation of funds, receiving payment for services not performed or for hours not worked, mishandling or untruthful reporting of money transactions, destruction of assets, embezzlement, accepting materials of value from vendors, or consultants, and/or collecting reimbursement of expenses made for the benefit of the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR agrees that it will not, directly or indirectly; cause an employee of the OWNER to engage in such misconduct. 9.12 The CONTRACTOR agrees to comply with Appendix A(attached) of the City of Pearland's Title VI Nondiscrimination Plan Assurances. 4-2015 00500-6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have signed this Agreement in duplicate. One counterpart each has been delivered to OWNER and one to CONTRACTOR. This Agreement will be effective upon execution and attestation by authorized representatives of the City of Pearland and upon the following date: 1‘11. , 2024 OWNER: CONTRACTOR: CITY OF P • 'LAND R&B Grou, • I By: �, / By: PAI* El ' ! r 1 SO NI Title: V • Title: C e / /t PS/d Lrr Date: �" /a��2 Date: S7 4-/Z4> (Corporate Seal) fi Ratip, ATTES I��•r ATTEST '!' Address for giving notices /n2 / �l, ei7 111Ou S( ,c , o o g Phone: 7/s i V60) SX''OO Fax: 0/ 5- r 6 d- S�O? Agent for service of process: /1J c//2._/c dnJ END OF SECTION 4-2015 00500-7 of 7 Title VI Nondiscrimination Assurances APPENDIX A During the performance of this contract, the contractor, for itself, its assignees and successors in interest (hereinafter referred to as the "contractor") agrees as follows: (1) Compliance with Regulations: The contractor shall comply with the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination in Federally-Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation (hereinafter, "DOT") Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 21, as they may be amended from time to time, (hereinafter referred to as the Regulations), which are herein incorporated by reference and made a part of this contract. (2) Nondiscrimination: The contractor, with regard to the work performed by it during the contract, shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in the selection and retention of subcontractors, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment. The contractor shall not participate either directly or indirectly in the discrimination prohibited by Section 21 .5 of the Regulations, including employment practices when the contract covers a program set forth in Appendix B of the Regulations. (3) Solicitations for Subcontracts, including Procurements of Materials and Equipment: In all solicitations either by competitive bidding or negotiation made by the contractor for work to be performed under a subcontract, including procurements of materials or leases of equipment, each potential subcontractor or supplier shall be notified by the contractor of the contractor's obligations under this contract and the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination on the grounds of race, color, or national origin. (4) Information and Reports: The contractor shall provide all information and reports required by the Regulations or directives issued pursuant thereto, and shall permit access to its books, records, accounts, other sources of information, and its facilities as may be determined by the Sub-Recipient or the Federal Highway Administration to be pertinent to ascertain compliance with such Regulations, orders and instructions. Where any information required of a contractor is in the exclusive possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish this information the contractor shall so certify to the Sub-Recipient, or the Federal Highway Administration as appropriate, and shall set forth what efforts it has made to obtain the information. (5) Sanctions for Noncompliance: In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination provisions of this contract, the Sub-Recipient shall impose such contract sanctions as it or the Federal Highway Administration may determine to be appropriate, including, but not limited to: (a) withholding of payments to the contractor under the contract until the contractor complies, and/or (b) cancellation, termination or suspension of the contract, in whole or in part. (6) Incorporation of Provisions:The contractor shall include the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (6) in every subcontract, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment, unless exempt by the Regulations, or directives issued pursuant thereto. The contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontract or procurement as the Sub-Recipient or the Federal Highway Administration may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for non-compliance. Provided, however, that, in the event a contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or supplier as a result of such direction, the contractor may request the Sub-Recipient to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the Sub-Recipient, and, in addition, the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT APPENDIX B House Bill 89 Verification I, 12)‘(i CA-11 , K.o`(l.p- SONJ (Person name), the undersigned representative (hereafter referred to as "Representative") of ' tt ? ► (company or business name, hereafter referred to as "Business Entity"), being an adult over the age of eighteen (18) years of age, after being duly sworn by the undersigned notary, do hereby depose and affirm the following: 1. That Representative is authorized to execute this verification on behalf of Business Entity; 2. That Business Entity does not boycott Israel and will not boycott Israel during the term of any contract that will be entered into between Business Entity and the City of Pearland; and 3. That Representative understands that the term "boycott Israel" is defined by Texas Government Code Section 2270.001 to mean refusing to deal with, terminating business activities with, or otherwise taking any action that is intended to penalize, inflict economic harm on, or limit commercial relations specifically with Israel, or with a person or entity doing business in Israel or in an Israeli-controlled territory, but does not include an action made for ordinary business purposes. SIGNATURE F REPRESENTATIVE SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN TO BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day of rnit'y , 20020 . // "" JOSE LUIS VALLEJO t.444`. Notary Publio, State of 2eox c Comm. Expires 04-11 20�I `�r— �'�� 611t``�`}`� Notary ID 6477617 k a';ry P lir CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES FORM 1295 1 of 1 Complete Nos.1-4 and 6 if there are interested parties. OFFICE USE ONLY Complete Nos.1,2,3,5, and 6 if there are no interested parties. CERTIFICATION OF FILING 1 Name of business entity filing form,and the city,state and country of the business entity's place Certificate Number: of business. 2020-603812 R&B Group.Inc. Houston,TX United States Date Filed: 2 Name of governmental entity or state agency that is a party to the contract for which the form is 04/01/2020 being filed. City of Pearland Texas Date Acknowledged: 3 Provide the identification number used by the governmental entity or state agency to track or identify the contract,and provide a description of the services,goods,or other property to be provided under the contract. WW 1903, 0220-27 Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation Nature of interest 4 Name of Interested Party City,State,Country(place of business) (check applicable) Controlling Intermediary Morrison, Brian Houston ,TX United States X 5 Check only if there is NO Interested Party. o 6 UNSWORN DECLARATION $A-10 � p ^� My name is `'v'4t J b. *A O + ' .0 J and my date of birth is \\- My address is loLS 43 , �v��a�. "t.yck,_ t ouc4otj r1 l (street) (city) (state) (zip code) (country) I declare under penalty of per ry(that ttthe foregoing is true and correct. Executed in County. State of - S .on the 01 day of Mild- ,2002-° 6 (month) (year) Signa ure of authorized agent of contracting business entity (Declarant) Forms provided by Texas Ethics Commission www.ethics.state.tx.us Version V1.1.3a6aaf7d R&BGROUOIC VPEARCE ACORODATE(MMIDD/YYYY) CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 5/7/2020 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S),AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER N%reCT Vicki Pearce, CIC,CISR INSURICA TX Insurance Services,Inc. 19450 State Highway 249 Suite 550 (NC ,No,Eat): ,Ext):(713)934-2005 FAX No(866)652-9382 Houston,TX 77070 E-MAIL Vicki.Pearce@INSURICA.com INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURER A:United Fire&Casualty Company 13021 INSURED INSURER B:Texas Mutual Insurance Company 22945 R&B Group,Inc. INSURER C:Hanove r Insurance Company 22292 1213 N.Durham INSURERD: Houston,TX 77008 INSURER E: INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: 30 THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUBR POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LIMITS LTR INSD WVD IMMIDDIYYYY) IMMIDD/YYYYI A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITYEACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 CLAIMS-MADE X OCCUR 85321152 1/31/2020 1/31/2021 DRAMAGETOEaRENTED occurrence) $ 300,000 PREMISES I MED EXP(Any one person) $ 5,000 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GE 'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE _ $ 2,000,000 POLICY X TE f X LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 OTHER: $ A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT 1,000,000 (Ea accident) $ X ANY AUTO 85321152 1/31/2020 1/31/2021 BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ OWNED SCHEDULED AUTOSEONLY _ AUTOS Ep BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AURTOS ONLY _ AUTOS ONLY (Perr acc dentli)AMAGE _ E A X UMBRELLA UAB X OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE E 5,000,000 EXCESSLIAB CLAIMS-MADE 85321152 1/31/2020 1/31/2021 AGGREGATE $ 5,000,000 DED RETENTION E $ B WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY STATUTE ERH X ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE YIN 0001140773 1/31/2020 1/31/2021 E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 OFFICERIMEMBER EXCLUDED? N N/A (Mandatory In NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 If yes,describe under 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ A Builders Risk 46306193 1/31/2020 1/31/2021 ANY ONE JOBSITE 3,000,000 C CONTRACTORS EQPT IHDA81971504 1/31/2020 1/31/2021 MAXIMUM PER ITEM 450,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS/VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) Page 1 of 2 RE:Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation,City of Pearland,Texas,COP PN:WW 1903 30 Day Notice of Cancellation CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE Cityof Pearland THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. The Honorable Mayor&City Council of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland,TX 77581 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ACORD 25(2016/03) ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD AGENCY CUSTOMER ID: R&BGROUOIC VPEARCE LOC#: 1 ACORD' ADDITIONAL REMARKS SCHEDULE Page 1 of 1 AGENCY NAMED INSURED INSURICA TX Insurance Services, Inc. R&B Group,Inc. 1213 N.Durham POLICY NUMBER Houston,TX 77008 Harris SEE PAGE 1 CARRIER NAIC CODE SEE PAGE 1 SEE P 1 EFFECTIVE DATE:SEE PAGE 1 ADDITIONAL REMARKS THIS ADDITIONAL REMARKS FORM IS A SCHEDULE TO ACORD FORM, FORM NUMBER: ACORD 25 FORM TITLE: Certificate of Liability Insurance Page 2 of 2 GENERAL LIABILITY: ADDITIONAL INSURED—OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS—SCHEDULED PERSON OR ORGANIZATION (CG2010 0413)— Any Person or Organization to Whom You have Agreed to Name as Additional Insured by Written Contract or Agreement if Executed Prior to Loss;, ADDITIONAL INSURED—OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS—COMPLETED OPERATIONS(CG2037 0413)-Any Person or Organization to Whom You have Agreed to Name as Additional Insured by Written Contract or Agreement if Executed Prior to Loss. PRIMARY AND NONCONTRIBUTORY—OTHER INSURANCE CONDITION (CG2001 0413)—You have agreed in writing in a contract or agreement that this insurance would be primary and would not seek contribution from any other insurance available to the additional insured. TEXAS—EXTENDED ULTRA LIABILITY PLUS ENDORSEMENT—GENERAL LIABILITY EXTENSION (CG7208 07/17) -Blanket Waiver of Subrogation—We waive this right where you have agreed to do so as part of a written contract,executed by you prior to the loss. AUTO LIABILITY: BUSINESS AUTO ULTRA ENDORSEMENT(CA7109 0117)—Additional Insured Status by Contract,Agreement or Permit,Any Person or Organization to Whom You have Agreed to Name as Additional Insured by Written Contract or Agreement; Waiver of Subrogation Required By Contract,We waive any rights of recovery we may have against the person or organization with whom you have agreed in writing in a contract,agreement or permit. PRIMARY AND NON-CONTRIBUTORY—OTHER INSURANCE CONDITION (CA7334 0915)—Coverage is primary for any liability assumed under an "insured contract". This coverage will also be non-contributory if it is required by the terms of the"insured contract". WORKERS COMPENSATION: TEXAS WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT(WC42 03 04B)— Blanket Waiver—Any person or organization for whom the Named Insured has agreed by written contract to furnish this waiver. UMBRELLA: Follow Form of Underlying General Liability, Business Automobile Liability and Workers Compensation/Employers Liability Policies. POLLUTION LIABILITY: ADDITIONAL INSURED—ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT—ONGOING WORK OR OPERATIONS(ENV-3250(12/18)As required by written contract or agreement signed by both parties prior to a loss to which this insurance applies. ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT—PRODUCTS-COMPLETED OPERATIONS HAZARD (ENV-3251 (12/18): —Any Person or Organization to Whom You have Agreed to Name as Additional Insured by Written Contract or Agreement if Executed Prior to Loss. PRIMARY AND NONCONTRIBUTORY—OTHER INSURANCE CONDITION (ENV-3253)12/18)—You have agreed in writing in a contract or agreement that this insurance would be primary and would not seek contribution from any other insurance available to the additional insured. WAIVER OF RANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY — (ENV-3143 03/05)-Blanket Waiver of Subrogation—We waive this to"Any person or organization that is an owner of real property or personal property on which you are performing operations,or a contractor on whose behalf you are performing operations, and only at the specific written request of such person or organization to you,wherein such request is made prior to commencement of operations. ACORD 101 (2008/01) ©2008 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD bb R& B Group, Inc. POLICY NUMBER: 85321152 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY Policy Dates: January 31, 2020 to January 31, 2021 CG 20 10 04 13 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS - SCHEDULED PERSON OR ORGANIZATION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name Of Additional Insured Person(s) Or Organization(s) Location(s)Of Covered Operations ANY PERSON OR ORGANIZATION TO WHOM LOCATIONS DESIGNATED AND YOU HAVE AGREED TO NAME AS ADDIT- DESCRIBED IN THE ABOVE IONAL INSURED BY WRITTEN CONTRACT MENTIONED WRITTEN CONTRACT OR AGREEMENT IF EXECUTED PRIOR TO OR AGREEMENT . LOSS . Information required to complete this Schedule,if not shown above,will be shown In the Declarations. PREMIUM 50 A. Section II — Who Is An Insured Is amended to B. With respect to the insurance afforded to these include as an additional Insured the person(s) or additional insureds, the following additional organization(s) shown In the Schedule, but only exclusions apply: with respect to liability for "bodily injury", "property This Insurance does nota I " u or damage" or "personal and advertising Injury" apply to "bodily injury"rY caused, in whole or In part, by: "property damage" occurring after: 1. All work, Including materials, parts or 1. Your acts or omissions; or equipment furnished In connection with such 2. The acts or omissions of those acting on your work, on the project (other than service, behalf; maintenance or repairs) to be performed by or in the performance of your ongoing operations for on behalf of the additional Insured(s) at the the additional insured(s) at the location(s) location of the covered operations has been designated above, completed; or However 2. That portion of "your work" out of which the Injury or damage arises has been put to its 1. The insurance afforded to such additional intended use by any person or organization Insured only applies to the extent permitted by other than another contractor or subcontractor law; and engaged in performing operations for a 2. If coverage provided to the additional insured is principal as a part of the same project. required by a contract or agreement, the insurance afforded to such additional insured will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. CG 20 10 04 13 © Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2012 Page 1 of 2 C. With respect to the Insurance afforded to these 2. Available under the applicable Limits of additional insureds, the following is added to Insurance shown in the Declarations; Section III—Limits Of Insurance: whichever is less. If coverage provided to the additional insured is This endorsement shall not Increase the required by a contract or agreement, the most we applicable Limits of Insurance shown in the will pay on behalf of the additional insured Is the Declarations. amount of insurance: 1. Required by the contract or agreement; or Page 2 of 2 ©Insurance Services Office,Inc., 2012 CG 20 10 04 13 R& B Group, Inc. POLICY NL10M9ER. 85 3 2115 2 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY Policy Dates: January 31, 2020 to January 31, 2021 CG 20 37 04 13 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS - COMPLETED OPERATIONS This endorsement modifies Insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name Of Additional Insured Person(s) Or Organization(s) Location And Description Of Completed Operations ANY PERSON OR ORGANIZATION TO WHOM LOCATIONS DESIGNATED AND YOU HAVE AGREED TO NAME AS ADDIT-- DESCRIBED IN THE ABOVE IONAL INSURED BY WRITTEN CONTRACT MENTIONED WRITTEN CONTRACT OR AGREEMENT IF EXECUTED PRIOR TO OR AGREEMENT. LOSS. Information required to complete this Schedule,If not shown above,will be shown In the Declarations. PREMIUM 1 ,000 A. Section II —Who Is An Insured is amended to B. With respect to the insurance afforded to these include as an additional insured the person(s) or additional Insureds, the following Is added to organization(s) shown In the Schedule, but only Section III—Limits Of Insurance: with respect to liability for "bodily injury" or If coverage provided to the additional Insured Is "property damage"caused, In whole or In part, by required by a contract or agreement, the most we "your work" at the location designated and will pay on be half of the additional Insured is the described in the Schedule of this endorsement amount of insurance: performed for that additional Insured and 1. Required by the contract or agreement; or included in the "products -completed operations 2. Available under the applicable Limits of hazard". Insurance shown in the Declarations; However: whichever Is less. 1. The insurance afforded to such additional Insured only applies to the extent permitted This endorsement shall not Increase the applicable by law; and Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations, 2. If coverage provided to the additional insured is required by a contract or agreement, the Insurance afforded to such additional insured will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional Insured. CG 20 37 04 13 ©Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2012 Page 1 of 1 R&B Group, Inc. Policy#: 85321152 Policy Dates: January 31, 2020 to January 31, 2021 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 20 01 04 13 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. PRIMARY AND NONCONTRIBUTORY - OTHER INSURANCE CONDITION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART The following is added to the Other Insurance (2) You have agreed In writing in a contract or Condition and supersedes any provision to the agreement that this insurance would be contrary: primary and would not seek contribution Primary And Noncontributory Insurance from any other insurance available to the additional insured. This insurance is primary to and will not seek contribution from any other insurance available to an additional Insured under your policy provided that: (1) The additional insured Is a Named Insured under such other insurance; and CG 20 01 04 13 ©Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2012 Page 1 of 1 R& B Group, Inc. Policy#: 85321152 Policy Dates: January 31, 2020 to January 31, 2021 CG 72 08 07 17 TEXAS - EXTENDED ULTRA LIABILITY PLUS ENDORSEMENT COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EXTENSION ENDORSEMENT SUMMARY OF COVERAGES This is a summary of the various additional coverages and coverage modifications provided by this endorsement. No coverage is provided by this summary. * Extended Property Damage * Expanded Fire Legal Liability to include Explosion, Lightning and Sprinkler Leakage * Coverage for non-owned watercraft is extended to 51 feet in length * Property Damage —Borrowed Equipment * Property Damage Liability —Elevators * Coverage D—Voluntary Property Damage Coverage $5,000 Occurrence with a $10,000 Aggregate * Coverage E —Care, Custody and Control Property Damage Coverage $25,000 Occurrence with a$100,000 Aggregate — $500 Deductible * Coverage F —Electronic Data Liability Coverage —$50,000 * Coverage G— Product Recall Expense $25,000 Each Recall Limit with a $50,000 Aggregate —$1,000 Deductible * Coverage H—Water Damage Legal Liability —$25,000 * Coverage I—Designated Operations Covered by a Consolidated (Wrap-Up) Insurance Program —Limited Coverage * Increase in Supplementary Payments: Bail Bonds to $1,000 * Increase in Supplementary Payments: Loss of Earnings to $500 * For newly formed or acquired organizations —extend the reporting requirement to 180 days * Broadened Named Insured * Automatic Additional Insured — Owners, Lessees or Contractors — Automatic Status When Required in Construction Agreement With You — Including Upstream Parties * Contractors BlanketAdditional Insured — Products —Completed Operations Coverage —Including Upstream Parties * Automatic Additional Insured—Vendors * Automatic Additional Insured — Lessor of Leased Equipment Automatic Status When Required in Lease Agreement With You * Automatic Additional Insured —Managers or Lessor of Premises *Additional Insured —Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured *Additional Insured —State or Governmental Agency or Subdivision or Political Subdivision —Permits or Authorizations *Additional Insured —Consolidated Insurance Program (Wrap-Up) Off-Premises Operations Only —Owners, Lessees or Contractors Automatic Status When Required in Construction Agreement With You *Additional Insured —Employee Injury to Another Employee * Automatically included —Aggregate Limits of Insurance (per location) * Automatically included —Aggregate Limits of Insurance (per project) * Knowledge of occurrence — Knowledge of an "occurrence", "claim or suit" by your agent, servant or employee shall not in itself constitute knowledge of the named insured unless an officer of the named insured has received such notice from the agent, servant or employee * Blanket Waiver of Subrogation * Liberalization Condition * Unintentional failure to disclose all hazards. If you unintentionally fail to disclose any hazards existing at the inception date of your policy, we will not deny coverage under this Coverage Form because of such failure. However, this provision does not affect our right to collect additional premium or exercise our right of cancellation or non-renewal. *"Insured Contract" redefined for Limited Railroad Contractual Liability * Mobile equipment to include snow removal, road maintenance and street cleaning equipment less than 1,000 lbs GVW * Bodily Injury Redefined REFER TO THE ACTUAL ENDORSEMENT FOLLOWING ON PAGES 2 THROUGH 14 FOR CHANGES AFFECTING YOUR INSURANCE PROTECTION CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 1 of 14 R & B Group, Inc. Policy#: 85321152 Policy Dates: January 31, 2020 to January 31, 2021 CG 72 08 07 17 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. TEXAS - EXTENDED ULTRA LIABILITY PLUS ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SECTION I - COVERAGES A. The following changes are made at COVERAGE A— BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY: 1. Extended Property Damage At 2. Exclusions exclusion a. Expected or Intended Injury is replaced with the following: "Bodily injury" or"property damage" expected or intended from the standpoint of the insured. This exclusion does not apply to"bodily injury" or"property damage' resulting from the use of reasonable force to protect persons or property. 2. Expanded Fire Legal Liability At 2. Exclusions the last paragraph is deleted and replaced by the following: Exclusions c. through n. do not apply to damage by fire, explosion, lightning, smoke resulting from such fire, explosion, or lightning or sprinkler leakage to premises while rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with permission of the owner. A separate limit of insurance applies to this coverage as described in SECTION III — LIMITS OF INSURANCE. 3. Non-Owned Watercraft At 2. Exclusions exclusion g. Aircraft, Auto Or Watercraft (2) (a) is deleted and replaced by the following: (a) Less than 51 feet long; 4. Property Damage —Borrowed Equipment At 2. Exclusions the following is added to paragraph (4) of exclusion j. Damage To Property: This exclusion does not apply to"property damage" to borrowed equipment while at a jobsite and while not being used to perform operations. The most we will pay for "property damage" to any one piece of borrowed equipment under this coverage is $25,000 per occurrence. The insurance afforded under this provision is excess over any valid and collectible property insurance (including deductible) available to the insured, whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, 5. Property Damage Liability —Elevators At 2. Exclusions the following is added to paragraphs (3), (4) and (6) of exclusion j. Damage To Property: This exclusion does not apply to "property damage" resulting from the use of elevators. However, any insurance provided for such "property damage" is excess over any valid and collectible property insurance (including deductible) available to the insured, whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis. B. The following coverages are added: 1. COVERAGE D— VOLUNTARY PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE "Property damage" to property of others caused by the insured: a. While in your possession; or b. Arising out of"your work", Coverage applies at the request of the insured, whether or not the insured is legally obligated to pay. For the purposes of this Voluntary Property Damage Coverage only: Exclusion j. Damage to Property is deleted and replaced by the following: CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 2 of 14 CG 72 08 07 17 j. Damage to Property "Property damage" to: (1) Property held by the insured for servicing, repair, storage or sale at premises you own, rent, lease, operate or use; (2) Property transported by or damage caused by any"automobile", "watercraft" or"aircraft" you own, hire or lease; (3) Property you own, rent, lease, borrow or use. The amount we will pay is limited as described below in SECTION III —LIMITS OF INSURANCE. For the purposes of this Voluntary Property Damage Coverage, our right and duty to defend ends when we have paid the Limit of Liability or the Aggregate Limit for each coverage, and we are granted sole discretion in making payments under this coverage. 2. COVERAGE E—CARE, CUSTODY AND CONTROL PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE For the purpose of this Care, Custody and Control Property Damage Coverage only: a. Item (4) of Exclusion j. does not apply. The amount we will pay is limited as described below in SECTION III —LIMITS OF INSURANCE. For the purposes of this Care, Custody and Control Property Damage Coverage, our right and duty to defend ends when we have paid the Limit of Liability or the Aggregate Limit for each coverage, and we are granted sole discretion in making payments under this coverage. 3. COVERAGE F—ELECTRONIC DATA LIABILITY COVERAGE For the purposes of this Electronic Data Liability Coverage only: a. Exclusion p. of Coverage A — Bodily Injury And Property Damage Liability in Section I — Coverages is replaced by the following: 2. Exclusions This insurance does not apply to: p. Electronic Data Damages arising out of the loss of, loss of use of, damage to, corruption of, inability to access, or inability to manipulate "electronic data" that does not result from physical injury to tangible property. However, this exclusion does not apply to liability for damages because of"bodily injury". b. "Property Damage" means: (1) Physical injury to tangible property, including all resulting loss of use of that property. All such loss of use shall be deemed to occur at the time of the physical injury that caused it; or (2) Loss of use of tangible property that is not physically injured. All such loss of use shall be deemed to occur at the time of the"occurrence" that caused it; or (3) Loss of, loss of use of, damage to, corruption of, inability to access or inability to properly manipulate "electronic data", resulting from physical injury to tangible property. All such loss of"electronic data" shall be deemed to occur at the time of the"occurrence" that caused it. For the purposes of this Electronic Data Liability Coverage, "electronic data" is not tangible property. The amount we will pay is limited as described below in SECTION III — LIMITS OF INSURANCE . 4. COVERAGE G —PRODUCT RECALL EXPENSE a. Insuring Agreement (1) We will pay 90% of"product recall expense" you incur as a result of a"product recall" you initiate during the coverage period. (2) We will only pay for "product recall expense" arising out of "your products" which have been physically relinquished to others. The amount we will pay is limited as described below in SECTION III — LIMITS OF INSURANCE. CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 3 of 14 CG 72 08 07 17 b. Exclusions This insurance does not apply to "product recall expense" arising out of: (1) Any fact, circumstance or situation which existed at the inception date of the policy and which you were aware of, or could reasonably have foreseen that would have resulted in a"product recall". (2) Deterioration, decomposition or transformation of a chemical nature, except if caused by an error in the manufacture, design, processing, storage, or transportation of"your product", (3) The withdrawal of similar products or batches that are not defective, when a defect in another product or batch has been found. • (4) Acts, errors or omissions of any of your employees, done with prior knowledge of any of your officers or directors. (5) Inherent vice, meaning a natural condition of property that causes it to deteriorate or become damaged. (6) "Bodily Injury" or'Property Damage". (7) Failure of"your product" to accomplish its intended purpose, including any breach of warranty of fitness, quality, efficacy or efficiency, whether written or implied. (8) Loss of reputation, customer faith or approval, or any costs incurred to regain customer market, or any other consequential damages. (9) Legal fees or expenses. (10) Damages claimed for any loss, cost or expense incurred by you or others for the loss of use of "your product". (11) "Product recall expense" arising from the "product recall" of any of "your products" for which coverage is excluded by endorsement. (12) Any "product recall" initiated due to the expiration of the designated shelf life of"your product". 5. COVERAGE H —WATER DAMAGE LEGAL LIABILITY The Insurance provided under Coverage H (Section I) applies to'property damage" arising out of water damage to premises that are both rented to and occupied by you. The Limit under this coverage shall not be in addition to the Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit. The amount we will pay is limited as described below in SECTION III — LIMITS OF INSURANCE . 6. COVERAGE I — DESIGNATED OPERATIONS COVERED BY A CONSOLIDATED (WRAP-UP) INSURANCE PROGRAM The following exclusion is added to Paragraph 2. Exclusions of SECTION I — COVERAGES COVERAGE A — BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY: r. This insurance does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" arising out of either your ongoing operations or operations included within the "products-completed operations hazard" for any "consolidated (Wrap-up) insurance program" which has been provided by the prime contractor/project manager or owner of the construction project in which you are involved. This exclusion applies whether or not a consolidated (Wrap-up) insurance program: a. Provides coverage identical to that provided by this Coverage Part; or b. Has limits adequate to cover all claims. This exclusion does not apply if a"consolidated (Wrap-up) insurance program" covering your operations has been cancelled, non-renewed or otherwise no longer applies for reasons other than exhaustion of all available limits, whether such limits are available on a primary, excess or on any other basis, You must advise us of such cancellation, nonrenewal or termination as soon as practicable. For purposes of this exclusion a "consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program" is a program providing insurance coverage to all parties for exposures involved with a particular (typically major) construction project. CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 4 of 14 CG 72 08 07 17 C. SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS —COVERAGES A AND B is amended: 1. To read SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS 2. Bail Bonds Item 1.b. is amended as follows: b. Up to $1,000 for cost of bail bonds required because of accidents or traffic law violations arising out of the use of any vehicle to which the Bodily Injury Liability Coverage applies. We do not have to furnish these bonds. 3. Loss of Earnings Item td. is amended as follows: d. All reasonable expenses incurred by the insured at our request to assist us in the investigation or defense of the claim or"suit', including actual loss of earnings up to$500 a day because of time off from work. 4. The following language is added to Item 1. However, we shall have none of the duties set forth above when this insurance applies only for Voluntary Property Damage Coverage and/or Care, Custody or Control Property Damage Coverage and we have paid the Limit of Liability or the Aggregate Limit for these coverages. SECTION II - WHO IS AN INSURED A. The following change is made: Extended Reporting Requirements Item 3.a. is deleted and replaced by the following: a. Coverage under this provision is afforded only until the 180th day after you acquire or form the organization or the end of the policy period, whichever is earlier. B. The following provisions are added: 4. BROAD FORM NAMED INSURED Item 1.f. is added as follows: f. Any legally incorporated entity of which you own more than 50 percent of the voting stock during the policy period only if there is no other similar insurance available to that entity. However: (1) Coverage A does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" that occurred before you acquired more than 50 percent of the voting stock; and (2) Coverage B does not apply to "personal and advertising injury" arising out of an offense committed before you acquired more than 50 percent of the voting stock. 5. Additional Insured — Owners, Lessees or Contractors-Automatic Status When Required in Construction or Service Agreement With You —Including Upstream Parties a. Any person or organization for whom you are performing operations when you and such person or organization have agreed in writing in a contract or agreement that such person or organization be added as an additional insured on your policy; b. Any other person or organization you are required to add as an additional insured under the contract or agreement described in Paragraph a. above. Such person(s) or organization(s) is an additional insured only with respect to liability for "bodily injury", "property damage" or"personal and advertising injury" which may be imputed to that person or organization directly arising out of: 1. Your acts or omissions; or 2. The acts or omissions of those acting on your behalf; in the performance of your ongoing operations for the additional insured. However, the insurance afforded to such additional insured: 1. Only applies to the extent permitted by law; and CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission Page 5 of 14 CG 72 08 07 17 2. Will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. c. With respect to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, the following additional exclusions apply: This insurance does not apply to: 1. "Bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of the rendering of, or the failure to render, any professional architectural, engineering or surveying services, including: a. The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifications; or b. Supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. This exclusion applies even if the claims against any insured allege negligence or other wrongdoing in the supervision, hiring, employment, training or monitoring of others by that insured, if the "occurrence" which caused the "bodily injury" or "property damage", or the offense which caused the "personal and advertising injury", involved the rendering of or the failure to render any professional architectural, engineering or surveying services. 2. "Bodily injury" or"property damage" occurring after: a. All work, including materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with such work, on the project (other than service, maintenance or repairs) to be performed by or on behalf of the additional insured(s) at the location of the covered operations has been completed; or b. That portion of"your work" out of which the injury or damage arises has been put to its intended use by any person or organization other than another contractor or subcontractor engaged in performing operations for a principal as a part of the same project. 6. Additional Insured —Products Completed Operations Coverage — Including Upstream Parties a. Any person or organization for whom you are performing operations when you and such person or organization have agreed in writing in a contract or agreement that such person or organization be added as an additional insured on your policy; and b. Any other person or organization you are required to add as an additional insured under the contract or agreement described in Paragraph a.above. Such person(s) or organization(s) is an additional insured only with respect to liability for "bodily injury", "property damage" or"personal and advertising injury" which may be imputed to that person or organization directly arising out of"your work" specified in the "written contract" and included in the"products-completed operations hazard". However: (1) The insurance afforded to such additional insureds only applies to the extent permitted by law; (2) If coverage provided to the additional insured is required by a contract or agreement, the insurance afforded to such additional insured will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. (3) Such coverage will not apply subsequent to the first to occur of the following: i. The expiration of the period of time required by the "written contract"; or ii. The expiration of any applicable statute of limitations or statute of repose with respect to claims arising out of"your work". c. With respect to the insurance afforded to any additional insured under this endorsement, the following additional exclusionary language shall apply: This insurance does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" arising out of the rendering of, or the failure to render, any professional architecture, engineering or surveying services, including: (1) The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifications; or (2) Supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 6 of 14 CG 72 08 07 17 7. Additional Insured —Vendors a. Any person(s) or organization(s) (referred to throughout this additional coverage as vendor), but only with respect to "bodily injury" or "property damage", which may be imputed to that person(s) or organization(s) arising out of "your products" shown with the Schedule which are distributed or sold in the regular course of the vendor's business is an insured. However: (1) The insurance afforded to such vendor only applies to the extent permitted by law; and (2) If coverage provided to the vendor is required by a contract or agreement, the insurance afforded to such vendor will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such vendor. b, With respect to the insurance afforded to these vendors, the following additional exclusions apply: (1) This insurance afforded the vendor does not apply to: (a) "Bodily injury" or"property damage" for which the vendor is obligated to pay damages by reason of the assumption of liability in a contract or agreement. This exclusion does not apply to liability for damages that the vendor would have in the absence of the contract or agreement; (b) Any express warranty unauthorized by you; (c) Any physical or chemical change in the product made intentionally by the vendor; (d) Repackaging, except when unpacked solely for the purpose of inspection, demonstration, testing, or the substitution of parts under instructions from the manufacturer, and then repackaged in the original container. (e) Any failure to make such inspections, adjustments, tests or servicing as the vendor has agreed to make or normally undertakes to make in the usual course of business, in connection with the distribution or sale of products. (f) Demonstration, installation, servicing or repair operations, except such operations performed at the vendor's premises in connection with the sale of the product. (g) Products which, after distribution or sale by you, have been labeled or relabeled or used as a container, part or ingredient of any other thing or substance by or for the vendor. (h) "Bodily injury" or"property damage" arising out of the sole negligence of the vendor for its own acts or omissions or those of its employees or anyone else acting on its behalf. However, this exclusion does not apply to: i. The exceptions contained in Sub-paragraphs d. or f.; or ii. Such inspections, adjustments, tests or servicing as the vendor has agreed to make or normally undertakes to make in the usual course of business, in connection with the distribution or sale of the products. (2) This insurance does not apply to any insured person or organization, from whom you have acquired such products, or any ingredient, part or container, entering into, accompanying or containing such products. 8. Additional Insured — Lessor of Leased Equipment — Automatic Status When Required in Lease Agreement With You a. Any person(s) or organization(s) from whom you lease equipment when you and such person(s) or organization(s) have agreed in writing in a contract or agreement that such person(s) or organization(s) be added as an additional insured on your policy. Such person(s) or organization(s) is an insured only with respect to your liability for "bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" directly arising out of the maintenance, operation or use of equipment leased to you, which may be imputed to such person or organization as the lessor of equipment. However, the insurance afforded to such additional insured: (1) Only applies to the extent permitted by law; and (2) Will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 7 of 14 CG 72 08 07 17 A person's or organization's status as an additional insured under this endorsement ends when their contract or agreement with you for such leased equipment ends. b. Wth respect to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, this insurance does not apply to any "occurrence" which takes place after the equipment lease expires. 9. Additional Insured —Managers or Lessors of Premises a. Any person(s) or organization(s), but only with respect to liability arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of that part of the premises leased to you and subject to the following additional exclusions: This insurance does not apply to: (1) Any "occurrence" which takes place after you cease to be a tenant in that premises. (2) Structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by or on behalf of the person(s) or organization(s) shown in the Schedule, However: (1) The insurance afforded to such additional insured only applies to the extent permitted by law; and (2) If coverage provided to the additional insured is required by a contract or agreement, the insurance afforded to such additional insured will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. 10. Additional Insured —Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured a. Any architects, engineers or surveyors who are not engaged by you are insureds, but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury" or "property damage" or"personal and advertising injury" which may be imputed to that architect, engineer or surveyor arising out of: (1)Your acts or omissions; or (2) Your acts or omissions of those acting on your behalf; in the performance of your ongoing operations performed by you or on your behalf. But only if such architects, engineers or surveyors, while not engaged by you, are contractually required to be added as an additional insured to your policy. However, the insurance afforded to such additional insured: (1) Only applies to the extent permitted by law; and (2) Will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. b. With respect to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, the following additional exclusion applies: This insurance does not apply to "bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of the rendering of or failure to render any professional services, including: (1) The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, change orders, designs or specifications; or (2) Supervisory, inspection or engineering services. This exclusion applies even if the claims against any insured allege negligence or other wrongdoing in the supervision, hiring, employment, training or monitoring of others by that insured, if the "occurrence" which caused the "bodily injury" or "property damage", or the offense which caused the "personal and advertising injury", involved the rendering of or the failure to render any professional services. 11. Additional Insured — State or Governmental Agency or Subdivision or Political Subdivision — Permits or Authorizations Any state or governmental agency or subdivision or political subdivision is an insured, subject to the following provisions: CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 8 of 14 CG 72 08 07 17 a. This insurance applies only with respect to operations performed by you or on your behalf for which the state or governmental agency or subdivision or political subdivision has issued a permit or authorization. However: (1) The insurance afforded to such additional insured only applies to the extent permitted by law; and (2) If coverage provided to the additional insured is required by a contract or agreement, the insurance afforded to such additional insured will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. b. This insurance does not apply to: (1) "Bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of operations performed for the federal government, state or municipality; or (2) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" included within the "products-completed operations hazard". 12. Additional Insured Consolidated Insurance Program (Wrap-Up) Off-Premises Operations Only — Owners, Lessees or Contractors a. Any persons or organizations for whom you are performing operations, for which you have elected to seek coverage under a Consolidated Insurance Program, when you and such person or organization have agreed in writing in a contract or agreement that such person or organization be added as an additional insured on your policy as an insured. Such person or organization is an additional insured only with respect to your liability which may be imputed to that person or organization directly arising out of your ongoing operations performed for that person or organization at a premises other than any project or location that is designated as covered under a Consolidated Insurance Program. A person's or organization's status as an insured under this endorsement ends when your operations for that insured are completed. b. With respect to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, the following additional exclusion applies, This insurance does not apply to: "Bodily injury", "property damage", or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of the rendering of, or failure to render, any professional architectural, engineering or surveying services, including: (1) The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifications; and (2) Supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. 13. Additional Insured —Employee Injury to Another Employee With respect to your "employees" who occupy positions which are supervisory in nature: Paragraph 2.a.(1) of SECTION II —WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to read: a. "Bodily injury" or"personal and advertising injury": (1) To you, to your partners or members (if you are a partnership or joint venture), or to your members (if you are a limited liability company); (2) For which there is any obligation to share damages with or repay someone else who must pay damages because of the injury described in paragraph (1)(a) above; or (3) Arising out of his or her providing or failing to provide professional healthcare services, Paragraph 3.a. is deleted. For the purpose of this Item 12 only, a position is deemed to be supervisory in nature if that person performs principle work which is substantially different from that of his or her subordinates and has authority to hire, direct, discipline or discharge. CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 9 of 14 CG 72 08 07 17 SECTION III - LIMITS OF INSURANCE A. The following items are deleted and replaced by the following: 2. The General Aggregate Limit is the most we will pay for the sum of: a. Medical expenses under Coverage C; b. Damages under Coverage A, except damages because of "bodily injury" or "property damage" included in the"products-completed operations hazard"; and c. Damages under Coverage 8; and d. Damages under Coverage H. 3. The Products-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit is the most we will pay under Coverage A for damages because of "bodily injury" and "property damage" included in the "products-completed operations hazard" and Coverage G. 6. Subject to 5. above, the Damage to Premises Rented to You Limit is the most we will pay under Coverage A for damages because of "property damage" to any one premises, while rented to you, or in the case of damage by fire, explosion, lightning, smoke resulting from such fire, explosion, or lightning or sprinkler leakage while rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with permission of the owner. B. The following are added: 8. Subject to Paragraph 5. of SECTION III — LIMITS OF INSURANCE $25,000 is the most we will pay under Coverage H for Water Damage Legal Liability. 9. Coverage G— Product Recall Expense Aggregate Limit $50,000 Each Product Recall Limit $25,000 a. The Aggregate Limit shown above is the most we will pay for the sum of all "product recall expense" you incur as a result of all "product recalls" you initiate during the endorsement period. b. The Each Product Recall Limit shown above is the most we will pay, subject to the Aggregate and $1,000 deductible, for "product recall expense" you incur for any one "product recall" you initiate during the endorsement period. We will only pay for the amount of Product Recall Expenses which are in excess of the deductible amount. The deductible applies separately to each Product Recall. The limits of insurance will not be reduced by the amount of this deductible. We may, or will if required by law, pay all or any part of any deductible amount, Upon notice of our payment of a deductible amount, you shall promptly reimburse us for the part of the deductible amount we paid. 10. Aggregate Limits of Insurance (Per Location) The General Aggregate Limit applies separately to each of your "locations" owned by or rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with the permission of the owner. "Location" means premises Involving the same or connecting lots, or premises whose connection is interrupted only by a street, roadway, waterway or right-of-way of a railroad. 11. Aggregate Limits of Insurance (Per Project) The General Aggregate Limit applies separately to each of your projects away from premises owned by or rented to you. CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 10 of 14 CG 72 08 07 17 12. With respects to the insurance afforded to additional insureds afforded coverage by items 5 through 13 of SECTION II —WHO IS AN INSURED above, the following is added: The most we will pay on behalf of the additional insured is the amount of insurance: a. Required by the contract or agreement; b. Available under the applicable Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations; Whichever is less. This endorsement shall not increase the applicable Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations. 13. Subject to 5. of SECTION III — LIMITS OF INSURANCE, a $5,000 "occurrence" limit and a $10,000 "aggregate" limit is the most we will pay under Coverage A for damages because of "property damage" covered under Coverage D— Voluntary Property Damage Coverage. For the purposes of this Voluntary Property Damage Coverage, our right and duty to defend ends when we have paid the Limit of Liability or the Aggregate Limit far each coverage, and we are granted sole discretion in making payments under this coverage. 14. Subject to 5. of SECTION III — LIMITS OF INSURANCE, a $25,000 "occurrence" limit and a $100,000 "aggregate" limit is the most we will pay under Coverage E —Care, Custody and Control Coverage regardless of the number of: a. Insureds; b. Claims made or"suits" brought; or c. Persons or organizations making claims or bringing "suits". Deductible - Our obligation to pay damages on your behalf applies only to the amount of damages in excess of $500, This deductible applies to all damages because of "property damage" as the result of any one "occurrence" regardless of the number of persons or organizations who sustain damages because of that "occurrence". We may pay any part or all of the deductible amount to effect settlement of any claim or "suit" and upon notification of the action taken, you shall promptly reimburse us for such part of the deductible amount as has been paid by us. As respects this coverage "Aggregate" is the maximum amount we will pay for all covered "occurrences" during one policy period. For the purposes of this Care, Custody and Control Property Damage Coverage, our right and duty to defend ends when we have paid the Limit of Liability or the Aggregate Limit for each coverage, and we are granted sole discretion in making payments under this coverage. 15. Subject to 5. of SECTION III — LIMITS OF INSURANCE, the most we will pay for "property damage" under Coverage F -- Electronic Data Liability Coverage for loss of"electronic data" is $50,000 without regard to the number of"occurrences". SECTION IV - COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS A. The following conditions are amended: 1. Knowledge of Occurrence a. Condition 2., Items a. and b.are deleted and replaced by the following: (1) Duties In The Event Of Occurrence, Offense, Claim Or Suit (a) You must see to it that we are notified as soon as practicable of an "occurrence" or an offense which may result in a claim. Knowledge of an "occurrence" by your agent, servant or employee shall not in itself constitute knowledge of the named insured unless an officer of the named insured has received such notice from the agent, servant or employee. To the extent possible, notice should include: i. How, when and where the "occurrence" took place; ii. The names and addresses of any injured persons and witnesses, and ill. The nature and location of any injury or damage arising out of the "occurrence" or offense. CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 11 of 14 CG 72 08 07 17 (b) If a claim is made or "suit" is brought against any insured, you must: i. Immediately record the specifics of the claim or"suit" and the date received; and li. Notify us as soon as practicable. You must see to it that we receive written notice of the claim or"suit" as soon as practicable. Knowledge of a claim or "suit" by your agent, servant or employee shall not in itself constitute knowledge of the named insured unless an officer of the named insured has received such notice from the agent, servant or employee. 2. Where Broad Form Named Insured is added in SECTION II — WHO IS AN INSURED of this endorsement, Condition 4. Other Insurance b. Excess Insurance (1).(a) is replaced by the following: (a) Any of the other insurance, whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, that is available to an insured solely by reason of ownership by you of more than 50 percent of the voting stock, and not withstanding any other language in any other policy. This provision does not apply to a policy written to apply specifically in excess of this policy. B. The following are added: 1. Condition (5) of 2. "Duties in the event Occurrence, Offense, Claim or Suit" c. You or any other involved insured must: (5) Upon our request, replace or repair the property covered under Voluntary Property Damage Coverage at your actual cost, excluding profit or overhead. 10. Blanket Waiver Of Subrogation We waive any right of recovery we may have against any person or organization because of payments we make for injury or damage arising out of: premises owned or occupied by or rented or loaned to you, ongoing operations performed by you or on your behalf, done under a contract with that person or organization, "your work", or "your products". We waive this right where you have agreed to do so as part of a written contract, executed by you before the "bodily injury" or "property damage" occurs or the "personal injury" or "advertising injury" offense is committed. 11. Liberalization If a revision to this Coverage Part, which would provide more coverage with no additional premium becomes effective during the policy period in the state designated for the first Named Insured shown in the Declarations, your policy will automatically provide this additional coverage on the effective date of the revision. 12. Unintentional Failure to Disclose All Hazards Based on our reliance on your representations as to existing hazards, if you unintentionally should fail to disclose all such hazards at the inception date of your policy, we will not deny coverage under this Coverage Part because of such failure. However, this provision does not affect our right to collect additional premium or exercise our right of cancellation or non-renewal. 13. The following conditions are added in regard to Coverage G —Product Recall Expense In event of a"product recall", you must a. See to it that we are notified as soon as practicable of a "product recall". To the extent possible, notice should include how, when and where the"product recall" took place and estimated "product recall expense". b. Take all reasonable steps to minimize "product recall expense". This will not increase the limits of insurance. c. If requested, permit us to question you under oath at such times as may be reasonably required about any matter relating to this insurance or your claim, including your books and records. Your answers must be signed. d. Permit us to inspect and obtain other information proving the loss. You must send us a signed, sworn statement of loss containing the information we request to investigate the claim. You must do this within 60 days after our request. e. Cooperate with us in the investigation or settlement of any claim. f. Assist us upon our request, in the enforcement of any rights against any person or organization which may be liable to you because of loss to which this insurance applies. CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 12 of 14 CG 72 08 07 17 g. Claims Handling (1) Within 15 days after we receive written notice of claim, we will: (a) Acknowledge receipt of the claim. If we do not acknowledge receipt of the claim in writing, we will keep a record of the date, method and content of the acknowledgment; (b) Begin any investigation of the claim; and (c) Request a signed, sworn proof of loss, specify the information you must provide and supply you with the necessary forms. We may request more information at a later date, if during the investigation of the claim such additional information is necessary. (2) We will notify you in writing as to whether: (a) The claim or part of the claim will be paid; (b) The claim or part of the claim has been denied, and inform you of the reasons for denial; (c) More information is necessary; or (d) We need additional time to reach a decision. If we need additional time, we will inform you of the reasons for such need. (3) We will provide notification, as described in (2)(a) through (2)(d) above, within: (a) 15 business days after we receive the signed, sworn proof of loss and all information we requested; or (b) 30 days after we receive the signed, sworn proof of loss and all information we requested, if we have reason to believe the loss resulted from arson. If we have notified you that we need additional time to reach a decision, we must then either approve or deny the claim within 45 days of such notice. h. We will pay for covered loss or damage within 5 business days after: (1) We have notified you that payment of the claim or part of the claim will be made and have reached agreement with you on the amount of loss; or (2) An appraisal award has been made. However, if payment of the claim or part of the claim is conditioned on your compliance with any of the terms of this policy, we will make payment within 5 business days after the date you have complied with such terms. Catastrophe Claims If a claim results from a weather related catastrophe or a major natural disaster, the claim handling and claim payment deadlines described in a. and b. above are extended for an additional 15 days. Catastrophe or Major Natural Disaster means a weather related event which is: (1) Declared a disaster under the Texas Disaster Act of 1975; or (2) Determined to be a catastrophe by the State Board of Insurance. 3. The term "business day", as used in this endorsement, means a day other than Saturday, Sunday or a holiday recognized by the state of Texas. k. We will issue loss payment to the first Named insured shown in the Declarations and any mortgagee or loss payee as designated. 14. Limited Railroad Contractual Liability The following conditions are applicable only to coverage afforded by reason of the redefining of an "insured contract" in the DEFINITIONS section of this endorsement: a. Railroad Protective Liability coverage provided by Railroad Protective Liability Coverage Form (CG 00 35) with minimum limits of $2,000,000 per occurrence and a $6,000,000 general aggregate limit must be in place for the entire duration of any project. b. Any amendment to the Other Insurance condition of Railroad Protective Liability Coverage Form (CG 00 35) alters the primacy of the coverage or which impairs our right to contribution will rescind any coverage afforded by the redefined "insured contract" language. c. For the purposes of the Other Insurance condition of Railroad Protective Liability Coverage Form (CG 00 35) you, the named insured, will be deemed to be the designated contractor. CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 13 of 14 CG 72 08 07 17 SECTION V - DEFINITIONS A. At item 12. Mobile Equipment the wording at f.(1) is deleted and replaced by the following: f. (1) Equipment designed primarily for: (a) Snow removal; (b) Road maintenance, but not construction or resurfacing; or (c) Street cleaning; except for such vehicles that have a gross vehicle weight less than 1,000 lbs which are not designed for highway use. B. Item 3. "bodily injury" is deleted and replaced with the following: 3. "bodily injury" means physical injury, sickness or disease sustained by a person. This includes mental anguish, mental injury, shock, fright or death that results from such physical injury, sickness or disease. C. Item 9. "Insured Contract" c. is deleted and replaced with the following: c. Any easement or license agreement; D. Item 9. "Insured Contract" f.(1) is deleted. E. The following definitions are added for this endorsement only: 23. "Electronic data" means information, facts or programs stored as or on, created or used on, or transmitted to or from computer software, including systems and applications software, hard or floppy disks, CD-ROMS, tape drives, cells, data processing devices or any other media which are used with electronically controlled equipment. 24. "Product recall" means a withdrawal or removal from the market of"your product" based on the determination by you or any regulatory or governmental agency that: a. The use or consumption of "your product" has caused or will cause actual or alleged "bodily injury" or "property damage"; and b. Such determination requires you to recover possession or control of "your product" from any distributor, purchaser or user, to repair or replace "your product", but only if "your product" is unfit for use or consumption, or is hazardous as a result of: (1) An error or omission by an insured in the design, manufacturing, processing, labeling, storage, or transportation of"your product"; or (2) Actual or alleged intentional, malicious or wrongful alteration or contamination of "your product" by someone other than you. 25. "Product recall expense" means reasonable and necessary expenses for: a. Telephone, radio and television communication and printed advertisements, including stationery, envelopes and postage. b. Transporting recalled products from any purchaser, distributor or user, to locations designated by you. c. Remuneration paid to your employees for overtime, as well as remuneration paid to additional employees or independent contractors you hire. d. Transportation and accommodation expense incurred by your employees. e. Rental expense incurred for temporary locations used to store recalled products. f. Expense incurred to properly dispose of recalled products, including packaging that cannot be reused. g. Transportation expenses incurred to replace recalled products. h. Repairing, redistributing or replacing covered recalled products with like products or substitutes, not to exceed your original cost of manufacturing, processing, acquisition and/or distribution. These expenses must be incurred as a result of a "product recall". CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 14 of 14 R& B Group, Inc. Policy#: 85321152 Policy Dates: January 31, 2020 to January 31, 2021 COMMERCIAL AUTO CA 71 09 01 17 • THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. BUSINESS AUTO ULTRA ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM COMMON POLICY CONDITIONS COVERAGE INDEX DESCRIPTION PAGE Temporary Substitute Auto Physical Damage 2 Broad Form Insured 2 Employee as Insureds 2 Additional Insured Status by Contract, Agreement or Permit 2 Bail Bond Coverage 3 Loss of Earnings Coverage 3 Amended Fellow Employee Coverage 3 Towing and Labor 3 Physical Damage Additional Transportation Expense Coverage 3 Extra Expense -Theft 3 Rental Reimbursement and Additional Transportation Expense 4 Personal Effects Coverage 4 Personal Property of Others 4 Locksmith Coverage 4 Vehicle Wrap Coverage 5 Airbag Accidental Discharge 5 Audio, Visual and Data Electronic Equipment Coverage 5 Auto Loan/Lease Total Loss Protection 5 Glass Repair —Deductible Amendment 5 Amended Duties in the Event of Accident, Claim, Suit or Loss 6 Waiver of Subrogation Required by Contract 6 Unintentional Failure to Disclose 6 Hired, Leased, Rented or Borrowed Auto Physical Damage 6 Mental Anguish 7 Extended Cancellation Condition 7 The COVERAGE INDEX set forth above is informational only and grants no coverage. Terms set forth in (Bold Italics) are likewise for information only and by themselves shall be deemed to grant no coverage. CA 71 09 01 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 1 of 7 (Temporary Substitute Auto Physical Damage) A. TEMPORARY SUBSTITUTE AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE SECTION I -- COVERED AUTOS, paragraph C. Certain Trailers, Mobile Equipment and Temporary Substitute Autos is amended by adding the following at the end of the existing language: If Physical Damage Coverage is provided under this Coverage form for an 'auto" you own, the Physical Damage coverages provided for that owned "auto" are extended to any "auto" you do not own while used with the permission of its owner as a temporary substitute for the covered "auto" you own that is out of service because of its breakdown, repair, servicing, "loss", or destruction B. BROADENED LIABILITY COVERAGES SECTION Il — LIABILITY COVERAGE in Paragraph A. Coverage at 1. Who Is An Insured is amended to include the following: (Broad Form Insured) d, Any legally incorporated subsidiary in which you own more than 50% of the voting stock on the effective date of the Coverage Form. However, the Named Insured does not include any subsidiary that is an "insured" under any other automobile policy or would be an "insured" under such a policy but for its termination or the exhaustion of its Limit of Insurance. e. Any organization that is acquired or formed by you, during the term of this policy and over which you maintain majority ownership. However, the Named Insured does not include any newly formed or acquired organization: (1) That is a joint venture or partnership, (2) That is an "insured" under any other policy, (3) That has exhausted its Limits of Insurance under any other policy, or (4) 180 days or more after its acquisition or formation by you, unless you have given us notice of the acquisition or formation Coverage does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" that results from an accident that occurred before you formed or acquired the organization. (Employee as fnsureds) f. Any employee of yours while acting in the course of your business or your personal affairs while using a covered "auto" you do not own, hire or borrow. (Additional Insured Status by Contract, Agreement or Permit) g. Any person or organization whom you are required to add as an additional insured on this policy under a written contract or agreement; but the written contract or agreement must be: (1) Currently in effect or becoming effective during the term of this policy; and (2) Executed prior to the "bodily injury" or"property damage." The additional insured status will apply only with respect to your liability for "bodily injury" or "property damage" which may be imputed to that person(s) or organization(s) directly arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of the covered "autos" at the location(s) designated, if any. Coverage provided by this endorsement will not exceed the limits of liability required by the written contract or written agreement even if the limits of liability stated in the policy exceed those limits. This endorsement shall not increase the limits stated in Section II. C. Limits of Insurance. Far any covered "auto" you own this Coverage Form provides primary coverage. Page 2 of 7 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. CA 71 09 01 17 C. BROADENED SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS SECTION II. LIABILITY A. Coverage 2. Coverage Extensions a. Supplementary Payments (2) and (4) are replaced by the following: (Bail Bond Coverage) (2) Up to $5,000 for cost of bail bonds (including bonds for related traffic violations) required because of an "accident" we cover. We do not have to furnish these bonds. (Loss of Earnings Coverage) (4) All reasonable expenses incurred by the "insured" at our request, including actual loss of earning up to $500 a day because of time off from work. (Amended Fellow Employee Exclusion) D. AMENDED FELLOW EMPLOYEE EXCLUSION Only with respect to your "employees" who occupy positions which are supervisory in nature, SECTION II. LIABILITY B. Exclusion 5. Fellow Employee is replaced by: 5. Fellow Employee "Bodily Injury": a. To you, or your partners or members (if you are a partnership or joint venture), or to your members (if you are a limited liability company); b. To your "executive officers" and directors (if you are an organization other than a partnership, joint venture, or limited liability company) but only with respect to performance of their duties as your officers or directors; c. For which there is an obligation to share damages with or repay someone else who must pay damages because of the injury described in paragraph a and b above; or d. Arising out of his or her providing or failing to provide professional health care services. For purposes of this endorsement, a position is deemed to be supervisory in nature if that person performs principle work which is substantially different from that of his or her subordinates and has authority to hire, transfer, direct, discipline or discharge. E. BROADENED PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGES SECTION III —PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE A.Coverage is amended as follows: (Towing and Labor) 2. Towing is deleted and replaced with the following: 2. Towing and Labor We will pay towing and labor costs incurred, up to the limits shown below, each time a covered "auto" is disabled: a. For private passenger type vehicles we will pay up to $100 per disablement. b. For all other covered "auto's" we will pay up to $500 per disablement However, the labor must be performed at the place of disablement. (Physical Damage Additional Transportation Expense Coverage) 4. Coverage Extensions a. Transportation Expenses is amended to provide the following limits: We will pay up to $60 per day to a maximum of $1,800. All other terms and provisions of this section remain applicable. The following language is added to 4. Coverage Extensions: (Extra Expense— Theft) c. Theft Recovery Expense If you have purchased Comprehensive Coverage on an "auto" that is stolen, we will pay the expense of returning that stolen auto to you. The limit for this coverage extension is $5,000. CA 71 09 01 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 3 of 7 (Rental Reimbursement and Additional Transportation Expense) d. Rental Reimbursement We will provide Rental Reimbursement and Additional Expense coverage only for those Physical Damage coverages for which a premium is shown in the Declarations or schedule pages. Coverage applies only to a covered "auto". (1) We will pay for auto rental expense and the expense incurred by you because of "loss" to remove and transfer your materials and equipment from a covered "auto" to a covered "auto." Payment applies in addition to the otherwise applicable coverage you have on a covered "auto." No deductible applies to this coverage. (2) We will pay only for expenses incurred during the policy period and beginning 24 hours after the "loss" and ending, regardless of the policy's expiration, with the lesser of the following number of days: (a) The number of days reasonably required to repair or replace the covered "auto." If "loss" is caused by theft, this number of days is added to the number of days it takes to locate the covered "auto" and return it to you, or (b) 30 days. (3) Our payment is limited to the lesser of the following amounts: (a) Necessary and actual expenses incurred; or (b) $75 per day. (c) This coverage does not apply while there are spare or reserve "autos" available to you for your operations. (d) If"loss" results from the total theft of a covered "auto" of the private passenger or light truck type, we will pay under this coverage only that amount of your rental reimbursement expense which is not already provided for under the SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, A, Coverage, 4. Coverage Extensions, a. Transportation Expenses. (Personal Effects Coverage) e. Personal Effects If you have purchased Comprehensive Coverage on this policy for an "auto" you own and that "auto" is stolen, we will pay, without application of a deductible, up to $500 for Personal Effects stolen with the "auto". The insurance provided under this provision is excess over any other collectible insurance. For this coverage extension, Personal Effects means tangible property that is worn or carried by an "insured". (Personal Property of Others) f. Personal Property of Others We will pay up to $500 for loss to personal property of others in or on your covered "auto." This coverage applies only in the event of "loss" to your covered "auto" caused by fire, lightning, explosion, theft, mischief or vandalism, the covered "auto's" collision with another object, or the covered "auto's" overturn. No deductibles apply to this coverage. (Locksmith Coverage) g. Locksmith Coverage We will pay up to $250 per occurrence for necessary locksmith services for keys locked inside a covered private passenger "auto". The deductible is waived for these services. Page 4 of 7 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. CA 71 09 01 17 (Vehicle Wrap Coverage) h. Vehicle Wrap Coverage If you have Comprehensive or Collision coverage on an "auto" that is a total loss, in addition to the actual cash value of the "auto", we will pay up to $1,000 for vinyl vehicle wraps which are displayed on the covered "auto" at the time of total loss. Regardless of the number of autos deemed a total loss, the most we will pay under this Vehicle Wrap Coverage for any one "loss" is $5,000. For purposes of this coverage provision, signs or other graphics painted or magnetically affixed to the vehicle are not considered vehicle wraps. (Airbag Accidental Discharge) F. SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, B, Exclusions is amended at 3. to include the following language: If you have purchased Comprehensive or Collision Coverage under this policy, this exclusion does not apply to mechanical breakdown relating to the accidental discharge of an air bag. This coverage applies only to a covered auto you own and is excess of any other collectible insurance or warranty. No deductible applies to this coverage. G. BROADENED LIMITS OF INSURANCE (Audio, Visual and Data Electronic Equipment Coverage) SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE — C. Limit of Insurance at 1.b. is amended to provide the following limits: b. Limits of $1,000 per "loss" is increased to $5,000 per "loss". All other terms and provisions of this section remain applicable. (Auto Loan/Lease Total Loss Protection) SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE — C. Limit of Insurance is amended by adding the following language: 4. In the event of a total "loss" to a covered "auto" shown in the Schedule pages, subject at the time of the "loss" to a loan or lease, we will pay any unpaid amount due including up to a maximum of$500 for early termination fees or penalties on the lease or loan for a covered"auto" less: a. The amount paid under the Physical Damage Coverage Section of the policy; and b. Any: (1) Overdue lease /loan payments at the time of the "loss"; (2) Financial penalties imposed under a lease for excessive use, abnormal wear and tear or high mileage; (3) Security deposits not returned by the lessor; (4) Costs for extended warranties, Credit Life Insurance, Health, Accident or Disability Insurance purchased with the loan or lease; and (5) Carry-over balances from previous loans or leases. (Glass Repair— Deductible Amendment) H. GLASS REPAIR —DEDUCTIBLE SECTION Ill— PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE —D. Deductible is amended by adding the following: Any deductible shown in the Declarations as applicable to the covered "auto' will not apply to glass breakage if the damaged glass is repaired, rather than replaced. CA 71 09 01 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 5 of 7 (Amended Duties in the Event of Accident, Claim, Suit or Loss) I. AMENDED DUTIES IN THE EVENT OF ACCIDENT, CLAIM, SUIT OR LOSS Under SECTION IV — BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS, A. Loss Conditions , the following is added to paragraph 2. Duties In The Event of Accident, Suit or Loss: d. Knowledge of any "accident", "claim", "suit" or"loss" will be deemed knowledge by you when notice of such "accident", "claim", "suit" or"loss" has been received by: (1) You, if you are an individual; (2) Any partner or insurance manager if you are a partnership; (3) An executive officer or insurance manager, if you are a corporation; (4) Your members, managers or insurance manager, if you are a limited liability company; or (5) Your officials, trustees, board members or insurance manager, if you are a not-for-profit organization. (Waiver of Subrogation by Contract) J. WAIVER OF SUBROGATION REQUIRED BY CONTRACT Under SECTION IV, BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS, A. Loss Conditions 5. Transfer of Rights of Recovery Against Others to Us the following language is added: However, we waive any rights of recovery we may have against the person or organization with whom you have agreed in writing in a contract, agreement or permit, to provide insurance such as is afforded under the policy to which this endorsement is attached. This provision does not apply unless the written contract or written agreement has been executed, or permit has been issued, prior to the"bodily injury" or"property damage." (Unintentional Failure to Disclose) K. UNINTENTIONAL FAILURE TO DISCLOSE Under SECTION IV — BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS, B. General Conditions , the following is added to 2. Concealment, Misrepresentation Or Fraud: Your unintentional error in disclosing, or failing to disclose, any material fact existing at the effective date of this Coverage Form, or during the policy period in connection with any additional hazards, will not prejudice your rights under this Coverage Form. (Hired, Leased, Rented or Borrowed Auto Physical Damage) L. HIRED, LEASED, RENTED OR BORROWED AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE Under SECTION IV — BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS B. General Conditions 5. Other Insurance Paragraph 5.b. is replaced by the following: b. (1) For "Comprehensive" and "Collision" Auto Physical Damage coverage provided by this endorsement, the following are deemed to be covered "autos" you own: (a) Any Covered "auto" you lease, hire, rent or borrow; and (b) Any Covered "auto" hired or rented by your "employee" under a contract in that individual "employee's" name, with your permission, while performing duties related to the conduct of your business. However, any "auto" that is leased, hired, rented or borrowed with a driver is not a covered "auto" (2) Limit of Insurance For This Section The most we will pay for any one"loss" is the lesser of the following: (a) $75,000 per accident, or (b) actual cash value at the time of loss, or (c) cost of repair. Page 6 of 7 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. CA 71 09 01 17 Minus a $500 deductible. An adjustment for depreciation and physical condition will be made in determining actual cash value in the event of a total loss. No deductible applies to "loss" caused by fire or lightning. (3) This Hired Auto Physical Damage coverage is excess over any other collectible insurance. (4) Definitions For This Section (a) Comprehensive Coverage: from any cause except the covered "auto's" collision with another object or the covered "auto's" overturn. We will pay glass breakage, "loss" caused by hitting a bird or animal and, "loss" caused by falling objects or missiles. (b) Collision Coverage: caused by the covered "auto's" collision with another object or by the covered "auto's" overturn. (Mental Anguish) M. MENTAL ANGUISH Under SECTION V— DEFINITIONS, C. is replaced by the following: C. "Bodily injury" means bodily injury, sickness or disease sustained by a person including mental anguish or death resulting from bodily injury, sickness, or disease. (Extended Cancellation Condition) N. EXTENDED CANCELLATION CONDITION Under CANCELLATION, of the COMMON POLICY CONDITIONS form, item 2.b. is replaced by the following: b. 60 days before the effective date of cancellation if we cancel for any other reason. CA 71 09 01 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 7 of 7 R & B Group, Inc. Policy#: 85321152 Policy Dates: January 31, 2020 to January 31, 2021 CA 73 34 09 15 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. PRIMARY AND NON-CONTRIBUTORY - OTHER INSURANCE CONDITION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM The following language replaces SECTION IV BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS Part B. General Conditions 5. Other Insurance c.: c. Regardless of the provisions of Paragraph a. above, this Coverage Form's Covered Autos Liability Coverage is primary for any liability assumed under an "insured contract". This coverage will also be non-contributory if it is required by the terms of the "insured contract". CA 73 34 09 15 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 1 of 1 TexasMut ua WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND WC 42 03 04 B EMPLOYERS LIABILITY POLICY Insured copy TEXAS WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in item 3.A. of the Information Page. We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy.We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule, but this waiver applies only with respect to bodily injury arising out of the operations described in the schedule where you are required by a written contract to obtain this waiver from us. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. The premium for this endorsement is shown in the Schedule. Schedule 1. ( ) Specific Waiver Name of person or organization (X)Blanket Waiver Any person or organization for whom the Named Insured has agreed by written contract to furnish this waiver. 2. Operations: ALL TEXAS OPERATIONS 3. Premium: The premium charge for this endorsement shall be 2.00 percent of the premium developed on payroll in connection with work performed for the above person(s)or organization(s)arising out of the operations described. 4. Advance Premium: Included, see Information Page This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached effective on the inception date of the policy unless a different date is indicated below. (The following"attaching clause"need be completed only when this endorsement is Issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) This endorsement,effective on 1/31/20 at 12:01 a.m.standard time,forms a part of: Policy no. 0001140773 of Texas Mutual Insurance Company effective on 1/31/20 Issued to: R& B GROUP INC 7/1/14-.)Z This is not a bill - Authorized representative NCCI Carrier Code: 29939 1/29/20 PO Box 12058,Austin, TX 78711-2058 1 of 1 texasmutual.com 1 (800)859-5995 I Fax(800)359-0650 WC 42 03 04 B CITY OF PEARLAND PERFORMANCE BOND Bond No. 70190854 Section 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF BRAZORIA § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That R&B Group,Inc. of the City of Houston , County of Harris , and State of Texas, as principal, and The Guarantee Company of North America USA authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner), in the penal sum of$ 768.600.00 for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally, by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, effective as of the ath day of May , 20 20 , (the "Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WW 1903 BID NO.: 0220-27 which Contract, including the Contract Documents as defined therein, is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform said Contract Work and shall in all respects duly and faithfully observe and perform all and singular the covenants, conditions, and agreements in and by said Contract agreed and covenanted by the Principal to be observed and performed, and according to the true intent and meaning of said Contract and Contract Documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the Work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the Work to be performed thereunder. 12/2007 00610- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PERFORMANCE BOND IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 4th day of May , 2020. Principal: Surety: R&B Group,Inc. The Guarani Co y N ��ssAmerica USA By: .717— --).2% By: Uf ; Title: Brian D.Morrison,CEO Title: Michele Bonnin,Attorney-In-Fact Address: Address: 1213 North Durham Drive 9977 W.Sam Houston Parkway North,Suite 130 Houston,TX 770008 Houston,TX 77064 Telephone: 713-862-5800 Telephone: 832-446-3350 Fax: Fax: NOTICE: THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL-FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 12/2007 00610 -2 of 2 THE Q The Guarantee Company of North America USA GUARANTEE Southfield, Michigan POWER OF ATTORNEY NOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: That THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA USA, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Michigan, having its principal office in Southfield,Michigan,does hereby constitute and appoint Edward Arens, Philip Baker,Michele Bonnin,Jillian O'Neal, Erica A.Cox, Rebecca Garza Technical Assurance, L.L.C. its true and lawful attorney(s)-in-fact to execute,seal and deliver for and on its behalf as surety,any and all bonds and undertakings,contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof,which are or may be allowed,required or permitted by law,statute,rule,regulation,contract or otherwise. The execution of such instrument(s)in pursuance of these presents,shall be as binding upon THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA USA as fully and amply,to all intents and purposes,as if the same had been duly executed and acknowledged by its regularly elected officers at the principal office. The Power of Attorney is executed and may be certified so, and may be revoked, pursuant to and by authority of Article IX, Section 9.03 of the By-Laws adopted by the Board of Directors of THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA USA at a meeting held on the 315'day of December,2003. The President,or any Vice President, acting with any Secretary or Assistant Secretary,shall have power and authority: 1. To appoint Attorney(s)-in-fact, and to authorize them to execute on behalf of the Company, and attach the Seal of the Company thereto, bonds and undertakings,contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof;and 2. To revoke,at any time,any such Attorney-in-fact and revoke the authority given,except as provided below 3. In connection with obligations in favor of the Florida Department of Transportation only, it is agreed that the power and authority hereby given to the Attorney-in-Fact includes any and all consents for the release of retained percentages and/or final estimates on engineering and construction contracts required by the State of Florida Department of Transportation. It is fully understood that consenting to the State of Florida Department of Transportation making payment of the final estimate to the Contractor and/or its assignee,shall not relieve this surety company of any of its obligations under its bond. 4. In connection with obligations in favor of the Kentucky Department of Highways only, it is agreed that the power and authority hereby given to the Attorney-in-Fact cannot be modified or revoked unless prior written personal notice of such intent has been given to the Commissioner—Department of Highways of the Commonwealth of Kentucky at least thirty(30)days prior to the modification or revocation. 'urther,this Power of Attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile pursuant to resolution of the Board of Directors of the Company adopted at a meeting luly called and held on the 6th day of December 2011,of which the following is a true excerpt: RESOLVED that the signature of any authorized officer and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or certification thereof authorizing the execution and delivery of any bond, undertaking, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and such signature and seal when so used shall have the same force and effect as though manually affixed. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA USA has caused this instrument to be signed and e��C'7. � its corporate seal to be affixed by its authorized officer,this 1st day of March,2018. 1' 19 THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA USA lb Jbf /f STATE OF MICHIGAN Stephen C.Ruschak,President&Chief Operating Officer Randall Musselman,Secretary County of Oakland On this 1st day of March, 2018 before me came the individuals who executed the preceding instrument,to me personally known, and being by me duly sworn, said that each is the herein described and authorized officer of The Guarantee Company of North America USA; that the seal affixed to said instrument is the Corporate Seal of said Company;that the Corporate Seal and each signature were duly affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said Company. Cynthia A. Takai IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand at The Guarantee ...pryipilii* Notary Public, State of Michigan Company of North America USA offices the day and year above written. c vr.�o County of Oakland /7 �1 "k' � r yw s=' My Commission Expires February 27,2024 �-�/ a• ce l Acting in Oakland County I, Randall Musselman,Secretary of THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA USA,do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney executed by THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA USA,which is still in full force and effect. 0r►"TEFcoIN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have thereunto set my hand and attached the seal of said Company this 4th day of May , 2020 0 0 t ...:4:;azeix,....,....„.......4z,___ .3. 1I Akio" Randall Musselman,Secretary 11111 THE GUARANTEE® TEXAS CONSUMER NOTICE 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE AVISO IMPORTANTE To obtain information or make a complaint: Para obtener informacion o presentar una queja: 2. You may contact your agent at: Puede contactar a su agente en: 3. You may call The Guarantee Company of North Puede Ilamar al niumero de telefono gratuito de America USA's toll-free telephone number for The Guarantee Company of North America USA information or to make a complaint at: para obtener informacion o presenter una queja en: 1-866-328-0567 1-866-328-0567 4. You may also write to The Guarantee Company of Tambien puede escribir a The Guarantee Company of North America USA at: North America USA a; One Towne Square, Suite 1470 One Towne Square, Suite 1470 Southfield, Michigan 48076 Southfield, Michigan 48076 Web: www.thequaranteeus.com Web: www.theguaranteeus.com E-mail: Claims.USAthequarantee.com E-mail: Claims.US(c�theguarantee.com Fax: 248-750-0431 Fax: 248-750-0431 5. You may contact the Texas Department of Puede comunicarse con el Departamento de Seguros de Insurance to obtain information on companies, Texas para obtener informacion sobre companias, coverages, rights or complaints at: 1-800-252- coberturas, derechos o quejas en: 1-800-252-3439 3439 6. You may write the Texas Department of Puede escribir al Departamento de Seguros de Insurance: Texas: 333 Guadalupe Street 333 Guadalupe Street P.O. Box 149104 P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78701 Austin, TX 78701 Fax: (512) 490-1007 Fax: (512)490-1007 Web: http://ww.tdi.texas.gov Web: http://ww.tdi.texas.qov E-mail: ConsumerProtection(a�tdi.texas.gov E-mail: ConsumerProtection(a�tdi.texas.gov 7. PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: DISPUTAS PREMIUM 0 DE RECLAMACION: Should you have a dispute concerning your Si tiene una disputa sobre su prima o sobre un reclamo, premium or about a claim you should contact the debe comunicarse primero con el (agente) (compania) (agent) (company) (agent or the company)first. If agente o la compania). Si la disputa no se resuelve, the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the puede comunicarse con el Departamento de Seguros de Texas Department of Insurance. Texas (TDI). 8. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: ADJUNTE ESTE AVISO A SU POLITICA: Este aviso es This notice is for information only and does not solo para informacion y no se convierte en parte o become a part or condition of the attached condicion del documento adjunto. document. ;ev 10/10/2019 Page 1 of 1 The Guarantee Company of North America,USA 248 281 0281 I 1 866 328 0567 248 750 0431 One Towne Square,Suite 1470,Southfield,MI USA 48076 theguaranteeus.com I Excellence,Expertise,Expenence Every time CITY OF PEARLAND PAYMENT BOND Bond No. 70190854 Section 00611 PAYMENT BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF BRAZORIA § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That R&B Group, Inc. of the City of Houston , County of Harris , and State of Texas, as principal, and The Guarantee Company of North America USA authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner), in the penal sum of$ 768,600.00 for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally,by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, effective as of the 4th day of May , 20 zo , (the "Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WW 1903 BID NO.: 0220-27 which Contract, including the Contract Documents as defined therein, is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor or material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work provided for in said Contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the Work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the Work to be performed thereunder. 07/2006 00611 - 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PAYMENT BOND IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 4th day of May , 2020. Principal: Surety: R&B Group,Inc. The Guara'e r ivme:cJSA By: By: / Title: Brian D.Morrison,CEO Title: Michele Bonnin,Attorney-In-Fact Address: Address: 1213 North Durham Drive 9977 W.Sam Houston Parkway North,Suite 130 Houston,TX 770008 Houston,TX 77064 Telephone: 713-862-5800 _ Telephone: 832-446-3350 Fax: Fax: NOTICE: THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL-FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 07/2006 00611 -2 of 2 111 THE The Guarantee Company of North America USA GUARANTEE® Southfield, Michigan POWER OF ATTORNEY NOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: That THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA USA, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Michigan, having its principal office in Southfield,Michigan,does hereby constitute and appoint Edward Arens,Philip Baker,Michele Bonnin,Jillian O'Neal, Erica A.Cox, Rebecca Garza Technical Assurance,L.L.C. its true and lawful attorney(s)-in-fact to execute,seal and deliver for and on its behalf as surety,any and all bonds and undertakings,contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof,which are or may be allowed,required or permitted by law,statute,rule,regulation,contract or otherwise. The execution of such instrument(s)in pursuance of these presents,shall be as binding upon THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA USA as fully and amply,to all intents and purposes,as if the same had been duly executed and acknowledged by its regularly elected officers at the principal office. The Power of Attorney is executed and may be certified so,and may be revoked, pursuant to and by authority of Article IX, Section 9.03 of the By-Laws adopted by the Board of Directors of THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA USA at a meeting held on the 315'day of December,2003. The President,or any Vice President,acting with any Secretary or Assistant Secretary,shall have power and authority: 1. To appoint Attorney(s)-in-fact, and to authorize them to execute on behalf of the Company, and attach the Seal of the Company thereto, bonds and undertakings,contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof; and 2. To revoke,at any time,any such Attorney-in-fact and revoke the authority given,except as provided below 3. In connection with obligations in favor of the Florida Department of Transportation only, it is agreed that the power and authority hereby given to the Attorney-in-Fact includes any and all consents for the release of retained percentages and/or final estimates on engineering and construction contracts required by the State of Florida Department of Transportation. It is fully understood that consenting to the State of Florida Department of Transportation making payment of the final estimate to the Contractor and/or its assignee,shall not relieve this surety company of any of its obligations under its bond. 4. In connection with obligations in favor of the Kentucky Department of Highways only, it is agreed that the power and authority hereby given to the Attorney-in-Fact cannot be modified or revoked unless prior written personal notice of such intent has been given to the Commissioner—Department of Highways of the Commonwealth of Kentucky at least thirty(30)days prior to the modification or revocation. urther,this Power of Attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile pursuant to resolution of the Board of Directors of the Company adopted at a meeting ,rly called and held on the 6th day of December 2011,of which the following is a true excerpt: RESOLVED that the signature of any authorized officer and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or certification thereof authorizing the execution and delivery of any bond, undertaking, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and such signature and seal when so used shall have the same force and effect as though manually affixed. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA USA has caused this instrument to be signed and r its corporate seal to be affixed by its authorized officer,this 1st day of March,2018. celt:eart p THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA USA 7 ' ,�� egad-- Am..- A STATE OF MICHIGAN Stephen C.Ruschak,President&Chief Operating Officer Randall Musselman,Secretary County of Oakland On this 1st day of March, 2018 before me came the individuals who executed the preceding instrument,to me personally known, and being by me duly sworn, said that each is the herein described and authorized officer of The Guarantee Company of North America USA; that the seal affixed to said instrument is the Corporate Seal of said Company;that the Corporate Seal and each signature were duly affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said Company. :..-7;51:—1 Cynthia A. Takai IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand at The Guarantee Notary Public, State of Michigan Company of North America USA offices the day and year above written. o `' County of Oakland `.4.7 ; _ My Commission Expires February 27,2024 i.t a "' Acting in Oakland County I, Randall Musselman,Secretary of THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA USA,do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney executed by THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA USA,which is still in full force and effect. _pATEE cot. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I have thereunto set my hand and attached the seal of said Company this 4th day of May , 2020 l' 0 Ts /:::.4„. y..„.eesort,..,..,.. .....6._ N,.." Randall Musselman,Secretary THE GUARANTEE' TEXAS CONSUMER NOTICE 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE AVISO IMPORTANTE To obtain information or make a complaint: Para obtener informacibn o presentar una queja: 2. You may contact your agent at: Puede contactar a su agente en: 3. You may call The Guarantee Company of North Puede Ilamar al numero de telefono gratuito de America USA's toll-free telephone number for The Guarantee Company of North America USA information or to make a complaint at: para obtener informacion o presenter una queja en: 1-866-328-0567 1-866-328-0567 4. You may also write to The Guarantee Company of Tambien puede escribir a The Guarantee Company of North America USA at: North America USA a; One Towne Square, Suite 1470 One Towne Square, Suite 1470 Southfield, Michigan 48076 Southfield, Michigan 48076 Web: www.theguaranteeus.com Web: www.thequaranteeus.com E-mail: Claims.UStheguarantee.com E-mail: Claims.US(a�theguarantee.com Fax: 248-750-0431 Fax: 248-750-0431 5. You may contact the Texas Department of Puede comunicarse con el Departamento de Seguros de Insurance to obtain information on companies, Texas para obtener informacion sobre companias, coverages, rights or complaints at: 1-800-252- coberturas, derechos o quejas en: 1-800-252-3439 3439 6. You may write the Texas Department of Puede escribir al Departamento de Seguros de Insurance: Texas: 333 Guadalupe Street 333 Guadalupe Street P.O. Box 149104 P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78701 Austin, TX 78701 Fax: (512)490-1007 Fax: (512)490-1007 Web: http://ww.tdi.texas.gov Web: http://ww.tdi.texas.gov E-mail: ConsumerProtectiontdi.texas.qov cr E-mail: ConsumerProtection(a�tdi.texas.gov 7. PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: DISPUTAS PREMIUM 0 DE RECLAMACION: Should you have a dispute concerning your Si tiene una disputa sobre su prima o sobre un reclamo, premium or about a claim you should contact the debe comunicarse primero con el (agente) (compania) (agent) (company) (agent or the company)first. If agente o la compania). Si la disputa no se resuelve, the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the puede comunicarse con el Departamento de Seguros de Texas Department of Insurance. Texas (TDI). 8. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: ADJUNTE ESTE AVISO A SU POLITICA: Este aviso es This notice is for information only and does not solo para informacibn y no se convierte en parte o become a part or condition of the attached condicion del documento adjunto. document. ;ev 10/10/2019 Page 1 of 1 The Guarantee Company of North America,USA 248 281 0281 I 1 866 328 0567 248 750 0431 One Towne Square,Suite 1470,Southfield,MI USA 48076 theguaranteeus.com I Excellence,Expertise,Expenence ..Every time CITY OFPEARLAND ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND Bond No. 70190854 Section 00612 ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF BRAZORIA § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That R&B Group, Inc. of the City of Houston , County of Harris , and State of Texas, as principal, and The Guarantee Company of North America USA authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner), in the penal sum of$ 768000 00 for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally, by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, effective as of the 4th day of may , 20 zo , (the "Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation City of Pearland, Texas COP PN: WW 1903 BID NO.: 0220-27 which Contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully correct all such work not in accordance with the Contract Documents discovered within the one-year period from the date of substantial completion, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder. 07/2006 00612- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 4th day of May 2020. Principal: Surety: R&B Group,Inc. The Guarani•: o + u• , f o h America USA B :/5TLY BY / a/14.c_: Title: Brian D.Mdrrison,CEO Title: Michele Bonnie,Attorney-In-Fact Address: Address: 1213 North Durham Drive 9977 W.Sam Houston Parkway North,Suite 130 Houston,TX 770008 Houston,TX 77064 Telephone: 713-862-5800 Telephone: 832-446-3350 Fax: Fax: NOTICE: THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL-FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 07/2006 00612-2 of 2 THE The Guarantee Company of North America USA GUARANTEE® Southfield, Michigan POWER OF ATTORNEY NOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: That THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA USA, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Michigan, having its principal office in Southfield,Michigan,does hereby constitute and appoint Edward Arens, Philip Baker,Michele Bonnin,Jillian O'Neal,Erica A.Cox, Rebecca Garza Technical Assurance, L.L.C. its true and lawful attorney(s)-in-fact to execute,seal and deliver for and on its behalf as surety,any and all bonds and undertakings,contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof,which are or may be allowed,required or permitted by law,statute,rule,regulation,contract or otherwise. The execution of such instrument(s)in pursuance of these presents,shall be as binding upon THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA USA as fully and amply,to all intents and purposes,as if the same had been duly executed and acknowledged by its regularly elected officers at the principal office. The Power of Attorney is executed and may be certified so, and may be revoked, pursuant to and by authority of Article IX, Section 9.03 of the By-Laws adopted by the Board of Directors of THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA USA at a meeting held on the 3151 day of December,2003. The President,or any Vice President, acting with any Secretary or Assistant Secretary,shall have power and authority: 1. To appoint Attorney(s)-in-fact, and to authorize them to execute on behalf of the Company, and attach the Seal of the Company thereto, bonds and undertakings,contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof; and 2. To revoke,at any time,any such Attorney-in-fact and revoke the authority given,except as provided below 3. In connection with obligations in favor of the Florida Department of Transportation only, it is agreed that the power and authority hereby given to the Attorney-in-Fact includes any and all consents for the release of retained percentages and/or final estimates on engineering and construction contracts required by the State of Florida Department of Transportation. It is fully understood that consenting to the State of Florida Department of Transportation making payment of the final estimate to the Contractor and/or its assignee,shall not relieve this surety company of any of its obligations under its bond. 4. In connection with obligations in favor of the Kentucky Department of Highways only, it is agreed that the power and authority hereby given to the Attorney-in-Fact cannot be modified or revoked unless prior written personal notice of such intent has been given to the Commissioner—Department of Highways of the Commonwealth of Kentucky at least thirty(30)days prior to the modification or revocation. urther,this Power of Attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile pursuant to resolution of the Board of Directors of the Company adopted at a meeting my called and held on the 6th day of December 2011,of which the following is a true excerpt: RESOLVED that the signature of any authorized officer and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or certification thereof authorizing the execution and delivery of any bond, undertaking, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and such signature and seal when so used shall have the same force and effect as though manually affixed. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA USA has caused this instrument to be signed and 'ITV{cot its corporate seal to be affixed by its authorized officer,this 1st day of March,2018. THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA USA f mai LaWitehdL STATE OF MICHIGAN Stephen C.Ruschak,President&Chief Operating Officer Randall Musselman,Secretary County of Oakland On this 1st day of March, 2018 before me came the individuals who executed the preceding instrument, to me personally known, and being by me duly sworn, said that each is the herein described and authorized officer of The Guarantee Company of North America USA; that the seal affixed to said instrument is the Corporate Seal of said Company;that the Corporate Seal and each signature were duly affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said Company. Cynthia A. Takai IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand at The Guarantee •:,•=r1744,:*- Public, State of Michigan Company of North America USA offices the day and year above written. • County of Oakland V My Commission Expires February 27,2024 —, a• Acting in Oakland County I,Randall Musselman, Secretary of THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA USA,do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney executed by THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA USA,which is still in full force and effect. /:3,NT"; IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have thereunto set my hand and attached the seal of said Company this 4th day of May , 2020 A�� I Randall Musselman,Secretary THE GUARANTEE' TEXAS CONSUMER NOTICE 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE AVISO IMPORTANTE To obtain information or make a complaint: Para obtener informacion o presentar una queja: 2. You may contact your agent at: Puede contactar a su agente en: 3. You may call The Guarantee Company of North Puede Hamar al nUmero de telofono gratuito de America USA's toll-free telephone number for The Guarantee Company of North America USA information or to make a complaint at: para obtener informacion o presenter una queja en: 1-866-328-0567 1-866-328-0567 4. You may also write to The Guarantee Company of Tambien puede escribir a The Guarantee Company of North America USA at: North America USA a; One Towne Square, Suite 1470 One Towne Square, Suite 1470 Southfield, Michigan 48076 Southfield, Michigan 48076 Web: www.theguaranteeus.com Web: www.theguaranteeus.com E-mail: Claims.US(c�thequarantee.com E-mail: Claims.US(a�thequarantee.com Fax: 248-750-0431 Fax: 248-750-0431 5. You may contact the Texas Department of Puede comunicarse con el Departamento de Seguros de Insurance to obtain information on companies. Texas para obtener informacion sobre companias, coverages, rights or complaints at: 1-800-252- coberturas, derechos o quejas en: 1-800-252-3439 3439 6. You may write the Texas Department of Puede escribir al Departamento de Seguros de Insurance: Texas: 333 Guadalupe Street 333 Guadalupe Street P.O. Box 149104 P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78701 Austin, TX 78701 Fax: (512) 490-1007 Fax: (512)490-1007 Web: http://ww.tdi.texas.gov Web: http://ww.tdi.texas.gov E-mail: ConsumerProtection(a�tdi.texas.gov E-mail: ConsumerProtection@tdi.texas.gov 7. PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: DISPUTAS PREMIUM 0 DE RECLAMACION: Should you have a dispute concerning your Si tiene una disputa sobre su prima o sobre un reclamo, premium or about a claim you should contact the debe comunicarse primero con el (agente) (compania) (agent) (company) (agent or the company) first. If agente o la compania). Si la disputa no se resuelve, the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the puede comunicarse con el Departamento de Seguros de Texas Department of Insurance. Texas (TDI). 8. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: ADJUNTE ESTE AVISO A SU POLITICA: Este aviso es This notice is for information only and does not solo para informacion y no se convierte en parte o become a part or condition of the attached condicion del documento adjunto. document. Iev 10/10/2019 Page 1 of 1 The Guarantee Company of North America,USA 248 281 0281 I 1 866 328 0567 248 750 0431 One Towne Square,Suite 1470,Southfield,MI USA 48076 theguaranteeus.com I Excellence,Expertise,Expenence . Every time CITY OF PEARLAND PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN Section 00615 PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN AND PAYMENT AFFIDAVIT The undersigned contracted with City of Pearland to furnish in connection with certain improvements to real property located in the City of Pearland, TX and owned by the City of Pearland which improvements are described as follows: In consideration of Pay Estimate No. in the amount of$ the undersigned, on oath, states that all persons and firms who supplied labor and materials to the undersigned in connection with said Project will be fully paid within 30 days of the date of this document by the undersigned for such work through In consideration of the payment herewith made,the undersigned does fully and finally release and hold harmless the City of Pearland and its surety, if any, through the above date from any and all claims, liens, or right to claim or lien, arising out of this Project under any applicable bond, law or statue. It is understood that this affidavit is submitted to induce payment of the above sum and for use by the City of Pearland in assuring the Owner and others that all liens and claims relating to the said Project furnished by the undersigned are paid. Signature Printed Name&Title Company Name State of County of Subscribed and sworn to, before me, this day of , 20 . My Commission Expires: Notary Public 5-12-12 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page No. 1.0 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1 1.01 Owner, Contractor and Engineer 1.02 Contract Documents 1.03 Subcontractor 1.04 Written Notice 1.05 Work 1.06 Extra Work 1.07 Work Day 1.07-1 Rain Day 1.07-2 Impact Day 1.08 Calendar Day 1.09 Substantially Completed 1.10 Interpretation of Words and Phrases 1.11 Referenced Standards 1.12 Contract Time 1.13 Construction Inspector 1.14 Balancing Change Order 2.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE OWNER 4 2.01 No Warranty of Design 2.02 Right of Entry 2.03 Ownership of Plans 10-2012 00700 - 1 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 2.04 Changes and Alterations 2.05 Damages 3.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ENGINEER 6 3.01 Owner-Engineer Relationship 3.02 Keeping of Plans and Specifications Accessible 3.03 Preliminary Approval 3.04 Inspection by Engineer 3.05 Determination of Questions and Disputes 3.06 Recommendation of Payment 4.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 8 4.01 Independent Contractor 4.02 Contractor's Understanding 4.03 Laws and Ordinances 4.04 Assignment and Subletting 4.05 Performance and Payment Bonds [and Maintenance Bond] 4.06 Insurance 4.07 Permits and Fees 4.08 Texas State Sales Tax 4.09 Contractor's Duty and Superintendence 4.10 Character of Workers 4.11 Labor, Equipment, Materials, Construction Plant and Buildings 4.12 Sanitation 4.13 Cleaning and Maintenance 4.14 Performance of Work 4.15 Right of Owner to Accelerate the Work 10-2012 00700- ii CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.16 Layout of Work 4.17 Shop Drawings 4.18 Engineer-Contractor Relationship; Observations 4.19 Observation and Testing 4.20 Defects and Their Remedies 4.21 Liability for Proper Performance 4.22 Protection Against Accident To Employees and the Public 4.23 Protection of Adjoining Property 4.24 Protection against Claims of Subcontractors, Laborers,Materialmen, and Furnishers of Equipment, Machinery and Supplies 4.25 Protection Against Royalties or Patented Invention 4.26 Indemnification 4.27 Losses From Natural Causes 4.28 Guarantee 5.0 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 18 5.01 Time and Order of Completion 5.02 Extension of Time 5.03 Hindrances and Delays 5.04 Suspension of Work 5.05 Liquidated Damages for Delay 5.06 Change of Contract Time 5.07 Delays Beyond Owner's and Contractor's Control 6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 21 6.01 Discrepancies and Omissions 6.02 Quantities and Measurements 10-2012 00700 -in CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.03 Estimated Quantities 6.04 Price of Work 6.05 Payments 6.06 Partial Payments 6.07 Use of Completed Portions &Punchlist 6.08 Substantial Completion 6.08-1 6.09 Final Payment 6.10 Correction of Work Before Final Payment 6.11 Correction of Work After Final Payment 6.12 Payments Withheld 6.13 Delayed Payments 7.0 EXTRA WORK AND CLAIMS 27 7.01 Differing Site Conditions 7.02 Change Orders 7.03 Change Orders 7.04 Request for Work Approval for Work on Non-Work Days 7.05 Minor Changes 7.06 Extra Work 7.07 Time of Filing Claims 8.0 DEFAULT 30 8.01 Default by Contractor 8.02 Supplementation of Contractor Forces 8.03 Cumulative Remedies & Specific Performance 8.04 Cross-Default 10-2012 00700-iv CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 8.05 Insolvency 8.06 Contingent Assignment 8.07 Waiver of Consequential Damages 8.08 Termination for Convenience 8.09 Default by Owner 9.0 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 35 ATTACHMENT NO. 1: WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE Al ATTACHMENT NO. 2: AGREEMENT FOR FINAL PAYMENT AND CONTRACTOR'S SWORN RELEASE B1 ATTACHMENT NO. 3: OWNER'S INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTOR Cl 10-2012 00700 -v CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 1.0 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1.01 OWNER, CONTRACTOR AND ENGINEER. The OWNER, the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER are those persons or organizations identified as such in the Agreement. The term ENGINEER as used in these General Conditions shall refer to the Engineer or Architect identified in the Agreement, as applicable, and means a person authorized to act as a representative of the entity designated by the OWNER to provide professional services required in connection with the preparation of plans and specifications of this Contract. The term CONSTRUCTION MANAGER as used in these General Conditions shall refer to the Construction Manager identified in the Agreement, as applicable, and means a person authorized to act as representative of the entity designated by the OWNER to provide professional services required in connection with the performance of the work of this Contract. The Owner's representative on the project site shall be the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER or ENGINEER as designated. 1.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents shall consist of all of the documents identified in Article 8 of the Standard Form of Agreement, which documents, excluding such documents as may be delivered or issued after the Effective Date of the Agreement, as referenced in Article 8, shall be bound together in a Project Manual for the Work. All references to the "Contract" or the "Agreement" in these General Conditions of Agreement shall include the Contract Documents. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be binding as if required by all. In the event of any conflict among the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall govern in the following order: (1) Modifications in writing and signed by both parties, including any Change Orders; (2) Standard Form of Agreement; (3) Special Conditions of Agreement; (4) General Conditions of Agreement, including Attachment No. 1 — Workers' Compensation Insurance Coverage, Attachment No. 2 — Agreement for Final Payment and CONTRACTOR'S Sworn Release, and Attachment No. 3 — Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor; (5) Addenda, if any; (6) Plans and Specifications referenced or included in the Project Manual; (7) Instructions to Bidders; (8) Bid Proposal; and 08-2018 00700- 1 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (9) Exhibits: The following Exhibits, if any, attached hereto, are incorporated herein, and are a part of this Contract: In the event a conflict or inconsistency remains between or within the Contract Documents, or the Contract Documents and applicable standards, codes and ordinances, CON IRACTOR shall provide the greater quantity or better quality, or CONTRACTOR shall comply with the more stringent requirements, as determined by ENGINEER. Terms or phrases used in the Contract Documents with a well-known technical or construction industry meaning shall have such recognized meanings. References to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the laws or regulations of any governmental authority, shall mean the latest in effect on the effective date of the Contract, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. 1 .03 SUBCONTRACTOR. The term "subcontractor", as employed herein, includes those entities having a contract with the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor for performance of work on the Project. OWNER shall have no responsibility to any subcontractor for performance of work on the Project contemplated by these Contract Documents, and any such subcontractor shall look exclusively to CONTRACTOR for any payments due subcontractor. 1.04 WRITTEN NOTICE. Written Notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person or by electronic means through the Pro-Trak to the individual or to a partner of the partnership or joint venture, or to an officer of the corporation or company for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by Certified Mail, Return Receipt Requested, to the last known business address or registered office of such individual,partnership,joint venture or corporation or company, or to the address for giving notices listed in the Standard Form of Agreement. 1.05 WORK. Unless otherwise stipulated, the CONTRACTOR shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, services, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities or services of any nature whatsoever necessary for the execution and completion of the Work described in the Standard Form of Agreement. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new, and both workmanship and materials shall be of good quality. The CONTRACTOR shall, if required by the ENGINEER as representative of the OWNER, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well-known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials shall be furnished in strict conformity with the Contract Documents. 1.06 EXTRA WORK. The term "Extra Work", as used in this Contract, shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the ENGINEER as representative of the OWNER, to be performed by the CONTRACTOR to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work shown in the plans. Extra work shall be authorized in writing by the ENGINEER prior to commencement. Extra Work items are paid for on an as needed, as authorized basis only. 1.07 WORK DAY: As used herein, a "Work Day" is defined as any Monday through Friday, not a legal holiday, and any Saturday or Sunday specifically approved by the OWNER, in which the CONTRACTOR can perform six or more hours of work per the current construction schedule. CONTRACTOR agrees to request specific approval from the Construction Manager or 08-2018 00700-2 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Owner, in advance, to perform work on Saturdays or Sundays and in so doing agrees to pay all charges and costs for Inspection and or Construction Management services required during the performance of any such approved work. Refer to paragraph 7.04 for procedure to determine cost for Construction Management and Inspection Services for work on non-work days. 1.07-1 RAIN DAY: As used herein, is defined as any WORK DAY during which weather related conditions prevent the CONTRACTOR from performing four (4) or more consecutive hours of work on critical path items as identified in the current construction schedule. CONTRACTOR shall record Rain Days on the Pay Application each month for the review and possible approval by the OWNER. The approved Rain Day is then added to the Contract Time. (See 1.12 Contract Time below) 1.07-2 IMPACT DAY: As used herein, is a day that is added to the CONTRACT TIME by the OWNER by Change Order to extend the Contract Time by one full Work Day. (See 1.12 Contract Time below) Impact Days, once approved by the OWNER, shall extend the Contract Time on a one-to-one basis to replace a Work Day lost to conditions that prevented the CONTRACTOR from performing four (4) or more consecutive hours of work on critical path items. Impact Days are added to the Contract Time by Change Order only at the end of the work and then only if, in the opinion of the OWNER, a time extension is warranted due to delays beyond the control of the Contractor and required to complete the work within the Contract Time. 1.08 CALENDAR DAY. A "calendar day" is any day of the week, month or year no days being excepted. Unless otherwise expressly provided, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). 1 .09 SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED: The terms "Substantially Completed", or "Substantially Complete" or"Substantial Completion" as used in this Contract, shall mean that all major process components of the facility or work have been made suitable for use or occupancy, including appropriate documentation from the equipment suppliers that all of the individual components have been installed in accordance with the specifications and manufacturer's recommendations, the installations have been approved by the ENGINEER and the items have met the start-up and testing requirements of the contract documents or is deemed to be in a condition to serve its intended purpose or requires only minor miscellaneous work and adjustment to achieve Final Completion and Acceptance as determined by the ENGINEER. Upon compliance with the above referenced criteria, ENGINEER shall issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion. PARTIAL SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: designation will be given on components of the Work that must be placed into service prior to the completion of the entire Work. The contractor's One Year Warranty period for these items shall begin on the date of Partial Substantial Completion as designated by the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER shall determine and make all such designations. 1.10 INTERPRETATION OF WORDS AND PHRASES. Whenever the words "directed", "permitted", "designated", "required", "ordered", "considered necessary", "prescribed" or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement,permission, order, opinion designation or prescription of the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative is intended. Similarly, the words "approved", "acceptable", "satisfactory" or words of like import shall mean that no exception is taken by ENGINEER, but does not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents. 08-2018 00700-3 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Whenever in the Specifications or Plans of the Contract Documents, the terms of description of various qualities relative to finish, workmanship or other qualities of similar kind which cannot, from their nature, be specifically and clearly described and specified, but are necessarily described in general terms, the fulfillment of which must depend on individual judgment, then, in all such cases, any question of the fulfillment of said Specifications shall be decided by the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative, and said work shall be done in accordance with his interpretations of the meaning of the words, terms or clauses defining the character of the work. 1.11 REFERENCED STANDARDS. No provision of any referenced standard specification, or manual shall be effective to change the duties and responsibilities of the Owner, Engineer, Contractor, or their consultants, employees, or representatives from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to the Engineer or its consultants, employees, or representatives any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibilities contrary to provisions of the Contract Documents. 1.12 CONTRACT TIME The term Contract Time as used herein, refers to the number of Calendar days provided to complete the work or the date, stated in the Agreement: (i)to achieve Substantial Completion, and (ii) to complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by ENGINEER's written recommendation of final payment in accordance with Paragraph 6.09 and as modified as a result of any authorized Extensions. The established Contract Time includes 40 Rain Days per year, based on the average number of rain days per year for the period of June 1898 to December 1996 as recorded by the Alvin Weather Center Record. The Contract Time shall only be extended by (a) the addition of Rain Days equal to the number of actual Rain Days in excess of 40 days per year and (b) the number of Impact Days granted for delays, in the opinion of the Owner, beyond the control of the Contractor. The extension of the Contract Time shall be the CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for delays. 1.13 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTOR The term "Construction Inspector" here in includes those professionals engaged by the OWNER to ensure CONTRACT work's compliance with the specifications and any applicable statutory requirements. 1.14 BALANCING CHANGE ORDER is a change order executed during the close-out process that may add/remove pay items, or adjust quantities of existing items or remove unused pay items or quantities Balancing Change Orders are used to reconcile the unit cost of the work performed or installed by the Contractor. 2.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE OWNER 2.01 NO WARRANTY OF DESIGN. It is understood that the OWNER MAKES NO WARRANTY OF THE ADEQUACY, ACCURACY OR SUFFICIENCY OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS OR ANY OTHER DESIGN DOCUMENTS, AND OWNER HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY SUCH WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. Prior to commencing each portion of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the relevant Contract Documents, shall observe conditions at the site affecting the Work, and shall take field measurements of existing conditions related to the Work. Any errors, omissions or 08-2018 00700-4 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT inconsistencies in the Contract Documents noted by the CONTRACTOR, and/or any variance between the Contract Documents and applicable codes, standards or ordinances, shall be promptly reported by CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER in writing as a Request for Information. Work performed prior to a Request for Information shall be at the Contractor's risk. If CONTRACTOR fails to perform its obligations under this paragraph, CON TRACTOR shall pay such costs and damages to OWNER as would have been avoided if CONTRACTOR had reported any errors, omissions, inconsistencies or variances in the Contract Documents noted by CONTRACTOR or which should have been noted by a careful study of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall comply with the Contract Documents, all approved modifications thereof and additions and alterations thereto approved in writing by the OWNER. The burden of proof of such compliance shall be upon the CONTRACTOR to show that he has complied with the requirements of the Contract Documents and approved modifications thereof and all approved additions and alterations,thereto, as the same shall have been interpreted by the ENGINEER. 2.02 RIGHT OF ENTRY. The OWNER reserves the right to enter the property or location on which the work herein contracted for is to be performed, constructed or installed, for itself or such agent or agents as it may select, for the purpose of inspecting the work, or for the purpose of performing, constructing or installing such collateral work as the OWNER may desire. The OWNER shall have the right to make inspections at all reasonable times, and the CONTRACTOR hereby waives any claims for extension of time and/or compensation for any loss or damage if his work shall be delayed by reason of such inspection, performance, construction or installation of collateral work. 2.03 OWNERSHIP OF PLANS. All plans, specifications and copies thereof furnished by the OWNER shall not be reused on other work and, with the exception of the sets forming the part of the signed Contract Documents, are to be returned to the OWNER on request at the completion of the Work. All plans and models are the property of the OWNER. 2.04 CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations, additions and deletions as the OWNER may see fit, in the Work, including but not limited to changes in line, grade, form, dimensions, plans or specifications for the Work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of construction, without affecting the validity of this Contract and the corresponding Performance and Payment Bonds. If such changes or alterations or deletions diminish the quantity or the value of the Work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for compensation or damages, including lost or anticipated profits on the Work that may be affected. If the amount of Work is increased and the work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid for according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price, if any, established for such work under this Contract, otherwise, such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Article 7 hereof for Extra Work. In case the OWNER shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any Work already done or material already furnished or used in said Work,then the OWNER shall compensate the CONTRACTOR for any material or labor so used and for any actual loss occasioned by such change due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the Work as originally planned. 2.05 DAMAGES. In the event the OWNER is damaged in the course of the work by the act, negligence, omission, mistake or default of the CONTRACTOR, or should the 08-2018 00700-5 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CONTRACTOR unreasonably delay the progress of the work being done by others on the job so as to cause loss for which the OWNER becomes liable, then the CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for such loss. 3.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ENGINEER 3.01 OWNER-ENGINEER RELATIONSHIP. The ENGINEER shall serve as the OWNER'S representative during construction. The duties, responsibilities and limitations on the authority of the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents; and the ENGINEER shall not have authority to extend the OWNER's liability or to bind the OWNER for any additional liability of any nature whatsoever without the written consent of the OWNER. Any communications by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR regarding the Work shall be issued through the ENGINEER. It is the intent of this Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the Work; therefore, written decisions or directions rendered by the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising therefrom shall be resolved as provided in Article 7. Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the OWNER'S representative shall have the authority to issue written stop work orders whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE. The ENGINEER shall furnish the CONTRACTOR with four(4) copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to the CONTRACTOR, and the CONTRACTOR shall keep one full size copy of the same constantly accessible on the job site, with the latest revisions noted thereon. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for preserving the Plans and Specifications, timely and accurately updated, for reference and review by the OWNER or the ENGINEER and submittal of redlines during closeout. 3.03 PRELIMINARY APPROVAL. The ENGINEER shall not have the power to waive the obligations imposed under this Contract for the furnishing by the CONTRACTOR of new material of good quality, and for good and workmanlike performance of the Work as herein described, and in full accordance with the Contract Documents, without alteration, deletion or change. No failure or omission of the OWNER'S representative to discover, object to or condemn any non-conforming or defective work or material, or to stop work, shall release the CONTRACTOR from the obligation to fully and properly perform the Contract, including without limitation, the obligation to at once remove and properly replace any defective work or material at any time prior to final acceptance, upon discovery of such non-conforming or defective work or material. Any questioned Work may be ordered taken up or removed for inspection by the ENGINEER prior to final acceptance, and if found not to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, all expense of removing, inspection and repair or replacement shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR; otherwise the expense thus incurred shall be allowed as Extra Work and shall be paid for by the OWNER, provided that where inspection or approval is specifically required by the Specifications prior to performance of certain work, should the CONTRACTOR proceed with such work without requesting prior inspection or approval, he shall bear all expense of taking up, removing and replacing this work if so directed by the ENGINEER. 08-2018 00700-6 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 3.04 INSPECTION BY ENGINEER. The ENGINEER will make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress and quality of the executed Work and to determine if such Work generally meets the essential performance and design features and the technical, functional /or engineering requirements of the Contract Documents, and is in all other respects being performed in compliance with the Contract Documents. However, the ENGINEER shall not be responsible for making any detailed, exhaustive, comprehensive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality and/or quantity of the work, nor shall the ENGINEER be in any way responsible, directly or indirectly, for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, quality, procedures, programs, safety precautions or lack of same incident to the Work being performed or any part thereof. The ENGINEER shall use reasonable care to prevent deviation from the intent and substance of the Contract Documents by the CONTRACTOR in the performance of the Work and any part thereof and, on the basis of such on-site observations, will keep the OWNER informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the OWNER against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the CONTRACTOR. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement or any other Contract Document, the ENGINEER shall not be in any way responsible or liable for any acts, errors, omissions or negligence of the CONTRACTOR, any subcontractors, agents, servants or employees or any other person, firm or corporation performing or attempting to perform any of the Work. 3.05 DETERMINATION OF QUESTIONS AND DISPUTES. In order to prevent delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is agreed that the ENGINEER shall, in all cases, determine the quantities and qualities of the several kinds of Work, which are to be paid for under this Contract. The ENGINEER shall address all questions in relation to said Work and the construction thereof, as well as all claims, disputes and other matters in question between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER relating to the execution or progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents. In the event the ENGINEER shall become aware of or shall receive information that there is a dispute or a possible dispute as to the reasonable interpretation of the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, or any other dispute or question, the ENGINEER shall, within a reasonable time, provide a written interpretation of the Contract Documents or a written decision on all questions arising relative to the execution of the Work, copies of which shall be delivered to all parties to the Contract. If the CONTRACTOR or OWNER desires to take exception to any directions, order, interpretation or instructions of the ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR or OWNER shall present any such claim to the ENGINEER in accordance with the provisions of Section 7.07. 3.06 RECOMMENDATION OF PAYMENT. The ENGINEER shall review the CONTRACTOR's application for payment and supporting documents, shall determine the amount owed to the CONTRACTOR and shall provide written recommendation to the OWNER for payment to the CONTRACTOR in such amount. Such recommendation of payment to CONTRACTOR shall constitute a representation to the OWNER of the ENGINEER's judgment that the work has progressed to the point indicated, to the best of his knowledge, information and belief; however, such recommendation of an application for payment to CONTRACTOR shall not be deemed an acceptance of any defective or non-conforming Work. Any recommendation of payment by the ENGINEER shall be subject to OWNER's rights to withhold payment under Section 6.12 and as otherwise provided in the Contract. 08-2018 00700 - 7 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 4.01 INDEPENDENT CON TRACTOR. CONTRACTOR is, and shall remain, an independent contractor, solely responsible for the manner and method of completing the Work under this Contract, with full and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise and control his own employees and to determine the means, method and manner of performing such Work, so long as such methods comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and do not adversely affect the completed improvements or any other property abutting or adjoining the Work area, the OWNER and ENGINEER being interested only in the result obtained and conformity of such completed improvements to the Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents. The fact that the OWNER or ENGINEER as the Owner's representative shall have the right to observe CONTRACTOR's work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the OWNER and the ENGINEER hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or affect the status of the CONTRACTOR as an independent contractor with respect to either the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative or to the CONTRACTOR's own employees or to any other person, firm or corporation. 4.02 CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING. It is understood and agreed that the CONTRACTOR has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the Work, the conformation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the Work, the general and local conditions, including but not limited to weather, access, lay down and storage areas, and all other matters which in any way affect the Work under this Contract. It is further understood that the CONTRACTOR has satisfied himself as to the terms, meaning, intent and requirements of all of the Contract Documents, and applicable laws, codes, regulations and ordinances. CONTRACTOR hereby warrants and represents that it has taken into consideration all of the foregoing factors, and CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work for the Contract Price and within the Contract Time. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of the OWNER or the ENGINEER, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 4.03 LAWS AND ORDINANCES. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state or local laws, codes, ordinances, permits and regulations, regardless of whether the same are adopted before or after the execution of this Contract, which in any manner affect the Contract or the work, and shall indemnify, save and hold harmless the OWNER and the ENGINEER against any claim arising out of the violation of any such laws, ordinances and regulations, whether by the CONTRACTOR or his agents, employees, subcontractors or vendors. If the CONTRACTOR observes that the Plans and Specifications are at variance with federal or state laws or codes or the ordinances or regulations of the City, he shall promptly notify the ENGINEER in writing, and any necessary changes shall be made as provided in the Contract for changes in the work. If the CON TRACTOR performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, codes, ordinances, rules or regulations, or if CONTRACTOR reasonably should have known of any such violation, and without such notice to the ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The OWNER is a Political Subdivision of the State of Texas, and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the OWNER may enter into contracts, shall be controlling and shall be considered as part of this Contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. Neither the act 08-2018 00700-8 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT of OWNER entering into this Contract, nor OWNER's performance hereunder, shall constitute a waiver of any immunity from suit enjoyed by OWNER under applicable law, all such rights and defenses being hereby expressly reserved, notwithstanding any term or provision herein to the contrary. The Code of Ordinances and other applicable regulations of the OWNER shall be deemed to be embodied in this Contract. The prevailing wage rates applicable to this Project shall be either Document 00811 — Wage Scale for Engineering Construction, or Document 00813 — Wage Scale for Building Construction, or both, as set out in the Project Manual. 4.04 ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this Contract and that he will not assign, by power of attorney or otherwise, or sublet said Contract, or any rights, duties or obligations arising thereunder, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of the OWNER, and that no part or feature of the Work will be sublet to anyone objectionable to the ENGINEER or the OWNER. In addition, the OWNER reserves the right to disapprove the subletting of this Contract or any portion hereof on any basis whatsoever. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the subletting of any portion or feature of the Work or materials required in the performance of this Contract shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from his obligations to the OWNER, as provided for by this Agreement. 4.05 PERFORMANCE, PAYMENT AND MAINTENANCE BONDS. In the event the Contract Price shall be in excess of $25,000.00, the CONTRACTOR shall execute separate Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds, each in the sum of one hundred percent(100%) of the Contract Price, and each in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code. If the Contract Price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statutory bonds will not be required. All required Bonds shall be payable to OWNER and on forms approved by the OWNER, and shall be executed by a corporate surety in accordance with Article 7.19-1 of the Texas Insurance Code. It is agreed that the Contract shall not be in effect until such original Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds are delivered to and approved by the OWNER. The cost of the premium for the Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds, should Maintenance Bonds be required, shall be included in the CONTRACTOR's Bid Proposal. All bonds shall be issued by Texas Department of Insurance approved surety companies. 4.06 INSURANCE. The CONTRACTOR, at his own expense, shall procure, maintain and keep in force throughout the duration of the Work, and throughout the Guarantee Period, insurance as specified in Attachment No. 1 hereto with regard to Workers' Compensation Insurance, and as specified in Attachment No. 3 hereto with regard to all other Insurance. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this Contract, whether performed by the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor, or others for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. 4.07 PERMITS AND FEES. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, licenses, and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, and which are legally required at the time bids are received. Permits required by the City of Pearland will be issued as a NO FEE permit. 4.08 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX. Materials incorporated into this project are exempt from State Sales according to provisions of the Texas Tax Code, Chapter 151, Subsection H. 08-2018 00700-9 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit or exemption certificate which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the Work without paying tax at due time of purchase. 4.09 CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE. The CONTRACTOR shall give adequate attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this Contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the ENGINEER as the OWNER'S representative. The superintendent shall represent the CONTRACTOR in his absence and shall act as the agent of the CONTRACTOR, and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the CONTRACTOR. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the CONTRACTOR is essential to the proper performance of the Work, and lack of such supervision shall be an act of default, and grounds for suspending operations of the CONTRACTOR. The Superintendent cannot be removed from the project without the consent of the Owner; the Superintendent must speak and understand the English language; the Superintendent must be on site when any work on the project is being done, even when a subcontractor is performing the work. The Work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the CONTRACTOR, and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. Neither the OWNER nor the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative will be responsible for the acts or omissions of the CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors or any of its agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the Work. 4.10 CHARACTER OF WORKERS. The CON TRACTOR agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance of the type of work required under this Contract, to do the Work, and agrees that whenever the ENGINEER shall inform him in writing that any worker or workers on the Work are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful or disorderly, or in the ENGINEER's opinion, are not using their best efforts for the progress of the Work, such worker or workers shall be discharged from the Work and shall not again be employed on the Work without the ENGINEER's written consent. OWNER reserves the right to bar any person, subcontractor, or supplier found to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or not using their best efforts to progress work or considered to be a threat to the health, safety and welfare to the project or workforce. 4.11 LABOR, EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, CONSTRUCTION PLANT, AND BUILDINGS. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, services, tools, equipment, machinery, supplies, facilities, utilities and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this Contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that the OWNER shall furnish same; and further, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, all means of construction and any and all parts of the Work, whether the CONTRACTOR has been paid, partially paid or not paid for such Work, until the entire Work is completed and accepted. The building or placement of structures for housing workers or offices, or the erection of tents or other forms of protection, will be permitted only with the ENGINEER's written permission, and at 08-2018 00700- 10 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT such places as the ENGINEER shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structures shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER. Any structures of any nature constructed, placed or erected by the CONTRACTOR for the purposes herein set out, shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR as to the proper erection, placement or construction thereof; and the CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify and hold the ENGINEER or OWNER harmless from any claims of any nature whatsoever brought against either of them for damages allegedly sustained by anyone by reason of the erection, placement, construction or maintenance of CONTRACTOR's buildings or structures. 4.12 SANITATION. Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers and others on the Work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the CONTRACTOR in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the ENGINEER, and their use shall be strictly enforced. Any structures of any nature constructed or erected by the CONTRACTOR for the purposes herein set out, shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR as to the proper erection or construction thereof, and the CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify and hold the ENGINEER and OWNER harmless from any claims of any nature whatsoever brought against either of them for damages allegedly sustained by anyone by reason of the erection, construction or maintenance of CONTRACTOR's buildings. 4.13 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times keep and maintain the premises free from accumulation of debris, trash and waste. The CON TRACTOR shall remove waste, debris and trash at the end of each work day. CONTRACTOR shall remove all such debris, trash and waste, tools, scaffolding and surplus materials, and shall leave the Work broom-clean or its equivalent, upon completion of the Work. The Work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute, the OWNER may remove the debris,trash, waste and surplus materials, and charge the cost to the CONTRACTOR. 4.14 PERFORMANCE OF WORK. It is further agreed that it is the intent of this Contract that all Work must be done and all material must be furnished in accordance with the generally accepted practice for such materials furnished or work completed, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.15 RIGHT OF OWNER TO ACCELERATE THE WORK. If at any time the methods or equipment used by the CONTRACTOR, or the work force supplied are found to be inadequate to achieve the progress required to Substantially Complete the Work within the Contract Time, the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative, may order the CONTRACTOR in writing to supplement its forces and/or equipment, or work shifts or overtime, or otherwise improve its efficiency and rate of progress to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within the Contract Time, and the CONTRACTOR shall comply with such order, at its own cost and expense. 4.16 LAYOUT OF WORK. Except as specifically provided herein, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out work by means of construction surveying and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER and in conformance with the Contract Documents. 4.17 SHOP DRAWINGS. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own Work or in that of any other contractor, six (6) checked copies, unless otherwise specified, of all shop and/or setting drawings and schedules 08-2018 00700- 11 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT required for the work of the various trades. Contractor will check and approve shop drawings for compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and will so certify by stamp on each drawing prior to submittal to ENGINEER. Any drawings submitted without Contractor's stamp of approval will not be considered and will be returned to him for proper submission. The ENGINEER shall pass upon them with reasonable promptness, indicating desired corrections. The CONTRACTOR shall make any corrections required by the ENGINEER, file with him two (2) corrected copies and furnish such other copies as may be needed. The ENGINEER's approval of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from responsibility for deviations from the Contract Documents, unless he has, in writing, called the ENGINEER's attention to such deviations at the time of the submission, and the ENGINEER has acknowledged and accepted such deviations in writing, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to fully and completely review all shop drawings to ascertain their effect on his ability to perform the required Contract Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, and within the Contract Time. Such review by the ENGINEER shall be for the sole purpose of determining the apparent sufficiency of said drawings or schedules to result in finished improvements in conformity with the Contract Documents, and shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his duty as an independent contractor as previously set forth, it being expressly understood and agreed that the ENGINEER does not assume any duty to pass upon the propriety or adequacy of such drawings or schedules, or any means or methods reflected thereby, in relation to the safety of either person or property during CONTRACTOR's performance hereunder, and any action taken by the ENGINEER shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his responsibility and liability to comply with the Contract Documents. OWNER, CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR shall make all submittals, review comments, notes, corrections, schedules and updates, testing results, payment applications, instructions and other communications by means of the OWNER'S Pro-Trak. The OWNER, ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR shall each retain such hard copies form this system as are required for their specific record keeping requirements. No documents shall be removed from this system or destroyed except those being replaced by the systems protocols as a latest version document. All requirements for written communications, submittals, comments, instructions or other documents processed by means of this system shall have the same legal or time sensitive status as if they had been hand delivered in hard copy to their intended addressee. 4.18 ENGINEER-CONTRACTOR RELATIONSHIP; OBSERVATIONS. It is agreed by the CONTRACTOR that the ENGINEER, as the OWNER's representative, shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint such subordinate engineers, representatives or observers as the said ENGINEER may from time to time deem proper to observe the materials furnished and the Work done under this Agreement. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, representatives or observers for the proper observation and examination of the work. The CONTRACTOR shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, representatives or observers so appointed, when sucl directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and the Contract Documents, provided, however, should the CONTRACTOR object to any orders by any 08-2018 00700- 12 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT subordinate engineer, representative or observer, the CONTRACTOR may, within three (3) days, make written appeal to the ENGINEER for his decision. 4.19 OBSERVATION AND TESTING. The OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe, inspect and test the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation, inspection and testing at any location wherever Work is in preparation or progress. The CONTRACTOR shall ascertain the scope of any observation, inspection or testing which may be contemplated by the OWNER or the ENGINEER and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the Work will be ready for such observation, inspection or testing. The OWNER or the ENGINEER may reject any Work found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such deficiencies, and regardless of whether the ENGINEER has previously accepted the Work through oversight or otherwise. If any Work is covered without approval or consent of the OWNER, it must, if requested by the OWNER or the ENGINEER, be uncovered for examination, at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. In the event that any part of the Work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for the OWNER or the ENGINEER to make observations of such Work or require testing of said Work, then in such event, the OWNER or the ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish the OWNER or the ENGINEER with certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by independent persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the Contract Documents. If any Work, which is required to be inspected, tested or approved, is covered up without written approval or consent of the OWNER or the ENGINEER, it must, if requested by the OWNER or the ENGINEER, be uncovered for observation and testing, at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR unless otherwise provided herein. Any Work which fails to meet the requirements of such tests, inspections or approval, and any Work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be considered defective. Such defective Work and any other work affected thereby shall be corrected at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. Neither observations by the OWNER or by the ENGINEER, nor inspections, certifications, tests or approvals made by the OWNER, the ENGINEER or other persons authorized under this Agreement to make such inspections, tests or approvals, shall relieve the CONTRACTOR from his obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.20 DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES. It is further agreed that if the Work or any part thereof or any material brought on the site of the Work for use in the Work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the ENGINEER as unsuitable or not in conformity with the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the ENGINEER, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such Work so that it shall be in full accordance with this Contract, It is further agreed that any such remedial action contemplated herein shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense. 08-2018 00700- 13 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.21 LIABILITY FOR PROPER PERFORMANCE. Engineering construction drawings and specifications, as well as any additional instructions and information concerning the Work to be performed, passing from or through the ENGINEER, shall not be interpreted as requiring or allowing the CONTRACTOR to deviate from the Contract Documents, the intent of such drawings, specifications and any other such instructions being to define with particularity the agreement of the parties as to Work the CONTRACTOR is to perform. CONTRACTOR shall be fully and completely liable and contractually bound, at his own expense, for design, construction, installation and use or non-use of all items and methods incident to the performance of the Contract, including, without limitation, the adequacy of all temporary supports, shoring, bracing, scaffolding, machinery or equipment, safety precautions or devices, similar items or devices used by him during construction, and work performed either directly or incident to construction, and for all loss, damage or injury incident thereto, either to person or property, whether such damage be suffered by the ENGINEER, the OWNER or any other person not a party to this Contract. Any review of Work in progress or any visit or observation during construction, or any clarification of Contract Documents by the ENGINEER or OWNER, or any agent, employee or representative of either of them, whether through personal observation on the Project site or by means of approval of shop drawings for construction or construction processes, or by other means or methods, is agreed by the CONTRACTOR to be for the purpose of observing the extent and nature of Work completed or being performed, as measured against the Contract Documents, or for the purpose of enabling the CONTRACTOR to more fully understand the Contract Documents so that the completed construction Work will conform thereto, and shall in no way relieve the CONTRACTOR from full and complete responsibility for proper performance of his Work on the Project, including, without limitation, the propriety of means and methods of the CONTRACTOR in performing said Contract, and the adequacy of any designs, plans or other facilities for accomplishing such performance. Any action by the ENGINEER or the OWNER in visiting or observing during construction, or any clarification of Contract Documents shall not constitute a waiver of CONTRACTOR'S liability for damages as herein set out. Deviation by the CONTRACTOR from Contract Documents, whether called to the CONTRACTOR's attention or not, shall in no way relieve CONTRACTOR from his responsibility to complete all work in accordance with said Contract Documents, and further shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of his liability for loss, damage or injury as herein set out. 4.22 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the safety of himself, his employees and persons entering the project site, as well as for the protection of the improvements being erected and the property of himself or any other person, as a result of his operations hereunder. The CONTRACTOR shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times exercise reasonable precautions for the safety of employees and others on or near the Work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded, as a minimum, in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of the Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary machinery guards, safe walkways, ladders, bridges, gangplanks, barricades, fences, traffic control, warning signs and other safety devices. 08-2018 00700- 14 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT No alcoholic beverages, non-prescription drugs, or unsafe practices shall be allowed on the Work site. CONTRACTOR shall dismiss anyone participating in any of the above from the Work site for the duration of the Project. Only prescription drug uses with a doctor's authorization to perform construction activities shall be allowed on the Work site. Violation of this provision is a default under the Contract. The use, possession, sale, transfer, purchase or being under the influence of alcohol, drugs or any other illegal or unlawful substance by CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR's employees, or CONTRACTOR's subcontractors and employees at any time at the Work site or while on company business is prohibited. CONTRACTOR shall institute and enforce appropriate drug testing guidelines and program. All accidents or injuries to CONTRACTOR's employees working on the job site must be reported verbally and in writing to the ENGINEER immediately, and within no more than eight(8)hours. The safety precautions actually taken and their adequacy shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR, in his sole discretion as an independent contractor. Inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative concerning omissions under thus paragraph as the Work progresses, are intended as reminders to the CONTRACTOR of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty by ENGINEER, or OWNER's representative to supervise safety precautions by either the CONTRACTOR or any of his subcontractors. 4.23 PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY. The CONTRACTOR shall employ proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which might be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this Agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent or adjoining property. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES TO INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, SAVE AND HOLD HARMLESS THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, OWNER AND ENGINEER AGAINST ANY CLAIM OR CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, LOSS, COSTS OR EXPENSES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ATTORNEY'S FEES, DUE TO ANY INJURY TO ANY ADJACENT OR ADJOINING PROPERTY, ARISING OR GROWING OUT OF THE PERFORMANCE OF THE CONTRACT, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT SUCH DAMAGE, LOSS, COST OR EXPENSE IS CAUSED IN PART BY THE NEGLIGENCE, GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY OF OWNER AND/OR ENGINEER. 4.24 PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES THAT HE WILL PROMPTLY PAY WHEN DUE, AND WILL INDEMNIFY, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER HARMLESS FROM ALL CLAIMS GROWING OUT OF THE DEMANDS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, WORKERS, MECHANICS, MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY AND PARTS THEREOF, EQUIPMENT, POWER TOOLS AND ALL SUPPLIES, INCLUDING COMMISSARY, INCURRED IN THE FURTHERANCE OF THE PERFORMANCE OF THIS CONTRACT. When so desired by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If the CONTRACTOR fails to do so, then the OWNER may, at the option of the OWNER, either pay directly any unpaid bills of which the OWNER has written notice, or withhold from the CONTRACTOR's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably 08-2018 00700- 15 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT sufficient to liquidate any and all such claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payments to the CONTRACTOR shall be resumed in full, in accordance with the terms of this Contract. Any and all communications between any parties under this paragraph shall be in writing. Nothing contained in this paragraph or this Agreement shall create, establish or impose any relationship, contractual or otherwise,between OWNER and any subcontractor, laborer or supplier of CONTRACTOR, nor shall it create, establish or impose any duty upon OWNER to pay or to see to the payment of any subcontractor, laborer or supplier of CONTRACTOR. 4.25 PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENTED INVENTION. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright, by suitable legal agreement with the patentee or owner thereof THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DEFEND ALL SUITS OR CLAIMS FOR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT OR COPYRIGHT AND SHALL INDEMNIFY, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER HARMLESS FROM ANY LOSS OR LIABILITY ON ACCOUNT THEREOF, EXCEPT SUCH SUITS AND CLAIMS ARISING OUT OF A PARTICULAR DESIGN, DEVICE, MATERIAL OR PROCESS OR THE PRODUCT OF A PARTICULAR MANUFACTURER OR MANUFACTURERS SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED BY THE OWNER; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, IF CHOICE OF ALTERNATE DESIGN, DEVICE, MATERIAL OR PROCESS IS ALLOWED TO THE CONTRACTOR, OR IF CONTRACTOR KNEW OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE PATENT OR COPYRIGHT AND FAILED TO PROMPTLY NOTIFY OWNER IN WRITING, THEN THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER HARMLESS FROM ANY LOSS OR LIABILITY ON ACCOUNT THEREOF. 4.26 INDEMNIFICATION. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES TO DEFEND, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD THE ENGINEER AND THE OWNER HARMLESS FROM ANY CLAIMS OR DEMANDS OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER MADE BY ANY EMPLOYEE, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS OR SUBCONTRACTORS OF CONTRACTOR, OR BY ANY UNION, TRADE ASSOCIATION, WORKER'S ASSOCIATION OR OTHER GROUPS, ASSOCIATIONS OR INDIVIDUALS, ALLEGEDLY REPRESENTING EMPLOYEES OF THE CONTRACTOR, IN ANY DISPUTE BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS EMPLOYEES, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY INVOLVING, GROWING OUT OF OR ARISING FROM CLAIMS BY SUCH EMPLOYEES FOR WAGES, SALARY, COMPENSATION, BENEFITS, WORKING CONDITIONS OR ANY OTHER SIMILAR COMPLAINT OR CLAIM WHICH MAY BE MADE. THE CONTRACTOR, HIS SURETIES AND INSURANCE CARRIERS SHALL DEFEND, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER AND THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS, REPRESENTATIVES, AGENTS AND EMPLOYEES FROM AND AGAINST ALL DAMAGES, CLAIMS, LOSSES, DEMANDS, SUITS, LIABILITIES, JUDGMENTS AND COSTS OF ANY CHARACTER WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEY'S FEES AND EXPENSES, AND SHALL BE REQUIRED TO PAY ANY JUDGMENT THEREFOR, WITH COSTS, WHICH MAY BE OBTAINED AGAINST THE OWNER AND/OR THE ENGINEER OR ANY OF THEIR OFFICERS, REPRESENTATIVES, AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES, ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM OR ALLEGEDLY ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM THE PERFORMANCE 08-2018 00700- 16 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT OF THE WORK, PROVIDED THAT ANY SUCH DAMAGES, CLAIM, LOSS, DEMAND, SUIT, LIABILITY, JUDGMENT, COST OR EXPENSE: (A) ARISES OUT OF OR RESULTS FROM IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR ALLEGEDLY ARISES OUT OF OR RESULTS FROM IN WHOLE OR IN PART, ANY BREACH OF THIS AGREEMENT OR BREACH OF WARRANTY BY CONTRACTOR; OR (B) IS ATTRIBUTABLE TO BODILY INJURY, SICKNESS, DISEASE OR DEATH OR INJURY TO OR DESTRUCTION OF TANGIBLE PROPERTY, INCLUDING THE LOSS OF USE RESULTING THEREFROM; AND IS CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART OR IS ALLEGEDLY CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART BY ANY NEGLIGENT ACT OR OMISSION OF THE CONTRACTOR, ANY SUBCONTRACTOR, THEIR AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES OR ANYONE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY EMPLOYED BY ANY ONE OF THEM OR ANYONE FOR WHOSE ACTS ANY OF THEM MAY BE LIABLE, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT IT IS CAUSED IN PART OR ALLEGEDLY CAUSED IN PART BY THE NEGLIGENCE, GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY OF OWNER, ENGINEER AND/OR A PARTY INDEMNIFIED HEREUNDER. Notwithstanding the foregoing or anything in the Agreement to the contrary, in accordance with the provisions of Section 130.002 of the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code, CONTRACTOR shall not be obligated to indemnify or hold harmless the ENGINEER, his agents, servants or employees, from liability for damage that is caused by or results from defects in plans, designs or specifications prepared, approved or used by the ENGINEER, or negligence of the ENGINEER in the rendition or conduct of professional duties called for or arising out of any construction contract and the plans, designs or specifications that are a part of the construction contract, and arises from personal injury or death, property injury, or any other expense that arises from personal injury, death, or property injury. This indemnity agreement is a continuing obligation, and shall survive notwithstanding completion of the Work, Final Payment, expiration of the warranty period, termination of the Contract, and abandonment or takeover of the Work. CONTRACTOR's indemnification obligations hereunder shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts, and shall not be limited by any limitation on amounts or coverage of insurance provided or to be provided under this Contract. 4.27 LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES. All loss, cost, expense or damage to the CONTRACTOR arising out of the nature of the Work to be done or from any unforeseen circumstances in the prosecution of the same, or from the action of the elements, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the Work, shall be sustained and borne by the CONTRACTOR at his own cost and expense. 08-2018 00700- 17 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.28 GUARANTEE. The CONTRACTOR hereby guarantees all the Work under the Contract to be free from defects or deficiencies in material in every particular and free from defects or deficiencies in workmanship; and against unusual damage from proper and usual use; and agrees to replace or to re-execute without cost to the OWNER such Work as may be found to be defective, deficient or otherwise not in conformance with the Contract Documents, and to make good all damages caused to other work or material, due to such defective Work or due to its required replacement or re-execution. This guarantee shall cover a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion or Partial Substantial Completion of Work under the Contract, as evidenced by the Certificate of Substantial Completion. Neither the Certificate of Substantial Completion, Final Payment, nor any provision in the Contract Documents shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for defective, deficient or non-conforming material or workmanship during the period covered by the guarantee. The one-year period of guarantee will not limit the OWNER'S other rights under common law with respect to any defects, deficiencies or non-conforming Work discovered after one year. If this one-year guarantee conflicts with other warranties or guarantees, the longer period of warranty or guarantee will govern. 5.0 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 5.01 TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION. It is the meaning and intent of this Contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the CONTRACTOR shall be allowed to prosecute his Work at such times and seasons, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conducive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and the time of prosecution shall be such that the Work shall be Substantially Completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this Contract and the Contract Time; provided, also, that when the OWNER is having other work done, either by contract or by his own forces, the ENGINEER may direct the time and manner of constructing the Work done under this Contract, so that conflict will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the OWNER shall be harmonized, and the CONTRACTOR shall fully cooperate and coordinate its Work with OWNER or such other contractors. The CONTRACTOR shall submit, an updated schedule with every pay estimate for review by the ENGINEER, schedules which shall show the order in which the CONTRACTOR proposes to carry on the Work, with dates on which the CONTRACTOR will start the several parts of the work, and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. Such schedules shall show completion of the Work within the Contract Time, and/or shall show such recovery efforts as CONTRACTOR intends to undertake in the event Substantial Completion of the Work is delayed. 5.02 EXTENSION OF TIME. The CONTRACTOR agrees that he has submitted his Bid Proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this Project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions as hereinafter set forth, and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this Contract, except when Substantial Completion of the Work has been delayed solely by strikes, lockouts, fires, Acts of God, or by any other cause which the ENGINEER shall decide justifies the delay. The CONTRACTOR shall give the ENGINEER prompt notice, in writing and within three (3) days of the start of any such delay, of the cause of any such delay, and its estimated effect on the Work and the schedule for completion of the Work. Upon receipt of a written request for an extension of the Contract Time from the CONTRACTOR, supported by relevant and all requested documentation, the ENGINEER shall submit such written request, together with his written recommendation, to the 08-2018 00700- 18 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT OWNER for consideration. If the delay is not attributable in whole or in part to any act or omission of CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors or suppliers, and if the OWNER determines that CONTRACTOR is entitled to an extension of time under the terms of the Contract, the OWNER shall grant an extension of time for Substantial Completion of the Work, sufficient to compensate for the delay, and such extension of time shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy, except as may be otherwise provided herein. No extensions of Contract Time shall be made for delays occurring prior to the Contractor's mobilization as defined in Section 01505 MOBILIZATION. The Contract Time as defined in the Bid Proposal and other sections herein incorporates 40 Rain Days per calendar year or an average of 3.33 days per calendar month. The CONTRACTOR is required to keep record of all weather related delays and to submit the monthly count on each Pay Application. The Owner's Representative shall review and sign off on this record as a part of the Pay Application approval process every month. If, during preparation of the Balancing Change Order, the status of the work progress requires an extension of the Contract Time, Impact Days shall be added to the Completion Date equal to the total number of Weather or Impact Days approved less the original 40 days resident in the original Contract Time. The Addition of Weather or Impact Days will only alter the Contract Time when added by Change Order. If the Work is completed prior to the Completion Date, No Days will be added. The addition of Weather or Impact Days shall be the CONTRACTOR's sole remedy for delays to the completion of the Work and their addition to the Contract Time shall not affect the Contract Price through any "per diem" adjustment to the General Conditions costs, Temporary Facilities costs or any other costs associated with the extension of the Contract Time. 5.03 HINDRANCES AND DELAYS. In executing the Contract, the CON TRACTOR agrees that in undertaking to complete the Work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all interference, disruption, hindrances and delays incident to such Work, whether growing out of delays in securing material, workmen or otherwise. No claim shall be made by the CONTRACTOR for damages, loss, costs or expense resulting from interference, disruption, hindrances or delays from any cause during the progress of any portion of the Work embraced in this Contract, except where the Work is stopped or suspended by order of the OWNER's representative and such stoppage or suspension is not attributable to any act or omission of CONTRACTOR. 5.04 SUSPENSION OF WORK. OWNER may, without cause, order the CONTRACTOR in writing to suspend the Work, in whole or in part, for such period of time as OWNER may request. The Contract Price and/or Contract Time shall be adjusted for any increase in the cost of or the time required for performance of the Work caused by such suspension. No adjustment shall be made to the extent performance was or would have been suspended by a cause for which CONTRACTOR is responsible, or to the extent an adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract Documents. 5.05 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY: It is understood and agreed that time is of the essence, and that the CONTRACTOR will commence the Work on the date specified herein or in any Notice to Proceed, and will Substantially Complete the Work within the Contract Time. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER, that the time for the Substantial Completion of the Work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that a failure to complete on time will cause damage to the OWNER and that such damages 08-2018 00700- 19 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT cannot be accurately measured or that ascertainment will be difficult. Therefore, the parties agree that for each and every calendar day the Work or any portion thereof shall remain uncompleted after the expiration of the Contract Time, the CONTRACTOR shall pay, as liquidated damages and as a reasonable estimate of OWNER's damages, and not as a penalty,the amount set out in the Standard Form of Agreement. However, the foregoing agreement as to liquidated damages constitutes only an agreement by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR as to the amount of damages which the OWNER will sustain by reason of the CONTRACTOR'S failure to complete the work within the Contract Time. Should the OWNER suffer damage by reason of any other breach by CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may recover such actual damages in addition to any liquidated damages due. The OWNER shall have the right to deduct and withhold the amount of any and all such damages whether it be the minimum amount stipulated above or otherwise, from any monies owing by it to said CONTRACTOR, or the OWNER may recover such amount from the CONTRACTOR and the sureties of his bond; all of such remedies shall be cumulative and the OWNER shall not be required to elect any one nor be deemed to have made an election by proceeding to enforce any one remedy. 5.06 CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME: The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order. Any claim for an adjustment of Contract Time shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making such claim to the other party and to the ENGINEER promptly, but in no event later than ten (10) days after the event-giving rise to the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim, along with supporting data, shall be delivered within thirty (30) days of the occurrence and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written representation that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in Contract Time shall be determined by the ENGINEER in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. Contractor shall submit, as a minimum, the following data: A. Information showing that the time requested is not included in the existing Contract and in addition to the Contract. B. Information documenting that the number of days requested is accurate for the event. C. Revised, current construction schedule showing that the time requested affects the project's critical path. 5.07 DELAYS BEYOND OWNER'S AND CONTRACTOR'S CONTROL: Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Time due to delays beyond the control of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR, including, but not limited to, interference by utility owners or other contractors performing other work, Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of the Contract Time in an amount equal to the time lost. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Price as a result of such delays. IN NO EVENT SHALL OWNER BE LIABLE TO CONTRACTOR FOR DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM (i) Delays caused by, or within the control of, the CONTRACTOR, or (ii) Delays beyond the control of both parties including, but not limited to, interference by utility owners or other contractors performing other work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, even if such delays are due in part to the negligence, other fault, breach of contract or warranty, violation of the Texas Deceptive Trade Act, or strict liability without regard 08-2018 00700-20 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT to fault of OWNER. An extension of Contract time shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for any such delays. Delays attributed to, and within the control of, a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of the CONTRACTOR. 6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 6.01 DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS. If the CONTRACTOR knows or reasonably should have known of any discrepancies or omissions in the Contract Documents, he shall notify the ENGINEER and obtain a clarification by Addendum before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the ENGINEER prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the CONTRACTOR fully understands the Work to be performed and has provided sufficient sums in his Bid Proposal to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five(5) days prior to the opening of bids. 6.02 QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS. No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured and/or computed length, area, volume, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. 6.03 ESTIMATED QUANTITIES. This Agreement, including the Contract Documents, and including any estimates contained therein, is intended to convey all Work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of Work to be done and material to be furnished under this Contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the Work and for comparing the Bid Proposals offered for the Work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of Work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this Contract may differ from the estimates and that the items listed or estimated quantities stated, and/or any difference between estimated and actual Work, shall not give rise to a claim by the CONTRACTOR against the OWNER for loss, cost, expense, damages, unit price adjustment, quantity differences,unrecovered overhead or lost or anticipated profits, or other compensation. 6.04 PRICE OF WORK. It is agreed that it is the intent of this Contract that all Work described in the Bid Proposal, and Contract Documents, is to be done for the prices bid by the CONTRACTOR and that such prices shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the intent of these Contract Documents as interpreted by the ENGINEER, and all costs, expenses, bond and insurance premiums, taxes, overhead, and profit. In consideration of the furnishing of all the necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all Work by the CONTRACTOR, and upon the completion of all Work and the delivery of all materials embraced in this Contract in full conformity with the Contract Documents, the OWNER agrees to pay to the CONTRACTOR the prices set forth in the Standard Form of Agreement, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that the Contract is a unit cost agreement, unless stated otherwise, and that the final Contract amount is equal to the unit cost multiplied by the number of units authorized, installed and approved by the Owner. The OWNER does not assume any obligation to pay for any services or material not actually authorized and used. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to receive such prices as payment in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid Work, and for all expenses incurred by him, and for full performance of the Work and the whole thereof in the 08-2018 00700-21 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT manner and according to this Agreement, Contract Documents, and the requirements of the ENGINEER. 6.05 PAYMENTS. No payments made or approvals or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the Contract, either in whole or in part, nor shall any certificate, approval or payment be considered as acceptance of defective, deficient or non-conforming Work. CONTRACTOR shall, at any time requested during the progress of the Work, furnish the OWNER or the ENGINEER with an affidavit showing the CON IRACTOR's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the Work. Before Final Payment is made, the CONTRACTOR shall satisfy the OWNER, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no unpaid claims due subcontractors, suppliers or laborers by reason of any Work under the Contract. Acceptance by CONTRACTOR of Final Payment shall constitute a waiver of any and all claims of whatsoever nature against OWNER, arising out of or related to the Contract, or the Work, or any acts or omissions of OWNER or ENGINEER, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this Contract. 6.06 PARTIAL PAYMENTS. When the Contract Price is a lump sum amount,prior to the first Application for Payment, CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review and approval a Schedule of Values, which shall fairly allocate the entire Contract Price among the various portions of the Work and shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the ENGINEER may reasonably require. The Schedule of Values shall follow the trade divisions of the Specifications so far as practicable. Upon approval, this Schedule of Values shall be used by ENGINEER as the basis for reviewing the Contractor's Application for Payment. Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. On or before the tenth day of each month, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit to the ENGINEER, for approval or correction, an application for partial payment, being a statement showing as completely as practicable, the agreed unit quantities and extended total value of the Work done by the CONTRACTOR up to and including the twenty-fifth day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all conforming materials to be fabricated into the Work and stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the OWNER or ENGINEER at the Work site only. No payment will be made for materials stored until OWNER has approved in writing storage at the Work site. The ENGINEER shall then review such statement of unit quantities and application for partial payment and the progress of the Work made by the CONTRACTOR and, within ten days after the date ENGINEER receives CONTRACTOR's application for payment, if the application is found to be accurate and correct and the WORK conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents, the ENGINEER shall certify the application for partial payment and shall deliver his preliminary certification for payment to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR; or, if the ENGINEER finds that CONTRACTOR's application for payment contains an error or is otherwise disputed, he shall notify CON TRACTOR of such error or dispute, and shall prepare a preliminary certificate for partial payment for the undisputed amount of the application for payment due CONTRACTOR, and deliver it to the OWNER and CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER'S notice to CONTRACTOR that a bona fide dispute for payment exists shall include a list of the specific reasons for nonpayment. All payment applications made by CONTRACTOR and delivered to ENGINEER and all verifications and certification of such applications shall be made and transmitted within the Pro Trak system and signed with the appropriate electronic signatures as provided for in the software. Such applications for payment shall not be considered complete unless accompanied by the 08-2018 00700-22 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CONTRACTOR'S Partial Waiver of Lien and Payment Affidavit, Section 00615, duly executed by an authorized representative of the CONTRACTOR and reflecting the correct corresponding amount of the payment application. The OWNER shall then pay the CONTRACTOR, within thirty (30) days of the date of ENGINEER's receipt of the application for payment, the undisputed balance due, less applicable retainage, and further less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained or withheld by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement. CONTRACTOR may submit a corrected application for payment after its receipt of the ENGINEER's notice of error or dispute, and such corrected application for payment shall be reviewed by the ENGINEER and disputed or paid under the same procedure and within the same time limits set out above. As a condition of any progress payment under this Agreement, CONTRACTOR shall execute and deliver to ENGINEER and OWNER a full release of all claims, direct or indirect, at law or in equity, arising out of or related to the Work to date, excluding retainage or any claims previously submitted as required under the terms of the Contract, and specifically identified and excluded by CONTRACTOR in the release. OWNER shall be entitled to retain from each progress payment five percent (5%) of the amount thereof. Such retainage shall be retained until Final Completion and satisfaction of all conditions for Final Payment. It is understood, however, that in case the whole Work be near to completion, as certified by the ENGINEER, and some unexpected or unusual delay occurs, through no neglect or fault on the part of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may, upon written recommendation of the ENGINEER, pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage to the CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR, at the OWNER'S option, may be relieved of the obligation to fully complete the Work, and thereupon, the CONTRACTOR shall receive, at the OWNER'S option, payment of the balance due him under the Contract for Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, subject to OWNER's rights to otherwise withhold or retain payments, and subject to the conditions set forth under"6.09 FINAL PAYMENT." The Owner at its option and in compliance with Texas law may reduce retainage to less than the above-stated percentages. 6.07 USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS & PUNCHLIST. The OWNER shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially completed portions of the Work, notwithstanding that the time for completing the entire work or such portions may not have expired; but such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If such prior use increases the cost of or delays the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within three (3) days of OWNER's taking possession, give OWNER written notice of same, and CONTRACTOR may be entitled to such extra compensation or extension of time, or both, as may be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement. 6.08 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER AND ENGINEER, by letter executed by a duly qualified officer of CONTRACTOR that in CONTRACTOR's opinion, the Work of the Contract, or an agreed portion thereof, is "Substantially Complete". Such notification shall include a list of all outstanding or incomplete items. Upon receipt, and within a reasonable time thereafter, of such notice, the ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR shall jointly perform a walk-through and inspection of the Work to determine the status of all or the identified portion of the work, and the ENGINEER shall prepare a detailed 08-2018 00700-23 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT list of unfinished, incomplete, defective and/or non-conforming Work ("Punchlist"). If the ENGINEER determines that the Work is Substantially Complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, the ENGINEER shall issue to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR a Certificate of Substantial Completion. OWNER shall have seven (7) days after receipt of Certificate to make written objection to the ENGINEER as to any provision of the Certificate or the attached list of non-conforming work. If ENGINEER concludes that the Work is not Substantially Complete, ENGINEER will, within fourteen (14) days, notify CONTRACTOR of the reason he believes the Work is not Substantially Complete. Upon Substantial Completion of the Work, ENGINEER will deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities, pending final payment and acceptance, with respect to security, maintenance, utilities and damage to the Work, except as otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. NEITHER THE SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF THE WORK, NOR THE OMISSION OF AN ITEM FROM THE PUNCHLIST, SHALL EXCUSE THE CONTRACTOR FROM PERFORMING ALL OF THE WORK UNDERTAKEN, WHETHER OF A MINOR OR MAJOR NATURE, AND THEREBY COMPLETING THE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall establish the time period within which CONTRACTOR shall complete the Work for Final Acceptance by the Owner and ENGINEER. 6.08-1 OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from the Work after the date of Substantial Completion, for security requirement reasons. OWNER may establish an access procedure to facilitate CONTRACTOR's uninterrupted access to the Work for the purposes of completing and correcting all items on the Punchlist in an expeditious manner. 6.09 FINAL PAYMENT. Final payment of the Retainage withheld from the Contract Price shall be made by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR at such time as: (a) the Work, including all Change Orders and including all Punchlist work, has been fully completed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents; (b) the Contract has been fully performed except for the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to correct nonconforming Work during the warranty period set forth in the Contract Documents, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which necessarily survive final payment; (c) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER; (d) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a Consent of Surety, if any, to final payment; (e) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a complete set of As-Built Drawings, reflecting all deviations from the Plans, Specifications and approved shop drawings in the Work actually constructed, and delivers all maintenance and operating manuals and/or instructions; 08-2018 00700-24 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (f) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER all building certificates required prior to occupancy and all other required inspections/approvals/acceptances by city, county, state governmental entities or other authorities having jurisdiction; (g) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER assignments of all guarantees and warranties from subcontractors, vendors, suppliers or manufacturers, as well as names, addresses and telephone numbers of contacts for each subcontractor, vendor, supplier or manufacturer; (h) CONTRACTOR removes all equipment, tools,temporary facilities, surplus materials and rubbish from the site, and final cleans the site to OWNER's satisfaction; (i) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a Full and Final Release and Affidavit of Bills Paid in the form attached hereto as Attachment No. 2, executed by CONTRACTOR; (j) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER all other documentation required to be submitted to OWNER pursuant to the Contract Documents, including but not limited to any special guarantees or warranties, operation and maintenance manuals, etc'. in each case in a form satisfactory to OWNER as determined in OWNER's sole discretion; and (k) The Final Application for Payment has been approved by the ENGINEER and OWNER. Acceptance of Final Payment by the CONTRACTOR shall constitute a waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER other than any claims previously made in writing by CONTRACTOR against OWNER, and still unsettled, and except for claims arising out of third party actions, cross-claims and counterclaims. No interest shall be due or payable by OWNER to CONTRACTOR on any sums retained or withheld by OWNER pursuant to the terms or provisions of the Contract Documents, except as otherwise provided by applicable law. Neither the Certificate of Substantial Completion nor the Final Payment nor possession or acceptance of the Work shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of its obligation for correction of defective or non- conforming Work, or for fulfillment of any warranty, which may be required by law or by the Contract Documents. 6.10 CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove from OWNER's premises all materials, equipment or Work which is defective or otherwise not in conformance with the Contract Documents, whether actually incorporated in the Work or not, and CONTRACTOR shall, at his own expense, promptly replace such materials, equipment or Work with other materials conforming to the requirements of the Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of CONTRACTOR or other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If CONTRACTOR does not remove and replace any such unsuitable Work within ten (10) business days after receipt of a written notice from the OWNER or the ENGINEER, the OWNER may remove, replace and remedy such work at CONTRACTOR's expense. 08-2018 00700-25 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.11 CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT. If within one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall, at its sole cost, correct it and any other work affected thereby promptly after receipt of a written notice from OWNER to do so. In addition, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any damage to building contents, when such damage results from the CONTRACTOR's use of faulty materials or defective workmanship; to the extent such damage is not covered by OWNER's insurance. This warranty period shall renew and recommence for each corrected item of Work upon completion of the remedial work. This time period for correction by CONTRACTOR is in addition to, and not in lieu of, all warranties or remedies, which exist at common law or by statute. These warranty obligations shall survive the termination of this Contract, and shall be enforceable by a decree of specific performance, in addition to such other rights and remedies available to OWNER at law or in equity. 6.12 PAYMENTS WITHHELD. The OWNER may withhold, or on account of subsequently discovered evidence nullify and demand immediate repayment of, the whole or part of any certificate for payment or payment, to such extent as may be necessary to protect OWNER from loss on account of: (a) Defective or non-conforming Work not remedied; (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims; (c) Failure of the CON TRACTOR to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for material or labor; (d) Damage to another contractor, OWNER, existing improvements on the site, or to adjacent or adjoining property; (e) Reasonable doubt that the Work can be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract amount; (f) Reasonable indication that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time; (g) Failure on the part of the CONTRACTOR to execute any and all documents, releases or other documents presented to the CONTRACTOR for execution, as provided for herein or otherwise; (h) Liquidated or other damages due to late completion; and/or (i) Any breach by CONTRACTOR of this Contract or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. When the above grounds are removed to OWNER's satisfaction, the withheld payment shall be made promptly. If the said causes are not so remedied, OWNER may remedy the same for CONTRACTOR's account, charge the entire cost thereof to CONTRACTOR and deduct such cost 08-2018 00700-26 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT from the Contract Sum or from any payments due or to become due under any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 6.13 DELAYED PAYMENTS. Should the OWNER fail to make payment to the CONTRACTOR when payment is due in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents, any interest due CONTRACTOR for late payments shall accrue and be paid in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2251 of the Texas Government Code, as amended, and payment of such interest shall fully liquidate and compensate any injury to the CONTRACTOR growing out of such delay in payment. Should OWNER fail to pay CONTRACTOR an undisputed amount due within the time limits provided in the Contract or applicable law, CONTRACTOR shall give the notice required and comply with the provisions of Section 2251.051 of the Texas Government Code, and shall thereupon be entitled to the rights and remedies provided therein. 7.0 EXTRA WORK AND CLAIMS 7.01 DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS. During the progress of the work, if subsurface, latent physical conditions or unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature are encountered at the site that differ materially from those indicated in the contract or from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in the work provided for in the contract, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER's Representative in writing within three (3) calendar days of the specific differing conditions before the site is disturbed and before the affected work is performed. (a) Upon written notification,the ENGINEER will investigate the conditions, and if it is determined that the conditions materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in the cost or time required for the performance of any work under the contract, an adjustment, excluding anticipated profits,will be made and the contract modified in writing accordingly. The ENGINEER will notify the CONTRACTOR in writing of the determination whether or not an adjustment of the contract is warranted. (b)No contract adjustment which results in a benefit to the CONTRACTOR will be allowed unless the CONTRACTOR has provided the required written notice. (c)No contract adjustment will be allowed under this clause for any effects caused on unchanged work. 7.02 SUSPENSIONS OF WORK ORDERED BY THE ENGINEER. If the performance of all or any portion of the work is suspended by the ENGINEER in writing for seven (7) calendar days and the CONTRACTOR believes that additional compensation and/or contract time is due as a result of such suspension,the CONTRACTOR shall submit a written request for adjustment to the ENGINEER within seven (7) calendar days of receipt of the notice to resume work. The request shall set forth the reasons and support for such adjustment. (a)Upon receipt,the ENGINEER will evaluate the CONTRACTOR's request. If the ENGINEER agrees that the cost and/or time required for the performance of the contract has increased as a result of such suspension and the suspension was caused by conditions beyond the control of and not the fault of the CONTRACTOR, its suppliers, or subcontractors at any approved tier, and not caused by weather, the ENGINEER will make an adjustment (excluding profit) and modify the contract in writing accordingly. The CONTRACTOR will be notified of the ENGINEER's determination, in writing, whether or 08-2018 00700-27 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT not an adjustment of the contract is warranted. (b)No contract adjustment will be allowed unless the CONTRACTOR has submitted the request for adjustment within the time prescribed. (c)No contract adjustment will be allowed under this clause to the extent that performance would have been suspended by any other cause, or for which an adjustment is provided or excluded under any other term or condition of this contract. 7.03 CHANGE ORDERS. Without invalidating this Agreement, the OWNER may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions to the Work; such changes will be authorized by Change Order to be prepared by the ENGINEER for execution by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. The Change Order shall set forth the basis for any change in Contract Price, as hereinafter set forth for Extra Work, and any change in Contract Time, which may result from the change. 7.04 In accordance with paragraph 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S request to work weekends, the Owner's Construction Manager shall, upon receipt of written notice by the CONTRACTOR of the need to conduct work on otherwise non-Work Days, prepare a cost estimate for providing Construction Management and Inspection services during the requested period and submit this to both OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If approved by both parties the Construction Manager shall prepare a Deductive Change Order in the amount stated in the estimate for the signature of the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER for inclusion in the next Pay Application. The Deductive Change Order must be signed and executed by both the OWNER and CONTRACTOR prior to start of work on any non-Work Day. 7.05 MINOR CHANGES. The ENGINEER may authorize minor changes in the Work not inconsistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents and not involving an increase in Contract Price or time. If the CONTRACTOR believes that any minor changes authorized by the ENGINEER involves Extra Work or entitles him to an increase in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, the CON TRACTOR shall give notice of same by written request to the ENGINEER for a written Work Order, with a copy to OWNER. Any such notice and request by the CONTRACTOR shall be given prior to beginning the changed work. CONTRACTOR's commencement of any minor change in the Work prior to such written notice and request shall constitute a waiver of any and all claims for an increase in the Contract Price or the Contract Time arising out of or related to such changed work. 7.06 EXTRA WORK. It is agreed that the CONTRACTOR shall perform all work when presented with a written Change Order, Work Change Directive or Work Order signed by the ENGINEER, subject, however, to the right of the CONTRACTOR to require written confirmation of such Change Order, Work Change Directive or Work Order by the OWNER. It is agreed that the basis of compensation or adjustment to the CONTRACTOR for work either altered, added or deleted by a Change Order or Work Change Directive, or for which a claim for Extra Work is made, shall be determined by one or more of the following methods: Method(A) --By Contract unit prices applicable to the work, if any; or Method(B) --By agreed unit prices or agreed stipulated lump sum price; or 08-2018 00700-28 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Method(C) --If neither Method (A) nor Method (B) can be agreed upon before the Extra Work is commenced, then the CONTRACTOR shall be paid the "Actual Field Cost" of the work plus: a) For subcontractors performing work mark-up shall be limited to fifteen percent, ten (10%) for the subcontractor plus five (5%) for the General Contractor or b) For the General Contractor alone, self-performing the extra work, without subcontractor, the mark-up shall not exceed ten percent (10%), as full and final compensation for the Extra Work and all costs and expenses, direct or indirect, arising out of or related thereto. In the event said Extra Work or Change Order or Work Change Directive work is performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "Actual Field Cost" is hereby defined as the cost to the CONTRACTOR of all workers, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, and materials, supplies, trucks, rentals of machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such Extra Work or Change Order or Work Change Directive work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred together with all power, fuel, lubricants, water and similar operating expenses, plus all necessary incidental expenses incurred directly on account of such Extra Work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits and other payroll taxes, and a rateable proportion of premiums on Performance and Payment Bonds and Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation, and all other insurance as may be required by law or ordinance, or the Contract Documents,plus all payments to subcontractors for such work. The ENGINEER may direct the form in which accounts of the "Actual Field Cost" shall be kept and the records of these accounts shall be made available to the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER or OWNER may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise these matters shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using one hundred percent (100%), unless otherwise specified, of the latest schedule of Equipment Ownership Expense adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America where practicable. The mark-up of the "Actual Field Cost" to be paid to the CONTRACTOR, shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the "Actual Field Cost" as herein defined, save that where the CONTRACTOR's field office must be maintained solely on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "Actual Field Cost." No claim for Extra Work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered by the ENGINEER in a written Work Order. In case any orders or instructions, either oral or written, appear to the CONTRACTOR to involve Extra Work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the Contract Time, he shall make written request to the ENGINEER for a written Work Order authorizing such Extra Work within ten (10) days of ENGINEER's orders or instructions, otherwise the orders or instructions will be considered minor changes. The issuance of a Work Order by the ENGINEER shall not constitute or be construed as an agreement or acknowledgement by the ENGINEER that the work which is the subject of the Work Order is Extra Work outside the scope of the Contract Work, but shall merely constitute a direction to the 08-2018 00700-29 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CONTRACTOR to perform the work, and the CONTRACTOR shall proceed with the work, and shall keep an accurate account of the "Actual Field Cost" thereof, as provided under Method (C). Upon completion of the alleged Extra Work, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within ten (10) days submit his claim to the ENGINEER by proper certification and attestation, on forms provided by the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER shall render a written decision on CONTRACTOR's claim within ten (10) days. It is mutually agreed between the parties that the ENGINEER's decision on all claims or questions in relation to the Work, CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work, any changes in the Work or Extra Work, the Contract Price and/or the Contract Time, shall be final and conclusive and binding upon the parties. If the ENGINEER shall fail to respond in writing to CONTRACTOR's claim within thirty (30) days of the date of submission, or if CONTRACTOR shall dispute or object to ENGINEER's decision on any claim, and CONTRACTOR fails to file a Request for Mediation of such claim in accordance with the provisions of Article 9.0, within sixty(60) days after the date of submission to the ENGINEER, or such longer period as the parties may agree to in writing, the CONTRACTOR shall lose and forfeit his right to make such claim for Extra Work at any later date, and all such claims held by the CONTRACTOR shall be deemed waived, forfeited and forever barred. CONTRACTOR shall continue to diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 7.07 TIME OF FILING CLAIMS. Except as otherwise provided herein, all questions of dispute or adjustment shall be made within the Pro-Trak system and filed with the ENGINEER within three (3) days after the ENGINEER has given any directions, order or instruction to which the CONTRACTOR desires to take exception. The ENGINEER shall reply within thirty(30) days to such written exceptions, and render his final decision in writing. It is mutually agreed between the parties that the ENGINEER's decision on all claims or questions in relation to the Work, CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work, any changes in the Work or Extra Work, the Contract Price and/or the Contract Time, shall be final and conclusive and binding upon the parties. In case the CON TRACTOR should desire to appeal from the ENGINEER's decision, the CONTRACTOR may request a meeting between representatives of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR for the purposes of appealing the ENGINEER's decision directly to the OWNER, such meeting to occur within ten (10) days after the date of the CONTRACTOR's request, or such longer period as may be agreed to by the parties in writing. If the CONTRACTOR shall still be aggrieved after a meeting with the OWNER and/or his representative, the CONTRACTOR shall have sixty (60) days after the date of the meeting, or such longer period as the parties may agree to in writing, to file a Request for Mediation of such claim in accordance with the provisions of Article 9.0. In the event the CONTRACTOR shall fail, for any reason, to timely file a Request for Mediation, the OWNER shall be released of any and all liability, and the CONTRACTOR's failure to timely file a Request for Mediation shall constitute a waiver, forfeit and final bar of all such claims held by the CONTRACTOR against the OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall continue to diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 8.0 DEFAULT 8.01 DEFAULT BY CONTRACTOR. In case the CONTRACTOR should abandon and fail or refuse to resume Work within five (5) days after written notification from the OWNER or the ENGINEER, or if the CONTRACTOR fails to comply with the orders of the ENGINEER when such orders are consistent with the Contract Documents, or if the CONTRACTOR otherwise defaults on its obligations under the Contract, OWNER shall have the right, if it so elects and 08-2018 00700-30 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT without prejudice to any other rights it may have, after giving five (5) days written notice of default to CONTRACTOR and any surety, to terminate the Contract or any part thereof and/or to take over or cause others to take over the Work or any part thereof, and to complete such Work for the account of CONTRACTOR. Where Performance and Payment Bonds exist, the sureties on these bonds shall be directed to complete the Work in conjunction with the notice of default, and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the CONTRACTOR. After receiving said notice of default,the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within no more than three (3) days, remove from the Work any machinery, equipment, or tools then on the job, not intended for incorporation into the Work. Should CONTRACTOR fail to promptly remove such machinery, equipment or tools, OWNER may remove such machinery, equipment or tools and store same at CONTRACTOR's expense; return such machinery, equipment or tools to their purported owner; or otherwise dispose of such machinery, equipment or tools as OWNER sees fit. Any materials, supplies and/or equipment delivered for use in the Work, may be used in the completion of the Work by the OWNER or the surety on the Performance Bond, or another contractor in completion of the Work; it being understood that the use of such equipment, supplies and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the Work and be reflected in the final settlement. Where there is no Performance Bond or in case the surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinabove provided for within ten (10) days after the service of such notice, then the OWNER may provide for completion of the Work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The OWNER may thereupon employ such force of workers and use such machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as the OWNER may deem necessary to expeditiously complete the Work, and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said CONTRACTOR, and expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the OWNER out of such monies as may be due or that may thereafter at any time become due to the CONTRACTOR under and by virtue of this Agreement or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this Contract if the same had been completed by the CONTRACTOR, then said CONTRACTOR shall be credited with the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this Contract if the same had been completed by such CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall promptly pay the amount of such excess to the OWNER upon demand; or (b) The OWNER, under sealed bids, under the times and procedures provided for by law, may let the contract for completion of the Work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this Contract. In case of any increase in cost to the OWNER under the completion contract, as compared to what would have been the cost under this Contract, such increase shall be charged to the CONTRACTOR, and the amount of such increase may be deducted by the OWNER out of such monies as may be due or that may thereafter at any time become due to the CONTRACTOR under and by virtue of this Agreement or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall promptly pay the amount of such increase to the OWNER 08-2018 00700-31 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT upon demand. However, should the cost to complete any such completion contract prove to be less than what would have been the cost to complete under this Contract,the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall be credited therewith. In the event of a default by CONTRACTOR, no further payments shall be made to CON TRACTOR under the Contract until the Work is Finally Completed. When the Work shall have been Finally Completed, the CONTRACTOR and his surety shall be so notified. A complete itemized statement of the Contract accounts, certified by the ENGINEER as being correct, shall then be prepared and delivered to the CONTRACTOR and his surety, whereupon the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement. The OWNER, prior to incurring an obligation to make payment hereunder, shall have such statement of completion attested to by the CONTRACTOR and the surety as accurate, and in exchange for payment of the sum stated therein, the OWNER shall be entitled to a full and final release of any claims or demands by the CONTRACTOR or the surety. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the OWNER had the work been completed by the CONTRACTOR under the terms of this Contract, or when the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the OWNER, then all machinery, equipment, tools or supplies left on the site of the Work shall be turned over to the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety. Should the cost to complete the Work exceed the Contract Price, and the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety fail to pay the amount due the OWNER within the time designated above, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies which are the property of CONTRACTOR on the site of the Work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials, shall be mailed to the CONTRACTOR and his surety at the respective addresses designated in the Contract, provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the CONTRACTOR and his surety, subject only to the duty of the OWNER to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of such notice, the OWNER may sell such property, equipment, tools, materials or supplies, and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the CONTRACTOR and his surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the OWNER may elect. The OWNER shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies, which remain on the Work, and belong to persons other than the CONTRACTOR or his surety, to their reputed owners. 8.02 SUPPLEMENTATION OF CONTRACTOR FORCES. If CONTRACTOR at any time shall, in OWNER'S sole opinion, fail to furnish skilled workers, suitable materials, supplies or adequate equipment sufficient for the prompt, timely and diligent prosecution of the Work in accordance with OWNER's direction, OWNER shall have the right, without prejudice to the exercise of other remedies for the same default and without fully taking over the Work, to supplement CONTRACTOR's forces and to expedite delivery of and to procure and furnish such workers, materials, tools, supplies or equipment for CONTRACTOR's account by employing other contractors and suppliers engaged in the same class of work and charge the entire cost thereof to CONTRACTOR, said cost to be deducted from sums due or to become due to CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any other agreement with OWNER or any parent, subsidiary or affiliate of OWNER. 08-2018 00700-32 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 8.03 CUMULATIVE REMEDIES & SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE. All rights and remedies of OWNER, under the terms of the Contract and/or available at law or in equity, are cumulative. In the event CONTRACTOR or any of its subcontractors, vendors or suppliers fails or refuses for any reason to provide timely manufacture, fabrication, delivery, installation, erection, construction or completion of any supplies, materials, expendables, equipment, machinery, accessories or appurtenances to be furnished hereunder, CONTRACTOR acknowledges and agrees that such items are required, necessary, essentially unique to the Project and the Work and will cause irreparable harm to OWNER and the Project if not furnished in accordance with the Contract, and OWNER shall have the right to obtain a decree of specific performance and mandatory injunctive relief from any Court of competent jurisdiction to ensure the timely furnishing of such items. 8.04 CROSS-DEFAULT. If, for any reason, CONTRACTOR is declared in default and/or terminated by OWNER under any other agreement with OWNER, whether related to the Project or not related to the Project, OWNER shall have the right to offset and apply any amounts which might be owed to OWNER by CONTRACTOR under any other such agreements against any earned but unpaid amounts owing to CON TRACTOR by OWNER under the Contract, any retainage earned by CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any unearned, unpaid amount under the Contract. 8.05 INSOLVENCY. It is recognized that if CONTRACTOR becomes a debtor in voluntary or involuntary bankruptcy proceedings, makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, such events could seriously impair or frustrate CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. Accordingly, it is agreed that should CONTRACTOR become a debtor in bankruptcy, either voluntary or involuntary, CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER in writing within twenty-four (24) hours of the filing with the bankruptcy court. Further, it is agreed that upon occurrence of any one or more such events, OWNER shall be entitled to request of CONTRACTOR or its successors, trustees or receivers, adequate assurances of future performance. In the event such adequate assurances are not given to the reasonable satisfaction of OWNER within seventy-two (72) hours of such request, OWNER shall have the right to immediately invoke the remedies of this Section 8 or as provided by law. Pending receipt of such adequate assurances of such future performance, OWNER may proceed with the Work on a temporary basis and deduct the costs, plus reasonable overhead and profit, from any amounts due or which may become due to CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any other agreement with OWNER. In this regard, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that delays in performance could result in more damages to CONTRACTOR than would be sustained if OWNER failed to exercise such remedies. 8.06 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT. CONTRACTOR hereby assigns to OWNER, all of CONTRACTOR's rights under and interest in any and all subcontracts and/or purchase orders entered into by CONTRACTOR pursuant to this Agreement, such assignment to become effective upon CONTRACTOR's default under this Agreement or OWNER's termination of this Contract, and OWNER's acceptance of such assignment. Upon CONTRACTOR's default or OWNER's termination of this Contract, OWNER may, in the event there is no performance bond for the Contract, or in the event the performance bond surety fails to complete the Contract, or if OWNER otherwise so elects in its sole discretion, accept such assignment by written notice of such acceptance to CONTRACTOR and subcontractor, and may require subcontractors to perform all of the then unperformed duties and obligations under the subcontract, for the direct benefit of OWNER. In the event OWNER requires such performance by a subcontractor, then OWNER 08-2018 00700-33 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT shall be obligated to pay such subcontractor any amounts due and owing under the terms of the subcontract/purchase order, at the subcontract prices and rates, and subject to any rights of withholding or offset and other terms and conditions of the subcontract, for all work properly performed by such subcontractor, to the date of OWNER's acceptance and thereafter. OWNER's liability in this connection, however, shall not exceed the amount obtained by subtracting all payments made by CONTRACTOR to subcontractor from the Subcontract Price at the time of CONTRACTOR's default or OWNER's termination of CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall include a provision in its subcontracts that allows such assignment and allows OWNER to take these actions, and further provides that in the event of CONTRACTOR's termination for default, the subcontractor agrees to give the OWNER or its agent the right to inspect all books and records of subcontractor relating to the Work. 8.07 WAIVER OF CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. CON TRACTOR expressly waives any and all claims for consequential damages against OWNER arising out of or related to this Contract, or any other agreements between CONTRACTOR and OWNER, including, but not limited to, claims for damages incurred by CONTRACTOR for principal office expenses, including the compensation of personnel stationed there, losses of financing, bonding capacity, business and reputation, and claims for lost profit, whether on this Contract or otherwise. 8.08 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE. OWNER may at its sole discretion, upon five (5) days written notice to CONTRACTOR, terminate this Contract, in whole or in part, if and when OWNER determines that it is in the best interest of OWNER to do so. Upon receipt of such written notice from OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall cease all terminated Work and take reasonable precautions to protect and preserve such work, and shall take all reasonable measures after consultation with OWNER to terminate or assign to OWNER all subcontracts, purchase orders or other commitments related to the Work or the Project on terms and conditions acceptable to OWNER. CONTRACTOR will be paid for all Work performed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, based upon the Contract Price and the percentage of completion on the date of termination, and less amounts previously paid, subject to any reasonable backcharges attributable to CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any of the provisions of this Contract and further subject to the other terms of this Contract regarding payment. In no event will CONTRACTOR receive or be entitled to any payment or compensation whatsoever for interruption of business or loss of business opportunities, any other items of consequential damages, for overhead or loss of profits on the unperformed Work and/or services and unfurnished materials or for any intangible, impact or similarly described cost, damages or expense, and under no circumstances shall the total sum paid to or received by CONTRACTOR under this Contract exceed the Contract Price. The compensation provided herein shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy arising out of a termination for convenience. 8.09 DEFAULT BY OWNER. In case the OWNER shall default on its material obligations under this Contract, other than OWNER's failure to pay CONTRACTOR a disputed amount due within the time limits provided in the Contract or applicable law, as addressed by Section 6.13 of this Agreement, and shall fail or refuse to cure, or to commence and diligently pursue cure of such default within fifteen (15) days after written notification by the CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR may suspend or wholly abandon the Work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools and equipment, and all materials on the site of the Work that have not been included in payments to the CON TRACTOR and have not been incorporated into the Work. And thereupon, the ENGINEER shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the CONTRACTOR, which estimate shall include the value of all Work actually completed by 08-2018 00700-34 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT said CONTRACTOR (at the Contract Prices), the value of all partially completed Work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this Contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the CONTRACTOR to carry the whole Work to completion and which cannot be utilized. The ENGINEER shall then make a final statement of the balance due the CONTRACTOR by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the OWNER and all other sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement, and shall present the same to the OWNER, and OWNER's payment of said sum to the CONTRACTOR, on or before thirty (30) days after OWNER's receipt of such statement, shall satisfy any and all rights, claims or causes of action of CONTRACTOR arising out of or related to such default by OWNER, and shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for such default. A disputed or unilateral claim by the Contractor cannot by itself constitute a default hereunder. 9.0 DISPUTE RESOLUTION Any dispute or pending claim or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall not excuse or relieve CONTRACTOR of its obligations under the Contract, and CONTRACTOR shall diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. All claims, disputes and other matters in question arising out of or relating to, the Contract, or the breach thereof, shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to any other dispute resolution process as may be selected by OWNER. Unless mutually agreed otherwise the mediation shall be conducted by a third party who will be selected by agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR, and Request for Mediation shall be filed with the other party. The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. If a claim, dispute or other matter in question between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involves the work of a subcontractor or supplier, OWNER or CONTRACTOR may join such subcontractor or supplier as a party to any mediation proceeding between OWNER and CONTRACTOR hereunder. CONTRACTOR shall include in all subcontracts and/or purchase orders related to the Work a specific provision whereby the subcontractor or supplier consents to being joined in mediation between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involving the work of such subcontractor or supplier. This Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Texas and shall be considered performable in Brazoria County, Texas, for venue purposes. Further, the OWNER and CONTRACTOR stipulate that venue for any dispute resolution proceeding involving or touching upon the Contract other than the conduct of an arbitration hearing shall be in Brazoria County, Texas, or, if such choice of venue is prohibited or unenforceable by law, shall be held in the county where the Project is located. CONTRACTOR agrees to pay OWNER all reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by OWNER in the event OWNER seeks to enforce any provision of this Contract whether by arbitration or other dispute resolution process. Further, in the event OWNER defends any claim instituted by CONTRACTOR against OWNER, whether in arbitration or other dispute resolution process, CONTRACTOR agrees to pay OWNER all reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by OWNER in defending such claim provided OWNER is the prevailing party, in whole or in part, in such proceeding. 08-2018 00700-35 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO. 1 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE A. DEFINITIONS: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") . A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83 or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project for the duration of the Project. Duration of the Project _includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the contractor's/person's work on the Project has been completed and the Project warranty period has expired. Persons providing services on the project includes persons or entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with due contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, motor carriers and owner- operators, (as defined at Section 406.121 of the Texas Labor Code), leasing companies, and employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Title 5 Workers' Compensation, Subtitle A Texas Workers' Compensation Act, for employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. C. The CONTRACTOR must provide a certificate of coverage to the OWNER prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the CONTRACTOR's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the CONTRACTOR must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the OWNER showing that coverage has been extended. E. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from each subcontractor or other person providing services on a project, and provide to the OWNER: (I) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the Project, so the OWNER will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and 05/2007 00700-Al CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (2) no later than seven days after receipt by the CONTRACTOR and prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The CONTRACTOR shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the CONTRACTOR knew or should have known, of any changes that materially affect the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The CONTRACTOR shall post on each Project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. NOTICE REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512) 440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." I. The CONTRACTOR shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,too: (1) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Title 5 Workers' Compensation, Subtitle A Texas Workers' Compensation Act, for all of its employees providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; (2) provide to the CONTRACTOR,prior to that person beginning work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the Project: 05/2007 00700-A2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (3) provide the CONTRACTOR, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage, showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; (4) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the CONTRACTOR: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the Project; and (b) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage,prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and (7) contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the CONTRACTOR is representing to the OWNER that all employees of the CON TRACTOR who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage agreements will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the CONTRACTOR to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the CONTRACTOR, which entitles the OWNER to pursue all rights and remedies available to it under the Contract, at law or in equity, if the CONTRACTOR does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the OWNER. 05/2007 00700 -A3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO. 2 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS AGREEMENT FOR FINAL PAYMENT AND CONTRACTOR'S SWORN RELEASE In consideration of the Final Payment under that certain contract between [Contractor's Company Name] (hereafter "CONTRACTOR") and the City of Pearland (hereafter "OWNER") for the Project known as Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation (the "Contract"), the CONTRACTOR makes the following representations to OWNER, either individually if a proprietorship, or jointly and severally by all general partners if a partnership, or if a corporation, by action of the president and secretary of said corporation, as duly authorized by appropriate action of the stockholders and/or board of directors of said corporation, their signatures hereon constituting a representation under oath by said individuals that they have the authority to execute this Agreement for and on behalf of the said corporation: 1. The undersigned CONTRACTOR represents to OWNER that the Application for Payment for the Final Payment under the Contract, and the final Change Order issued under the Contract if any, whether or not modified, corrected or changed in some way by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR or the OWNER, a copy of which are attached hereto and marked Exhibit "A", are true, correct and accurate, and that CONTRACTOR has received payment in full for all other Applications for Payment submitted under the Contract, and that CONTRACTOR has been fully compensated for all labor, materials, equipment and/or services furnished in connection with the Contract, except for the Final Payment. 2. It is agreed and stipulated by the undersigned CONTRACTOR that upon the receipt of Final Payment in the amount as set out on the attached Application for Payment, the CONTRACTOR, by execution of this instrument of release, does, therefore, RELEASE and FOREVER DISCHARGE OWNER of and from all manner of debts, claims, demands, obligations, suits, liabilities and causes of action of any nature whatsoever, at law or in equity, in contract or in tort, now existing or which may hereafter accrue, arising out of or related to the Contract, any Change Orders or Work Orders, the Work, or any labor, materials, equipment or services furnished by CONTRACTOR to OWNER. 3. The CONTRACTOR, acting by and through the person or persons whose names are subscribed hereto, does solemnly swear and affirm that all bills and claims have been paid to all materialmen, suppliers, laborers, subcontractors, or other entities performing services or supplying materials or equipment, and that OWNER shall not be subject to any bills, claims, demands, litigation or suits in connection therewith. 4. It is further specifically understood and agreed that this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release shall constitute a part of the Contract, and it is also specifically understood and agreed that this Agreement shall not act as a modification, waiver or renunciation by OWNER of any of its rights or remedies as set out in the Contract itself, but this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release shall constitute a supplement thereto for the additional protection of OWNER. 05/2007 00700-B1 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT SIGNED and EXECUTED this, the_day of , 20 . CONTRACTOR: By: Signature Print Name: Title: [If CONTRACTOR is a proprietorship, owner must sign; if a partnership, each general partner must sign; if a corporation,the following language should be used.] SIGNED and EXECUTED this,the day of 20_by , a Texas corporation, under authority granted to the undersigned by said corporation as contained in the Charter, By-Laws or Minutes of a meeting of said corporation regularly called and held. CONTRACTOR: By: President ATTEST: Corporate Secretary (Corporate Seal) [This form is for use by either a proprietorship or a partnership. In the event CONTRACTOR is a partnership or a joint proprietorship, additional signature lines should be added for each individual.] 05/2007 00700-B2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT AFFIDAVIT STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF § BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared the person or persons whose name(s) are subscribed to the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, who each, after being by me duly sworn, on their oaths deposed and said: I (We) am (are)the person(s)who signed and executed the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, and I (we)have read the facts and statements as therein set out and the representations as made therein, and I (we) state that the above and foregoing are true and correct. CONTRACTOR-Affiant SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED TO before me, the day of 20_. Notary Public, State of Texas My Commission Expires: [This form is for use in the event CONTRACTOR is a corporation.] 07/2006 00700-B3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT AFFIDAVIT STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF __ § BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared the persons who signed and executed the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment mid Contractor's Sworn Release, whose names are set out above, who each, after being by me duly sworn, on their oaths deposed and said: We each are the persons whose names are subscribed above, and hold respectively the offices in the corporation as set out above, and each state under oath that we have the authority to execute this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release for and on behalf of said corporation,pursuant to authority granted to us in the Charter of said corporation,the By-Laws of said corporation and/or the Minutes of said corporation; and the facts, statements and representations as set out in the instrument to which this Affidavit is attached, are true and correct. SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED TO before me this, the day of 20 Notary Public, State of Texas My Commission Expires: 07/2006 00700-B4 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO. 3 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS OWNER'S INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTOR 1. Definitions. For purposes of this Agreement: 1.1 Owner Parties. "Owner Parties" means (a) the City of Pearland, its successors and assigns, and the Engineer, (b) any officers, employees, or agents of such persons or entities, and (c)others as required by the Contract Documents, if any. 1.2 Contractor. "Contractor" shall mean the vendor providing the service or work to be performed under this Agreement. 1.3 Subcontractor. "Subcontractor" shall include subcontractors of any tier. 1.4 ISO. "ISO"means Insurance Services Office. 2. Contractor Insurance Representations to Owner Parties 2.1 It is expressly understood and agreed that the insurance coverages required herein: 2.1.1 represent Owner Parties' minimum requirements and are not to be construed to void or limit the Contractor's indemnity obligations as contained in this Agreement nor represent in any manner a determination of the insurance coverages the Contractor should or should not maintain for its own protection; and 2.1.2 are being, or have been, obtained by the Contractor in support of the Contractor's liability and indemnity obligations under this Agreement. Neither the requirements as to insurance to be carried as provided for herein, the insolvency, bankruptcy or failure of any insurance company carrying insurance of the Contractor, nor the failure of any insurance company to pay claims accruing, shall be held to affect, negate or waive any of the provisions of this Agreement. 2.2 Failure to obtain and maintain the required insurance shall constitute a material breach of, and default under, this Agreement. If the Contractor shall fail to remedy such breach within five (5)business days after notice by the Owner, the Contractor will be liable for any and all costs, liabilities, damages and penalties resulting to the Owner Parties from such breach, unless a written waiver of the specific insurance requirement(s) is provided to the Contractor by the Owner. In the event of any failure by the Contractor to comply with the provisions of this Agreement, the Owner may, without in any way compromising or waiving any right or remedy at law or in equity, on notice to the Contractor, purchase such insurance, at the Contractor's expense, provided that the Owner shall have no obligation to do so and if the Owner shall do so, the Contractor shall not be relieved of or excused from the obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance amounts and coverages. 10-2012 00700-Cl CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 3. Conditions Affecting All Insurance Required Herein 3.1 Cost of Insurance. All insurance coverage shall be provided at the Contractor's sole expense. 3.2 Status and Rating of Insurance Company. All insurance coverage shall be written through insurance companies authorized to do business in the state in which the work is to be performed and rated no less than A-: VII in the most current edition of A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide. 3.3 Restrictive, Limiting, or Exclusionary Endorsements. All insurance coverage shall be provided to the Owner Parties in compliance with the requirements herein and shall contain no endorsements that restrict, limit, or exclude coverage required herein in any manner without the prior express written approval of the Owner. 3.4 Limits of Liability. The limits of liability may be provided by a single policy of insurance or by a combination of primary and umbrella policies, but in no event shall the total limits of liability available for any one occurrence or accident be less than the amount required herein. 3.5 Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal, or Material Reduction in Coverage. All insurance coverage shall contain the following express provision: In the event of cancellation, non-renewal, or material reduction in coverage affecting the certificate holder, thirty (30) days prior written notice shall be given to the certificate holder by certified mail or registered mail, return receipt requested. 3.6 Waiver of Subrogation. The Contractor hereby agrees to waive its rights of recovery from the Owner Parties with regard to all causes of property and/or liability loss and shall cause a waiver of subrogation endorsement to be provided in favor of the Owner Parties on all insurance coverage carried by the Contractor, whether required herein or not. 3.7 Deductible/Retention. Except as otherwise specified herein, no insurance required herein shall contain a deductible or self-insured retention in excess of $25,000 without prior written approval of the Owner. All deductibles and/or retentions shall be paid by, assumed by, for the account of, and at the Contractor's sole risk. The Contractor shall not be reimbursed for same. 4. Maintenance of Insurance. The following insurance shall be maintained in effect with limits not less than those set forth below at all times during the term of this Agreement and thereafter as required: 10-2012 00700-C2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.1 Commercial General Liability Insurance 4.1.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall cover liability arising out of all locations and operations of the Contractor, including but not limited to liability assumed under this contract (including the tort liability of another assumed in a business contract). Defense shall be provided as an additional benefit and not included within the limit of liability. 4.1.2 Form. Commercial General Liability Occurrence form (at least as broad as an unmodified ISO CG 0001 0798 or its equivalent). 4.1.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with limits of not less than: Each Occurrence Limit $1,000,000 General Aggregate Limit $2,000,000 Product-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit $2,000,000 Personal and Advertising Injury Limit $1,000,000 4.1.4 Required Endorsements a. Additional Insured. Additional insured status shall be provided in favor of the Owner Parties on any of the following: i. ISO form CG 20 10 11 85; or ii. ISO form CG 20 26 11 85; or iii. a combination of ISO forms CG 20 33 10 01 and CG 20 37 1001; or iv. any form providing equivalent protection to Owner. b. Designated Construction Project(s) Aggregate Limit. The aggregate limit shall apply separately to this Agreement through use of an ISO CG 25 03 03 97 endorsement or its equivalent. c. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. d. Personal Injury Liability. The personal injury contractual liability exclusion shall be deleted. e. Primary and Non-Contributing Liability. It is the intent of the parties to this Agreement that all insurance required herein shall be primary to all insurance available to the Owner Parties. The obligations of the Contractor's insurance shall not be affected by any other insurance available to the Owner Parties and shall seek no contribution from the Owner Parties' insurance, whether primary, excess contingent, or on any other basis. The Contractor's insurance coverage shall be endorsed to provide such primary and non- contributing liability. f. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 10-2012 00700-C3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.1.5 Continuing Commercial General Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount, including required endorsements, for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to Owner stating Work completion date. 4.2 Auto Liability Insurance 4.2.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall cover liability arising out of any auto (including owned,hired, and non-owned). 4.2.2 Form. Business Auto form (at least as broad as an unmodified ISO CA 0001 or its equivalent). 4.2.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than $1,000,000. 4.2.4 Required Endorsements a. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. b. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 4.3 Employer's Liability Insurance 4.3.1 Coverage. Employer's Liability Insurance shall be provided as follows: 4.3.2 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than: Employer's Liability: $1,000,000 each accident and each disease. 4.3.3 Required Endorsements a. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. b. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 4.4 Umbrella Liability Insurance 4.4.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall be excess over and be no less broad than all coverages described above and shall include a drop-down provision for exhaustion of underlying limits. 4.4.2 Form. This policy shall have the same inception and expiration dates as the commercial general liability insurance required above. 10-2012 00700 -C4 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.4.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than $5,000,000. 4.4.4 Continuing Umbrella Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount, including required endorsements, for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to the Owner stating Work completion date. 4.5 Professional Liability Insurance 4.5.1 Coverage. The Contractor shall provide professional liability insurance for any professional design or engineering drawing required by the work. Such insurance shall indemnify the Owner from claims arising from the negligent performance of professional services of any type, including but not limited to design or design/build services as part of the Work to be performed. 4.5.2 Form. This insurance shall include prior acts coverage sufficient to cover all services rendered by the Contractor and by its consultants under this Agreement. It is recognized that this coverage may be provided on a Claims-Made basis. 4.5.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than $1,000,000. 4.5.4 Continuing Professional Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to the Owner stating Work completion date. 4.6 Builder's Risk 4.6.1 Insureds. Insureds shall include: a. Owner, General Contactor and all Loss Payees and Mortgagees as Named Insureds; and b. subcontractors of all tiers in the Work as Additional Insureds. 10-2012 00700-C5 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.6.2 Covered Property. Such insurance shall cover: a. all structure(s) under construction, including retaining walls, paved surfaces and roadways, bridges, glass, foundation(s), footings, underground pipes and wiring, excavations, grading, backfilling or filling; b. all temporary structures (e.g., fencing, scaffolding, cribbing, false work, forms, site lighting, temporary utilities and buildings) located at the site; c. all property including materials and supplies on site for installation; d. all property including materials and supplies at other locations but intended for use at the site; e. all property including materials and supplies in transit to the site for installation by all means of transportation other than ocean transit; and f. other Work at the site identified in the Agreement to which this Exhibit is attached. Form a. Coverage shall be at least as broad as an unmodified ISO Special form, shall be provided on a completed-value basis, and shall be primary to any other coverage insurance available to the insured parties, with that other insurance being excess, secondary and non- contributing. b. No protective safeguard warranty shall be permitted. c. Required coverage shall further include: i. Additional expenses due to delay in $ TBD completion of project(where applicable) ii. Agreed value Included without sublimit iii. Damage arising from error, omission or Included without sublimit deficiency in construction methods, design, specifications, workmanship or materials, including collapse iv. Debris removal additional limit 25% of direct damage loss v. Earthquake (where applicable) $ TBD vi. Earthquake sprinkler leakage (where $ TBD applicable) vii. Expediting expenses $ TBD viii. Flood(where applicable) $ TBD ix. Freezing Included without sublimit x. Mechanical breakdown, including hot& Included without sublim cold testing(where applicable) xi. Notice of cancellation, non-renewal or Included 10-2012 00700 -C6 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT material reduction—60 days prior written notice to each insured xii. Occupancy clause, as required in F, Included below xiii. Ordinance or law Included without sublimit xiv. Pollutant clean-up and removal $ TBD xv. Preservation of property Included without sublimit xvi. Replacement cost Included xvii. Theft Included without sublimit xviii. Waiver of subrogation as required in G, Included below. 4.6.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided in an amount equal at all times to the full replacement value and cost of debris removal for any single occurrence. 4.6.4 Deductibles. Deductibles shall not exceed the following: a. All Risks of Direct Damage, Per $5,000 Occurrence, except b. Delayed Opening Waiting Period 5 Days c. Flood, Per Occurrence $25,000 or excess of NFIP if in Flood Zone A, BorV d. Earthquake and Earthquake Sprinkler $25,000 Leakage, Per Occurrence 4.6.5 Termination of Coverage. The termination of coverage provision shall be endorsed to permit occupancy of the covered property being constructed so long as such occupancy does not exceed 20% of the usable area of the property. This insurance shall be maintained in effect, unless otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents, until the earliest of the following dates: a. the date on which all persons and organizations who are insureds under the policy agree that it shall be terminated; b. the date on which final payment, as provided for in the Agreement to which this Exhibit is attached,has been made; or c. the date on which the insurable interests in the Covered Property of all insureds other than Contractor have ceased. 10-2012 00700-C7 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.6.6 Waiver of Subrogation. The waiver of subrogation provision shall be endorsed as follows: a. A waiver of subrogation shall be provided in favor of all insureds. b. The waiver of subrogation provisions shall be endorsed as follows: Should a covered loss be subrogated, either in whole or in part, your rights to any recovery will come first, and we will be entitled to a recovery only after you have been fully compensated for the loss. 5. Intentionally left blank. 6. Evidence of Insurance 6.1 Provision of Evidence. Evidence of the insurance coverage required to be maintained by the Contractor, represented by certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements issued by the insurance company or its legal agent, and must be furnished to the Owner prior to commencement of Work and not later than fifteen (15) days after receipt of this Agreement. New certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements shall be provided to the Owner prior to the termination date of the current certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements. 6.2 Form 6.2.1 All property insurance required herein shall be evidenced by ACORD form 28, "Evidence of Property Insurance". 6.2.2 All liability insurance required herein shall be evidenced by ACORD form 25, "Certificate of Insurance". 6.3 Specifications. Such certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements shall specify: 6.3.1 The Owner as a certificate holder with correct mailing address. 6.3.2 Insured's name, which must match that on this Agreement. 6.3.3 Insurance companies affording each coverage, policy number of each coverage, policy dates of each coverage, all coverages and limits described herein, and signature of authorized representative of insurance company. 6.3.4 Producer of the certificate with correct address and phone number listed. 6.3.5 Additional insured status required herein. 6.3.6 Amount of any deductibles and/or retentions. 6.3.7 Cancellation, non-renewal and material reduction in coverage notification as required by this Agreement. Additionally, the words "endeavor to" and "but failure to mail such notice shall impose no obligation or liability of any kind upon Company, it agents or representatives" shall be deleted from the cancellation provision of the ACORD 25 certificate of insurance form. 10-2012 00700-C8 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.3.8 Designated Construction Project Aggregate Limits required herein. 6.3.9 Personal Injury contractual liability required herein. 6.3.10 Primary and non-contributing status required herein. 6.3.11 Waivers of subrogation required herein. 6.4 Required Endorsements. A copy of each of the required endorsements shall also be provided. 6.5 Failure to Obtain. Failure of any Owner Party to demand such certificate or other evidence of full compliance with these insurance requirements or failure of any Owner Party to identify a deficiency from evidence that is provided shall not be construed as a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to maintain such insurance. 6.6 Certified Copies. Upon request of any Owner Party, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a certified copy of all insurance policies required herein within ten (10) days of any such request. Renewal policies, if necessary, shall be delivered to the Owner prior to the expiration of the previous policy. 6.7 Commencement of Work. Commencement of Work without provision of the required certificate of insurance, evidence of insurance and/or required endorsements, or without compliance with any other provision of this Agreement, shall not constitute a waiver by any Owner Party of any rights. The Owner shall have the right, but not the obligation, of prohibiting the Contractor or any subcontractor from performing any Work until such certificate of insurance, evidence of insurance and/or required endorsements are received and approved by the Owner. 7. Insurance Requirements of Contractor's Subcontractors 7.1 Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by all subcontractors (or provided by the Contractor on behalf of subcontractors) to cover operations performed under any subcontract agreement. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any modification in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors. The Contractor shall maintain certificates of insurance from all subcontractors containing provisions similar to those listed herein (modified to recognize that the certificate is from subcontractor) enumerating, among other things, the waivers of subrogation, additional insured status, and primary liability as required herein, and make them available to the Owner upon request. 7.2 The Contractor is fully responsible for loss and damage to its property on the site, including tools and equipment, and shall take necessary precautions to prevent damage to or vandalism, theft, burglary, pilferage and unexplained disappearance of property. Any insurance covering the Contractor's or its subcontractor's property shall be the Contractor's and its subcontractor's sole and complete means or recovery for any such loss. To the extent any loss is not covered by said insurance or subject to any deductible or co-insurance, the Contractor shall not be reimbursed for same. Should the Contractor or its subcontractors choose to self insure this risk, it is expressly agreed that the Contractor hereby waives, and shall cause its 10-2012 00700-C9 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT subcontractors to waive, any claim for damage or loss to said property in favor of the Owner Parties. 8. Use of the Owner's Equipment. The Contractor, its agents, employees, subcontractors or suppliers shall use the Owner's equipment only with express written permission of the Owner's designated representative and in accordance with the Owner's terms and condition for such use. If the Contractor or any of its agents, employees, subcontractors or suppliers utilize any of the Owner's equipment for any purpose, including machinery, tools, scaffolding, hoists, lifts or similar items owned, leased or under the control of the Owner, the Contractor shall defend, indemnify and be liable to the Owner Parties for any and all loss or damage which may arise from such use. 9. Release and Waiver. The Contractor hereby releases, and shall cause its subcontractors to release, the Owner Parties from any and all claims or causes of action whatsoever which the Contractor and/or its subcontractors might otherwise now or hereafter possess resulting in or from or in any way connected with any loss covered by insurance, whether required herein or not, or which should have been covered by insurance required herein, including the deductible and/or uninsured portion thereof, maintained and/or required to be maintained by the Contractor and/or its subcontractors pursuant to this Agreement. 10-2012 00700-C 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00800 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT The following Special Conditions modify the General Conditions, Document 00700. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Special Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1.01 Add the following paragraph to the end of Article 1.01: The OWNER'S representative on the project site is: telephone: 281. 652. The CONSTRUCTION MANAGER is: telephone: The CONSTRUCTION INSPECTOR is: telephone: ARTICLE 4 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 4.05 Add the following paragraph to Article 4.05: A Maintenance Bond in accordance with Document 00612 of the Project Manual is required for this Project. The cost of this bond shall be included in the CONTRACTOR'S Bid Proposal. Attachment No. 3 To General Conditions, Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor, Article 4.6 Builder's Risk—Builder's Risk Insurance is Not Required for this project. ARTICLE 5 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 5.08 Add Article 5.08: The Contract Time as defined in the bid and other sections of the Contract Documents includes a certain number of rain days. Based on the Alvin Weather Center Records, the average annual rain days from June 1898 to December 1996 is 40 days calculated from all precipitation days of record. The CONTRACTOR is required to keep a record of rain days at the site. The record of rain days must be accepted and signed by the City Inspector monthly, and shall be reported on the monthly pay estimate submittal. At the end of the contract, the CONTRACTOR will be credited only for 08/2018 00800- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT the number of accepted rain days that exceed 40 rain days per year, proportionate to the original Contract Time. General Notes: Section 01500 Temporary Facilities requires CONTRACTOR to provide high speed internet access in the Field Office. BIDDER is Not Required to provide either a Field Office or any internet access for this project. All other requirements remain and will be required per the section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate with the Owner for all Traffic Control Documents.Contractor to coordinate with the Owner for procurement of Traffic Control Documents prior to permitting. Contractor is to keep a minimum of one lane open at all times,in both directions. No lane closures to extend beyond the defined work day. Contractor Will Not be required to provide an on-site construction office for the duration of this project. END OF SECTION 08/2018 00800-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION Section 00811 WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION 1.01 In accordance with the Prevailing Wage law on Public Works (Article 2258 of the Texas Government Code), the public body awarding the contract does hereby specify the rates shown on the attached tables following to be the general prevailing rates in the locality in which the work is being performed. 1.02 This prevailing wage rate does not prohibit the payment of more than the rates stated. 1.03 The wage scale for engineering construction is to be applied to all site work greater than five (5) feet from an exterior wall of new building under construction or from an exterior wall of an existing building. 10-2012 00811 - 1 of 1 1/28/2020 beta.SAM.gov "General Decision Number: TX20200032 01/03/2020 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20190032 `ate: Texas Construction Type: Heavy County: Brazoria County in Texas. HEAVY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (Including Water and Sewer Lines (Does Not Include Flood Control) Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of $10.80 for calendar year 2020 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.80 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2020. If this contract is covered by the EO and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must pay workers in that classification at least the wage rate determined through the conformance process set forth in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii) (or the EO minimum wage rate, if it is higher than the conformed wage rate). The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Please note that nis EO applies to the above-mentioned types of contracts tered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but it does not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(2)-(60). Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/03/2020 * SFTX0669-001 04/01/2019 Rates Fringes SPRINKLER FITTER (Fire Sprinklers) $ 29.53 21.27 SUTX2005-018 05/18/2005 Rates Fringes Carperter $ 14.38 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER $ 11.37 1.13 ECTRICIAN $ 18.40 1.34 Formbuilder/Formsetter $ 9.83 1.69 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING $ 11.29 0.00 https://beta.sam.gov/wage-determination/TX20200032/0?index=wd&is_active=true&date_filter index=0&date_rad_selection=date&wdType=dbra&con... 1/4 1/28/2020 beta.SAM.gov Laborers: Common $ 8.99 1.25 Landscape $ 7.35 0.00 Mason Tender Cement $ 9.96 0.00 Pipelayer $ 9.63 1.50 PIPEFITTER $ 17.00 0.04 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR: Backhoe $ 12.74 0.00 Bulldozer $ 12.46 0.00 Crane $ 11.00 0.74 Excavator $ 16.74 0.00 Front End Loader $ 10.47 1.28 Grader $ 12.20 1.48 Tractor $ 11.29 1.45 TRUCK DRIVER $ 14.42 1.00 WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of ""identifiers"" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed https://beta.sam.gov/wage-determination/TX20200032/0?index=wd&is_active=true&date_filter_index=0&date_rad_selection=date&wdType=dbra&con... 2/4 1/28/2020 beta.SAM.gov in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or ""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of —he union which prevailed in the survey for this assification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU"" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the -gage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion to for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination https://beta.sam.gov/wage-determination/TX20200032/0?index=wd&is_active=true&date_filter_index=0&date_rad_selection=date&wdType=d bra&con... 3/4 1/28/2020 beta.SAM.gov * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. END OF GENERAL DECISION https://beta.sam.gov/wage-determination/TX20200032/0?index=wd&is_active=true&date_filter index=0&date_rad_selection=date&wdType=dbra&con... 4/4 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO. I Date: March 16. 2020 PROJECT: Cullen Regional Litt Station Rehabilitation BID NO.: 0220-27 BID DATE: March 26, 2020 at 2:00 PM FROM: David W Kasper, P.E. Project Manager ARKK Engineers, LLC 7322 Southwest Fwy, Ste. 1040, Houston,TX 77074 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: I. The pre-bid conference is no longer mandatory. The non-mandatory pre-bid conference will be held at the City of Pearland City Hall Annex at 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581 at 3:00 p.m. on March 18, 2020. SPECIFICATIONS: No changes. CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: No changes. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 David W. Kasper, P.E. Project Manager 2-22-12 00900- 1 of 1 CITY CF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO. 2 Date: March 20,2020 PROJECT: Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation �,,��� `OF,,rt2. BID NO.: 0220-27 Osit � ` fit fDAVID W. KASPER..� BID DATE: April 2, 2020 at 2:00 PM 7.01•"".••................`.....',�c ti. 65294 r 4 FROM: David W Kasper,P.E. ` AZe."4! 40.0.'• w:'0 Project Manager 't giNA ti ARKK Engineers, LLC 7322 Southwest Fwy, Ste. 1040, Houston,TX 77074 W To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications. and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: 1. Bid Date:The Bid Opening Date is changed to be April 2.2020. 2. Section 00500 Standard Form of Agreement Article 3—CONTRACT TIME Item 3.1 - Replace with the following: The Work will be Substantially Complete (as defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions) within 180 calendar days (including weekends and holidays) from the date when the Contract Time commences to run as provided in paragraph 5.01 of the General Conditions (as revised in the Special Conditions if applicable), and completed and ready for Final Payment within two hundred and ten (210) days from the date when the Contract Time commences to run.No work will be allowed on Sundays TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: No changes. 2-22-12 00900- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: SHEET 2: Item 10 under the General Scope of Work table: The wall liner thickness is to be 1.5 inches thick SHEET 11 —Electrical Legend: Append the Conduit Schedule to add the following items: Size& No. Conductors From To Description GEN- 2" C,W/3-#1 GENERATOR 101 +#1 GND GENERATOR ATS POWER GEN- 2" C, W/2-#10+4-#12 GENERATOR 120V 102 +#10 GND CONTROL PANEL GENERATOR LOADS GEN- 1"C,W/ANNUCIATOR SERVICE GENERATOR 103 CABLE GENERATOR RACK ANNUNCIATOR AUTOMATIC GENERATOR GEN- TRANSFER ALARMS AND 104 1"C, W/8-#14+14 GND GENERATOR SWITCH STATUS INFORMATION TO BIDDERS: 1. Attached is the Pre-Bid Meeting Sign in Sheet and Meeting Notes. 2. Answers to Questions from Contractors: a. Sheet 12 Note 3. Who pays for the gas line and meter provided by Utility Co.to the distribution line? Answer: The City is handling the meter installation and gas line extension between the gas main and the meter. The Contractor is responsible for all items"downstream" of the gas meter. b. Sheet 7 Alt.No. 1 shows adding a grout fillet around full interior floor. Is this structural grout that is requested and does it require rebar? No spec provided for structural grout. Answer: Use concrete as specified in Section 03300—Cast in Place Concrete, Section 2.05. Paragraph A—Type II Portland cement, ASTM—Cl 50 4000 psi mix for concrete in contact with sewage. No rebar is required. c. Section 00500 Article 3./3.1 states we have 180 days to substantial competition I assume for the base bid. If the owner decides to do the Alternate No. 1, how many additional days will the contractor get for the additional work added to the scope? Answer: The contract time of 180 days reflects that Add Alternate I is anticipated to be awarded. The 180 days is intended to provide ample lead time to procure the generator. 2-22-12 00900-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM d. Sheet 14 conduits GEN-101, 102, 103 and 104 are not on the conduit schedule on Sheet 11. Answer—See the appended conduit schedule in this addendum. e. Alternate I Bid Item No. 6 states the liner at minimum 1.5"thickness. Per Sheet 3 General Scope of Work. Alt.No.4 and No. 10 states 1"thick. Please Clarify. Answer—By Addendum 2, the notes are revised to clarify that the wall liner thickness is to be 1.5 inches. f. Sheet 3 at the Bypass Pumps location is the contractor required to provide temporary fencing around the pumps and discharge piping? Answer: The Contractor is responsible to protect his equipment from vandalism,theft, misuse,etc. g. Also does this area belong to the City of Pearland? Answer: The Contractor should assume that the City of Pearland has easement rights to install the temporary bypass pumping operation as shown on the plan. h. Sheet 6. Is the contractor to install safety grate on the two spare existing pump hatches? Answer: No, only on the 3 opening as shown. i. Sheet 12 at the location shown for the existing M.T.S. is the radio control panel. The service and generator duct bank is shown going to the wrong location. The existing M.T.S., disconnect and remote generator outlet is located between the main control panel and the radio control panel on the north side of the pad. Answer: Yes,conduits should be routed to the existing MTS location between the existing pump control and radio panels. j. Specification Section 02790-2/2.01A. states the contractor can use the electrical powered pumps or diesel driven pumps for the bypass pumping. Can the contractor use the existing electrical service to power the dewatering system with Electrical Pumps? Answer: For the purpose of the Bid Phase, please assume that no, if electrical pumps are used, the Contractor will need to provide a generator to drive the electrical pumps. k. Sheet 14 on the conduit and conductors from the service to the now A.T.S.states to modify and extend circuits as required. Does this apply to the conduit and conductors from the existing control panel to the new A.T.S. also? Answer: Yes,this applies to the conduit and conductors from the existing control panel to the new A.T.S. 2-22-12 00900-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM 1. Sheet 15 Note 2 states all electrical devices and enclosures shall be mounted at 24" above the 500 year base flood plans. Please note that there are no elevations shown for the concrete foundation pad located at the new A.T.S. and new generator pad or the 500 year elevation given on the drawings. Please provide these elevations so the contractor will know if he can meet this requirement. Answer—Since the site is not within the 100 year flood plain,elevating above the 500 year flood elevation is not applicable to this site. All electrical devices and enclosures shall be mounted at least 24" above adjacent grade. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 2 C •C)V-173 David W. Kaspe . . Project Manager 2-22-12 00900-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Section 00100 INVITATION TO BID CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Lowest Responsible Bidder Sealed Electronic Bids will be accepted for the following project, in the City's E-bid System. Electronic bids shall be submitted through the City's web site at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. All interested Bidders are required to register as a "supplier" on the City's E-bid System at the above web address and clicking on "Supplier Registration". Registration provides automatic access to any changes to the Plans, Specifications or Bid time and date. However, submission of an E-bid requires completing a short registration questionnaire found on this web site. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services,New(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,Heavy (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,Trade(New Construction) For more information regarding registration instructions, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200, included in the project bid documents viewable on the web site. Questions regarding electronic bidding should be directed to City Purchasing Officer at ebids(a,pearlandtx.gov. All Bids submitted electronically will remain confidential until the opening date and time when they will be opened and read into the public record. Bids, shall be submitted on the form provided in the E-bid System and submitted electronically through this system to the City Purchasing Officer, City of Pearland, City Hall Annex located at 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. Electronic bids will be accepted until 2:00 p.m., Thursday, April 2, 2020. All Bids shall reference the following project information in the appropriate locations in provided electronic format. All properly submitted bids shall be publicly "opened" and read aloud into the public record following the closing of the acceptance period for the construction of: Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WW1903 BID NO.: 0220-27 A non-inundatory pre-bid conference will be held at the City of Pearland City Hall Annex at 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581 at 3:00 p.m. on March 18,2020. The project area is located on the west side of Cullen Boulevard,just north of Broadway, on a tract situated between a US Post Office and Exxon gas station, in the City of Pearland. The project involves the rehabilitation of an existing wastewater lift station, and all labor, equipment, materials,and incidentals required for the project. Upon award of a contract, the successful Bidder will be required to utilize the City's web based project management software, "Pro-Trak" for the administration of the construction project, 02-2020 00100-1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID including but not limited to, all transmittals and material submittals, RFI's, RFC's, Change Orders, Applications for Payment and all project communications with the City, its Construction Manager and Engineer. This system has certain hardware, interne access and operation requirements that form the basis for all project communications, documentation and records for the project. For more information, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200. Electronic Bid Documents: including Contract Documents, Plans and Technical Specifications are available for download on the City's Website at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx upon registration. The documents are NOT viewable without registration. These same documents are also available at the following locations. Amtek Plan Room (713) 956-0100 4001 Sherwood Houston,TX 77092 The Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. (713) 334-7100 2400 Augusta, Suite 350 Houston,TX 77057 Virtual Builders Exchange (832)613-0201 7035 W. Tidwell Building J, Suite 112 Houston,TX 77092 McGrawHill Construction—Dodge Reports 1-800-393-6343 No plan fees or deposits are required for plans and bid documents obtained through the City's E- bid System. BIDDERS MUST REGISTER AS A SUPPLIER ON THE CITY'S E-BID SYSTEM IN ORDER TO SUBMIT A BID EVEN IF BID DOCUMENTS ARE OBTAINED VIA ONE OF THE PLAN HOUSES. Bidders accept sole responsibility for downloading all of the required documents, plans, specifications bid forms and addenda required for bidding. No bid may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of ninety (90) days subsequent to the bid opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to"day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). Bid Security and Bonds: Bid Security in the form of Cashier's Check, Certified Check, or Bid Bond payable to the City of Pearland in the amount of 5% of the total base bid price must accompany each proposal. Bidders submitting bids electronically through the E-bid System shall scan and up-load a copy of the sealed Bid Bond as an attachment to their bid. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two bidders and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the Bid Opening. Bid Security shall be delivered to: Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive,Pearland, Texas 77581. 02-2020 00100-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID The successful Bidder must furnish Performance and Payment Bonds as required by Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code or other applicable law, as amended, upon the form included in the Contract Documents, in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, such bonds to be executed by a corporate surety duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and named in the current list of"Treasury Department Circular No. 570", naming the City of Pearland, Texas as Obligee. Additionally, the successful bidder shall be required to provide a one year Maintenance Bond for the improvements installed as part of this work, as provided in the Special Conditions of Agreement. Equal Opportunity: All responsible bidders will receive consideration for award of contract without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. Nondiscrimination: The City, in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252, 42 U.S.C. 2000d to 2000d-4 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Transportation, Subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally- Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such Act, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in consideration for an award. DBE/SBE Goal: The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE)goal for this project is 00%0. The Small Business Enterprise (SBE) goal for this project is 0%. DBEs and SBEs selected must be TxDOT approved. Race neutral participation is encouraged and can be achieved through various supplier and subcontracting opportunities. Selection Criteria: The Contract is to be awarded on the basis of Lowest Responsible Bidder. In identifying this criteria the City will consider: 1) lowest total bid price for all work listed and specifically requested, including but not limited to: Base Bid, Extra Work items and selected Alternates. The City of Pearland reserves the right to award a contract based on any combination of the above considered to be in its best interests or to reject any or all bids. A bid that has been "opened" may not be changed for the purposes of correcting an error in the bid price. Young Lorfing,TRMC City Secretary, City of Pearland First Publication date March 4,2020 Second Publication date March 11, 2020 • 02-2020 00100-3 of 3 mot �'t�4. CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECTS DEPARTMENT 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland,Texas 77581 ,, http://pearlandtx.gov es r. i s94. PRE-BID MEETING NOTES Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation March 18,2020 3:00 pm The pre-bid meeting for this project is mandatory. Please make sure you have signed the sign-in sheet. This meeting is not to make changes in the design. but to answer any questions about the plans and specifications. Any questions you have shall be sent in writing through the E-bid system at ebids(a,pearlandtx.gov. There will be no decisions made at this meeting. All questions and clarifications regarding project documents shall be made in writing and will be addressed by an addendum. Addendums will be available for viewing along with the contract documents. l) Introduction of Participants a) City of Pearland Project Manager: Cara Davis 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, TX 77581 281.652.1642 office cdav i s@pearl andtx.gov a) Design Engineer: David W. Kasper, P.E. ARKK Engineers, LLC 7322 Southwest Fwy. Ste. 1 040 Houston,TX 77074 713-400-2755 office 713-400-2754 fax 2) Introduction of the Project a) Project Name: Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation b) City of Pearland Project Number: WW 1903 c) Bid No: 0220-27 3) Project Overview a) Overview of Work Base bid: • Replace 3 existing pumps,discharge elbows, power cord,and rails w/3 new Flygt submersible pumps(contact: Hahn Equipment, Houston TX) • Replace all pump discharge piping and valves, Air release valve, and discharge piping supports as shown on the mechanical plan, mechanical section, and details. Design 1 of 3 32.Revised 7/25/08 Install three (3) safety grates as shown. • Install a new Vapex Nano odor control unit and associated piping, enclosure, AC, and accessories (contact: Pump Solutions Inc.New Caney Texas) • Demo/Replace 2 existing wet well vents as shown on the drawings and details • Recoating of existing above-grade piping,valves,and fittings that are to remain in service • Bypass pumping to accomplish the installation of the above items • Electrical-bring power to the Vapex Nano unit as shown on the electrical drawings • Electrical - Install auxiliary power generator as shown on the electrical drawings. Provide automatic transfer switch,panel modifications, conduit,wire,etc. as show Add Alternate 1: • Install 1.5" thick 100% calcium aluminate wall liner on lift station wet well walls and ceiling (20' diameter wet well) contact - National Works 713-785-4500. Requires removal of existing T-Lock wall liner system. Install floor fillet as shown on the Mechanical Section. • Bypass pumping to accomplish the wet well wall liner(removal of T-Lock system and application &curing of new wall liner) b) The Contractor shall be aware of existing utilities in and around the project areas. It is the Contractor's responsibility to locate and verify all utilities prior to construction. Contractor must contact and coordinate with all pertinent entities(i.e.AT&T,CenterPoint Energy,Comcast,etc...) and meet their requirements. c) Preliminary Cost Estimates:The estimated construction cost is $871,000. 4) Contract a) Award i) Contract will be awarded to the lowest responsible and responsive bidder. ii) Notice of Award—Successful Bidder shall return Standard Form of Agreement and Payment, Performance,and Maintenance Bonds within 10 days. iii) Notice to Proceed—Contractor shall commence work within ten (10) days after receipt of Notice to Proceed b) Project Duration i) Substantial Completion: 180 calendar days ii) Complete/Final Payment: 210 calendar days Design 2 of 3 32.Revised 7/25/08 iii) Liquidated Damages: $400 per day beyond established Substantial Completion date; $400 after the established Final Completion date. 5) Bidding Process a) Advertised: March 4. 2020& March 11,2020 in Pearland Reporter b) Non-Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference: March 18.2020 at City of Pearland City Hall Council Chambers c) Construction Plans & Specs available for download through the City's website at: https://pearland.ionwave.netlLogin.aspx d) Additional questions regarding the project plans or proposal documents must be submitted in writing through the e-bid system by Wednesday,March 25th to ebids ar,pearlandtx.gov. e) Sealed bids due: Thursday,April 2"d by 2:00 pm (per Addendum 2). Bids shall be submitted on the form provided in the E-bid System and submitted electronically through this system to the City Purchasing Officer. Bids will be opened electronically and read aloud after the 2:00 pm deadline. t) Bidder Qualifications—Three lowest bidders will be required to submit within 24 hours of bid opening. g) Bid Security—Five percent (5%) bid security must accompany each bid proposal in the form of certified check, cashier's check or Bid Bond. Low bidder will be required to submit original within 24 hours of bid opening. 6) Closing comments Anything that has been said during the Pre-bid Conference is for the purpose of assisting in the clarification of the details of this project. This discussion is intended to be helpful to the potential bidders, but in no way is it meant to change anything contained in the Bid Documents. Additional questions regardingto project plans or bid documents must be submitted in writing to the Design Engineer and City's Project Manager. Bidders must rely on Addenda for official answers to issues that are either not covered or are ambiguous in the Bid Documents. All Pre-Bid participants will be notified of future Addenda, if required interested bidders are responsible for obtaining Addenda from the Design Consultant. The City expects the highest standards of customer service and customer satisfaction. Field personnel must extend courtesy, cooperation,and rapid response to customer concerns. Communicate any customer request, complaints,and/or concerns to the Project Manager, Construction Manager,or the Construction Inspector as soon as possible. Design 3 of 3 32.Revised 7/25/08 itA 4, ri,. PRE-BID CONFERENCE v- Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation wPE . z ' ,a Project No. WW 1903 C. * AS March 18, 2020 3:00 p.m., City Hall Annex es r: eq'' Name (Print) Company Phone Number Email r,`iV i.00 14671a- c, z. 2,1 9.2J 69 Tates. G Vic& L.44r.zem Citietil.es1- 661-A..ki,.c) Ciai-yie y9'7 _ .Z.656.-5 � (', ins O '- ter -Coil LNS. 11Ar ..- ARici4- 713- 4n) -Z 7s3 r,/.:c,,ld,/fisc tv i+r ' r-ce.,.. icV , / 16 11.g- ya.) 2 7 ‘j14'11 M i .t XDp '1:;€I LOS 2_ i Le-I-L 1,1) Ivkl. a+,eth 14,1,4.44 L.cke v 1444.61-1oAriesv tri. C 0, 713-Vs-tirv5c oef' N-tc ivt CO3fPtf 404 c.fvJ •1 f 1 0A `14r PRE-BID CONFERENCE 'vg.. Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation , Project No. WW 1903 t Y ° "x March 18, 2020 3:00 p.m., City Hall Annex x 6 fsi% s41% Name (Print) Company Phone Number Email GAILe 4-- /5/eicze7e6 ' .`. 1�+ 2d c�t� am/ 5ex.". z8/-Y3S L S"G _ 14147Z04-04 .-.Kv, ./.- cZGf of-o 141A" "7! 3 ' .� p�� r1 S%U= .� y��y S� ✓ Y. r Construction PRE-BID CONFERENCE Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation 4.• ileg444 Project No. WW 1903 March 18, 2020 3:00 p.m., City Hall Annex tr, Name(Print) Company Phone Number Email Zetth- 11(4.10 C4414 PUVI4p30,14-iong cry__ F5-3a- gr- IL 'a -ackc,k. 0-p,„.42p 0 PL,E 0,)e LK. RAjkAP SOLAA-7 nk) I NC Z.C3 134.4 -5(7.7 5 Pii4, 0,,tri,e).sa._ixTlotos JT Co ion CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO.3 Date: March 30,2020 PROJECT: Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation BID NO.: 0220-27 BID DATE: April 2, 2020 at 2:00 PM FROM: David W Kasper, P.E. Project Manager ARKK Engineers, LLC 7322 Southwest Fwy, Ste. 1040, Houston, TX 77074 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. INFORMATION TO BIDDERS: 1. Answers to Questions from Contractors: a. On Addendum #2, Question L: Does this 24" above adjacent grade pad apply to the generator enclosure? If so the top of the pad elevation on Sheet 16 will have to be raised by 20" above top of concrete shown which will make the concrete pad 3'-8" thick not 2' as shown in Section A-A around the outer edge of the pad and select fill will need to be added under the 1thick pad. Please Clarify. Answer: No, this requirement does not apply to the generator enclosure. b. On Addendum #2, Conduit No. GEN-101 doesn't call for a neutral wire. Sheet 16 Generator Installation Detail states do not ground generator neutral at the generator but to ground generator neutral at the service (A.T.S.). Please Clarify. Answer: No 277V loads are present, a neutral conductor is not required. c. Sheet 14 and Specification Section 16211-4/2.02 B. states for the generator rating to be 60KW. Per Loftin Equipment(Kohler)the generator is undersized for the lift station based on their sizing software. It is showing this project needs a 180 KW generator unless they 2.22-12 00900- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM are only running one of the pumps or have time delaysNFD's on the loads. They are concerned that the 60 KW is not going to pull the loads due to the inrush on initial state-up. Please see the attached summary sizing report. Please clarify what size generator is required for this project so that the contractor can size the correct concrete foundation. Answer: The Generator is required to start all electrical loads as shown on plans and specs. In the event a specific manufacturer cannot meet the starting requirements of the electrical loads as shown, manufacturer should provide larger KW unit as needed such that their specific genset unit can start all the required loads shown at the site. Contractor to verify loads per spec section 16211-1.07 and provide generator rated accordingly to start and operate all loads. Existing lift pump time delays should be staggered to prevent all pumps starting at once. The 60 KW Generator size calculations were based on Cummins Powersuite software. The Kohler sizing report provided shows that the 180 KW Generator would be considerably oversized for this project. Contractor is responsible for coordinating final generator size/dimensions and providing concrete foundation sized to match generator provided. d. Sheet 6 on the existing 14" FM where the contractor is to make the bypass connection. Is the contractor supposed to recoat that riser?Not Shown. Answer: Recoating of this riser pipe is not in the scope of work. e. With the Stay at Home order until 4-3-2020 will this project still bid on 4/2/2020? Answer: Unless an Addendum is issued changing the bid date, the bid opening date will remain. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 3 el5:73-2,7 S1).-C)V- ''''...--P�E'OF Tek� , David W. Kaspe * DAVID W.KASPER • Project Manager `,o?A 86294 ;c , At j '''%Aes<,/CENSE.'\? .'4c L•ENG 2-22-12 00900-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO. 4 Date: March 31, 2020 PROJECT: Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation BID NO.: 0220-27 BID DATE: April 2, 2020 at 2:00 PM FROM: David W Kasper, P.E. Project Manager ARKK Engineers, LLC 7322 Southwest Fwy, Ste. 1040, Houston, TX 77074 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. INFORMATION TO BIDDERS: The bid for Cullen Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation will close on Thursday, 04/02/2020 at 2:00 p.m. as scheduled. The closing/unsealing of the bid will be executed remotely. If you wish to dial in to hear the results, use the following information: Conference #: 281-652-1955 Meeting#: 1790# Access Code: 097l# TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: Section 16211 Natural Gas Engine Generator and Controls Change paragraph 2.02 (E)to: "E.Generator shall be capable of starting loads in the above sequence with not more than /0% instantaneous terminal frequency drop. See section 1.04 A 7. " Change paragraph 2.01 (A) to: 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Natural Gas Engine Driven Generator Set, complete with accessories, shall be: 1. Kohler 2. Generac 2-22-12 00900- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM 3. Cummins 4. AKSA 5. Approved Equal B. Engines shall be: 1. Kohler 2. Generac 3. Cummins 4. AKSA 5. Approved Equal END OF ADDENDUM NO. 4 *f *...........t.)C)V' 1 \#it\ David W. Kaspe . . ; DAVID W.KASPER Project Manager % 86294 .4; < ,..q:NCENSER, ,, 2-22-12 00900-2 of 2 SUMMARY OF WORK SECTION 01100 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Summary of the Work including work by Owner, Owner furnished products, Work sequence, future Work, Contractor use of Premises, and Owner occupancy. 1.02 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Work of the contract includes: Base bid: 1. Replace 3 existing pumps, discharge elbows, power cord, and rails w/3 new Flygt submersible pumps (contact: Hahn Equipment, Houston TX) 2. Replace all pump discharge piping and valves,Air release valve, and discharge piping supports as shown on the mechanical plan, mechanical section, and details. Install three (3) safety grates as shown. 3. Install a new Vapex Nano odor control unit and associated piping, enclosure, AC, and accessories (contact: Pump Solutions Inc. New Caney Texas) 4. Demo/Replace 2 existing wet well vents as shown on the drawings and details 5. Recoating of existing above-grade piping, valves, and fittings that are to remain in service 6. Bypass pumping to accomplish the installation of the above items 7. Electrical -bring power to the Vapex Nano unit as shown on the electrical drawings 8. Electrical - Install auxiliary power generator as shown on the electrical drawings. Provide automatic transfer switch, panel modifications, conduit, wire, etc. as show 1.03 ALTERNATES A. Alternate bids quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option. B. Volunteer Alternates, any Alternate not specified in this Section, will not be considered. 19-024 01100-1 SUMMARY OF WORK C. Accepted Alternates will be identified in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. D. Bids will be evaluated as described in the General Instructions to Bidders. After determination of lowest bidder, consideration will be given to Alternates and Bid Price adjustments and award will be made on the basis of the most advantageous bid as determined by the City. E. Description of Alternates: a. ADD ALTERNATE 1 BID: 1. Install 1.5" thick 100% calcium aluminate wall liner on lift station wet well walls and ceiling(20' diameter wet well)contact-National Works 713-785-4500. Requires removal of existing T-Lock wall liner system. Install floor fillet as shown on the Mechanical Section. 2. Bypass pumping to accomplish the wet well wall liner(removal of T- Lock system and application& curing of new wall liner) 1.04 ALLOWANCE FOR GENERAL CONSTRUCTION ITEMS A. When included on the Bid Form, cash allowances have been established for the installation of any additional items for this project as identified by the City for General Construction Items as directed by the Engineer. Contractor shall submit a detailed breakdown to the City for approval prior to performing additional work. Payment will not include any coordination costs. 1.05 WORK BY OWNER—NOT APPLICABLE 1.06 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS—NOT APPLICABLE 1.07 WORK SEQUENCE A. Schedule to be provided by the Contractor. 1.08 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. The Owner will occupy the sites during the entire period of construction for the conduct of normal operations. B. Cooperate with the Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate the Owner's operations. Coordinate Contractor's activities with Engineer. C. Schedule work to accommodate this requirement. D. If owner uses or occupies any or all parts of the work or premises, this action does not signify substantial completion or any limits on the contractor's liability or contractual responsibility of premises. 19-024 01100-2 SUMMARY OF WORK PART2 PRODUCTS - NOTUSED PART3 EXECUTION - NOTUSED END OF SECTION 19-024 01100-3 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES Section 01140 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.1 GENERAL 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A General use of the Project Site including properties inside and outside of the limits of construction, work affecting roads, ramps, streets and driveways and notification to adjacent occupants. B References to Technical Specifications: l Section 01350—Submittals 2 Section 01730—Cutting&Patching 3 Section 01555 —Traffic Control &Regulation 4 Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 5 Section 01720—Field Surveying 6 Section 02980—Pavement Repair 7 Section 02770—Curbs, Curb & Gutter, &Headers 8 Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, & Embankment Materials 9 Section 02922—Sodding 10 Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding 1.3 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 Submittals. 1.4 LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION A Confine access,operations,and storage areas to limits of construction as shown on the Plans provided by Owner as stipulated in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement;trespassing on abutting lands or other lands in the area is not allowed. B Contractor may make arrangements,at Contractor's cost,for temporary use of private properties,in which case Contractor and Contractor's surety shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against claims or demands arising from such use of properties outside of the limits of construction. 1. Improvements to private properties made for the Contractor's use mustbe removed upon completion of the Work. a. No fill material may be placed in temporary work areas or on adjacent private properties without the written permission of the Engineer or the issuance of a Fill Permit by the City of Pearland or other governing entity. C Restrict total length which materials may be distributed along the route of the construction at any one time to 1,000 linear feet unless otherwise approved by Engineer. 01/2018 01140- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.5 PROPERTIES OUTSIDE OF LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION A If Contractor's means and methods require the acquisition of Temporary Construction Easements or any access to private property not already included in the above, such access and documentation along with any costs involved shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B Altering the condition of properties adjacent to and along the limits of construction will not be permitted unless authorized by the Engineer and property owner(s) as noted above. C Means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures which will result in damage to properties or improvements in the vicinity outside of the limits of construction will not be permitted without temporary or permanent easements as determined by the Engineer. D Any damage to properties outside of the limits of construction shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer and at no cost to the Owner. E Contractor shall protect or replace all property corners, monuments or other demarcations disturbed, damaged or lost as a result of his activities. The replacement of these devices shall be properly documented to the satisfaction of the City by a Registered Public Land Surveyor with copies delivered to the Owner or private property owner. 1.6 USE OF SITE A Obtain approvals of governing authorities prior to impeding or closing public roads or streets. Do not close consecutive intersections simultaneously B Notify Engineer 48 hours prior to closing a street or a street crossing. Permits for street closures are required in advance and are the responsibility of the Contractor. C Maintain access for emergency vehicles including access to fire hydrants. D Avoid obstructing drainage ditches or inlets; when obstruction is unavoidable due to requirements of the Work, provide grading and temporary drainage structures to maintain unimpeded flow. E Locate and protect private lawn sprinkler systems which may exist on rights-of-ways within the Project Site. Repair or replace damaged systems to condition equal to or better than that existing at start of the Work. F When required by the Work, cutting, patching, and fitting of Work to existing facilities,accommodating installation or connection of Work with existing facilities,or uncovering Work for access, inspection, or testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 01730—Cutting&Patching. G Fires are not permitted on the Project Site. 01/2018 01140-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.7 NOTIFICATION TO ADJACENT OCCUPANTS A Notify individual occupants in areas to be affected by the Work of the proposed construction and time schedule. Notification shall be 24 hours, 72 hours and 2 weeks prior to work being performed within 200 feet of the homes or businesses. B Include in notification names and telephone numbers of two representatives for resident contact,who will be available on 24-hour call. Include precautions which will be taken to protect private property and identify potential access or utility inconvenience or disruption. C Submit proposed notification to Engineer for approval. Consideration shall be given to the ethnicity of the neighborhood where English is not the dominant language. Notice shall be in an understandable language. 1.8 EXCAVATION IN STREETS AND DRIVEWAYS A Avoid hindering or needlessly inconveniencing public travel on a street or any intersecting alley or street for more than two blocks at any one time, except by permission of the Engineer. B Obtain the Engineer's approval when the nature of the Work requires closing of an entire street. Permits required for street closure are the Contractor's responsibility. Avoid unnecessary inconvenience to abutting property owners. C Remove surplus materials and debris and open 1000 feet or less for public use as work in that block is complete. D Acceptance of any portion of the Work will not be based on return of street to public use. E Avoid obstructing driveways or entrances to private property. F Provide temporary crossing or complete the excavation and backfill in one continuous operation to minimize the duration of obstruction when excavation is required across drives or entrances. G Provide barricades and signs in accordance with Section 01555 —Traffic Control & Regulation. 1.9 CLEAN-UP A Maintain Project Site in a neat and orderly manner. B Perform daily clean-up in and around construction zone of dirt,debris,scrap materials, other disposable items. C Leave streets, driveways, and sidewalks broom-clean or its equivalent at the end of each work day. D Promptly remove barriers,signs,and components of other control systems that are no 01/2018 01140-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES longer being utilized. E Dispose of waste and excess materials in accordance with requirements of Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal. 1.10 RESTORATION A Restore damaged permanent facilities to pre-construction conditions unless replacement or abandonment of facilities is indicated on the Plans. B Repair/Replace removed or damaged pavement in accordance with Section 02980— Pavement Repair and removed or damaged curbs,gutters, and headers in accordance with Section 02770 — Curbs, Curb & Gutter, & Headers. Repair/Replace with like materials to match existing style, lines, grades, etc., unless otherwise directed by Engineer. C Repair turf areas which become damaged by Contractor's operations at no additional cost to Owner. D Level with bank sand or topsoil, conforming to Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill,& Embankment Materials, as approved by the Engineer. E Provide sodding in areas of residential land use over the surface of ground disturbed during construction and not paved, or not designated to be paved, in accordance with Section 02922—Sodding. Use only block sodding; do not use spot sodding or sprigging. F Provide hydromulch seeding in areas of commercial, industrial or undeveloped land use over the surface of ground disturbed during construction and not paved, or not designated to be paved, in accordance with Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding. G Water and level newly sodded areas with adjoining turf using steel wheel rollers appropriate for sodding 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 01/2018 01140-4of4 SPECIAL PROVISION TO SECTION 01200 — MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT SPECIAL PROVISION TO SECTION 01200— MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Add the Following to Section 1.05 c Measurement and Payment: Provide a Schedule of Val ues as a Submittal to the Engi neer at the Pre-Construction Conference for all Lump Sum items if progress payments for those items are expected by the Contractor. Items of work in the Lump Sum bid item for Lift Station Rehabilitation should be al l ocated such that the fol I owi ng items, at a mini mum, are al located i n such a way that general I y reflects the Contractor's cost of materials and value of work performed: ■ Purchase and Delivery of Pumping Equipment ■ Installation of Pumps ■ Installation of Piping ■ Installation of Pipe Supports and Hardware ■ Installation of Protective Coatings ■ Bypass Pumping END OF SECTION SPECIAL PROVISION TO 01200-1 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Section 01200 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Procedures for measurement and payment of Work. B Conditions for nonconformance assessment and nonpayment for rejected products. C References to Technical Specifications: See Bid Proposal Sheet D Reference Standards: 1. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 1.02 AUTHORITY A Units and methods delineated in this Section are intended to complement the criteria of the Technical Specifications and Section 00300—Bid Proposal. B In the event of conflict, the unit specified for Bid Items in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal shall govern. C Measurements and quantities submitted by the Contractor will be verified by the Engineer. D Contractor shall provide necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel as required by Engineer to verify quantities. 1.03 UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED A Quantity and measurement estimates stated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal are for contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements supplied or placed in the Work, authorized and verified by Engineer shall determine payment as stated in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. B If the actual Work requires greater or lesser quantities than those quantities indicated in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal, provide the required quantities at the unit prices contracted except as otherwise stated in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement or in executed Change Order. 1.04 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES A Measurement by Weight: Reinforcing steel, rolled or formed steel or other metal shapes will be measured by CRSI or AISC Manual of Steel Construction weights. Welded assemblies will be measured by CRSI or AISC Manual of Steel Construction or scale weights. 05/2007 01200- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES B Measurement by Volume: 1. Stockpiles: Measured by cubic dimension using mean length, width, and height or thickness. 2. Excavation and Embankment Materials: Measured by cubic dimension using the average end area method. C Measurement by Area: Measured by square dimension using mean length and width or radius. D Linear Measurement: Measured by linear dimension, at the item centerline or mean chord. E Stipulated Price Measurement: By unit designated in the agreement. F Other: Items measured by weight, volume, area, or lineal means or combination, as appropriate, as a completed item or unit of the Work. 1.05 PAYMENT A Payment includes full compensation for all required supervision,labor,products,tools, equipment,plant,transportation,services,and incidentals;and erection,application or installation of an item of the Work; and Contractor's overhead and profit. The price bid shall include the total cost for required Work. Claims for payment as Unit Price Work not specifically covered in Section 00300—Bid Proposal will not be accepted. B Progress Payments for Unit Price Work will be based on the Engineer's observations and evaluations of quantities incorporated in the Work multiplied by the unit price. C Progress Payments for Lump Sum Work will be based on the Engineer's observations and evaluations of the percentage of quantities included in the schedule of values incorporated in the Work. D Final Payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and quantities determined by Engineer multiplied by the unit price for Work which is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work. 1.06 NONCONFORMANCE ASSESSMENT A Remove and replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to the Contract Documents. B If, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Engineer will direct one of the following remedies: 1. The nonconforming Work will remain as is, but the unit price will be adjusted to a lower price at the discretion of the Engineer. 2. The nonconforming Work will be modified as authorized by the Engineer, and the unit price will be adjusted to a lower price at the discretion of the Engineer, if the modified Work is deemed to be less suitable than originally specified. 05/2007 01200-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES C Individual Technical Specifications may modify these options or may identify a specific formula or percentage price reduction. D The authority of the Engineer to assess the nonconforming Work and identify payment adjustment is final. 1.07 NONPAYMENT FOR REJECTED PRODUCTS A Payment will not be made for any of the following: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable to Engineer. 2. Products determined as nonconforming before or after placement. 3. Products not completely unloaded from transporting vehicle. 4. Products placed beyond the lines and levels of the required Work. 5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work, unless specified otherwise. 6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected products. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 05/2007 01200-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES Section 01290 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Procedures for processing Change Orders, including: 1. Assignment of a responsible individual for approval and communication of changes in the Work; 2. Documentation of change in Contract Price and Contract Time; 3. Change procedures, using proposals and construction contract modifications, Work Change Directive, Stipulated Price Change Order, Unit Price Change Order, Time and Materials Change Order; 4. Execution of Change Orders; 5. Correlation of Contractor Submittals. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents C Other References: 1. Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment(Data Quest Blue Book). Rental Rate is defined as the full unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.03 RESPONSIBLE INDIVIDUAL A Contractor shall provide a letter indicating the name and address of the individual authorized to execute change documents, and who shall also be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ and Subcontractors of changes to the Work. The information shall be provided at the Preconstruction Conference. 1.04 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE AND CONTRACT TIME A Provide full information required for identification and evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of proposed changes in the Work. B Contractor shall document each Proposal for Change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow for its evaluation. 02/2008 01290- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES C Proposal for Change shall include, as a minimum, the following information as applicable: 1. Original Quantities of items in Section 00300—Bid Proposal with additions, reductions, deletions, and substitutions. 2. When Work items were not included in Section 00300—Bid Proposal, Contractor shall provide unit prices for the new items, with supporting information as required by the Engineer. 3. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 4. Additional data upon request. D For changes in the Work performed on a time-and-material basis, the following additional information may be required: 1. Quantities and description of products and equipment. 2. Taxes, insurance and bonds. 3. Overhead and profit as noted in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement, 7.03 "Extra Work". 4. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. 5. Time records and certified copies of applicable payrolls. 6. Invoices and receipts for products, rented equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. E Rented equipment will be paid to the Contractor by actual invoice cost for the duration of time required to complete the extra work. If the extra work comprises only a portion of the rental invoice where the equipment would otherwise be on the site,the Contractor shall compute the hourly equipment rate by dividing the actual monthly invoice by 176. (One day equals 8 hours and one week equals 40 hours.) Operating costs shall not exceed the estimated operating costs given for the item of equipment in the Blue Book. F For changes in the work performed on a time-and-materials basis using Contractor- owned equipment, compute rates with the Blue Book as follows: 1. Multiply the appropriate Rental Rate by an adjustment factor of 70 percent plus the full rate shown for operating costs. The Rental Rate utilized shall be the lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly or monthly rates. Use 150 percent of the Rental Rate for double shifts (one extra shift per day) and 200 percent of the Rental Rate for more than two shifts per day. No other rate adjustments shall apply. 2. Standby rates shall be 50 percent of the appropriate Rental Rate shown in the Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed. 1.05 CHANGE PROCEDURES A Changes to Contract Price or Contract Time can only be made by issuance of a Change Order. Issuance of a Work Change Directive or written acceptance by the Engineer of changes will be formalized into Change Orders. All such changes will be in accordance with the requirements of Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 7.01 "Change Orders". 02/2008 01290-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES B The Engineer will advise Contractor of Minor Changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Price or Contract Time as authorized by Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 7.02 "Minor Changes", by issuing supplemental instructions. C Contractor may request clarification of Plans, Technical Specifications or Contract Documents or other information. Response by the Engineer to a Request for Information does not authorize the Contractor to perform tasks outside the scope of the Work. All changes must be authorized as described in this Section. 1.06 PROPOSALS FOR CHANGE AND CONTRACT MODIFICATION A The Engineer may issue a Request for Proposal,which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Plans and Technical Specifications.The Engineer may also request a proposal in the response to a Request for Information. Contractor will prepare and submit its Proposal for Change within 7 days or as specified in the request. B The Contractor may propose an unsolicited change by submitting a Proposal for Change to the Engineer describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change and the effect on the Contract Price and Contract Time including full documentation. 1.07 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE A Engineer may issue a signed Work Change Directive instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. B The document will describe changes in the Work and will designate a method of determining any change in Contract Price or Contract Time. C Contractor shall proceed promptly to execute the changes in the Work in accordance with the Work Change Directive. 1.08 STIPULATED PRICE CHANGE ORDER A A Stipulated Price Change Order will be based on an accepted Proposal for Change including the Contractor's lump sum price quotation. 1.09 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER A Where Unit Prices for the affected items of the Work are included in Section 00300- Bid Proposal , the Unit Price Change Order will be based on unit prices as originally bid, subject to provisions of Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. B Where unit prices of the Work are not pre-determined in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal, Work Change Directive or accepted Proposal for Change will specify the unit prices to be used. 02/2008 01290-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 1.10 TIME-AND-MATERIAL CHANGE ORDER A Contractor shall provide an itemized account and supporting data after completion of change,within time limits indicated for claims in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. B Engineer will determine the change allowable in Contract Price and Contract Time as provided in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. C Contractor shall maintain detailed records of work done on time-and-material basis as specified in this Section, 1.04 "Documentation of Change in Contract Price and Contract Time". D Contractor shall provide full information required for evaluation of changes,and shall substantiate costs for changes in the Work. 1.11 EXECUTION OF CHANGE DOCUMENTATION A Engineer will issue Change Orders, Work Change Directives, or accepted Proposals for Change for signatures of parties named in Section 00500 — Standard Form of Agreement. 1.12 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A For Stipulated Price Contracts, Contractor shall promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Price. B For Unit Price Contracts,the next monthly Application for Payment of the Work after acceptance of a Change Order will be revised to include any new items not previously included and the appropriate unit rates. C Contractor shall promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time,and shall revise schedules to adjust time for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit for review. D Contractor shall promptly enter changes to the on-site and record copies of the Plans, Technical Specifications or Contract Documents as required in Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01290-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS Section 01310 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Section includes general coordination including Preconstruction Conference, Site Mobilization Conference, and Progress Meetings. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01100—Summary of Work 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Coordination is required throughout the documents. Refer to all of the Contract Documents and coordinate as necessary. 1.03 ENGINEER AND REPRESENTATIVES A The Engineer may act directly or through designated representatives as defined in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 1.01 "Owner, Contractor, and Engineer", and as identified by name at the Preconstruction Conference. 1.04 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION A Coordinate scheduling,submittals,and work of the various Technical Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. B Coordinate completion and clean up of the Work for Substantial Completion and for portions of the Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy. C Coordinate access to Project Site for correction of nonconforming work to minimize disruption of Owner's activities where Owner is in partial occupancy. 1.05 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A Engineer will schedule a Preconstruction Conference. B Attendance Required: Engineer's representatives,Consultants,Contractor,and major Subcontractors. C Agenda: 1. Distribution of Contract Documents. 2. Designation of personnel representing the parties to the Contract, and the Consultant. 3. Review of insurance. 02/2008 01310- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 4. Discussion of formats proposed by the Contractor for Schedule of Values, and Construction Schedule. 5. Discussion of required Submittals, including, but not limited to, Work Plans, Traffic Control Plans, Safety Programs, Construction Photographs. 6. Procedures and processing of Shop Drawings and other submittals, substitutions, Applications for Payment, Requests for Information, Request for Proposal, Change Orders, and Contract Closeout. 7. Scheduling of the Work and coordination with other contractors. 8. Review of Subcontractors. 9. Appropriate agenda items listed in this Section, 1.06 "Site Mobilization Conference", when Preconstruction Conference and Site Mobilization Conference are combined. 10. Procedures for testing. 11. Procedures for maintaining Project Record Documents. 12. Designation of the individual authorized to execute change documents and their responsibilities. 13. Discussion of requirements of a Trench Safety Program. 1.06 SITE MOBILIZATION CONFERENCE A When required by Section 01100—Summary of Work,Engineer will schedule a Site Mobilization Conference at the Project Site prior to Contractor occupancy. B Attendance Required: Engineer representatives, Consultants, Contractor's Superintendent, and major Subcontractors. C Agenda: 1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor 2. Safety and first aid procedures 3. Construction controls provided by Owner 4. Temporary utilities 5. Survey and layout 6. Security and housekeeping procedures 1.07 PROGRESS MEETINGS A Progress Meetings shall be held at Project Site or other location as designated by the Engineer. Meeting shall be held at monthly intervals, or more frequent intervals if directed by Engineer. B Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Engineer representatives, and Consultants as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. C Engineer or City's representative will make arrangements for meetings,and recording minutes. D Engineer or City's representative will prepare the agenda and preside at meetings. 02/2008 01310-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS E Contractor shall provide required information and be prepared to discuss each agenda item. F Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of Construction Schedule, Applications for Payment, payroll and compliance submittals. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of Submittal Schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review status of Requests for Information, Requests for Proposal. 7. Review status of Change Orders. 8. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 9. Maintenance of updates to Construction Schedule. 10. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 11. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 12. Coordination of projected progress. 13. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 14. Effect of proposed changes on Construction Schedule and coordination. 15. Other items relating to the Work. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01310-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS Section 01350 SUBMITTALS 1.0 GENERAL This Section contains general lists of Submittals and Technical Specifications that may be required for the Work. When Submittals are required elsewhere in these Technical Specifications, refer to this Section for Submittal requirements and procedures. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Submittal procedures for: 1. Schedule of Values 2. Construction Schedules 3. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples 4. Operations and Maintenance Data 5. Manufacturer's Certificates 6. Construction Photographs 7. Project Record Documents 8. Design Mixes B References to the following Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01310—Coordination &Meetings 2. Section 01630—Product Options & Substitutions 3. Section 01100—Summary of Work 4. Section 01380—Construction Photographs 5. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 6. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers 1.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A Scheduling and Handling 1. Schedule Submittals well in advance of the need for material or equipment for construction. Allow time to make delivery of material or equipment after Submittal is approved. 2. Develop a Submittal Schedule that allows sufficient time for initial review, correction,resubmission and final review of all submittals.The Engineer will review and return submittals to the Contractor as expeditiously as possible but the amount of time required for review will vary depending on the complexity and quantity of data submitted. In no case will a Submittal Schedule be acceptable which allows less than 30 days for initial review by the Engineer. This time for review shall in no way be justification for delays or additional compensation to the Contractor. 3. The Engineer's review of submittals covers conformity to the Plans,Technical Specifications, and dimensions which affect the layout. The Contractor is responsible for quantity determination. The Contractor is responsible for any errors, omissions or deviations from the Contract requirements; review of 01/2008 01350- 1 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS submittals in no way relieves the Contractor from his obligation to furnish required items according to the Plans and Technical Specifications. 4. Submit 5 copies of documents unless otherwise specified in this Section or by individual Technical Specifications. 5. Revise and resubmit submittals as required. Identify all changes made since previous submittal. 6. The Contractor shall assume the risk for material or equipment which is fabricated or delivered prior to approval. No material or equipment shall be incorporated into the Work or included in Applications for Payment until approval has been obtained in the specified manner. B Transmittal Form and Numbering 1. Transmit each submittal to the Engineer with a transmittal form. 2. Sequentially number each transmittal form beginning with the number 1. Re- Submittals shall use the original number with an alphabetic suffix(i.e.,2A for first Re-Submittal of Submittal 2 or 15C for third Re-Submittal of Submittal 15). Each submittal shall only contain one type of work, material, or equipment. Mixed submittals will not be accepted. 3. Identify variations from requirements of Contract Documents and identify product or system limitations. 4. For submittal numbering of video tapes, see this Section, 1.10 "Video". C Contractor's Certification 1. Each submittal shall contain a statement or stamp signed by the Contractor, certifying that the items have been reviewed in detail and are correct and in accordance with Contract Documents, except as noted by any requested variance. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A Submit a Schedule of Values at least 10 days prior to the first Application for Payment. A Schedule of Values shall be provided for each of the items indicated as Lump Sum (LS) in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal for which the Contractor requests to receive Progress Payments. B Schedule of Values shall be typewritten on 8-1/2"x 11",plain bond,white paper. Use the Table of Contents of this Project Manual as a format for listing costs of Work by Section. C Round off figures for each listed item to the nearest $100.00 except for the value of one item, if necessary, to make the total price for all items listed in the Schedule of Values equal to the applicable Lump Sum in Section 00300—Bid Proposal. D For Unit Price Contracts, items should include a proportional share of Contractor's overhead and profit, such that the total of all items listed in the Schedule of Values equals the Contract amount. For Stipulated Price Contracts,Mobilization,Bonds,and Insurance may be listed as separate items in the Schedule of Values. 01/2008 01350-2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS E For Lump Sum equipment items, where Submittals for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports in conjunction with Operation and Maintenance Data are required, include a separate item for equipment Operation and Maintenance Data Submittals and a separate item for Submittals of equipment Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports, each valued at five (5) percent of the Lump Sum. F Revise the Schedule of Values and resubmit for items affected by contract modifications,Change Orders,and Work Change Directives. Submit revised Schedule of Values 10 days prior to the first Application for Payment after the changes are approved by the Engineer. 1.04 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES A Submit Construction Schedules for the Work in accordance with the requirements of this Section. The Construction Schedule Submittal shall be,at a minimum,a bar chart, (computer generated or prepared manually) and a narrative report. B During the Preconstruction Meeting, as noted in Section 01310 - Coordination and Meetings, the Contractor shall provide a sample of the format to be used for the Construction Schedule Submittal. The format is subject to approval by the Engineer. Review of the Submittal will be provided within 7 days of the Submittal of the sample. C Within 7 days of the receipt of approval of the Contractor's format, or 14 days of the Notice to Proceed, whichever is later, the Contractor shall submit a proposed Construction Schedule for review. The Construction Schedule Submittal shall meet the following requirements: 1. The Construction Schedule shall usually include a total of at least 20 but not more than 50 activities. Fewer activities may be accepted, if approved by the Engineer. 2. For Projects with work at different physical locations,each location should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 3. For projects with multiple crafts or significant subcontractor components,these elements should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 4. For Projects with multiple types of tasks within the scope,these types of work should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 5. For Projects with significant major equipment items or materials worth over 25 percent of the Total Contract Price, the Construction Schedule shall indicate dates when these items are to be purchased,when they are to be delivered,and when installed. 6. For Projects where operating plants are involved, each period of work which will require the shut down of any process or operation shall be identified in the Construction Schedule and must be agreed to by the Engineer prior to starting work in the area. 7. A Billing Schedule(tabulation of the estimated monthly billings)for the Work shall be prepared and submitted by the Contractor with the first Construction Schedule. This information is not required in the monthly updates, unless significant changes in Work require re-submittal of the Construction Schedule for review. The total for each month and a cumulative total will be indicated. 01/2008 01350-3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS These monthly forecasts are only for planning purposes of the Engineer. Monthly payments for actual work completed will be made by the Engineer in accordance with Section 00700 - General Conditions of Agreement. D The Contractor must receive approval of the Engineer for the Construction Schedule and Billing Schedule prior to the first monthly Application for Payment. No payment will be made until these are accepted. E Upon written request from the Engineer, the Contractor shall revise and submit for approval all or any part of the Construction Schedule to reflect changed conditions in the Work or deviations made from the original plan and schedule. F The Contractor's Construction Schedule shall thereafter be updated with the Actual Start and Actual Finish Dates, Percent Complete, and Remaining Duration of each Activity and submitted monthly. The date to be used in updating the monthly Construction Schedule shall be the same Date as is used in the monthly Application for Payment. This monthly update of the Construction Schedule shall be required before the monthly Application for Payment will be processed for payment. G The narrative Construction Schedule Report shall include a description of changes made to the Construction Schedule; Activities Added to the Construction Schedule; Activities Deleted from the Construction Schedule; any other changes made to the Construction Schedule other than the addition of Actual Start Dates and Actual Finish Dates and Remaining Durations. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES A Shop Drawings 1. Submit Shop Drawings for review as required by the Technical Specifications. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures" shall be placed on each Shop Drawing. 3. The Shop Drawing shall accurately and distinctly present the following: a. Field and erection dimensions clearly identified as such. b. Arrangement and section views. c. Relation to adjacent materials or structure including complete information for making connections between work under this Contract and work under other contracts. d. Kinds of materials and finishes. e. Parts list and descriptions. f. Assembly Shop Drawings of equipment components and accessories showing their respective positions and relationships to the complete equipment package. g. Where necessary for clarity, identify details by reference to sheet numbers and detail numbers, schedule or room numbers as shown on the Plans. 4. Shop Drawing Drawings shall be to scale,and shall be a true representation of the specific equipment or item to be furnished. 01/2008 01350-4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS B Product Data 1. Submit Product Data for review when required in individual Technical Specifications. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures" shall be placed on each data item submitted. 3. Mark each copy to identify applicable products,models,options to be used in this Project. Supplement manufacturers'standard data to provide information unique to this Project, where required by the Technical Specification. 4. For products specified only by reference standard,submit manufacturer,trade name, model or catalog designation, and applicable reference standard. 5. For Approved Products, those designated in the Technical Specifications followed by the words"or approved equal",submit manufacturer,trade name, model or catalog designation, and applicable reference standard. 6. For products proposed as alternates to Approved Products, refer to Section 01630-Product Options and Substitutions, 1.04"Selection Options"and 1.07 "Substitution Procedures". 7. For products that are neither Pre-Approved, Approved, specified only by reference standard, nor proposed as alternates, submit product description, trade name, manufacturer, and supplier. Contractor shall provide additional information upon written request by Engineer or Owner. C Samples 1. Submit samples for review as required by the Technical Specification. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on each sample or a firmly attached sheet of paper. 3. Submit the number of samples specified in the Technical Specification;one of which will be retained by the Engineer. 4. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are identified in the Technical Specifications. 1.06 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA A When specified in Technical Specification,submit manufacturers'printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, operation, adjusting, finishing, and maintenance. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section. 1.02"Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of each document. C Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. 1.07 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A When specified in Technical Specification, submit manufacturers' certificate of compliance for review by Engineer. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of the certificate. 01/2008 01350-5 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS C Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. D Manufacturer's Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Engineer. 1.08 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A Submit photographs in accordance with Section 01380—Construction Photographs. 1. Prints: Prepare 2 prints of each view and submit 1 print directly to the City's Representative within 7 days of taking photographs. One print shall be retained by the Contractor and made available at all times for reference on the job site. B PRECONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS: 1. Prior to the commencement of any construction,take digital color photographs on the entire route of the project 2. Photographs: Two prints, color, matte finish; 3 x 5 inch size, mounted on 81/ x 11-inch soft card stock, with left edge binding margin for three hole punch, or in plastic pockets in three-ring notebook. 3. Th photographs shall show: a. Date photographs were taken b. Location of the photograph, house number and street name. (This information may be shown on a chalk board in the photograph by a label on the mountings.) 4. Photographs should show the condition of the following a. Esplanades and boulevards b. Yards (near, side and far side of street) c. Housewalk, sidewalk and driveway; curb d. Area between walk and curb 1) Particular features(yard lights, shrubs, fences, trees, etc.) 2) Landscaping and decorative features. C POST CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1. On completion of construction, provide photographs of any public or private property which has been repaired or restored and any damage which is or may be the subject of complaints. 1.09 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A Submit Project Record Documents in accordance with Section 01760—Project Record Documents. 1.10 VIDEO A Submit television video in DVD format as required in individual Technical Specifications. B Transmittal forms for video disks shall be numbered sequentially beginning with TO1, T02, T03, etc. 01/2008 01350-6 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS 1.11 DESIGN MIXES A When specified, submit design mixes for review. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of each design mix. C Mark each design mix to identify proportions,gradations,and additives for each class and type of design mix submitted. Include applicable test results on samples for each mix. D Maintain a copy of approved design mixes at mixing plant. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 01/2008 01350-7 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS Section 01380 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for construction photographs and submittals. B References Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01100—Summary of Work 2. Section 01350—Submittals 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Construction Photographs under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for installed Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A When required by Section 01100 — Summary of Work, submit photographs in accordance applicable provisions of this Section. B Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350—Submittals. C Prepare three(3)prints of each view and submit two(2) prints directly to the Project Manager within seven(7)days of taking photographs. One(1)print shall be retained by the Contractor in the field office at the Project Site and available at all times for reference. D When requested by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall submit extra prints of photographs, for distribution directly to designated parties who will pay the costs for the extra prints directly to the photographer. E When required by individual Sections, submit photographs taken prior to start of the Work to show original Project Site conditions. F When required by Contract Documents, submit photographs with Application for Payment. G When required by individual Sections,submit photographs taken following completion of the Work to show the condition in which the Project Site will be left. H With each submittal,include photographic negatives in protective envelopes,identified by Project Name, Contractor, and date photographs were taken. 01/2008 01380- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Contractor shall be responsible for the timely execution of the photographs, their vantage point, direction of shot, and quality. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 PHOTOGRAPHS A Photographs shall be digital quality and shall be submitted on a CD. B The photographs shall show on a non-elective chalkboard or white board,readable in the photograph: 1. Job number. 2. Date and time photographs were taken. 3. Location of the photograph, house number and street, along with the project number. C Indicate the condition of the following: 1. Esplanades and boulevards. 2. Yards (near side and far side of street). 3. House-walk and sidewalk. 4. Curb. 5. Area between walk and curb. 6. Particular features (yard lights, shrubs, fence, trees, etc.). 7. Date shall be on negative. 8. Provide notation of vantage point marked for location and direction of shot on a key plan of the Project Site. D Sufficient number of photographs shall be taken to show the existence or non- existence of cracked concrete and the condition of trees, shrubs and grass. E Identify each photograph with an applied label or rubber stamp on the back with the following information: 1. Name of the Project. 2. Name and address of the photographer(if a professional photographer is used). 3. Name of the Contractor. 4. Date the photograph was taken. 5. Photographs to be in plastic pockets and bound in three -ring notebook for easy access and viewing. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A Prior to the commencement of the Work, take photographs of the entire route of the Project Site. 01/2008 01380-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 3.02 POST-CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A Following the completion of the Work,take photographs from corresponding vantage points and direction of shots. 3.03 PROGESS PHOTOGRAPHS A Take photographs at intervals, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment and submit on CD with monthly Application for Payment. B Select the vantage points for each shot each month to best show the status of construction and progress since the last photographs were taken. Take not less than two (2) shots from the same vantage point creating a time-lapsed sequence. C Follow direction when given by the Project Manager in selecting vantage points. END OF SECTION 01/2008 01380-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS Section 01420 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A General quality assurance as related to Reference Standards and a list of references. B References to Technical Specifications: None 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A For Products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on the date as stated in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. C Request clarification from Engineer before proceeding should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20001 ACI American Concrete Institute P.O. Box 19150 Reford Station Detroit, MI 48219-0150 AGC Associated General Contractors of America 1957 E Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 AI Asphalt Institute Asphalt Institute Building College Park, MD 20740 AITC American Institute of Timber Construction 333 W. Hampden Avenue Englewood, CO 80110 02/2008 01420- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 400 North Michigan Avenue, Eighth Floor Chicago, IL 60611 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1000 16th Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 APA American Plywood Association Box 11700 Tacoma,WA 98411 API American Petroleum Institute 1220 L Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 AREA American Railway Engineering Association 50 F Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20001 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103 AWPA American Wood-Preservers'Association 7735 Old Georgetown Road Bethesda, MD 20014 AWS American Welding Society P.O. Box 35104 Miami, FL 33135 AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 02/2008 01420-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 1101 Connecticut Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 CRD U.S.A. Corps of Engineers Code of Ordinances City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, TX 77581 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 707 Westchester Avenue White Plains, NY 10604 FDA U.S. Food and Drug Administration 5600 Fisher Lane Rockville, MD 20857-0001 FS Federal Standardization Documents General Services Administration, Specifications Unit (WFSIS) 7th and D Street S.W. Washington, DC 20406 ICEA Insulated Cable Engineer Association P.O. Box 440 S. Yarmouth, MA 02664 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 445 Hoes Lane P.O. Box 1331 Piscataway, NJ 0855-1331 MIL Military Specifications General Services Administration, Specifications Unit (WFSIS) 7th and D Street S.W. Washington, DC 20406 NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers P. O. Box 986 Katy, TX 77450 02/2008 01420-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association 2101 L Street, N.W., Suite 300 Washington, DC 20037 NFPA National Fire Protection Association Batterymarch Park, P.O. Box 9101 Quincy, MA 02269-9101 OSHA Occupational Safety Health Administration U.S. Department of Labor, Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402 PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road Skokie, IL 60077-1083 PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute 201 North Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60606 SDI Steel Deck Institute Box 9506 Canton, OH 44711 SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 4400 Fifth Avenue Pittsburgh, PA 15213 TAC Texas Administrative Code TCEQ Texas Commission on Environmental Quality P. O. Box 13087 Austin, TX 78711-3087 TxDOT Texas Department of Transportation 125 East 11th Street Austin, TX 78701-2483 Texas MUTCD Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (2003 Adoption) (published by Texas Department of Transportation) UL Underwriters'Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingston Road Northbrook, IL 60062 UNI-BELL UNI-BELL Pipe Association 2655 Villa Creek Drive, Suite 155 02/2008 01420-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS Dallas, TX 75234 WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute 942 Main Street—Suite 300 Hartford, CT 06103 WWD/PI Water Well Drillers and Pump Installers Advisory Council Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation P.O. Box 12157 Austin, TX 78711 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01420-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Section 01450 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Testing Laboratory Services and Contractor responsibilities related to those services. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 3740, "Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction" b. ASTM E 329, "Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction" 1.02 SELECTION AND PAYMENT A Owner will select,employ,and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform inspection and testing identified in individual Technical Specifications. B Employment of testing laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C Owner or designated representative shall schedule and monitor testing as required to provide timely results and to avoid delay to the Work. D Contractor shall be responsible for paying for services of commercial testing laboratory, with prior approval of Owner, to perform the following: 1. Pipe diameter deflection tests on all flexible and semi-rigid sanitary sewer collection system pipe installation 2. Laboratory services required to establish mix design proposed for use for Portland cement concrete, asphaltic concrete mixtures and other material mixes requiring control by testing laboratory when required because of change in source of materials or other conditions not caused by Owner. 3. Tests required to establish optimum moisture of earth and base materials and to determine required compactive effort to meet density requirements. 4. Cores to test for thickness. 5. Testing and inspection performed for the Contractor's convenience. 6. Retesting and repetitions of laboratory services when initial tests indicate work does not comply with requirements of Contract Documents. 04/2008 01450- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.03 LABORATORY REPORTS A The Engineer will receive 1 copy, the Project Manager will receive 2 copies, and the Contractor will receive 2 copies of Laboratory Reports from the testing laboratory. One of the Contractor's copies shall remain at the Project Site for duration of Project. Test results which indicate non-conformance shall be transmitted immediately via fax from the testing laboratory to the Contractor and Project Manager. 1.04 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY A Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. B Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. C Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor. D Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. 1.05 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A Notify Project Manager and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services. Notify Engineer if specification section requires the presence of the Engineer. B Cooperate with laboratory personnel in collecting samples to be tested or collected on Project Site. C Provide access to the Work and to manufacturer's facilities. D Provide samples to laboratory in advance of their intended use to allow thorough examination and testing. E Provide incidental labor and facilities for access to the Work to be tested;to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested; and to facilitate tests and inspections including storage and curing of test samples. F Arrange with laboratory and pay for: 1. Retesting required for failed tests. 2. Retesting for nonconforming Work. 3. Additional sampling and tests requested by Contractor for his own purposes. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION 04/2008 01450-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 3.01 CONDUCTING TESTING A Laboratory sampling and testing shall conform to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 329,as well as other test standards specified in individual Technical Specifications. END OF SECTION 04/2008 01450-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Section 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Temporary facilities and the necessary controls for the Work including utilities, telephone, sanitary facilities, field office, storage sheds and building, safety requirements,first aid equipment,fire protection,security measures,protection of the Work and property, access roads and parking, environmental controls, disposal of trash,debris,and excavated material,pest and rodent control,water runoff and erosion control. B References to Technical Specifications: Section 00200—Instructions to Bidders Section 01100—Summary of Work Section 01350—Submittals Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation Section 01100—Summary of Work Section 01600—Material &Equipment Section 01570—Trench Safety System Section 01555 —Traffic Control &Regulation Section 01720—Field Surveying Section 01563 —Tree &Plant Protection Section 01564—Control of Ground Water& Surface Water Section 13730- Computer Equipment C Referenced Standards: Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Code of Ordinances, City of Pearland, Texas D Definitions: Underground Structures - sewer, water, gas, and other piping, and manholes, chambers, electrical and signal conduits, tunnels, and other existing subsurface installations located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. Surface Structures - existing buildings, structures and other constructed installations above the ground surface. Included with such structures are their foundations or any extension below the surface. Surface structures include, but are not limited to 12-2-2011 01500- 1 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS buildings,tanks, walls,bridges,roads, dams, channels, open drainage,piping,poles, wires, posts, signs, markers, curbs, walks, guard cables, fencing, and other facilities that are visible above the ground surface. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A The facilities and controls specified in this Section are considered minimum for the Work. The Contractor may provide additional facilities and controls for the proper execution of the Work and to meet Contractor's responsibilities for protection of persons and property. B Comply with applicable requirements specified in other Technical Specifications. Maintain and operate temporary facilities and systems to assure continuous service. Modify and extend systems as Work progress requires. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required. Restore existing facilities used for temporary services to specified or to original condition. 1.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A Temporary Service Make arrangements with utility service companies for such temporary services as are necessary to construct the work and manage the site. Abide by rules and regulations of the utility service companies or authorities having jurisdiction. Be responsible for utility service costs until the Work is Substantially Complete. Included are fuel,power,light,heat,and other utility services necessary for execution, completion,testing, and initial operation of the Work. B Water Provide water required for and in connection with Work to be performed and for specified tests of piping, equipment, devices, or for other use as required for proper completion of the Work. 12-2-2011 01500-2 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS For water to be drawn from public water supply, obtain special permit or license and meter from the proper City officials. For facilities under construction, establish a water/sewer billing account with City's Utility Billing Department.A deposit based on rates established by latest ordinance will be required. For water drawn from fire hydrants, apply for and receive a construction water meter from City'Public Works Department. Identify specific location for construction water meter installation. Once installed,water meter may not be moved without notification of Public Works Department. Install backflow preventer on fire hydrant supply if not included in City provided meter. Provide and maintain an adequate supply of potable water for domestic consumption by Contractor personnel. C Electricity and Lighting 1 Provide temporary electric power service in Contractor's name, as required for the prosecution of the Work, including testing of Work. Provide power for lighting, operation of the Contractor's equipment, or for any other use by Contractor or as necessary to maintain any of Owner's on-going operations as may continue on the site during any scheduled shutdown. Minimum lighting level shall be 5 foot-candles for open areas; 10 foot-candles for stairs and shops. 2 Provide permanent electric power service,in the Contractor's name,to the work or site as and when required by the schedule of the work to achieve Substantial Completion or Partial Substantial Completion. Contractor to establish service billing in its name and transfer service and billing to the Owner upon acceptance of the work as Substantially Complete and suitable for beneficial occupancy by the Owner. D Natural Gas Provide and pay for natural gas service to the work as and when required by the schedule to achieve Substantial Completion. Contractor to establish service billing in its name and transfer service and billing to the Owner upon acceptance of the work as Substantially Complete and suitable for beneficial occupancy by the Owner. E Temporary Heat and Ventilation Provide temporary heat as necessary for protection or completion of the Work. Provide temporary heat and ventilation to assure safe working conditions; maintain enclosed areas at a minimum of 50 degrees F. F Telephone Provide emergency telephone service at the Project Site for use by Contractor personnel and others performing work or furnishing services. G Sanitary Facilities Provide and maintain sanitary facilities for persons on the Project Site,in compliance with federal, state, and local regulations. Locate toilets on the Project Site near the 12-2-2011 01500-3 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS work and secluded from view insofar as possible. Keep toilets clean and supplied throughout the course of the Work. Enforce the use of sanitary facilities by construction personnel at the Project Site. Such facilities shall be enclosed. Pit-type toilets will not be permitted. No discharge will be allowed from these facilities. Collect and store sewage and waste so as not to cause a nuisance or health problem; have sewage and waste hauled off-site and properly disposed in accordance with local regulations. Control areas where sanitary facilities are located in conformance with Section 01566 —Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. 1.06 FIELD OFFICE A Provision of a Field Office and other specific temporary facilities as required in paragraph B below UNLESS otherwise stated in Section 00800 - Special Conditions of the Agreement,or Section 01100—Summary of Work. Provide for transportation,move-in, set-up,tie-down and,when project is complete,removal and move-out. The Contractor shall confirm location of office and other temporary facilities with Owner's Representative at Pre-Construction Meeting prior to delivery and set up. Location of temporary facilities shall be approved by the Owner's Representative by way of the submittal process. B. At a minimum, the Contractor's field office shall provide for, contain or serve to: provide a secured space for project administrative operations, periodic progress meetings,on-site storage for project files and plans,office space for CONTRACTOR's field supervisory personnel and provide a separate securable office space for OWNER's Representative including: meeting table and chairs, a single two drawer filing cabinet,a built-in drawing table and plan holders. Provide electric lighting and HVAC to the mobile office. 1. Field Office shall provide for, at a minimum, a high speed internet connection for use by Owner's Representative or Construction Manager as controlled by Paragraph A above. 1.07 STORAGE OF MATERIALS A Provide for storage of materials under the provisions of Section 01600—Material & Equipment. 1.08 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A Contractor shall prepare, submit and follow a Safety Program that complies with federal, state, and local safety codes, statutes, and practices. Include in the Safety Program documented response to excavation, embankment, and trench safety requirements as specified in Section 01570—Trench Safety System. B Conduct operations in strict accord with applicable federal,state and local safety codes and statutes and with good construction practice. The Contractor is fully responsible and obligated to establish and maintain procedures for safety of all work, personnel and equipment involved in the Work. 12-2-2011 01500-4 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS C Observe and comply with Texas Occupational Safety Act (Art. 5182a, V.C.S.) and with all safety and health standards promulgated by Secretary of Labor under Section 107 of Contract Work Hours and Standards Act, published in OSHA Standards - 29 CFR, Part 1926, and adopted by Secretary of Labor under the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, and to any other legislation enacted for safety and health of Contractor employees. Such safety and health standards apply to subcontractors and their employees as well as to the Contractor and its employees. D Observance of and compliance with the regulations shall be solely and without qualification the responsibility of the Contractor without reliance or superintendence of or direction by the Engineer or the Engineer's representative. Immediately advise the Engineer of investigation or inspection by Federal Safety and Health inspectors of the Contractor or subcontractor's work or place of work on the Project Site under this Contract,and after such investigation or inspection,advise the Engineer of the results. Submit one copy of accident reports to Engineer within ten(10) days of occurrence. E Protect areas occupied by workmen using the best available devices for detection of lethal and combustible gases. Test such devices frequently to assure their functional capability. Constantly observe infiltration of liquids into the Work area for visual or odor evidence of contamination. Take immediate and appropriate steps to seal off entry of contaminated liquids to the Work area. F Safety measures, including but not limited to safety personnel, first-aid equipment, ventilating equipment and safety equipment,in the Plans and Technical Specifications are obligations of the Contractor. G Maintain required coordination with the local Police and Fire Departments during the entire period covered by the Contract. 1.09 FIRST AID EQUIPMENT A Provide a first aid kit throughout the construction period. List telephone numbers for physicians, hospitals, and ambulance services in each first aid kit. B Have at least one person thoroughly trained in first aid procedures present on the Project Site whenever work is in progress. 1.10 FIRE PROTECTION A Fire Protection Standards. Conform to specified fire protection and prevention requirements as well as those that may be established by Federal, State, or local governmental agencies. B. Comply with all applicable provisions of NFPA Standard No. 241, Safeguarding Building Construction and Demolition Operations. Provide portable fire extinguishers, rated not less than 2A or 5B in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 10,Portable Fire Extinguishers,for each temporary building,and for every 3000 square feet of floor area of facilities under construction. 12-2-2011 01500-5 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Locate portable fire extinguishers within 50 feet maximum from any point on the Project Site. C. Fire Prevention and Safety Measures. Prohibit smoking in hazardous areas. Post suitable warning signs in areas that are continuously or intermittently hazardous. Use metal safety containers for storage and handling of flammable and combustible liquids. Do not store flammable or combustible liquids in or near stairways or exits. Maintain clear exits from all points within a structure. 1.11 SECURITY MEASURES A Protect all materials, equipment, and property associated with the Work from loss, theft,damage,and vandalism. Contractor's duty to protect property includes Owner's property. B If existing fencing or barriers are breached or removed for purposes of construction, provide and maintain temporary security fencing equal to existing as approved by Owner's Representative. 1.12 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC UTILITIES A Prevent damage to existing public utilities during construction. These utilities are shown on the Plans at their approximate locations. Give owners of these utilities at least 48 hours notice before commencing Work in the area, for locating the utilities during construction,and for making adjustments or relocation of the utilities when they conflict with the proposed Work. 1.13 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Preventive Actions. Take precautions, provide programs, and take actions necessary to protect the Work and public and private property from damage. Take action to prevent damage, injury or loss, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Store apparatus,materials,supplies,and equipment in an orderly,safe manner that will not unduly interfere with progress of the Work or the Work of any other contractor, any utility service company, or the Owner's operations. b. Provide suitable storage for materials that are subject to damage by exposure to weather,theft,breakage, or otherwise. c. Place upon the Work or any part thereof only such loads as are consistent with the safety of that portion of the Work. d. Frequently clean up refuse,rubbish,scrap materials,and debris caused by construction operations, keeping the Work safe and orderly. 12-2-2011 01500 -6 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS e. Provide safe barricades and guard rails around openings, for scaffolding, for temporary stairs and ramps, around excavations, elevated walkways, and other hazardous areas. Obtain written consent from proper parties before entering or occupying with workers, tools,materials or equipment,privately owned land except on easements provided for construction. Assume full responsibility for the preservation of public and private property on or adjacent to the site. If any direct or indirect damage is done by or on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in execution of the Work by the Contractor, it shall be restored by the Contractor to a condition equal to or better than that existing before the damage was done. B Barricades and Warning Signals. Where Work is performed on or adjacent to any roadway, right-of-way, or public place, furnish and erect barricades, fences, lights,warning signs, and danger signals; provide watchmen;and take other precautionary measures for the protection of persons or property and protection of the Work.Conform to Section 01555—Traffic Control& Regulation. C Preserving Control Points Maintain permanent benchmarks,public or private elevation or property demarcation and control monumentation, or other reference points. Unless otherwise directed in writing, replace at no cost to the Owner, those monuments,property corners or other permanent demarcations that are damaged or destroyed in accordance with Section 01720—Field Surveying. D Tree and Plant Protection. Protect trees,shrubs, lawns,outside of grading limits and within the grading limits as designated on the Plans,and in accordance with requirements of Section 01563—Tree &Plant Protection. E Protection of Underground and Surface Structures Known underground structures, including water, sewer, electric, and telephone services are shown on the Plans in accordance with the best information available,but is not guaranteed to be correct or complete. Contractor is responsible for making Locate Calls. Explore ahead of trenching and excavation work and uncover obstructing underground structures sufficiently to determine their location, to prevent damage to them and to prevent interruption of utility services. Restore to original condition damages to underground structure at no additional cost to the Owner. Immediately notify the agency or company owning any existing utility which is damaged,broken,or disturbed. Obtain approval from the Engineer and agency for any repairs or relocations, either temporary or permanent. 12-2-2011 01500-7 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Necessary changes in location of the Work may be made by the Engineer to avoid unanticipated underground structures. If permanent relocation of an underground structure or other subsurface installations is required and not otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents,the Engineer will direct Contractor in writing to perform the Work, which shall be paid for under the provisions for changes in the Contract Price as described in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. Support in place and protect from direct or indirect injury to underground and surface structures located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. Install such supports carefully and as required by the party owning or controlling such structure. Before installing structure supports,Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that the methods and procedures to be used have been approved by the owner of the structure. Avoid moving or in any way changing the property of public utilities or private service corporations without prior written consent of a responsible official of that service or public utility. Representatives of these utilities reserve the right to enter within the limits of this project for the purpose of maintaining their properties,or of making such changes or repairs to their property that may be considered necessary by performance of this Contract. Notify the owners and/or operators of utilities and pipelines of the nature of construction operations to be performed and the date or dates on which those operations will be performed. When construction operations are required in the immediate vicinity of existing structures,pipelines,or utilities,give a minimum of five (5)working days advance notice. Probe and flag the location of underground utilities prior to commencement of excavation. Keep flags in place until construction operations reach and uncover the utility. Assume risks attending the presence or proximity of underground and surface structures within or adjacent to the limits to the Work including but not limited to damage and expense for direct or indirect injury caused by the Work to any structure. Immediately repair damage caused, to the satisfaction of the owner of the damaged structure. 1.14 PROTECTION OF THE WORK Provide protection of installed products to prevent damage from subsequent operations. Remove protection facilities when no longer needed,prior to completion of the Work. Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment, materials, and surfaces. 1.15 ROADS AND PARKING A Prevent interference with traffic and Owner operations on existing roads. B Minimize use of existing streets and driveways by construction traffic. C Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment, materials, and surfaces. 12-2-2011 01500 - 8 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS D Construct and maintain temporary detours, ramps, and roads to provide for normal public traffic flow when use of public roads or streets is closed by necessities of the Work. E Provide mats or other means to prevent overloading or damage to existing roadways from tracked equipment or exceptionally large or heavy trucks or equipment F Designate temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. Locate as approved by Engineer. G Do not allow heavy vehicles or construction equipment unnecessarily in existing parking areas. 1.16 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS A Provide and maintain methods, equipment, and temporary construction as necessary for controls over environmental conditions at the construction site and adjacent areas. B Comply with statutes,regulations,and ordinances which relate to the proposed Work for the prevention of environmental pollution and preservation of natural resources, including but not limited to the National Environmental Policy Act of 1969, PL 91- 190, Executive Order 11514. C Provide, install and maintain storm water runoff control including but not limited to temporary entrance, silt fencing, etc. as specified in Contract Documents. D Recognize and adhere to the environmental requirements of the Project. Disturbed areas shall be strictly limited to boundaries established by the Contract Documents. Burning of rubbish, debris or waste materials is not permitted. 1.17 POLLUTION CONTROL A Provide methods,means,and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil,water or atmosphere by discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. B Provide equipment and personnel to perform emergency measures required to contain any spillage,and to remove contaminated soils or liquids. Excavate and dispose of any contaminated earth off-site, and replace with suitable compacted fill and topsoil. C Take special measures to prevent harmful substances from entering receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems in conformance with TPDES requirements and Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. D Provide systems for control of atmospheric pollutants. Prevent toxic concentrations of chemicals. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. 12-2-2011 01500-9 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS E Use equipment during construction that conforms to current federal, state, and local laws and regulations. 1.18 PEST AND RODENT CONTROL A Provide rodent and pest control as necessary to prevent infestation of Project Site. B Employ methods and use materials which will not adversely affect conditions at the Project Site or adjoining properties. 1.19 NOISE CONTROL A Provide vehicles, equipment, and construction activities that minimize noise to the greatest degree practicable. Noise levels shall conform to OSHA Standards- 29 CFR and in no case will noise levels be permitted which create a nuisance in the surrounding neighborhoods. B Conduct construction operations during daylight hours from 7:30 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. except as approved by Engineer. C Comply with Chapter 19 NOISE, Codes of Ordinances, City of Pearland, Texas. 1.20 DUST CONTROL A Control objectionable dust caused by operation of vehicles and equipment under the provisions of Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. 1.21 WATER RUNOFF AND EROSION CONTROL A Provide methods to control surface water,runoff,subsurface water,and water pumped from excavations and structures to prevent damage to the Work, the Project Site, or adjoining properties in accordance with Section 01564—Control of Ground Water& Surface Water and Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. B Inspect earthwork periodically to detect any evidence of the start of erosion. Apply corrective measures as required to control erosion. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 12-2-2011 01500- 10 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND FILTER FABRIC FENCE Section 01560 FILTER FABRIC FENCE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of filter fabric fence to control erosion and contain sediments and pollutants from overland flow. Filter fabric fence is not for use in channelized flow areas. Filter fabric fence may be reinforced. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 4. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 3786,"Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting strength of Textile Fabrics" b. ASTM D 4632, "Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles" 1.02 MEASURMENT AND PAYMENT A Filter fabric fence will be measured by the linear foot between the limits of the beginning and ending of wooden stakes. B Payment for filter fabric fence will include and be full compensation for all labor, equipment,materials,supervision,and all incidental expenses for construction of these items,complete in place,including,but not limited to protection of trees,maintenance requirements, repair and replacement of damaged sections, removal of sediment deposits, and removal of erosion and sediment control systems at the end of construction. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Manufacturer's catalog sheets and other Product Data on geotextile fabric. 03/2008 01560- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FILTER FABRIC FENCE 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILTER FABRIC A Provide woven or nonwoven geotextile filter fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material. B By ASTM D 4632, geotextile fabric shall have a grab strength of 100 psi in any principal direction,a Mullen burst strength exceeding 200psi by ASTM-D3786,and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140. C Filter fabric shall contain ultraviolet inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of 6 months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0 degrees F to 120 degrees F. D Representative Manufacturer: Mirafi, Inc., or equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A Provide erosion and sediment control systems at the locations shown on Plans. Such systems shall be of the type indicated and shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements shown on the Plans and specified in this Section. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil, other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C Regularly inspect and repair or replace damaged components of filter fabric fence as specified in this Section, 3.02F. Unless otherwise directed, maintain the erosion and sediment control systems until the Work is accepted by the Owner. Remove erosion and sediment control systems promptly when directed by the Engineer. Discard removed materials in accordance with Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal. D Conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A Provide filter fabric fence systems in accordance with the Plan detail for Filter fabric fence. Filter fabric fence shall be installed in such a manner that surface runoff will percolate through the system in sheet flow fashion and allow sediment to be retained and accumulated. B Attach the filter fabric to 2-inch by 2-inch wooden stakes spaced a maximum of 3 feet apart and embedded a minimum of 8 inches. If filter fabric is factory preassembled 03/2008 01560-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FILTER FABRIC FENCE with support netting,then maximum spacing allowable is 8 feet. Install wooden stakes at a slight angle toward the source of anticipated runoff. C Trench in the toe of the filter fabric fence with a spade or mechanical trencher as shown on the Plans. Lay filter fabric along the edges of the trench. Backfill and compact trench. D Filter fabric fence shall have a minimum height of 18 inches and a maximum height of 36 inches above natural ground. E Provide the filter fabric in continuous rolls and cut to the length of the fence to minimize the use of joints. When joints are necessary, splice the Fabric together only at a support post with a minimum 6-inch overlap and seal securely. F Inspect filter fabric fence systems after each rainfall,daily during periods of prolonged rainfall, and at a minimum once each week. Repair or replace damaged sections immediately. Remove sediment deposits when silt reaches a depth one-third the height of the fence or 6 inches, whichever is less. END OF SECTION 03/2008 01560-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL Section 01562 WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Disposal of waste material and salvageable material. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation 3. Section 01600—Materials &Equipment 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Obtain and submit applicable permits for proposed disposal sites. C Submit a Waste Material Disposal Plan. D Submit a copy of written permission from property owners,along with a description of the property,prior to disposal of excess material adjacent to the Project Site. Submit a written and signed release from property owner upon completion of disposal work. City of Pearland requires individual fill placement permits for all fill placed within the City limits. 1.04 WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL PLAN A Contractor shall formulate and implement a plan for the collection and disposal of waste materials on the Project Site which includes the following information: 1. Schedule for collection and inspection. 2. Location of trash and waste receptacles. 3. Provisions for liquid waste and potential water pollutants material. B The plan shall comply with applicable federal, state, and local health and safety regulations and Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 07/2006 01562- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SALVAGEABLE MATERIAL A Excavated material: When indicated on Plans, load, haul, and deposit excavated material at a location or locations outside the limits of Project Site. B Base, surface, and bedding material: Deliver gravel, asphaltic, or other base and surfacing material designated for salvage to the location designated by the Engineer. C Pipe culvert: Deliver culverts designated for salvage to Owner's storage area. D Other salvageable materials: Conform to requirements of individual Technical Specifications. E Coordinate delivery of salvageable material with Engineer. F When temporary, on-site storage of salvaged materials is required, comply with applicable provisions of Section 01600—Materials &Equipment. 3.02 SEDIMENT DISPOSAL A Remove sediment deposits and dispose of them at the designated spoil site for the Project. If a spoil site is not designated on the Plans, dispose of sediment off site at a location not in or adjacent to a stream or floodplain. B Off-site disposal is the responsibility of the Contractor. C Sediment to be placed at the Project Site should be spread evenly throughout the designated area,compacted and stabilized. Sediment shall not be allowed to flush into a stream or drainage way. D If sediment has been contaminated,it shall be disposed of in accordance with existing federal, state, and local rules and regulations. 3.03 EXCESS MATERIAL, WASTE,AND EQUIPMENT A Vegetation,rubble,broken concrete,debris,asphaltic concrete pavement,excess soil, and other materials not designated for salvage,shall become the property of Contractor and shall be removed from the Project Site and legally disposed of. B Dispose of removed equipment,materials,waste and debris in a manner conforming to applicable laws and regulations C Excess soil may be deposited on private property adjacent to the Project Site when written permission is obtained from property owner under the provisions of this Section, 1.03D. 07/2006 01562-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL D Verify the flood plain status of any proposed disposal site. Do not dispose of excavated materials in an area designated as within the 100-year Flood Hazard Area. E Waste materials shall be removed from the site on a daily basis, such that the site is maintained in a neat and orderly condition. F No materials shall be disposed in a manner to damage the Owner in any way. END OF SECTION 07/2006 01562 -3 of 3 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER Section 01564 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER AND SURFACE WATER 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Dewatering,depressurizing,draining,and maintaining trench and structure excavations and foundation beds in dry and stable condition. B Protecting work against surface runoff and rising flood waters. C Disposing of removed water. D References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement &Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems 4. Section 01565 —TPDES Requirements 5. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation E Referenced Standards: 1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 2. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) 3. Code of Ordinances, City of Pearland, Texas 4. Water Well Drillers and Pump Installers Advisory Council (WWD/PI) F Definitions: 1. Ground Water Control Systems - installations external to the excavation such as well points, eductors, or deep wells. Ground water control includes dewatering and depressurization. a. Dewatering-lowering the water table and intercepting seepage which would otherwise emerge from slopes or bottoms of excavations and disposing of removed water. The intent of dewatering is to increase stability of excavated slopes; prevent dislocation of material from slopes or bottoms of excavations;reduce lateral loads on sheeting and bracing; improve excavating and hauling characteristics of excavated material; prevent failure or heaving of the bottom of excavations; and to provide suitable conditions for placement of backfill materials and construction of structures and other installations. b. Depressurization-reduction in piezometric pressure within strata not controlled by dewatering alone, as required to prevent failure or heaving of excavation bottom. 2. Surface Water Control - diversion and drainage of surface water runoff and rain water away from the excavation. 3. Excavation Drainage- keeping excavations free of surface and seepage water. 02/2008 01564- 1 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for and control of ground water for open cut pipe excavations shall be on a linear foot basis and shall not exceed the length of open cut pipe installation in the area requiring ground water control. B Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for control of ground water for any condition(s) other than those described in this Section, 1.02A. No separate payment will be made for control of surface water. Include the cost to control non-pipe excavation ground water and surface water in price for Work requiring such controls. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit a Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan for review by the Engineer prior to start of any field work. The plan shall be signed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas. The plan shall include the following: 1. Results of subsurface investigation and description of the extent and characteristics of water bearing layers subject to ground water control. 2. Names of equipment suppliers and installation subcontractors. 3. A description of proposed ground water control systems indicating arrangement, location, depth and capacities of system components, installation details and criteria, and operation and maintenance procedures. 4. A description of proposed monitoring and control system indicating depths and locations of piezometers and monitoring wells, monitoring installation details and criteria, type of equipment and instrumentation with pertinent data and characteristics. 5. A description of proposed filters including types, sizes, capacities and manufacturer's application recommendations. 6. Design calculations demonstrating adequacy of proposed systems for intended applications. Define potential area of influence of ground water control operation near contaminated areas. 7. Operating requirements, including piezometric control elevations for dewatering and depressurization. 8. Excavation drainage methods including typical drainage layers, sump pump application and other necessary means. 9. Surface water control and drainage installations. 10. Proposed methods and locations for disposing of removed water. C Submit the following records upon completed initial installation: 1. Installation and development reports for well points, eductors, and deep wells. 02/2008 01564-2 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER 2. Installation reports and baseline readings for piezometers and monitoring wells. 3. Baseline analytical test data of water from monitoring wells. 4. Initial flow rates. D Submit the following records on a weekly basis during operations: 1. Records of flow rates and piezometric elevations obtained during monitoring of dewatering and depressurization. Refer to this Section, 3.02 "Requirements for Eductor, Well Points, or Deep Wells". 2. Maintenance records for ground water control installations, piezometers, and monitoring wells. E Submit the following records at end of the Work. Decommissioning(abandonment) reports for monitoring wells and piezometers installed by other during the design phase and left for Contractor's monitoring and use. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A Conduct subsurface investigations to identify groundwater conditions and to provide parameters for design, installation, and operation of groundwater control systems. B Design a ground water control system, compatible with the requirements of OSHA Standards - 29 CFR, Part 1926, and Section 01570 - Trench Safety Systems of these Technical Specifications, to produce the following results: 1. Effectively reduce the hydrostatic pressure affecting excavations. 2. Develop a substantially dry and stable subgrade for subsequent construction operations. 3. Preclude damage to adjacent properties, buildings, structures, utilities, installed facilities, and other work. 4. Prevent the loss of fines, seepage, boils, quick condition, or softening of the foundation strata. 5. Maintain stability of sides and bottom of excavations. C Ground water control systems may include single-stage or multiple-stage well point systems, eductor and ejector-type systems, deep wells, or combinations of these equipment types. D Provide drainage of seepage water and surface water, as well as water from any other source entering the excavation. Excavation drainage may include placement of drainage materials, such as crushed stone and filter fabric, together with sump pumping. E Provide ditches,berms,pumps and other methods necessary to divert and drain surface water from excavation and other work areas. F Locate ground water control and drainage systems so as not to interfere with utilities, construction operations, adjacent properties, or adjacent water wells. 02/2008 01564- 3 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER G Assume sole responsibility for ground water control systems and for any loss or damage resulting from partial or complete failure of protective measures and any settlement or resultant damage caused by the ground water control operations. Modify ground water control systems or operations if they cause or threaten to cause damage to new construction, existing site improvements, adjacent property, or adjacent water wells,or affect potentially contaminated areas. Repair damage caused by ground water control systems or resulting from failure of the system to protect property as required. H Provide an adequate number of piezometers installed at the proper locations and depths as required to provide meaningful observations of the conditions affecting the excavation, adjacent structures, and water wells. I Provide environmental monitoring wells installed at the proper locations and depths as required to provide adequate observations of hydrostatic conditions and possible contaminant transport from contamination sources into the work area or into the ground water control system. J Decommission piezometers and monitoring wells installed during design phase studies and left for Contractors monitoring and use. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A Comply with requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. B Comply with TCEQ regulations and WWD/PI Advisory Council for development, drilling, and abandonment of wells used in dewatering system. C Obtain permit from TCEQ under the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES),for storm water discharge from construction sites. Refer to Section 01565— TPDES, 3.02 "Certification Requirements". D Obtain all necessary permits from agencies with control over the use of groundwater and matters affecting well installation, water discharge, and use of existing storm drains and natural water sources. Because the review and permitting process may be lengthy, take early action to pursue and submit for the required approvals. E Monitor ground water discharge for contamination while performing pumping in the vicinity of potentially contaminated sites. F Implement control of ground and surface water under the provisions of Section 01566 —Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A Equipment and materials are at the option of Contractor as necessary to achieve desired results for dewatering. Selected equipment and materials are subject to review 02/2008 01564-4 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER of the Engineer through Submittals required in Section 01350 — Submittals, 1.06 "Operations and Maintenance Data". B Eductors, well points, or deep wells, where used, must be furnished, installed and operated by an experienced contractor regularly engaged in ground water control system design, installation, and operation. C Equipment and instrumentation for monitoring and control of the ground water control system includes piezometers and monitoring wells, and devices, such as flow meters, for observing and recording flow rates. D All equipment must be in good repair and operating order. E Sufficient standby equipment and materials shall be kept available to ensure continuous operation, where required. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 GROUND WATER CONTROL A Perform a subsurface investigation by borings as necessary to identify water bearing layers,piezometric pressures,and soil parameters for design and installation of ground water control systems. Perform pump tests, if necessary to determine the drawdown characteristics of the water-bearing layers. The results shall be presented in the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan. Refer to this Section, 1.03B. B Provide labor, material, equipment, techniques and methods to lower, control and handle ground water in a manner compatible with construction methods and site conditions. Monitor effectiveness of the installed system and its effect on adjacent property. C Install, operate, and maintain ground water control systems in accordance with the Plan. Notify Engineer in writing of any changes made to accommodate field conditions and changes to the Work. Provide revised drawings and calculations with such notification. D Provide for continuous system operation, including nights, weekends, and holidays. Arrange for appropriate backup if electrical power is primary energy source for dewatering system. E Monitor operations to verify that the system lowers ground water piezometric levels at a rate required to maintain a dry excavation resulting in a stable subgrade for prosecution of subsequent operations. F Where hydrostatic pressures in confined water bearing layers exist below excavation, depressurize those zones to eliminate risk of uplift or other instability of excavation or installed works. Allowable piezometric elevations shall be defined in the Plan. 02/2008 01564-5 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER G Maintain water level below subgrade elevation. Do not allow levels to rise until foundation concrete has achieved design strength. H During backfilling,dewatering may be reduced to maintain water level a minimum of 5 feet below prevailing level of backfill. However, do not allow that water level to result in uplift pressures in excess of 80 percent of downward pressure produced by weight of structure or backfill in place. Do not allow water levels to rise into cement stabilized sand until at least 48 hour after placement. I Provide a uniform diameter for each pipe drain run constructed for dewatering. Remove pipe drain when it has served its purpose. If removal of pipe is impractical, provide grout connections at 50-foot intervals and fill pipe with cement-bentonite grout or cement-sand grout when pipe is removed from service. J Extent of construction ground water control for structures with a permanent perforated underground drainage system may be reduced,such as for units designed to withstand hydrostatic uplift pressure. Provide a means of draining the affected portion of underground system,including standby equipment. Maintain drainage system during operations and remove it when no longer required. K Remove system upon completion of construction or when dewatering and control of surface or ground water is no longer required. L Compact backfill as required by the Contract Documents. 3.02 REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCTOR, WELL POINTS, OR DEEP WELLS A For aboveground piping in ground water control system,include a 12-inch minimum length of clear, transparent piping between every eductor well or well point and discharge header so that discharge from each installation can be visually monitored. B Install sufficient piezometers or monitoring wells to show that all trench or shaft excavations in water bearing materials are predrained prior to excavation. Provide separate piezometers for monitoring of dewatering and for monitoring of depressurization. Install piezometers and monitoring wells for tunneling as appropriate for Contractor's selected method of work. C Install piezometers or monitoring wells not less than one week in advance of beginning the associated excavation. D Dewatering may be omitted for portions of underdrains or other excavations,but only where auger borings and piezometers or monitoring wells show that soil is predrained by an existing system such that the criteria of the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan are satisfied. 02/2008 01564- 6 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER E Replace installations that produce noticeable amounts of sediments after development. F Provide additional ground water control installations or change the methods in the event that the installations according to the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan do not provide satisfactory results based on the performance criteria defined by the Plan and by this Section. Submit a revised Plan according to this Section, 1.03A. G Mechanical dewatering equipment shall comply with Chapter 19 NOISE, Code of Ordinances, City of Pearland, Texas. 3.03 EXCAVATION DRAINAGE A Contractor may use excavation drainage methods if necessary to achieve well drained, stable trench conditions. The excavation drainage may consist of the following methods or combination of methods: 1. Sump pumping in combination with: a. Layer of crushed stone and filter fabric. b. Sand and gravel drains. 2. Wells for ground water control. B Use sump pumping and a drainage layer, as defined in ASTM D 2321,placed on the foundation beneath pipe bedding or thickened bedding layer of Class I material. 3.04 MAINTENANCE AND OBSERVATION A Conduct daily maintenance and observation of piezometers or monitoring wells while the ground water control installations or excavation drainage are operating in an area. Keep system in good operating condition. B Replace damaged and destroyed piezometers or monitoring wells with new piezometers or wells as necessary to meet observation schedule. C Cut off piezometers or monitoring wells in excavation areas where piping is exposed, only as necessary to perform observation as excavation proceeds. Continue to maintain and make observations, as specified. D Remove and grout piezometers inside or outside the excavation area when ground water control operations are complete. Remove and grout monitoring wells when directed by the Engineer. 3.05 MONITORING AND RECORDING A Monitor and record average flow rate of operation for each deep well, or for each wellpoint or eductor header used in dewatering system. Also monitor and record water level and ground water recovery. These records shall be obtained daily until steady conditions are achieved, and twice weekly thereafter. 02/2008 01564-7 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER B Observe and record elevation of water level daily as long as ground water control system is in operation, and weekly thereafter until the Work is completed or piezometers or wells are removed, except when Engineer determines that more frequent monitoring and recording are required. Comply with Engineer's direction for increased monitoring and recording and take measures as necessary to ensure effective dewatering for intended purpose. 3.06 SURFACE WATER CONTROL A Intercept surface water and divert it away from excavations through use of dikes, ditches,curb walls,pipes,sumps or other approved means. The requirement includes temporary works required to protect adjoining properties from surface drainage caused by construction operations. B Divert surface water and seepage water into sumps and pump it into drainage channels or storm drains, when approved by agencies having jurisdiction. Provide settling basins when required by such agencies. C Provide additional surface water control measures or change the methods in the event that the measures according to the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan do not provide satisfactory results based on the performance criteria defined by the Plan and by this Section. Submit a revised Plan according to this Section, 1.03B. END OF SECTION 02/2008 01564-8 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION Section 01566 SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Descriptions of measures and practices, in response to TPDES General Permit TXR 150000, which shall be used on the Work to eliminate or significantly minimize pollutants in discharges into Surface Water in the State by controlling erosion and sediments at their source. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01550—Stabilized Construction Exit 2. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls C Definitions: 1. Potential Water Pollutant- any substance that could potentially alter the physical, thermal, chemical, or biological quality of the Surface Water in the State, rendering the water harmful, detrimental, or injurious to humans, animal life, vegetation, or property, or to public health, safety or welfare, or impairs the usefulness or the public enjoyment of the water for any lawful or reasonable purpose. 1.02 MEAUSREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in the Plans and this Technical Specification. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil, other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C The Contractor shall install, maintain, and inspect erosion and sediment control measures and practices that operate effectively and as specified in the Plans and in this or other Technical Specifications. 07/2006 01566- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION D Equipment and vehicles shall be prohibited by the Contractor from maneuvering on areas outside of the limits of construction or dedicated rights-of-way and easements. Damage caused by construction traffic to erosion and sediment control systems shall be repaired immediately by the Contractor. E The Contractor shall be responsible for collecting, storing, hauling, and disposing of spoil, silt, waste materials, and contaminated material resulting from erosion and sediment control measures as specified in this or other Technical Specifications and in compliance with applicable federal, state, and local rules and regulations. 3.02 EXPOSED SOIL A When soil is exposed as a result of clearing,grading,excavating,stockpiling,or other soil disturbing activities, the Contractor shall implement measures to effectively control erosion and prevent the escape of sediments from the Project Site. B Control measures may include the following practices: 1. Preserve existing vegetation to the extent possible. 2. Construct drainage swales, berms, or sediment basins. 3. Maintain grades to minimize the velocity of sheet flow over disturbed areas and promote evaporation and infiltration of storm water directly into the ground. 4. Install filter fabric fences or barriers, sediment traps, seepage basins, gabions, or storm drain inlet protection devices. 5. Utilize vegetative buffer strips, mulching, or riprap C When the placement of topsoil,bank sand, or other soil material is specified,after an area has been brought to grade and immediately prior to placement, loosen the subgrade discing or by scarifying to a depth of at least 2 inches to permit bonding to the subsoil. D When all soil disturbing activities have been completed, establish a perennial vegetative cover on all areas that are not paved, covered by permanent structures, or otherwise permanently stabilized. 3.03 DUST CONTROL A Implement control measures to minimize dust creation and movement on construction sites and roads and to prevent airborne sediment from reaching receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems, to reduce on-site and off-site damage, to prevent health hazards, and to improve traffic safety. B Control blowing dust by using one or more of the following measures: 1. Mulches bound with chemical binders. 2. Temporary vegetative cover. 3. Tillage to roughen surface and bring clods to the surface. 4. Irrigation by water sprinkling. 07/2006 01566-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION 5. Barriers using solid board fences, burlap fences, crate walls, bales of hay, or similar materials. C Implement dust control measures immediately whenever dust can be observed blowing on the Project Site. 3.04 DEMOLITION AREAS A Demolition activities which create large amounts of dust with significant concentrations of heavy metals or other potential water pollutants shall use methods described in this Section,3.03"Dust Control",to limit transport of airborne pollutants. However, water or slurry used to control dust contaminated with heavy metals or potential water pollutants shall be retained on the Project Site and shall not be allowed to run directly into watercourses or storm water conveyance systems by the appropriate use of control measures described in this Section. Methods of ultimate disposal of these materials shall be carried out in accordance with applicable local, state, and federal health and safety regulations. 3.05 SEDIMENT TRACKING A Minimize off-site tracking of sediments and the generation of dust by construction vehicles, keeping the streets clean or construction debris and mud, by implementing one or more of the following control measures: 1. Restrict all ingress and egress to stabilized construction exits. 2. Stabilize areas used for staging, parking, storage or disposal. 3. Stabilize on-site vehicle transportation routes. 4. Remove mud and other debris, washing if necessary, from vehicles prior to entrance onto public roadways from the Project Site. 5. Maintain grade to minimize the occurrence of mud on the Project Site. B Construct stabilized construction areas under the provisions of Section 01550 — Stabilized Construction Exists. C In addition to Stabilized Construction Exits shovel or sweep the pavement to the extent necessary to keep the street clean. Water-hosing or sweeping of debris and mud off of the street into adjacent areas is not allowed. 3.06 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR A Control equipment maintenance and repair so that oils,gasoline,grease,solvents,and other potential water pollutants cannot be washed directly into receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems. B Control measures may include the following practices: 1. Confine maintenance and repair of construction machinery and equipment to areas specifically designated for that purpose. 2. Provide these areas with adequate waste disposal receptacles for liquid as well as solid waste. 07/2006 01566-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION 3. Clean and inspect maintenance and repair areas daily. 4. Stabilize the area with coarse aggregate. 5. Maintain grade to prevent surface water from flowing over the area. 6. Place plastic matting, packed clay, tar paper, or other impervious material to prevent contamination of soil in the area. 7. Isolate areas of contaminated soil or other materials to facilitate proper removal and disposal. C Where effective control measures are not feasible,equipment shall be taken off-site for maintenance and repair. 3.07 WASTE COLLECTION AND DISPOSAL A Conduct operations in conformance with the plan provided in Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal and utilize such control measures,described in this Section,as may be necessary to eliminate or significantly reduce the discharge of possible water pollutants from the Project Site as a result of waste collection and disposal. B Keep receptacles and waste collection areas neat and orderly to the extent possible. Waste shall not be allowed to overflow its container or accumulate from day-to-day. Locate trash collection points where they will least likely be affected by concentrated storm water runoff. 3.08 WASHING AREAS A Vehicles such as concrete delivery trucks or dump trucks and other construction equipment shall not be washed at locations where the runoff will flow directly into a watercourse or storm water conveyance system. Preventative measures may include the following practices: 1. Designate special areas for washing vehicles. 2. Locate these areas where the wash water will spread out and evaporate or infiltrate directly into the ground, or where the runoff can be collected in a temporary holding or seepage basin. 3. Beneath wash areas construct a gravel or rock base to minimize mud production. B Construct washing areas under the provisions of Section 01550 — Stabilized Construction Exists. 3.09 STORAGE AND USAGE OF POTENTIAL WATER POLLUTANTS A Store and use potential water pollutants such as pesticides,fertilizers,distillate fuels, lubricants, solvents, cements, paints, acids, caustics, and other toxic substances in accordance with manufacturers' guidelines, Material Safety Data Sheets, and with local, state, and federal regulations. 07/2006 01566-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION B Isolate these substances in areas where they are to be stored,opened or used such that they will not cause pollution of runoff from the Project Site. Preventative measures may include the following practices: 1. Stabilize the area with coarse aggregate. 2. Store containers on raised platforms. 3. Place plastic matting, packed clay, tar paper, or other impervious material to prevent contamination of soil in the area. 4. Provide protective cover or weather proof enclosure. 5. Minimize accidental spillage. 6. Keep containers tightly closed. 7. Periodically inspect containers for leakage. 8. Maintain grade to prevent surface water from flowing over the area. 9. Provide berms, filter fabric fences or barriers, or sediment basins. 10. Designate washing areas for containers and other items that have come in contact with potential water pollutants. C Avoid overuse of substances such as pesticides and fertilizers which could produce contaminated runoff. 3.10 SANITARY FACILITIES A Provide the Project Site with adequate portable toilets for workers in accordance with Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls,and applicable health regulations. B Control areas where sanitary facilities are located so that sewage or chemicals will not be washed directly into receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems by using one or more of the following measures. 1. Inspect the facilities daily. 2. Service the facilities as often as necessary to maintain cleanliness and prevent overflows. 3. Stabilize the area with coarse aggregate 4. Maintain grade to prevent surface water from flowing over the area END OF SECTION 07/2006 01566-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT Section 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for transportation, delivery, handling, and storage of materials and equipment. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this work is a component. 1.03 PRODUCTS A Products: Means material,equipment,or systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation,fabrication,conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components designated for reuse. B Do not reuse materials and equipment,designated to be removed,except as specified by the Contract Documents. C Provide equipment and components from the fewest number of manufacturers as is practical, in order to simplify spare parts inventory and to allow for maximum interchangeability of components. For multiple components of the same size,type or application, use the same make and model of component throughout the Work. 1.04 TRANSPORTATION A Make arrangements for transportation, delivery, and handling of equipment and materials required for timely completion of the Work. B Transport and handle products in accordance with instructions. C Consign and address shipping documents to the proper party giving name of Project, street number, and City. Shipments shall be delivered to the Contractor. 1.05 DELIVERY A Arrange deliveries of products to accommodate the Construction Schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation. Avoid deliveries that cause lengthy storage or overburden of limited storage space. 07/2006 01600- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT B Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at the Project Site and to accommodate the following: 1. Work of other contractors or the Owner. 2. Limitations of storage space. 3. Availability of equipment and personnel for handling products. 4. Owner's use of premises. C Have products delivered to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened, labeled containers. D Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipment to assure: 1. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Quantities are correct. 3. Containers and packages are intact; labels are legible. 4. Products are properly protected and undamaged. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A Coordinate the off-loading of materials and equipment delivered to the Project Site. If necessary to move stored materials and equipment during construction, Contractor shall relocate materials and equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. B Provide equipment and personnel necessary to handle products, including those provided by the Owner, by methods to prevent damage to products or packaging. C Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent breaking scraping, marring, or otherwise damaging products or surrounding areas. D Handle products by methods to prevent over bending or overstressing. E Lift heavy components only at designated lifting points. F Handle materials and equipment in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. G Do not drop, roll, or skid products off delivery vehicles. Hand carry or use suitable materials handling equipment. 1.07 STORAGE OF MATERIAL A Store and protect materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of these Technical Specifications. Control storage of potential water pollutants in conformance with Section 01566 — Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. B Make necessary provisions for safe storage of materials and equipment. Place loose soil materials,and materials to be incorporated into the Work to prevent damage to any part of the Work or existing facilities and to maintain free access at all times to all parts of the Work and to utility service company installations in the vicinity of the Work. 07/2006 01600-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT C Keep materials and equipment neatly and compactly stored in locations that will cause a minimum of inconvenience to other contractors, public travel, adjoining owners, tenants, and occupants. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. D Provide adequately ventilated, watertight storage facilities with floor above ground level for materials and equipment susceptible to weather damage. E Restrict storage to areas available on the construction site for storage of material and equipment as shown on Plans or approved by the Project Manager. F Provide off-site storage and protection when on-site storage is not adequate. G Do not use lawns, grass plots, or other private property for storage purposes without written permission of the owner or other person in possession or control of such premises. Damage to lawns,sidewalks,streets or other improvements shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. H Protect stored materials and equipment against loss or damage. I Store materials in manufacturers'unopened containers. J Materials delivered and stored along the line of the Work shall be not closer than 3 feet to any fire hydrant. Public and private drives and street crossings shall be kept open. K The total length which materials may be distributed along the route of construction at any one time is 1000 lineal feet, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Project Manager. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 07/2006 01600-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS Section 01630 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Options for making product or process selections. B Procedures for proposing equivalent construction products or processes,including pre- approved, and approved products or processes C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350—Submittals. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A Product: Means,materials,equipment,or systems incorporated into the Work.Product does not include machinery and equipment used for production,fabrication,conveying, and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components designated for re-use. B Process: Any proprietary system or method for installing system components resulting in an integral, functioning part of the Work. For this Section, the word Product includes Processes. 1.04 SELECTION OPTIONS A Pre-approved Products: Products of certain manufacturers or suppliers are designated in the Technical Specifications as"pre-approved". Products of other manufacturers or suppliers will not be acceptable under this Contract and will not be considered under the submittal process for approving alternate products. B Approved Products: Products of certain manufacturers or suppliers designated in the Technical Specifications followed by the words "or approved equal". Approval of alternate products not listed in the Technical Specifications may be obtained through provisions of this Section and Section 01350—Submittals. The procedure for approval of alternate products is not applicable to Pre-approved Products. C Product Compatibility: To the maximum extent possible,provide products that are of the same type or function from a single manufacturer, make, or source. Where more than one choice is available as a Contractor's option, select a product which is compatible with other products already selected, specified, or in use by the Owner. 07/2006 01630- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A Furnish information the Engineer deems necessary to judge equivalency of the alternate product. B Pay for laboratory testing as well as any other review or examination cost needed to establish the equivalency between products which enables the Engineer to make such a judgment. C If the Engineer determines that an alternate product is not equivalent to that named in the Technical Specifications,the Contractor shall furnish one of the specified products. 1.06 ENGINEER'S REVIEW A Alternate products may be used only if approved in writing by the Engineer. The Engineer's determination regarding acceptance of a proposed alternate product is final. B Alternate products will be accepted if the product is judged by the Engineer to be equivalent to the specified product or to offer substantial benefit to the Owner. C The Owner retains the right to accept any product deemed advantageous to the Owner, and similarly, to reject any product deemed not beneficial to the Owner. 1.07 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURE A Collect and assemble technical information applicable to the proposed product to aid in determining equivalency as related to the Approved Product specified. B Submit a written request for a product to be considered as an alternate product along with the product information within fourteen(14)days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. C After the submittal period has expired, requests for alternate products will be considered only when a specified product becomes unavailable because of conditions beyond the Contractor's control. D Submit 5 copies of each request for alternate product approval. Include the following information: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. 2. For products: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature with product description, performance and test data, and reference standards. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product was used and date of installation. Include the name of the Owner, Architect/Engineer, and installing contractor. 07/2006 01630-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 3. For construction methods: a. Detailed description of proposed method. b. Shop Drawings illustrating methods. 4. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified. 5. Data relating to changes in Construction Schedule 6. Relationship to separate contracts, if any. 7. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product or method specified. 8. Other information requested by the Engineer. E Approved alternate products will be subject to the same review process as the specified product would have been for Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION 07/2006 01630-3 of 3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SECTION 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal requirements for manufacturers' operation and maintenance (O&M) data. B. Submittal requirements for O&M data notebooks. 1.02 UNIT PRICES A. The value and payment of approved equipment operation and maintenance manuals is incidental to the amount bid for equipment and installation. Project retainage will not be released until O&M manuals have been delivered and accepted by Owner. 1.03 REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish manufacturers' operation and maintenance data notebooks for equipment and components as required by the individual technical specifications in accordance with all sections and provisions of these specifications. B. Furnish O&M data notebooks in accordance with the requirements of this Section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit O&M data for manufacturers' equipment and components, as required. B. For projects which include multiple facilities, provide separate O&M data submittals noted accordingly. C. Manufacturers' O&M data submittals shall have been reviewed and accepted by the Owner's Representative prior to requesting operational testing. D. Submit three (3) copies of complete O&M data notebooks and electronic copies on disks meeting the requirements of this Section to the Owner's Representative 14 days prior to the scheduled demonstration testing and facility start-up. E. Compile the O&M data notebook of all approved manufacturer O&M data submittals previously reviewed and accepted by the Owner's Representative and organize in accordance with the requirements of this Section. ARKK Standard 3/14/2012 01730-1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA F. Incorporate revisions or additional data required for the O&M data notebook, due to system start-up and demonstration testing, and resubmit as a condition of final payment. 1.05 O&M DATA A. For each product or system list names, addresses, e-mail addresses and telephone numbers of suppliers and service representatives, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems,to show control and flow diagrams. D. Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. E. Warranties, Guarantees and Bonds: Bind in a copy of each. 1.06 O&M REQUIREMENTS A. For each item of equipment and each system include a description of unit or system and component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves where applicable, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. B. Data submitted on equipment shall include complete maintenance instructions (including preventive and corrective maintenance) and parts lists in sufficient detail to facilitate ordering replacements. C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, and normal operating instructions and sequence. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. D. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. Cross- reference lubricants to products offered by at least three major lubricant suppliers. Note lubrication points on Drawings. E. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. F. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. ARKK Standard 3/14/2012 01730-2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA G. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams, and diagrams required for maintenance. H. Troubleshooting guides. I. Complete spare parts list with predicted life of parts subject to wear, list of spare parts recommended on hand for both initial start-up and for normal operating inventory, and local or nearest source of spare parts availability. 1.07 O&M DATA NOTEBOOKS A. The Contractor shall compile O&M data notebooks for each facility consisting of the assembled manufacturer's O&M data submittals which were previously reviewed and accepted by the. Owner's Representative The O&M data notebooks are required before demonstration testing or start-up activities. B. Submit O&M data notebooks, bound in 81/2 x 11 inch text pages, 3-ring/D binder notebooks with durable plastic covers as well as electronic media containing the O&M manuals in acceptable electronic format. C. Provide binder covers and spines with computer printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA", title of project, facility name and address. D. For projects with multiple facilities, provide separate O&M data notebooks specific to each facility. E. Provide separate binder notebooks based on category of equipment or components submitted. Note as either "Mechanical", "Electrical", or "Instrumentation" on the cover and spine. DO NOT combine these into one binder. F. All binder notebooks shall be provided with labeled, tabbed, dividers logically arranged, and shall include a Table of Contents noting all sections, drawings, diagrams, vendor data, and other documents. PART2 PRODUCTS - NOTUSED PART3 EXECUTION - NOTUSED END OF SECTION ARKK Standard 3/14/2012 01730-3 CITY OF PEARLAND STARTING SYSTEMS Section 01750 STARTING SYSTEMS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Starting systems. B Demonstration and instructions. C Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D References to Technical specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01430—Contractor's Quality Control 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Contractor shall conduct all start-up operations under this Contract in conformance with Section 01430—Contractor's Quality Control. B Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. C Notify Engineer 7 days prior to startup of each item. D Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. E Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. 07/2006 01750- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND STARTING SYSTEMS • F Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. G Execute start-up under Contractor's supervision in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H When specified in individual specification sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect,check and approve equipment or system installation prior to and during start-up,and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. 3.02 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner two weeks minimum prior to date of Substantial Completion. B Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. C Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed-upon times, at equipment location. D Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 3.03 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING A Contractor shall start, test, adjust, balance, and provide reports on all installed equipment as provided for in this section. B Owner may also appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting, and balancing. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Owner indicating observations and results of the tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with specified requirements and with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C Owner's employment of an independent firm shall not relieve the Contractor's responsibility under this section. END OF SECTION 07/2006 01750-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Section 01760 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Maintenance and Submittal of Record Documents and Samples. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01770—Contract Closeout 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350—Submittals. 1.04 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A Maintain one copy of Record Documents at the Project Site in accordance with Section 00700— General Conditions of Agreement, 3.02 "Keeping Plans and Specifications Accessible". B Store Record Documents and Samples in field office if a field office is required by Contract Documents, or in a secure location. Provide files, racks, and secure storage for Record Documents and Samples. C Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters. D Maintain Record Documents in a clean,dry,and legible condition. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes. E Keep Record Documents and Samples available for inspection by Engineer. 1.05 RECORDING A Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. B Plans, Change Orders, and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record all actual construction, or "as built" conditions, including: 1. Measured horizontal locations and elevations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 07/2006 01760- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 2. Elevations of underground utilities referenced to bench marks utilized for the Work. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Changes made by modifications. 5. Details not on original Plans. 6. References to related Shop Drawings and Modifications. C Record information with a red pen or pencil on a set of drawings indicated as the Record Document Set, provided by Engineer. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION A Deliver Record Documents and Samples to Owner in accordance with Section 01770— Contract Closeout. END OF SECTION 07/2006 01760-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Section 01770 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Closeout procedures including final submittals such as operation and maintenance data, warranties, and spare parts and maintenance materials. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.04 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A Comply with Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement regarding Final Completion and Final Payment when Work is complete and ready for Engineer's final inspection. B Provide Record Documents under provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. C Complete or correct items on punch list,with no new items added. Any new items will be addressed during warranty period. D The Owner will occupy portions of the Work as specified in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. E Contractor shall request Final Inspection at least two weeks prior to Final Acceptance. 1.05 FINAL CLEANING A Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B Clean debris from drainage systems. C Clean Project Site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. 09/2009 01770- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACT CLOSEOUT D Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and temporary construction facilities from the Project Site following the final test of utilities and completion of the Work. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A Submit Operations and Maintenance data under provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.07 WARRANTIES A Provide one original of each warranty from Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Manufacturers. B Provide Table of Contents and assemble warranties in 3-ring/D binder with durable plastic cover. C Submit warranties prior to Final Application for Payment. 1. Warranties shall commence in accordance with the requirements of Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement, 1.09 "Substantially Completed". 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION Contractor shall diligently pursue completion of the items and activities contained in the Contract Close Out and Project Record Document sections of the project manual. Notwithstanding any performance of warranty work,the work of Contract Closeout shall be complete within thirty (30) days of the date of Final Completion and Acceptance of the work. END OF SECTION 09/2009 01770-2 of 2 Technical Specifications Division 2 — 15 : Civil & Mechanical STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS SECTION 02613 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Stainless steel pipe and fittings for wastewater use. 1.02 UNIT PRICE A. No separate payment will be made for stainless steel pipe and fittings under this section. Include cost in unit price for related item. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME B16.1 —Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. B. ANSI/ASME B36.19M— Standard for Stainless Steel Pipe. C. ANSUAWWA C207 — Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service — Sizes 4- inches through 144-inches. D. ANSUAWWA C220— Standard for Stainless Steel Pipe 4-inch and Larger. E. ASTM A240 — Standard Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels. F. ASTM F593 — Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. G. ASTM F594— Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300—Submittals. B. Submit shop drawings showing design of new pipe and fittings indicating laying dimensions, fabrication, fitting, flange, and special details. Production of pipe and fittings prior to review by Engineer is at Contractor's risk. 19-024 02613-1 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 1.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide manufacturer's certifications that all stainless steel pipe and fittings meet provisions of this Section and have been hydrostatically tested at factory and meet requirements of ANSUAWWA C220. B. Provide certifications that all flange joints have been tested and meet requirements of ANSI/AWWA C207. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE A. Type: Electrically welded or seamless at Contractor's option. B. Material: ASTM A240, Type 304 or 304L. C. Diameter and Wall Thickness: Pipe diameters shown and wall thickness shall comply with ANSI/ASME B36.19M, Schedule 40. D. Pressure Rating: 150 psi minimum (internal operating pressure). All pipe shall be capable of withstanding full vacuum. E. Fabrication: 1. Longitudinal Seams: Maximum of two per section. 2. Girth Seams: Not less than four feet apart, except at fittings and specials. 3. Pipe Ends: Perpendicular to longitudinal axis. 4. Roundness: ±1/16-inch. 5. Straightness: ±1/8-inch in 10-feet. 6. Edges: All joint-edges shall be true so as not to leave a shoulder on the inside of the pipe. F. Welding: 1. Longitudinal Welds: Tungsten Inert Gas or Metal Inert Gas. 2. Circumferential Welds: Helicare or metallic air process. 3. Grinding: All interior welds shall be ground smooth to provide and internal bead of 1/16 inch or less. 19-024 02613-2 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS G. Factory Finish: 1. All pipe and fittings shall be pickled after manufacture by immersion in acid bath until all weld discoloration and iron pickup is removed. 2. Passivate all piping welds after fabrication. 3. Thoroughly wash all pipe and fittings with clear water after pickling. 2.02 STAINLESS STEEL FLANGED JOINTS A. Provide welded plate flange joints, restrained flange adapters or flexible couplings as required for field assembly of exposed and submerged piping, all stainless steel. B. All other joints shall be shop welded unless otherwise shown or specified in the Drawings. C. Welded plate flanges shall conform to ASTM A240 Type 304/304L stainless steel drilled to ANSI B16.1 Class 125 standards. Fabrication and welding, in addition to the requirements stated herein, shall comply with ANSI/AWWA C207, Class E flanges (pressure rated at 250 psi). D. Gaskets: Minimum 1/8-inch thick, EPDM or neoprene, full faced gaskets. E. Bolts and Nuts: Bolts per ASTM F593 Type 316 stainless steel, and nuts per ASTM F594 Type 316 stainless steel. 2.03 STAINLESS STEEL FITTINGS A. Type: Flanged joints as shown on the Drawings, conforming to ASTM A240 Type 316L stainless steel drilled to ANSI B16.1 Class 125 Standards,pressure rated at 250 psi. B. Construction: Smooth radius. C. Wall Thickness: As required for the service condition specified but in no case less than the pipe wall thickness. PART 3 —EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Conform to installation requirements of the Drawings, Specifications and manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 19-024 02613-3 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS Section 02634 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ductile iron pipe and fittings for water mains,wastewater force mains,gravity sanitary sewers, and storm sewers. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 02676—Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines 3. Section 02533 —Sanitary Sewage Force Mains 4. Section 02630—Polyethylene Wrap 5. Section 02510—Water Mains 6. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers C. Referenced Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. ANSI A21.51, Ductile-lion Pipe Centrifugal Cast, in Metal Molds b. ANSI A21.11, Rubber Gasket Joints Cast and Ductile Iron Press Pipe c. ANSI A21.15, Flanged Cast and Ductile Iron d. ANSI A21.50, Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe e. ANSI A21.10, Cast Iron and Ductile lion Fittings,2 thru 48 in./Water f. ANSI B16.1, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings g. ANSI A21.53, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service h. ANSI A21.4, Cement-Mortar lining/Cast and Ductile lion Pipe and Fittings 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings b. AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray lion Fittings for Water c. AWWA C153 Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service d. AWWA C600 Installation for Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances 3. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) a. SSPC-SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 5/2013 02634- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS a. ASTM G 62,"Standard Test Method for Holiday Detection in Pipeline Coatings" b. ASTM D 1248, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for ductile iron pipe and fittings under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for Water Mains, Sanitary Sewage Force Mains, Gravity Sanitary Sewers, and Storm Sewers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit Shop Drawings showing design of new pipe and fittings indicating alignment and grade, laying dimensions, fabrication, fitting, flange, and special details. Show station numbers for pipe and fittings corresponding to Plans. Production of pipe and fittings prior to review by the Engineer is at Contractor's risk. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide manufacturer's certifications that all ductile iron pipe and fittings meet provisions of this Section and have been hydrostatically tested at factory and meet requirements of ANSI A21.51. B. Provide certifications that all pipe joints have been tested and meet requirements of ANSI A21.11. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. Ductile iron pipe barrels: ANSI A21.15,ANSI A21.50 or ANSI A21.51;bear mark of Underwriters' Laboratories approval. B. Provide pipe sections in standard lengths,not less than 18 feet long,except for special fittings and closure sections as indicated on Shop Drawings. C. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings,use minimum Pressure Class 250 for waterlines or thickness Class 52 for waterlines in casing or augered hole. Provide minimum thickness Class 52 for sanitary sewers. Provide minimum Pressure Class 350 for flanged pipe. 5/2013 02634-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.02 JOINTS A. Joint types: ANSI A21.11 push-on;ANSI A21.11 mechanical joint;or ANSI A21.15 flanged end. Provide push-on joints unless otherwise indicated on the Plans or required by these specifications.For bolted joints,bolts shall conform to requirements of AWWA C111. B. Where restrained joints for buried service are required by Plans, provide one of the following, or Approved Equal (restrained joints shall be polyethylene wrapped): 1. Super-Lock Joint by Clow Corporation. 2. Flex-Ring or Lok-Ring by American Cast Iron Pipe Company. 3. TR-Flex Joint by U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company. 4. EBAA IRON MEGALUG Mechanical Joint Restraint. C. Threaded or grooved type joints which reduce pipe wall thickness below minimum required are not acceptable. D. Provide for restrained joints designed to meet test pressures required under Section 02676 - Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines or Section 02533— Sanitary Sewage Force Mains, as applicable. E. Where ductile iron water main is cathodically protected from corrosion,bond rubber gasketed joints as shown on Plans to provide electrical continuity along entire pipeline, except where insulating flanges are required by Plans. 2.03 GASKETS A. Furnish, when no contaminant is identified, plain rubber (SBR) gasket material; for flanged joints 1/8-inch thick gasket in accordance with ANSI A21.15. B. Pipes to be installed in potentially contaminated areas,especially where free product is found near the elevation of the proposed pipeline, shall have the following gasket materials for the noted contaminants: CONTAMINANT GASKET MATERIAL REQUIRED • Petroleum (diesel, gasoline) Nitrile Rubber,Nitrile Rubber, FKM Viton Type Gasket(ASTM 1418) Other contaminants As recommended by the pipe manufacture 5/2013 02634-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.04 FITTINGS A. Use fittings of same size as pipe. Reducers are not permitted to facilitate an off-size fitting. Reducing bushings are also prohibited. Make reductions in piping size by reducing fittings. Line and coat fittings as specified for pipe they serve. B. Push-on Fittings will not be allowed above grade. C. Flanged Fittings: ANSI A21.10; ANSI B16.1 cast or ductile iron. Flanges: ANSI B16.1, Class 125; pressure rated at 250 psig. D. Mechanical Joint Fittings: ANSI A21.10 (AWWA C110);pressure rated at 250 psi. E. Ductile Iron Compact Fittings for Water Mains:ANSI A21.53(AWWA C 153);4-inch through 12-inch diameter; cement-mortar lining; conform to requirements of Section 02630—Polyethylene Wrap. 2.05 COATINGS AND LININGS A. Water Main Interiors: ANSI A21.4, cement lined with seal coat. B. Sanitary Sewer and Force Main Interiors: 1. Preparation: Commercial blast cleaning conforming to SSPC-SP6. 2. Liner thickness: Nominal 40 mils, minimum 35 mils, for pipe barrel interior; minimum 6- 10 mils at gasket groove and outside spigot end to 6-inches back from end. 3. Testing: ASTM G 62, Method B for voids and holidays; provide written certification. 4. Acceptable Lining Materials: a. Virgin polyethylene conforming to ASTM D 1248, with inert fillers and carbon black to resist ultraviolet degradation during storage heat bonded to interior surface of pipe and fittings;"Polyline"by American Cast Iron Pipe Company; or Approved Equal. b. Polyurethane: Corro-pipe II by Madison Chemicals. c. Ceramic Epoxy: Protecto-401 by Enduron Protective Coatings. C. Sanitary Sewer Point Repair Pipe: For pipes which will be lined with high density polyethylene liner pipe or cured-in-place liner,provide cement-lined with seal coat in accordance with ANSI A21.4. For pipes which will not be provided with named liner, provide pipe as specified in this Section, 2.05B "Sanitary Sewer and Force Main Interiors". 5/2013 02634-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS D. Exterior: Prime coat and outside asphaltic coating conforming to ANSI A21.10,ANSI A21.15, or ANSI A21.51 for pipe and fittings in open cut excavation and in casings. E. Polyethylene Wrap: For buried water lines and sanitary sewers, including point repairs, provide polyethylene wrap unless otherwise specified or shown. Provide Polyethylene Wrap for all buried ductile iron pipe,including polyurethane coated pipe. F. For flanged joints in buried service, provide petrolatum wrapping system, Denso, or Approved Equal, for the complete joint and all alloy steel fasteners. Alternatively, provide bolts made of Type 304 Stainless Steel. G. Pipe to be installed in potentially contaminated areas shall have coatings and linings recommended by the manufacturer as resistant to the contaminants. 2.06 MANUFACTURERS A. Pre-approved manufacturers of ductile iron are American Cast Iron Pipe Co.,McWane Cast Iron Pipe Co., and U. S. Pipe and Foundry Co. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Conform to installation requirements of Section 02510—Water Mains,Section 02530 —Gravity Sanitary Sewers,and Section 02533—Sanitary Sewage Force Mains,except as modified in this Section. B. Install in accordance with AWWA C600 and manufacturer's recommendations. C. Install all ductile iron pipe in polyethylene wrap, unless cathodic protection is provided. Do not use polyethylene wrap with a cathodic protection system. 3.02 GRADE A. Unless otherwise specified on Plans,install ductile iron pipe for water service to clear utility lines with following minimum cover: DIAMETER DEPTH OF COVER (INCHES) (FEET) 16 and 24 5 12 and smaller 4 END OF SECTION 5/2013 02634-5 of 5 LIFT STATION WALL LINER SECTION 02770 LIFT STATION WALL LINER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Repair and/or rehabilitation of deteriorated lift station basins with corrosion resistant wall liner system. 1. Lining and sealing of concrete and/or masonry walls, ceiling, floor, pipe inlets, to include removal of unsound materials, preparation, chemical grouting, structural grouting, patching, plugging and sealing compounds. 2. Surface preparation, and installing of structural linings, corrosion protection coating, and/or flexible corrosion protection lining, to include protection of surfaces not to be treated, touch-up, clean-up and appurtenant work all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and this Specification. 1.02 UNIT PRICES A. Refer to Section 01200 -Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures. B. Measurement and payment for the installation of wall liner as per specifications is on a square foot basis at the specified thickness or as indicated in the Proposal Form, using the system as shown on the plans and reflected on the Bid Form. C. Incidental items include cleaning, preparation, testing, all safety procedures plugs, diversion pumping to complete lining and associated testing, sealing of active leaks, drilling of weep holes if necessary, repair of cracks, holes or any other deterioration, disposal of debris, grouting the existing pipes and surface restoration. D. Cleaning and removal of debris prior to installation of liner shall be considered incidental to the cost of lift station and basin rehabilitation. E. Pay estimates for progress payments will be made as measured above. An estimate for 100 percent payment will be authorized when the structure has been lined and successfully tested. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Perform work needed to make lift station basin structurally sound, prevent entrance of inflow or groundwater, prevent entrance of soil or debris, and provide protection against hydrogen sulfide gas attack. 19-024 02770-1 LIFT STATION WALL LINER B. Manufacturer's Product Support - Provide a representative employed by the manufacturer having technical training in admixture and wall liner to ensure that the work is performed per manufacturer's recommendations. This includes visual examination of the wet well after hydoblasting and prior to placement of any liner. The manufacturer's representative will notify the Contractor and the City representative immediately if additional preparatory (hydro blasting, sealing) work is necessary prior to providing concurrence with the lining operations. The manufacturer's representative shall submit a written report within one week of each site visit summarizing observations, recommendations with special notes about corrective actions, and photo(s). C. Obtain all chemical grouting materials from a single manufacturer. D. Installation shall be completed by firms and individuals trained in methods of installation by the manufacturer with at least five years of experience. E. All Contractor personnel performing the lining work shall have confined space entry certification that is up to date. Such certification must be provided as a submittal to the Engineer. F. Field verification shall be completed by the contractor prior to commencement of work. G. Contractor shall verify the finished thickness of each rehabilitation method prior to starting the next layer and upon completion of the work. The Engineer may obtain core samples at his discretion. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit product data, including surface preparation instructions and application instructions, from manufacturer of wall repair materials, hydraulic cements, quickset mortars, specialized sealants, and grouts. C. Contractor is responsible for performing a PH Level Determination test for each lift station and submitting the results to the Engineer prior to commencing any work. D. Installer Qualifications. Installers of liners and wall repair systems shall submit qualifications to Engineer at least 14 days prior to start of any material application. Submittal shall consist of: 1. Manufacturer's approved equipment list, by name and model number for application of product and contractor's equipment list showing approved equipment available for use in product application. 2. List of contractor's personnel who have satisfactorily completed 19-024 02770-2 LIFT STATION WALL LINER manufacturer's training in product application within previous two years. Include date of certification for each person. E. Progress Photographs: 1. After cleaning and sealing each lift station wet well, submit color photographs of the wet well's interior walls for review by Engineer. Manufacturer's representative must inspect the wet well before giving approval to begin lining. 2. After liner installation of each basin, submit a minimum of three additional color photographs to show final condition of rehabilitated lift station wet well. 3. Provide photographs of sufficient quality and clarity so that interior condition can be readily determined by Engineer. 4. Provide with photos the date, lift station number, material used, and appropriate remarks. 1.05 SALVAGE A. Covers and frames, inlet grates and frames, pipes, brackets, pumps, and all lift station equipment remain the property of the Owner. Deliver salvaged items to locations designated by Engineer. 1.06 MATERIAL HANDLING,DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Materials shall be delivered in the original unopened containers. Each container shall be clearly labeled with the following: 1) Product name 2) Manufacturer's name 3) Component designation 4) Product mix ratio 5) Health and safety information B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle the materials which prevent damage. The contractor shall promptly inspect delivered materials for damage. C. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL CLEANING MATERIAL A. High Pressure Water: 5000-psi minimum force. B. Cleaners: Detergent or muriatic acid capable of removing dirt, grease, oil and other matter which would prevent a good bond of sealing material to wall. Refer to sealing material manufacturer's recommendations. 19-024 02770-3 LIFT STATION WALL LINER 2.02 WALL REPAIR MATERIALS A. Hydraulic Cements: Use a blend of cement powders or hydraulic cement to stop active leaks in the structure that meet the following: 1) Compressive strength of 5500 psi in 28-days 2) Tensile strength of 570 to 650 psi in 28-days 3) Bond strength of 800 to 880 psi in 28 days B. Quickset Mortar: Use a quickset mortar to repair wide cracks, holes or disintegrated mortar. 2.03 STRUCTURAL REPAIR AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. 100% CALCIUM ALUMINATE WALL LINER 1. This method consists of spray applying a 100% Fused Calcium Aluminate (mortar + aggregate) cementitious mix to the basin walls, ceiling, and floor on the existing basin resulting in a monolithic liner to the thickness as designed on the bid proposal and on the drawings. The mix(es) shall be batched in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Adding water to facilitate application at the nozzle will not be allowed. 2. Provide preapproved cementitious structural rehabilitation liner material for use as a liner for basin. Use a pre-approved cementitious structural rehabilitation material which developed a minimum compressive strength of 5,500 psi at 24 hours as tested per the provisions of ASTM C 109. Follow manufacturer's recommended batching and mixing instructions. 3. Select wall liner material from the following list of preapproved products: a. SewperCoat PG (Fiber-reinforced 100% Calcium aluminate mortar) by Kerneos, Inc. with a 10-year warranty from the manufacturer. 4. The materials to be utilized in the lining of lift station basins shall be designed and manufactured to withstand the severe effects of hydrogen sulfide in a wastewater environment. Manufacturer of corrosion protection products shall have long proven experience in the production of the lining products utilized and shall have satisfactory installation record. 5. The materials shall be applied by an approved manufacturer's certified applicator and must have undergone training by the manufacturer. 19-024 02770-4 LIFT STATION WALL LINER Equipment for installation of lining materials shall be high quality grade and be as recommended by the manufacturer. 6. The Contractor shall have manufacturer's representative present on site during the installation of corrosion resistant barrier. The thicknesses specified for each lift station are shown on the plan drawings. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 BYPASS/DIVERSION PUMPING A. Install and operate diversion pumping equipment to maintain sewage flow and to prevent backup or overflow in accordance Section 02790 — Bypass Pumping. Obtain approval for diversion pumping equipment and procedures from Engineer. 3.02 LIFT STATION BASIN WALL CLEANING A. The floor, ceiling, piping, pumps, brackets, anchors, and interior walls of the basin shall be thoroughly cleaned and made free of all foreign materials including dirt, grit, roots, oils, grease, sludge, incompatible existing coatings, waxes, form release, curing compounds, efflorescence, sealers, salts, or other contaminants which may affect the performance and adhesion of the coating to the substrate. 1. High pressure water blasting with a minimum of 5000 psi shall be used to clean free all foreign material within the basin. 2. An approved detergent or muriatic acid shall be used integrally with the high pressure cleaning water. 3. All materials resulting from the cleaning of the basin shall be removed prior to application of the cement based coating. 4. All loose or defective concrete aggregate, cement, brick, grout, ledges, steps and protruding ledges shall be removed to provide an even surface prior to application of coating. B. Prevent any foreign material from entering the adjoining pipes. Remove droppings of foreign and wall sealant materials before they harden on the bottom of the basin. C. Manufacturer's representative shall be available at all times on site to answer questions and approve preparation work prior to lining. D. Clean the lift station walls thoroughly. Use a high-pressure washer to clean the substrate with a sprayer tip. Keep the tip between 6 and 12 inches from the surface and hold at a 45° to 90° angle to the surface. The operator may control and direct the movement of the spray tip across the surface of the manhole wall at a speed equal to no more than one foot per second (or 0.3 meters per second). 19-024 02770-5 LIFT STATION WALL LINER A special cleaning agent, detergent and/ or acid chemical wash may be added to the water for extra dirty, greasy and tough surfaces. The cleaning water may also be heated to 210° for extra tough removal of grease contamination. Take extra special care to remove all debris from the basin. Begin the cleaning process and move down along the wall to the bottom. Use a rotating turbo nozzle that super boost the required pressure to strip away the foreign matter and deleterious materials from the wall. Continue the cleaning procedure to remove loose and protruding aggregate, concrete pieces, and cement mortar; and use a mason's hammer or scraper if necessary. 3.03 LIFT STATION BASIN WALL SEALING A. Seal active leaks in the basin structure by using a blend of cement powder or hydraulic cement. B. Remove loose or defective wall material. Wipe or brush surface clean prior to the application of hydraulic cements. C. Drill weep holes at bottom of manhole walls to relieve hydrostatic pressure to stop leaks. Plug pressure relief holes after leaks are stopped using hydraulic cement materials. Lead wool may also be used to plug large leaks. D. Repair wide cracks, holes, or disintegrated mortar with quickset mortars. Follow manufacturer's application procedures. E. After all active leaks have been stopped, clean and prepare walls and ceiling for application of selected liner material. F. Properly apply the sealing compound to provide the minimum required uniform coating to the wall surface. G. Prevent any foreign material from entering the adjoining pipes. Remove droppings of foreign and wall sealant materials before they harden on the bottom of the basin. H. Strictly follow product manufacturer's published technical specifications and recommendations for surface preparation, application and proportioning. 3.04 100% CALCIUM ALUMINATE WALL LINER A. The structural liner/corrosion resistant barrier shall be spray applied as per the manufacturer's recommendation and shall have an average minimum finished thickness as indicated in the drawings and bid proposal. B. The Contractor shall have manufacturer's representative present on site at all times during the installation of structural liner/corrosion resistant barrier. C. The Contractor shall make provisions in his unit price bid for each structure to 19-024 02770-6 LIFT STATION WALL LINER maintain dry conditions for the corrosion resistant liner application and subsequent curing as per manufacturer's recommendations. D. Minimum moist curing time is 18 hours or per manufacturer's requirements, whichever is longer. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inform Engineer immediately if materials being used are not producing required results or need modification. Engineer has the right to stop use of any material at any time. B. Upon completion of the project, the manufacturer shall provide a certification stating the corrosion protective coating was applied in accordance with the manufacturer's procedures and recommendations. 3.06 INSPECTION A. After basin wall sealing has been completed, visually inspect the basin in the presence of Engineer. Check for cleanliness and for elimination of active leaks. B. At completion of lift station rehabilitation assist Engineer in verifying installation of minimum coating thickness of concrete liner. Test several points on the basin wall and ceiling. Repair verification points prior to final acceptance for payment. The Contractor will use a penetrometer such as the ACM-FP01 Fire Proofing Depth Gauge device to measure, verify and control the cementitious mortar liner thickness. C. The Depth Gauge shall be set at the required setting to maintain the cement thickness as required, and witnessed by the City's site representative. The site representative will observe daily operations, spot check the cementitious mortar application process, and final work in compliance with the City's site representative instructions. All thin areas shall be marked and filled again. The Contractor shall provide a Depth Gauge for the City's site representative. D. During application of corrosion resistant liner, a wet film thickness gauge, meeting ASTM D4414, shall be used. Measurements shall be taken, documented and attested by the Contractor for submission to the Owner. E. At completion of lift station rehabilitation assist Engineer in verifying installation of minimum coating thickness of structural/corrosion resistant 100% calcium aluminate liner. Test several points on the basin wall and ceiling. Repair verification points prior to final acceptance for payment. 3.07 TESTING 19-024 02770-7 LIFT STATION WALL LINER A. The applicator shall use a digital camera, and or a pole camera system video recorder device, to inspect, verify and report the product system application meets the specification requirements. B. Any deficiencies in the finished coating shall be marked and repaired by the Contractor according to the procedures set forth herein. END OF SECTION 19-024 02770-8 BYPASS PUMPING SECTION 02790 BYPASS PUMPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Use of bypass pumping/ diversion pumping to prevent surcharging and maintain uninterrupted flow through sewage collection system while allowing Contractor to provide reliable sewer service to the sanitary sewer users at all times and to isolate sewer line manholes, lift stations, and/or sewer line segments designated for cleaning, rehabilitation, and television inspection operations. Includes installation and operation of bulkheads, plugs, hoses, piping and pumps to maintain sewage flow and prevent backup and overflow. 1.02 UNIT PRICES A. Bypasss pumping / diversion pumping is not paid for separately, but rather is included in the lump sum price for work associated with the Lift Station Improvements that require bypass/diversion pumping. B. Bypass pumping shall be shall be utilized and shall include but not limited to the following instances. 1. Maintaining flow in the existing sanitary sewer during the duration of the cleaning television inspection (pre and post) and rehabilitation operations. 2. Maintaining rehabilitation/compaction service to all residential and commercial areas during the duration of construction operations. 3. Construction/rehabilitation of manholes and lift stations. 4. Cleaning and television inspection of the newly constructed or rehabilitated main. 5. Facilitate connections to existing lines or structures. 6. Cleaning and television inspection to verify service connections. 7. Bypass pumping to remove manholes and/or structures. 8. Bypass pumping to facilitate testing. 9. Any bypass pumping required to accomplish the work as necessary regardless of the sequencing and phasing. C. Measurement and Payment shall include the pumping systems, all pipe, hoses, standby pumps, connections and any other appurtenances necessary to operate the system 24 hours a day during the duration of the proposed improvements. D. The Contractor shall submit a bypass pumping plan to the Engineer for review and concurrence prior to commencing rehabilitation operations in any given area. 19-024 02790-1 BYPASS PUMPING PART2 MATERIALS 2.01 PUMPS A. Use electrical powered pumps or diesel-driven pumps with Level III sound attenuation (max 70 d(B)A @ 7 meters) having a minimum pumping capacity as required (minimum pumping capacity = the firm pumping capacity of the lift station, where firm capacity=pumping capacity with the largest lift pump out of service). 2.02 PIPING, JOINTS AND ACCESSORIES A. All piping,joints and accessories shall be designed to withstand at least twice the maximum system pressure or a minimum of 50 psi whichever is greater and be leak free. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROCEDURES AND METHODS A. Prior to beginning rehabilitation operations demonstrate pumping system is in good working order. B. Locate pumping suction and discharge lines so as not to cause undue interference with the use of streets,private driveways entrances or residences. C. All piping,joints and accessories shall be designed to withstand at least twice the maximum system pressure or a minimum of 50 psi whichever is greater. D. Plug off and pump down sewer manhole or line segment in designated area. Maintain sanitary sewer system so that surcharging does not occur. E. Complete lift station rehabilitation operations as quickly as possible. F. An experienced operator shall be on site at all times (24 hours per day) to monitor the operation, adjust pump speed, valves, etc. The monitoring time may be reduced to normal working hours if the bypass pumping system is equipped with a working autodialer system that shall automatically notify the Contractor of high liquid levels and system malfunction. G. The Contractor shall be able to provide an experienced operator to the site within one (1) hours' drive at all times in which the bypass pumping system is in operation. H. Furnish all labor, materials, supervision and equipment necessary for maintaining the pumping system in continuous proper working order for the duration of rehabilitation and improvement operations. Obtain approval of discharge location for diversion pumping system prior to commencing work. 19-024 02790-2 BYPASS PUMPING Under no condition will raw sewage be allowed to discharge in open ditches, streets or storm sewer systems nor in any way that would create unsanitary conditions or interfere unduly with the use of streets,private driveways entrances or residences. Whenever flows in a sewer line are blocked, plugged or bypassed, sufficient precautions must be taken to protect the sewer lines from damage. Ensure that sewer line cleaning, rehabilitation and television inspection and/or bypass operations do not cause flooding or damage to public or private property being served by the sewer lines involved in the repair. The Contractor is responsible for having additional standby pumps in the event of failure of any pumps. I. In the event sewage accidentally drains into the drainage system or street, the Contractor shall immediately stop the overflow, notify the Engineer and cleanup and disinfect the spillage to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 1. In the event the sewage is spilled onto public or private property, the Contractor shall wash down, clean up and disinfect the spillage to the private owner's/Engineer's satisfaction. 2. Overflow/spillage shall be reported to the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) and the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) by the Contractor within 24 hours. J. When diversion pumping operations are complete, piping shall be drained into the sanitary sewer prior to disassembly. END OF SECTION 19-024 02790-3 CITY OF PEARLAND TOPSOIL Section 02910 TOPSOIL 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Furnishing and placing topsoil for finish grading and for seeding, sodding, and planting. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 - Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 5. Section 02200—Site Preparation 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for topsoil under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which topsoil is a component. B If topsoil is included as a Bid Item, measurement will be based on the units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit product quality,material sources, and field quality information in accordance with this Section. 1.04 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 07/2006 02910- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TOPSOIL 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A Topsoil shall be fertile, friable, natural sandy loam surface soil obtained from excavation or borrow operations having the following characteristics: 1. pH value of between 5.5 and 6.5. 2. Liquid limit: topsoil not exceed 50 3. Plasticity index: 10 or less. 4. Gradation: maximum of 40 percent with a passing the#280 sieve. B Topsoil shall be reasonably free of subsoil,clay lumps, weeds,non-soil materials and other litter or contamination. Topsoil shall not contain roots,stumps,and stones larger than 2 inches. C Obtain topsoil from the top material from naturally well drained areas where topsoil occurs at a minimum depth of 4 inches and has similar characteristics to that found at the placement site. Do not obtain topsoil from areas infected with a growth of, or reproductive parts of nut grass or other noxious weeds. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify that excavation and embankment operations have been completed to correct lines and grades. 3.02 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND SOTCKPILING A Conform to topsoil stripping and stockpiling requirements of Section 02200 — Site Preparation. 3.03 PLACEMENT A Contractor shall conduct erosion control practices described in Section 01566-Source Controls for Erosion and Sedimentation during topsoil placement operations. B For areas to be seeded or sodded, scarify or plow existing surface material to a minimum depth of 4 inches,or as indicated on the Plans. Remove any vegetation and foreign inorganic material. Place 4 inches of topsoil on the loosened material and roll lightly with an appropriate lawn roller to consolidate the topsoil. C Increase depth of topsoil to 6 inches when placed over cement stabilized sand used as bedding and backfill material. D For areas to receive bushes or trees,excavate existing material and place topsoil to the depth and dimensions shown on the Plans. 07/2006 02910-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TOPSOIL E Remove spilled topsoil from curbs, gutters, and, paved areas and dispose of excess topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 01140 — Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.04 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain topsoil until a vegetative cover is established. B Repair areas damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02910-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING Section 02922 SODDING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Sodding areas of residential lawns disturbed during construction and not paved or designated to be paved, or as indicated on Plans. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 4. Section 02910—Topsoil 5. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C Definitions: 1. Lawn - ground covered with fine textured grass kept neatly mowed. 2. Sod-blocks, squares, strips of turf grass, and adhering soil used for vegetative planting. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for utility or paving. B If sodding is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. C No payment shall be made for sodding of restoration areas disturbed by Contractor outside the limits of construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit material sources and product quality information in accordance with this Section. C Submit a certificate stating that fertilizer complies with these specification requirements and the requirements of the Texas Fertilizer Law. 07/2006 02922- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Topsoil: Conform to material requirements of Section 02910—Topsoil. B Bank Sand: Conform to material requirements of Section 02255—Bedding,Backfill, and Embankment Materials. C Fertilizer: Available nutrient percentage by weight: 12 percent nitrogen, 4 percent phosphoric acid, and 8 percent potash; or 15 percent nitrogen, 5 percent phosphoric acid, and 10 percent potash. D Weed and Insect Treatment: Provide acceptable treatment to protect sod from weed and insect infestation. Submit treatment method to the Engineer for approval. All insect and disease control shall be installed within guidelines set forth by the Structural Pest Control Board of the State of Texas E Water: Potable, available on-site through Contractor's water trucks. Do not use private resident's water. 2.02 SOD A Species: Bermuda (Cynodon Dactylon), Buffalo (Buchloe Dactyloides), or St. Augustine to match existing or as directed. B Contents: 95 percent permanent grass suitable to climate in which it is to be placed; not more than 5 percent weeds and undesirable grasses; good texture, free from obnoxious grasses, roots, stones and foreign materials. C Size: 12 inch wide strips,uniform in thickness(2 inch minimum with clean-cut edges. D Sod is to be supplied and maintained in a healthy condition as evidenced by the grass being a normal, green color. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory. Do not start work during inclement or impending inclement weather. Perform Sodding only when weather and soil conditions are deemed by Engineer to be suitable for proper placement. 07/2006 02922-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING B After the areas to receive sod are brought to grade, rake out any foreign organic or inorganic material, including stones, hard clay lumps and other debris. C Level with Bank Sand or Topsoil, as approved by the Engineer. D Loosen the subgrade by discing or by scarifying to a depth of at least 4 inches. E Place and compact topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 02910 — Topsoil. Top soil shall be free of weeds and foreign material immediately before sodding. F Spread 2-inch (±1") layer of Bank Sand over prepared topsoil. G Prior to placing sod,rake areas smooth,free from unsightly variations,bumps,ridges, or depressions, and completely free from stones, hard clay lumps and other debris. H Apply fertilizer at a rate of 25 lbs/1000 SF. Apply after raking soil surface and not more than 48 hours prior to laying sod. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of soil. Lightly water to aid in dissipation of fertilizer. 3.02 APPLICATION A Lay sod with closely fitted joints leaving no voids and with ends of sod strips staggered. Sod shall be laid within 24 hours of harvesting. B After sod is laid, irrigate thoroughly to secure 6-inch minimum penetration into soil below sod. C Tamp and roll sod with approved equipment to eliminate minor irregularities and to form close contact with soil bed immediately after planting and watering. Submit type of tamping and rolling equipment to be used to the Engineer for approval, prior to construction. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A Maintenance Period: 1. Begin maintenance immediately after each section of grass sod is installed and continue for a 30-day period from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Re-sod unacceptable areas. 3. Water, fertilize, control disease and insect pests, mow, edge, replace unacceptable materials, and perform other procedures consistent with good horticultural practice to ensure normal, vigorous and healthy growth. All disease control shall be installed within guidelines set forth by the Structural Pest Control Board of the State of Texas. 4. Notify Engineer 10 days before end of maintenance period for inspection. B Watering: 1. Water lawn areas once a day with minimum 1/2 inch water for the first 3 weeks after area is sodded. 07/2006 02922-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING 2. After 3-week period, water twice a week with 3/4 inch of water each time unless comparable amount has been provided by rain. 3. Make weekly inspections to determine moisture content of soil unless soil is in frozen condition. 4. Water in the morning to enable soil to absorb maximum amount of water with minimum evaporation. C Mowing: 1. Mow sod at intervals which will keep grass height from exceeding 3-1/2 inches. 2. Set mower blades at 2-1/2 inches. 3. Do not remove more than one-half of grass leaf surface. 4. Sodded areas requiring mowing within 1 month after installation, shall be mowed with a light-weight rotary type mower. The sod shall be mowed only when dry and not in a saturated or soft condition. 5. Remove grass clippings during or immediately after mowing. D Fertilizer and Pest Control: 1. Evenly spread fertilizer composite at a rate of 40 pounds per 5,000 square feet or as recommended by manufacturer. Fertilizer shall not be placed until 2 weeks after placement of sod. 2. Restore bare or thin areas by topdressing with a mix of 50 percent sharp sand and 50 percent sphagnum peat moss. 3. Apply mixture 1/4 to 1/2 inch thick. 4. Treat areas of heavy weed and insect infestation as recommended by treatment manufacturer. 3.04 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140 - Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.05 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain sod in good condition until 30 days after Substantial Completion. B Replace sod damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02922-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast-in-place concrete building frame members,floors,shear walls,foundation walls, and supported slabs, vaults, manholes and wet wells. B. Cast-in-place concrete work for utility construction or rehabilitation,such as slabs on grade,small vaults,site-cast bases for precast units,cast-in-place manholes,including headwalls and miscellaneous small structures. C. Floors and slabs on grade. D. Concrete seal slabs. E. Control, and expansion and contraction joint devices associated with concrete work, including joint sealants. F. Design, construction, erection, and removal of structural concrete formwork. G. Equipment pads, light pole base,thrust blocks. H. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 - Measurement and Payment 2. Section 01350 - Submittals 3. Section 01310 - Coordination and Meetings 4. Section 03600 - Structural Grout 5. Section 03310 - Structural Concrete 6. Section 03100—Concrete Formwork 7. Section 01440—Inspection Services 8. Section 01460—Testing Laboratory Services I. Reference Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) 4. American Welding Society(AWS) 5. Wire Reinforcement Institute (WRI) 6. Encyclopedia of Industrial Chemical Analysis 5/2013 03300- 1 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.02 UNIT PRICES A. Measurement for cast-in-place concrete is on lump-sum basis for each aforementioned item as bid. Payment includes related work performed on these items in accordance with related sections of these Technical Specifications. B. Measurement for extra cast-in-place concrete is on cubic-yard basis. Payment includes related work performed in accordance with related sections. C. Refer to Section 01200 -Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Hot Weather: Any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity and wind velocity tending to impair quality of fresh or hardened concrete or otherwise resulting in abnormal properties. Hot weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI- 305R. B. Cold Weather: Period when,for more than 2 successive days,mean daily temperature is below 40 degrees F. Cold weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI - 306R. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to the requirements of Section 01350—Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit Shop Drawings detailing reinforcement fabrication, bar replacement location, splices, spacing, bar designation, bar type, length, size, bending, number of bars, bar support type, and other pertinent information, including dimensions. Provide sufficient detail for placement of reinforcement without use of Plans. Information shall correspond directly to data listed on bill of materials. 2. Use of reproductions of Plans by Contractor,Subcontractor,erector,fabricator or material supplier in preparation of Shop Drawings(or in lieu of preparation of Shop Drawings) signifies acceptance by that party of information shown thereon as correct,and acceptance of obligation to pay for any job expense,real or implied,arising due to errors that may occur thereon. Remove references to Design Engineer, including seals, when reproductions of Plans are used as Shop Drawings. 3. Detail Shop Drawings in accordance with ACI 315, Figure 6. 5/2013 03300 -2 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 4. Submit Shop Drawings showing location of proposed additional construction joints,and obtain approval of the Engineer,prior to submitting reinforcing steel Shop Drawings. C. Bill of Materials: Submit with Shop Drawings. D. Product Data: 1. Mechanical Bar Splices: Submit manufacturer's technical literature,including specifications and installation instructions. 2. Epoxy grout proposed for anchoring reinforcing dowels to hardened concrete: Submit manufacturer's technical literature including recommended installation procedures. 3. Provide data on joint devices, attachment accessories and admixtures. E. Certificates: 1. Submit steel manufacturer's certificates of mill tests giving properties of steel proposed for use. List of manufacturer's test number,heat number, chemical analysis, yield point, tensile strength, and percentage of elongation. Identify proposed location of steel in work. 2. Foreign-manufactured reinforcing bars shall be tested for conformance to ASTM requirements by a certified independent testing laboratory located in United States. Certification from any other source is not acceptable. Submit test reports for review. Do not begin fabrication of reinforcement until material has been approved. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01350-Submittals. B. Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components which are concealed from view. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301-99:Specifications for Structural Concrete- IP. B. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work. C. Conform appropriately to ACI 305R-99:Hot Weather Concreting or ACI 306R.1- 90:Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. 5/2013 03300-3 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01310—Coordination and Meetings. B. Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM - C150, Type I - Normal Portland Type II - Moderate Sulphate resistance Portland type. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM - C33. C. Use coarse limestone aggregate and crushed limestone for fine aggregate. The product of concrete alkalinity(A,as equivalent calcium carbonate)times the thickness of cover over the reinforcing steel (Z, in inches) shall not be less than 0.54, i.e. concrete shall have an AZ factor greater than or equal to 0.54. Provide a minimum concrete cover of 2" over reinforcing steel on the inside of the structures. D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.02 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entrainment: ASTM - C260. B. Chemical: ASTM - C494, Type A - Water Reducing Type D - Water Reducing and Retarding Type E - Water Reducing and Accelerating admixture. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent: Two component modified epoxy resin. B. Vapor Barrier: 6 mil clear polyethylene film type recommended for below grade application. C. Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate,cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days. 2.04 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS A. Joint Filler Type C: ASTM - D1752; Premolded sponge rubber, fully compressible with recovery rate of minimum 95 percent. 5/2013 03300-4 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE B. Sealant: ASTM- D1190; synthetic rubber. 2.05 CONCRETE MIX A. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM - C94, Alternative No. 3. A minimum of 5.75 bags of cement per cubic yard of concrete shall be used. For Concrete in Contact with sewage use Portland Type II, ASTM - C 150, Cement. B. Provide concrete to the following criteria: 1. Compressive Strength 7 days: 2400 psi 2. Compressive Strength 28 days: 4000 psi 3. Slump: 3 to 4 inches for concrete cast against earth in slabs and footings and where used as a topping. 5 to 6 inches for concrete in supported slabs,beams, columns and walls. 4. Maximum Water/Cement Ratio: 0.50. C. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Engineer. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. D. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Engineer. E. Add air entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to temperature lower than 40 degrees F. Air content shall be 3 percent maximum for concrete with trowel finished surfaces and 3-5 percent for other concrete. 2.06 FORM MATERIAL A. Smooth Forms: New plywood, metal, plastic, tempered concrete-form hardboard, dressed lumber faced with plywood or lining, or metal-framed plywood-faced panel material,to provide continuous,straight,smooth surfaces. Form material shall be free of raised grain, torn surfaces, worn edges, patches, dents or other defects. Furnish material in largest practical sizes to minimize number of j oints and,when indicated on Plans,conform to joint system indicated. Form material shall have sufficient strength and thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection. B. Rough Forms: Plywood, metal, dressed or undressed lumber free of knots, splits or other defects, or other material acceptable to the Engineer of sufficient strength and thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection. C. Plywood: Conform to PS 1, Class 1. D. Lumber: Conform to PS 20. 5/2013 03300-5 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE E. Edge Forms and Intermediate Screed Strips: Type and strength compatible with the screed equipment and methods used. F. Plastic Forms: One-piece forms for domes,beams and pan joists. Single lengths for columns not exceeding height of 7'-6". For columns over 7'-6",use 7'-6" sections and filler sections as needed. To facilitate removal of pan joist forms, taper sides 1 inch per foot. G. Metal Pan Joist Forms: Removable type; fabricated of minimum 14-gage steel; one piece between end closures. Adjustable forms not allowed. Taper sides 1 inch per foot to facilitate removal. H. Earth Cuts for Forms: 1. Use earth cuts for forming unexposed sides of grade beams cast monolithically with slabs on grade. 2. Where sides of excavations are stable enough to prevent caving or sloughing, following surfaces may be cast against neat-cut excavations: a. Sides of footings. b. Inside face of perimeter grade beams not monolithic with slab on grade. When inside face is cast against earth, increase beam width indicated on Plans by 1 inch. c. Both faces of interior grade beams not monolithic with slab on grade. When grade beam is cast against earth, increase beam width indicated on Plans by 2 inches. Corrugated Fiberboard Carton Forms: 1. Corrugated fiberboard carton forms, when called for, are intended to form a void space beneath pile-supported and pier-supported slabs and other structural elements as shown. 2. Provide products of a reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in commercial production of double-faced corrugated fiberboard carton forms,constructed of waterproof paper and laminated with waterproof adhesive. 3. Fiberboard forms: Capable of supporting required dead load plus construction loads,and designed to lose their strength upon prolonged contact with moisture and soil bacteria. 4. Seal cuts and ends of each form section by dipping in waterproof wax,unless liners and flutes are completely impregnated with waterproofing. 5/2013 03300-6 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 5. Size forms as indicated on Plans. Assemble as recommended by manufacturer, either with steel banding at 4'-0" maximum on centers, or, where liners and flutes are impregnated with waterproofing, with adequate stapling. J. Circular Forms: 1. Form round-section members with paper or fiber tubes, constructed of laminated plies using water-resistant adhesive with wax-impregnated exterior for weather and moisture protection. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist loads imposed by wet concrete without deformation. Provide manufacturer's seamless units to minimize spiral gaps and seams. 2. Fiberglass or steel forms may be used for round-section members. K. Shores: Wood or adjustable metal,with bearing plates;with double wedges at lower end. L. Form Ties: 1. Use commercially-manufactured ties, hangers and other accessories for embedding in concrete. Do not use wire not commercially fabricated for use as a form accessory. 2. Fabricate ties so ends or end fasteners can be removed without causing spalling of concrete faces. Depth from formed concrete face to the embedded portion: At least 1 inch, or twice the minimum dimension of tie,whichever is greater. 3. Provide waterstop feature for form ties used on liquid-containing structures and on concrete walls which will have earth backfill on one side. 4. Removable ties: Taper ties may be used when approved by the Engineer. In the hole left by the removal of the taper tie, insert a preformed neoprene or polyurethane plug sized to seat at the center of the wall. M. Form Coating: Commercial formulation of form oil or form-release agent having proven satisfactory performance. Coating shall not bond with, stain or otherwise adversely affect concrete surfaces, or impair their subsequent treatment, including application of bonding agents, curing compounds, paint, protective liners and membrane waterproofing. N. Coating for Plastic Forms: Alkali-resistant gel-coat. O. Chamfer Strips: Unless otherwise indicated on Plans,provide 3/4 inch chamfer strips in corners of forms to produce beveled edges where required by this Section, 3.0 "Execution". P. Form Gaskets: Polyethylene rod, closed cell, 1-inch diameter. 5/2013 03300- 7 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.07 DESIGN OF FORMWORK A. Conform to ACI 117, ACI 347 and building codes, unless more restrictive requirements are specified or shown on Plans. Contractor shall design and engineer concrete formwork, including shoring and bracing. Design formwork for applicable gravity loads,lateral pressure,wind loads and allowable stresses. Camber formwork to compensate for anticipated deflection during placement of concrete required to maintain specified tolerances. Design formwork to be readily removed without impact, shock or damage to concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. B. Slip Forming: Permitted on written approval of the Engineer. Contractor shall demonstrate suitability of method proposed. 2.08 REINFORCING MATERIAL A. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed bars conforming to ASTM-A615,grade as indicated on Plans, except column spirals and those shown on Plans to be smooth bars. Where grade is not shown on Plans, use Grade 60. B. Smooth Bars: Where indicated on Plans, use smooth bars conforming to ASTM - A36; ASTM -A615, Grade 60; or ASTM -A675, Grade 70. C. Column Spirals: Bars conforming to ASTM-A615,Grade 60,or wire conforming to ASTM -A82. D. Epoxy-Coated Deformed Bars,Column Spirals and Smooth Bars: Conform to ASTM -A775/A775M. E. Welded Wire Fabric: 1. Welded Smooth Wire Fabric: Conform to ASTM -A185. 2. Welded Deformed Wire Fabric: Conform to ASTM -A497. 3. Provide wire size, type and spacing as shown. Where type is not shown on Plans, use welded smooth wire fabric. 4. Furnish welded wire fabric in flat sheets only. F. Tie Wire: 16-1/2 gage or heavier annealed steel wire. Use plastic-coated tie wire with epoxy-coated reinforcing steel. G. Bar Supports: Provide chairs. Use bar supports and accessories of sizes required to provide required concrete cover. Where concrete surfaces are exposed to weather, water or wastewater,provide plastic accessories only;do not use galvanized or plastic- tipped metal in such locations. Provide metal bar supports and accessories rated Class 1 or 2 conforming to CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. Use epoxy-coated bar supports with epoxy-coated reinforcing bars. 5/2013 03300-8 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE H. Slabs on Grade: Provide chairs with sheet metal bases or provide precast concrete bar supports 3 inches wide, 6 inches long, and thick enough to allow required cover. Embed tie wires in 3-inch by 6-inch side. I. Mechanical Bar Splices: 1. Conform to ACI 318-05:Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; use where indicated on Plans. a. Compression splices shall develop ultimate stress of reinforcing bar. b. Tension splices shall develop 125 percent of minimum yield point stress of reinforcing bar. 2. Regardless of chemical composition of steel,any heat effect shall not adversely affect performance of reinforcing bar. J. Welded Splices: 1. Provide welded splices where shown and where approved by the Engineer. Welded splices of reinforcing steel shall develop a tensile strength exceeding 125 percent of the yield strength of the reinforcing bars connected. 2. Provide materials for welded splices conforming to AWS D1.4 — Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel. K. Epoxy Grout: High-strength rigid epoxy adhesive,conforming to ASTM-C881,Type IV, manufactured for purpose of anchoring dowels into hardened concrete and the moisture condition, application temperature and orientation of the hole to be filled. Unless otherwise shown, depth of embedment shall be as required to develop the full tensile strength(125 percent of yield strength)of dowel,but not less than 12 diameters. 2.09 FABRICATION OF REINFORCING A. Bending: Fabricate bars to shapes indicated on Plans by cold bending. Bends shall conform to minimum bend diameters specified in ACI 318-05:Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. Do not straighten or rebend bars. Fabricate epoxy-coated reinforcing steel to required shapes in a manner that will not damage epoxy coating. Repair any epoxy coating with patching material conforming to Item 4.4 of ASTM -A775/A775M. B. Splices: 1. Locate splices as indicated on Plans. Do not locate splices at other locations without approval of the Engineer. Use minimum number of splices located at points of minimum stress. Stagger splices in adjacent bars. 2. Length of lap splices: As shown on Plans. 5/2013 03300-9 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3. Prepare ends of bars at mechanical splices in accordance with splice manufacturer's requirements. C. Construction Joints: Unless otherwise shown, continue reinforcing through construction joints. D. Bar Fabrication Tolerances:Conform to tolerances listed in ACI 315,Figures 4 and 5. E. Standard Hooks: Conform to the requirements of ACI 318-05:Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. F. Marking: Clearly mark bars with waterproof tags showing number of bars,size,mark, length, and yield strength. Mark steel with same designation as member in which it occurs. 2.10 FINISHING MATERIALS A. Sealer/Dustproofer (VOC Compliant): Water-based acrylic sealer; non-yellowing under ultraviolet light after 200-hour test in accordance with ASTM - D4587. Conform to local, state and federal solvent emission requirements. B. Epoxy Floor Topping: Two-component epoxy resin meeting ASTM-C881 Type III, resistant to wear,staining and chemical attack,blended with granite,sand,trap rock or quartz aggregate, trowel-applied over concrete floor. Topping thickness shall be 1/8 inch. Color shall be gray. C. Abrasive Aggregate for Nonslip Finish: Fused aluminum oxide grit,or crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 40 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 25 percent ferric oxide. Material shall be factory graded, packaged, rustproof and nonglazing, and unaffected by freezing,moisture and cleaning materials. D. Epoxy Penetrating Sealer: Low-viscosity,two-component epoxy system designed to give maximum penetration into concrete surfaces. Sealer shall completely seal concrete surfaces from penetration of water, oil and chemicals; prevent dusting and deterioration of concrete surfaces caused by heavy traffic;and be capable of adhering to floor surfaces subject to hydrostatic pressure from below. Color shall be transparent amber or gray. Surface shall be non-slip. E. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable latex base liquid conforming to ASTM - C 1059. When used in water and wastewater treatment structures,bonding agent shall be suitable for use under continuously submerged conditions. Conformance and suitability certification by manufacturer is required. F. Bonding Grout: Prepare bonding grout by mixing approximately one part cement to one part fine sand meeting ASTM - C144 but with 100 percent passing No. 30 mesh sieve. Mix with water to consistency of thick cream. At Contractor's option, a commercially-prepared bonding agent used in accordance with manufacturer's 5/2013 03300- 10 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE recommendations and instructions may be used. When used in water and wastewater treatment structures, bonding agent shall be suitable for use under continuously submerged conditions. Conformance and suitability certification by manufacturer is required. Submit manufacturer's technical information on proposed bonding agent. G. Patching Mortar: 1. Make patching mortar of same materials and of approximately same proportions as concrete, except omit coarse aggregate. Substitute white Portland cement for part of gray Portland cement on exposed concrete in order to match color of surrounding concrete. Determine color by making trial patch. Use minimum amount of mixing water required for handling and placing. Mix patching mortar in advance and allow to stand. Mix frequently with trowel until it has reached stiffest consistency that will permit placing. Do not add water. 2. Proprietary compounds for adhesion or specially formulated cementitious repair mortars may be used in lieu of or in addition to foregoing patching materials provided that properties of bond and compressive strength meet or exceed the foregoing and color of surrounding concrete can be matched where required. Use such compounds according to manufacturer's recommendations. When used in water and wastewater treatment structures, material shall be suitable for use under continuously submerged conditions. Conformance and suitability certification by manufacturer is required. H. Epoxy Adhesive: Two-component, 100 percent solids, 100 percent reactive compound developing 100 percent of strength of concrete, suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Epoxy used to inject cracks and as a binder in epoxy mortar shall meet ASTM-C881,Type VI. Epoxy used as a bonding agent for fresh concrete shall meet ASTM - C881, Type V. I. Non-shrink Grout: See Section 03600 - Structural Grout. J. Spray-Applied Coating: Acceptable products are Thoro System Products "Thoroseal Plaster Mix" or approved equal. Color: Gray. K. Concrete Topping: Class H concrete with 3/8-inch maximum coarse aggregate size,as specified in this Section. L. Concrete Fill: Class H concrete with 3/8-inch maximum coarse aggregate size,(Class C where fill thickness exceeds 3 inches throughout a placement), as specified in Section 03310 - Structural Concrete. M. Evaporation Retardant: Confilm, manufactured by Master Builders; Eucobar, manufactured by Euclid Chemical Company; or equal. 5/2013 03300 - 11 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.11 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS A. Membrane-forming Curing Compound: Conform to ASTM - C309, Type 1D, and following requirements. 1. Minimum solids content: 30 percent. 2. Compound shall not permanently discolor concrete. When used for liquid- containing structures, curing compound shall be white-pigmented. 3. When used in areas that are to be coated, or that will receive topping or floor covering,material shall not reduce bond of coating,topping,or floor covering to concrete. Curing compound manufacturer's technical information shall state conditions under which compound will not prevent bond. 4. Conform to local,state and federal solvent emission requirements.Conform to local, state and federal solvent emission requirements. 5. White pigmented concrete curing compound shall be sprayed on in one even coat with a hand or power sprayer as soon as the surface water disappears from concrete surface. B. Clear Curing and Sealing Compound(VOC Compliant): Conform to ASTM-C309, Type 1,Class B,and the following requirements: 30 percent solids content minimum; non-yellowing under ultraviolet light after 500-hour test in accordance with ASTM- D4587. Sodium silicate compounds are not permitted. Conform to local, state and federal solvent emission requirements. C. Sheet Material for Curing Concrete: ASTM- C171; waterproof paper,polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheeting. D. Curing Mats(for use in Curing Method 2): Heavy shag rugs or carpets,or cotton mats quilted at 4 inches on center; 12 ounce per square yard minimum weight when dry. E. Water for curing: Clean and potable. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement. B. Verify that anchors,seats,plates,reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. 5/2013 03300- 12 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. In locations where new concrete is dowelled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout. 3.03 PREPARATION OF SURFACES FOR CONCRETING A. Earth Surfaces: 1. Under interior slabs on grade,install vapor barrier. Lap joints at least 6 inches and seal watertight with tape,or sealant applied between overlapping edges and ends. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of reinforcing and inserts with vapor barrier material;lap over damaged areas at least 6 inches and seal watertight. 2. Other Earth Surfaces: Thoroughly wet by sprinkling prior to placing concrete, and keep moist by frequent sprinkling up to time of placing concrete thereon. Remove standing water. Surfaces shall be free from standing water,mud and debris at the time of placing concrete. B. Construction Joints: 1. Definition: Concrete surfaces upon or against which concrete is to be placed, where the placement of the concrete has been interrupted so that, in the judgment of the Engineer,new concrete cannot be incorporated integrally with that previously placed. 2. Interruptions: When placing of concrete is to be interrupted long enough for the concrete to take a set,use forms or other means to shape the working face to secure proper union with subsequent work. Make construction joints only where acceptable to the Engineer. 3. Preparation: Give horizontal joint surfaces a compacted,roughened surface for good bond. Except where the Plans call for joint surfaces to be coated, clean joint surfaces of laitance, loose or defective concrete and foreign material by hydroblasting or sandblasting(exposing aggregate),roughen surface to expose aggregate to a depth of at least 1/4 inch and wash thoroughly. Remove standing water from the construction joint surface before new concrete is placed. 4. After surfaces have been prepared cover approximately horizontal construction joints with a 3-inch lift of a grout mix consisting of Class A concrete batched without coarse aggregate; place and spread grout uniformly. Place wall concrete on the grout mix immediately thereafter. 5/2013 03300 - 13 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE C. Set and secure reinforcement, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and similar embedded items in the forms where indicated on Plans,Shop Drawings and as otherwise required. Obtain the Engineer's acceptance before concrete is placed. Accuracy of placement is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. D. Unless otherwise approved by Engineer, place no concrete until at least 4 hours after formwork,inserts,embedded items,reinforcement and surface preparation have been completed and accepted by the Engineer. Clean surfaces of forms and embedded items that have become encrusted with grout or previously-placed concrete before placing adjacent concrete. E. Casting New Concrete Against Old: Where concrete is to be cast against old concrete (any concrete which is greater than 60 days of age),thoroughly clean and roughen the surface of the old concrete by hydro-blasting or sandblasting (exposing aggregate). Coat joint surface with epoxy bonding agent following manufacturer's written instructions,unless indicated otherwise. Unless noted otherwise,this provision does not apply to vertical wall joints where waterstop is installed. F. Protection from Water: Place no concrete in any structure until water entering the space to be filled with concrete has been properly cut off or diverted and carried out of the forms,clear of the work. Deposit no concrete underwater. Do not allow still water to rise on any concrete until concrete has attained its initial set. Do not allow water to flow over the surface of any concrete in a manner and at a velocity that will damage the surface finish of the concrete. Pumping,dewatering and other necessary operations for removing ground water, if required, are subject to the Engineer's review. G. Corrosion Protection: Position and support pipe, conduit, dowels and other ferrous items to be embedded in concrete construction prior to placement of concrete so there is at least a 2 inch clearance between them and any part of the concrete reinforcement. Do not secure such items in position by wiring or welding them to the reinforcement. H. Where practicable, provide for openings for pipes, inserts for pipe hangers and brackets, and setting of anchors during placing of concrete. I. Accurately set anchor bolts and maintain in position with templates while they are being embedded in concrete. J. Cleaning: Immediately before concrete is placed,thoroughly clean dirt,grease,grout, mortar,loose scale,rust and other foreign substances from surfaces of metalwork to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 FORMWORK INSTALLATION A. Formwork Construction 1. Construct and maintain formwork so that it will maintain correct sizes of members,shape,alignment,elevation and position during concrete placement and until concrete has gained sufficient strength. Provide for required 5/2013 03300- 14 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, anchorages, and inserts. 2. Construct forms for easy removal without damage to concrete surfaces. 3. Make formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placement. Solidly butt joints and provide backup material at joints as required to prevent leakage and fins. Provide gaskets for wall forms to prevent concrete paste leakage at their base. 4. Place chamfer strips in forms to bevel edges and corners permanently exposed to view,except top edges of walls,and slabs which are indicated on Plans to be tooled. Do not bevel edges of formed joints and interior corners unless indicated on Plans. Form beveled edges for vertical and horizontal corners of equipment bases. Unless otherwise indicated on Plans,make bevels 3/4 inch wide. 5. Provide temporary openings at bases of column and wall forms and other points as required for observation and cleaning immediately before concrete is placed. 6. Where runways are required for moving equipment, support runways directly on the formwork or structural members. Do not allow runways or supports to rest on reinforcing steel. 7. Use smooth forms on formed concrete surfaces required to have smooth form finish or rubbed finish. 8. Rough forms may be used on formed concrete surfaces indicated to have rough form finish. B. Forms for Surfaces Requiring Smooth Form Finish: 1. Drill forms to suit ties used and to prevent leakage of concrete mortar around tie holes. Uniformly space form ties and align in horizontal and vertical rows. Install taper ties, if used, with the large end on the wet face of the wall. 2. Provide sharp, clean corners at intersecting planes, without visible edges or offsets. Back up joints with extra studs or girts to maintain true, square intersections. 3. Form molding shapes, recesses and projections with smooth-finish materials and install in forms with sealed joints to prevent displacement. 4. Form exposed corners of beams and columns to produce square,smooth,solid, unbroken lines. 5/2013 03300- 15 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 5. Provide exterior exposed edges with 3/4-inch chamfer or 3/4-inch radius. 6. Arrange facing material in orderly and symmetrical fashion. Keep number of joints to practical minimum. Support facing material adequately to prevent deflection in excess of allowable tolerances. 7. For flush surfaces exposed to view in completed structure,overlap previously- placed hardened concrete with form sheathing by approximately 1 inch. Hold forms against hardened concrete to maintain true surfaces,preventing offsets or loss of mortar. C. Forms for Surfaces Requiring Rubbed Finish: Provide forms as specified in this Section, 3.04B "Forms for Surfaces Requiring Smooth Form Finish". Use smooth plywood linings or forms, in as large sheets as practicable, and with smooth, even edges and close joints. D. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. Provide and secure supports for types of screeds required. E. Circular Forms: Set forms in one piece for full height of member. F. Surfaces to Receive Membrane Waterproofing: Coordinate surface finish, anchors, reglets, and similar requirements with membrane waterproofing applicator. G. Fireproofing Steel Member: Construct forms to provide not less than the concrete thickness necessary,measured from face of steel member,to provide the required fire rating. Forms for concealed surfaces may be unlined. H. Tolerances: 1. Unless noted otherwise on Plans,construct formwork so concrete surfaces will conform to tolerance limits listed in Tables 03100A and 03100B at end of this Section. 2. Establish sufficient control points and bench marks as references for tolerance checks. Maintain these references in undisturbed condition until final completion and acceptance of the Work. Adjustment of Formwork: 1. Use wedges or jacks to provide positive adjustment of shores and struts. After final inspection and before concrete placement,fasten in position wedges used for final adjustment of forms. 2. Brace forms securely against lateral deflections. Prepare to compensate for settling during concrete placement. 5/2013 03300- 16 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3. For wall openings,construct wood forms that facilitate necessary loosening to counteract swelling of forms. J. Corrugated Fiberboard Carton Forms: 1. Place on smooth firm bed of suitable material to prevent vertical displacement; set tight to prevent horizontal displacement. Exercise care to avoid buckling of forms. Install in accordance with manufacturer's directions and recommendations. 2. Fit carton forms tightly around piles and piers; completely fill the space between subgrade and concrete placement with carton forms to form a void space. 3. Protect carton forms from moisture and maintain in a dry condition until concrete is placed on them. If they become wet before placement of concrete, allow them to dry and carefully inspect for strength before concrete is placed. 4. Before concrete placement, replace damaged or deteriorated forms which are incapable of supporting concrete dead load plus construction live loads. 3.05 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Clean surfaces of forms and embedded materials before placing concrete. Remove accumulated mortar, grout, rust and other foreign matter. B. Coat forms for exposed or painted concrete surfaces with form oil or form-release agent before placing reinforcement. Cover form surfaces with coating material in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Do not allow excess coating material to accumulate in forms or to contact hardened concrete against which fresh concrete will be placed. Remove coating material from reinforcement before placing concrete. C. Forms for unexposed surfaces, other than retained-in-place metal forms, may be wet with water immediately before concrete placement in lieu of coating. When possibility of freezing temperatures exists, however, the use of coating is mandatory. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCEMENT A. Placement Tolerances: Place reinforcement within tolerances of Table 03210A at the end of this Section. Bend tie wire away from forms to maintain the specified concrete coverage. B. Interferences: Maintain 2-inch clearance from embedded items. Where reinforcing interferes with location of other reinforcing steel,conduit or embedded items,bars may be moved within specified tolerances or one bar diameter,whichever is greater. Where 5/2013 03300- 17 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE greater movement of bars is required to avoid interference,notify the Engineer. Do not cut reinforcement to install inserts, conduit, mechanical openings or other items without approval of the Engineer. C. Concrete Cover: Provide clear cover measured from reinforcement to face of concrete as listed in Table 03210B at the end of this Section, unless otherwise indicated on Plans. D. Placement in Forms: Use spacers,chairs,wire ties and other accessory items necessary to assemble,space,and support reinforcing properly. Provide accessories of sufficient number, size and strength to prevent deflection or displacement of reinforcement due to construction loads or concrete placement. Use appropriate accessories to position and support bolts, anchors and other embedded items. Tie reinforcing bars at each intersection, and to accessories. Blocking reinforcement with concrete or masonry is prohibited. E. Placement for Concrete on Ground: Support bar and wire reinforcement on chairs with sheet metal bases or precast concrete blocks spaced at approximately 3 feet on centers each way. Use minimum of one support for each 9 square feet. Tie supports to reinforcing bars and wires. F. Vertical Reinforcement in Columns: Offset vertical bars by at least one bar diameter at splices. Provide accurate templates for column dowels to ensure proper placement. G. Splices: 1. Do not splice bars, except at locations indicated on Plans or reviewed Shop Drawings, without approval of the Engineer. 2. Lap Splices: Unless otherwise shown or noted, Class B, conforming to ACI 318-89,Section 12.15.1. Tie securely with wire prior to concrete placement,to prevent displacement of splices during concrete placement. 3. Mechanical Bar Splices: Use only where indicated on Plans or approved by the Engineer. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. a. Couplers located at a joint face shall be of a type which can be set either flush or recessed from the face as shown. Seal couplers prior to concrete placement to completely eliminate concrete or cement paste from entering. b. Couplers intended for future connections: Recess 1/2 inch minimum from concrete surface. After concrete is placed,plug coupler and fill recess with sealant to prevent contact with water or other corrosive materials. c. Unless noted otherwise, match mechanical coupler spacing and capacity to that shown for the adjacent reinforcing. 5/2013 03300- 18 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 4. Construction Joints: Place reinforcing continuous through construction joints, unless noted otherwise. H. Welded Wire Fabric: Install wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Unless otherwise indicated on Plans, lap adjoining pieces at least 6 inches or one full mesh plus 2 inches, whichever is larger. Lace splices with wire. Do not make end laps midway between supporting beams, or directly over beams of continuous structures. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps. Conform to WRI - Manual of Standard Practice for Welded Wire Fabric. I. Field Bending: Shape reinforcing bent during construction operations to conform to Plans. Bars shall be cold-bent; do not heat bars. Closely inspect reinforcing for breaks. When reinforcing is damaged, replace, Cadweld, or otherwise repair, as directed by the Engineer. Do not bend reinforcement after it is embedded in concrete. J. Epoxy-coated Reinforcing Steel: Install in accordance this Section, 3.06J "Field Bending",and in a manner that will not damage epoxy coating. Repair damaged epoxy coating with patching material as specified in Paragraph 2.09 A -Bending. K. Field Cutting: Cut reinforcing bars by shearing or sawing. Do not cut bars with cutting torch. L. Welding of reinforcing bars is prohibited, except where shown on Plans. 3.07 GROUTING OF REINFORCING AND DOWEL BARS A. Use epoxy grout for anchoring reinforcing and dowel steel to existing concrete in accordance with epoxy manufacturer's instructions. Drill hole not more than 1/4 inch larger than steel bar diameter(including height of deformations for deformed bars)in existing concrete. Just before installation of steel,blow hole clean of all debris using compressed air. Partially fill hole with epoxy,using enough epoxy so when steel bar is inserted, epoxy grout will completely fill hole around bar. Dip end of steel bar in epoxy and twist bar while inserting into partially-filled hole. 5/2013 03300- 19 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE TABLE 03210A REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT TOLERANCES Placement Tolerances (in inches) Clear Distance - To formed soffit: -1/4 To other formed surfaces: ±1/4 Minimum spacing between bars -1/4 Clear distance from unformed surface to top reinforcement- Members 8 inches deep or less: ±1/4 Members more than 8 inches deep but less than 24 inches deep: -1/4, +1/2 Members 24 inches deep or greater: -1/4, +1 Uniform spacing of bars +7 (but the required number of bars shall not reduced): Uniform spacing of stirrups and ties (but the required number of stirrups and ties shall not be reduced): +1 Longitudinal locations of bends and ends of reinforcement- General: ±2 Discontinuous ends of members: ±1/2 Length of bar laps: -1 1/2 Embedded length - For bar sizes No. 3 through 11: -1 For bar sizes No. 14 and 18: -2 5/2013 03300-20 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE TABLE 03210B MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER FOR REINFORCEMENT Minimum Surface Cover (in inches) Slabs and Joists - Top and bottom bars for dry conditions— No. 14 and No. 18 bars: 1 1/2 No. 11 bars and smaller: 1 Formed concrete surfaces exposed to earth, water, or weather, over, or in contact with, sewage; and for bottoms bearing on work mat, or slabs supporting earth cover- No. 5 bars and smaller: 1 1/2 No. 6 through No. 18 bars: 2 Beams and Columns - For dry conditions - Stirrups, spirals and ties: 1 1/2 Principal reinforcement: 2 Exposed to earth, water, sewage or weather Stirrups and ties: 2 Principal reinforcement: 2 1/2 Walls - For dry conditions - No. 11 bars and smaller: 1 No. 14 and No. 18 bars: 1 1/2 Formed concrete surfaces exposed to earth, water, sewage or weather, or in contact with ground- Circular tanks with ring tension: 2 All others: 2 Footings and Base Slabs - At formed surfaces and bottoms bearing on concrete work mat: 2 At unformed surfaces and bottoms in contact with earth: 3 Over top of piles: 2 Top of footings - - same as slabs 5/2013 03300-21 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.08 HANDLING,TRANSPORTING AND PLACING CONCRETE A. Conform to applicable requirements of this Section and Chapter 8 of ACI 301- 99:Specifications for Structural Concrete—IP,Chapter 8. Use no aluminum materials in conveying concrete. B. Rejected Work: Remove concrete found to be defective or non-conforming in materials or workmanship. Replace rejected concrete with concrete meeting requirements of Contract Documents, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Unauthorized Placement: Place no concrete except in the presence of the Engineer. Notify the Engineer in writing at least 24 hours before placement of concrete. D. Placement in Wall Forms: 1. Do not drop concrete through reinforcing steel. 2. Do not place concrete in any form so as to leave an accumulation of mortar on form surfaces above the concrete. 3. Pump concrete or use hoppers and, if necessary, vertical ducts of canvas, rubber or metal (other than aluminum) for placing concrete in forms so it reaches the place of final deposit without separation. Free fall of concrete shall not exceed 4 feet below the ends of pump hoses, ducts, chutes or buggies. Uniformly distribute concrete during depositing. 4. Do not displace concrete in forms more than 6 feet in horizontal direction from place where it was originally deposited. 5. Deposit in uniform horizontal layers not deeper than 2 feet;take care to avoid inclined layers or inclined construction joints except where required for sloping members. 6. Place each layer while the previous layer is still soft. 7. Provide sufficient illumination in form interior so concrete at places of deposit is visible from the deck or runway. E. Conveyors and Chutes: Design and arrange ends of chutes, hopper gates and other points of concrete discharge in the conveying,hoisting and placing system so concrete passing from them will not fall separated into whatever receptacle immediately receives it. Conveyors, if used, shall be of a type acceptable to the Engineer. Do not use chutes longer than 50 feet. Slope chutes so concrete of specified consistency will readily flow. If a conveyor is used,it shall be wiped clean by a device operated in such a manner that none of the mortar adhering to the belt will be wasted. All conveyors and chutes shall be covered. 5/2013 03300-22 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE F. Placement of Slabs: In hot or windy weather, conducive to plastic shrinkage cracks, apply evaporation retardant to slab after screeding in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not use evaporation retardant to increase water content of the surface cement paste. Place concrete for sloping slabs uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top, for the full width of the placement. As work progresses,vibrate and carefully work concrete around slab reinforcement. Screed the slab surface in an up-slope direction. G. When adverse weather conditions affect quality of concrete, postpone concrete placement. Do not mix concrete when the air temperature is at or below 40 degrees F and falling. Concrete may be mixed when temperature is 35 degrees F and rising. Take temperature readings in the shade, away from artificial heat. Protect concrete from temperatures below 32 degrees F until the concrete has cured for a minimum of 3 days at 70 degrees F or 5 days at 50 degrees F. When concrete temperature is 85 degrees F or above, do not exceed 60 minutes between introduction of cement to the aggregates and discharge. When the weather is such that the concrete temperature would exceed 90 degrees F, employ effective means, such as pre-cooling of aggregates and mixing water, using ice or placing at night, as necessary to maintain concrete temperature, as placed,below 90 degrees F. 3.09 PUMPING OF CONCRETE A. If pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory results, in the judgment of the Engineer, discontinue pumping operations and proceed with the placing of concrete using conventional methods. B. Pumping Equipment: Use a 2-cylinder pump designed to operate with only one cylinder if one is not functioning, or have a standby pump on site during pumping. C. The minimum hose (conduit) diameter: Comply with ACI 304.2R-96:Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. D. Replace pumping equipment and hoses (conduits)that do not function properly. E. Do not use aluminum conduits for conveying concrete. F. Field Quality Control: Take samples for slump, air content and test cylinders at the placement(discharge) end of the line. 3.10 CONCRETE PLACEMENT SEQUENCE A. Place concrete in a sequence acceptable to the Engineer. To minimize effects of shrinkage, place concrete in units bounded by construction joints shown. Place alternate units so each unit placed has cured at least 7 days for hydraulic structures,or 3 days for other structures, before contiguous unit or units are placed, except do not 5/2013 03300-23 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE place corner sections of vertical walls until the 2 adjacent wall panels have cured at least 14 days for hydraulic structures and 7 days for other structures. B. Level the concrete surface whenever a run of concrete is stopped. To ensure straight and level joints on the exposed surface of walls, tack a wood strip at least 3/4-inch thick to the forms on these surfaces. Carry concrete about 1/2 inch above the underside of the strip. About one hour after concrete is placed,remove the strip,level irregularities in the edge formed by the strip with a trowel and remove laitance. 3.11 TAMPING AND VIBRATING A. Thoroughly settle and compact concrete throughout the entire depth of the layer being consolidated, into a dense, homogeneous mass; fill corners and angles, thoroughly embed reinforcement,eliminate rock pockets and bring only a slight excess of water to the exposed surface of concrete during placement. Use ACI 309R-96:Guide for Consolidation of Concrete, Group 3, immersion-type high-speed power vibrators (8,000 to 12,000 rpm) in sufficient number and with sufficient(at least one) standby units. Use Group 2 vibrators only when accepted by the Engineer for specific locations. Do not transport concrete by vibrating. B. Use care in placing concrete around waterstops. Carefully work concrete by rodding and vibrating to make sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Where flat-strip type waterstops are placed horizontally, work concrete under waterstops by hand, making sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Give concrete surrounding the waterstops additional vibration beyond that used for adjacent concrete placement to assure complete embedment of waterstops in concrete. C. Concrete in Walls: Internally vibrate, ram, stir, or work with suitable appliances, tamping bars, shovels or forked tools until concrete completely fills forms or excavations and closes snugly against all surfaces. Do not place subsequent layers of concrete until previously-placed layers have been so worked. Provide vibrators in sufficient numbers,with standby units as required,to accomplish the results specified within 15 minutes after concrete of specified consistency is placed in the forms. Keep vibrating heads from contact with form surfaces. Take care not to vibrate concrete excessively or to work it in any manner that causes segregation of its constituents. 3.12 PLACING MASS CONCRETE A. Observe the following additional restrictions when placing mass concrete. 1. Use specified superplasticizer. 2. Maximum temperature of concrete when deposited: 70 degrees F. 3. Place in lifts approximately 18 inches thick. Extend vibrator heads into previously-placed layer. 5/2013 03300-24 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 4. Refer to Section 03310 - Structural Concrete for Mass Concreting. 3.13 CONCRETE FINISHING 3.14 FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES A. Unfinished Surfaces: Finish is not required on surfaces concealed from view in completed structure by earth, ceilings or similar cover,unless indicated otherwise on Plans. B. Rough Form Finish: 1. No form facing material is required on rough form finish surfaces. 2. Patch tie holes and defects. Chip off fins exceeding 1/4 inch in height. 3. Rough form finish may be used on concrete surfaces which will be concealed from view by earth in completed structure,except concealed surfaces required to have smooth form finish, as shown on Plans. C. Smooth Form Finish: 1. Form facing shall produce smooth, hard, uniform texture on concrete. Use plywood linings or forms in as large sheets as practicable, and with smooth, even edges and close joints. 2. Patch tie holes and defects. Rub fins and joint marks with wooden blocks to leave smooth, unmarred finished surface. 3. Provide smooth form finish on the wet face of formed surfaces of water- holding structures, and of other formed surfaces not concealed from view by earth in completed structure,except where otherwise indicated on Plans. Walls that will be exposed after future construction, at locations indicated on Plans, shall have smooth form finish. Smooth form finish on exterior face of exterior walls shall extend below final top of ground elevation. Exterior face of all perimeter grade beams shall have smooth form finish for full depth of grade beam. D. Rubbed Finish: 1. Use plywood linings or forms in as large sheets as practicable, and with smooth, even edges and close joints. 2. Remove forms as soon as practicable,repair defects,wet surfaces,and rub with No. 16 carborundum stone or similar abrasive. Continue rubbing sufficiently to bring surface paste,remove form marks and fins,and produce smooth,dense 5/2013 03300-25 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE surface of uniform color and texture. Do not use cement paste other than that drawn from concrete itself. Spread paste uniformly over surface with brush. Allow paste to reset, then wash surface with clean water. 3. Use rubbed finish at locations indicated on Plans,except where rubbed finish is indicated for a wall which will be containing a liquid, use spray-applied coating. E. Spray-applied Coating: At Contractor's option,in lieu of rubbed finish,spray-applied coating may be applied after defects have been repaired and fins removed. Remove form oil, curing compound and other foreign matter that would prevent bonding of coating. Apply coating in uniform texture and color in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions. F. Related Unformed Surfaces: Tops of piers, walls, bent caps, and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces shall be struck smooth after concrete is placed. Float unformed surfaces to texture reasonably consistent with that of formed surfaces. Continue final treatment on formed surfaces uniformly across unformed surfaces. 3.15 HOT WEATHER FINISHING A. When hot weather conditions exist, as defined in the Section, 1.03A"Hot Weather", and as judged by the Engineer, apply evaporation retardant to the surfaces of slabs, topping and concrete fill placements immediately after each step in the finishing process has been completed. 3.16 FINISHING SLABS AND SIMILAR FLAT SURFACES TO CLASS A, B AND C TOLERANCES A. Apply Class A, B and C finishes at locations indicated on Plans. Class B or better finish shall be applied if not shown otherwise by the Plans. B. Shaping to Contour: Use strike-off templates or approved compacting-type screeds riding on screed strips or edge forms to bring concrete surface to proper contour. See Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork for edge forms and screeds. C. Consolidation and Leveling: Concrete to be consolidated shall be as stiff as practicable. Thoroughly consolidate concrete in slabs and use internal vibration in beams and girders of framed slabs and along bulkheads of slabs on grade. Consolidate and level slabs and floors with vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds or other approved means. After consolidation and leveling, do not permit manipulation of surfaces prior to finishing operations. D. Tolerances for Finished Surfaces: Check tolerances by placing straightedge of specified length anywhere on slab. Gap between slab and straightedge shall not exceed tolerance listed for specified class. 5/2013 03300-26 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Straightedge Tolerance Class Length in Feet in Inches A 10 1/8 B 10 1/4 C 2 1/4 E. Raked Finish: After concrete has been placed, struck off,consolidated and leveled to Class C tolerance,roughen surface before final set.Roughen with stiff brushes or rakes to depth of approximately 1/4 inch. Notify the Engineer prior to placing concrete requiring initial raked surface finish so that acceptable raked finish standard may be established for project. Protect raked,base-slab finish from contamination until time of topping. Provide raked finish for following: 1. Surfaces to receive bonded concrete topping or fill. 2. Steep ramps, as noted on Plans. 3. Additional locations as noted on Plans. F. Float Finish: 1. After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and leveled, do not work further until ready for floating. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared,or when mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit proper operation of power-driven float. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats. Use hand floating with wood or cork-faced floats in locations inaccessible to power- driven machine and on small, isolated slabs. 2. After initial floating, re-check tolerance of surface with 10-foot straightedge applied at not less than two different angles. Cut down high spots and fill low spots to Class B tolerance. Immediately re-float slab to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 3. Provide float finish at locations not otherwise specified and not otherwise indicated on Plans. G. Trowel Finish: 1. Apply float finish as previously specified. After power floating, use power trowel to produce smooth surface which is relatively free of defects but which may still contain some trowel marks. Do additional troweling by hand after surface has hardened sufficiently. Do final troweling when ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over surface. Thoroughly consolidate surface by hand troweling operations. 2. Produce finished surface free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and conforming to Class A tolerance. On surfaces intended to 5/2013 03300-27 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE support floor coverings,remove defects which might show through covering by grinding. 3. Provide trowel finish for floors which will receive floor covering and additional locations indicated on Plans. H. Broom or Belt Finish: 1. Apply float finish as previously specified. Immediately after completing floated finish, draw broom or burlap belt across surface to give coarse transverse scored texture. 2. Provide broom or belt finish at locations indicated on Plans. 3.17 FINISHING SLABS AND SIMILAR FLAT SURFACES TO "F-NUMBER SYSTEM" FINISH A. Shaping to Contour: Use strike-off templates or approved compacting-type screeds riding on screed strips or edge forms to bring concrete surface to proper contour. Edge forms and screeds: Conform to Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork. B. Consolidation and Leveling: Concrete to be consolidated shall be as dry as practicable. Thoroughly consolidate concrete in slabs and use internal vibration in beams and girders of framed slabs and along bulkheads of slabs on grade. Consolidate and level slabs and floors with vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds or other approved means. After consolidation and leveling,do not manipulate surfaces prior to finishing operations. C. Tolerances for Finished Surfaces: Independent testing laboratory will check floor flatness and levelness in accordance with this Section,3.23F"Field Quality Control". D. Float Finish: 1. After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and leveled, do not work further until ready for floating. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared,or when mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit proper operation of power-driven float. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats. Use hand floating with wood or cork-faced floats in locations inaccessible to power- driven machine and on small, isolated slabs. 2. Check tolerance of surface after initial floating with a 10-foot straightedge applied at not less than two different angles. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Immediately refloat slab to uniform, smooth, granular texture to FF20/FL17 tolerance, unless shown otherwise on Plans. 3. Provide "F-Number System" float finish at locations indicated on Plans. 5/2013 03300-28 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE E. Trowel Finish: 1. Apply float finish as previously specified. After power floating, use power trowel to produce smooth surface which is relatively free of defects but which may still contain some trowel marks. Do additional trowelings by hand after surface has hardened sufficiently. Do final troweling when ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over surface. Thoroughly consolidate surface by hand troweling operations. 2. Produce finished surface free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and conforming to an FF25/FL20 tolerance for slabs on grade and FF25/FL17 for elevated slabs, unless shown otherwise on Plans. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings, remove defects, which might show through covering, by grinding. 3. Provide "F-Number System"trowel finish at locations indicated on Plans. 3.18 BONDED CONCRETE TOPPING AND FILL A. Surface Preparation: 1. Protect raked, base-slab finish from contamination until time of topping. Mechanically remove oil, grease, asphalt, paint, clay stains or other contaminants, leaving clean surface. 2. Prior to placement of topping or fill, thoroughly dampen roughened slab surface and leave free of standing water. Immediately before topping or fill is placed, scrub coat of bonding grout into surface. Do not allow grout to set or dry before topping or fill is placed. B. Concrete Fill: 1. Where concrete fill intersects a wall surface at an angle steeper than 45 degrees from vertical, provide a 1.5-inch deep keyway in the wall at the point of intersection; size keyway so that no portion of the concrete fill is less than 1.5 inches thick. Form keyway in new walls; create by saw cutting the top and bottom lines and chipping in existing walls. 2. Apply wood float finish to surfaces of concrete fill. 3. Provide concrete fill at locations shown on Plans. C. Bonded Concrete Topping in Bottom of Clarifiers and Thickeners: 1. Minimum thickness of concrete topping: 1 inch. Maximum thickness when swept in by clarifier and thickener equipment: 3 inches. 5/2013 03300-29 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2. Compact topping and fill by rolling or tamping,bring to established grade,and float. Topping grout placed on sloping slabs shall proceed uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top, for the full width of the placement. Coat surface with evaporation retardant as needed between finishing operations to prevent plastic shrinkage cracks. 3. Screed topping to true surface using installed equipment. Protect equipment from damage during sweeping-in process. Perform sweeping-in process under supervision of equipment manufacturer's factory representative. After topping has been screeded, apply wood float finish. During finishing, do not apply water, dry cement or mixture of dry cement and sand to the surface. 4. As soon as topping or fill finishing is completed, coat surface with curing compound. After the topping is set and sufficiently hard in clarifiers and where required by the Engineer, fill the tank with sufficient water to cover the entire floor for 14 days. 5. Provide bonded concrete topping in bottom of all clarifiers and thickeners. 3.19 EPDXY PENETRATING SEALER A. Surfaces to receive epoxy penetrating sealer: Apply wood float finish. Clean surface and apply sealer in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Rooms with concrete curbs or bases: Continue application of floor coating on curb or base to its juncture with masonry wall. Rooms with solid concrete walls or wainscots: Apply minimum 2-inch-high coverage of floor coating on vertical surface. C. Mask walls, doors, frames and similar surface to prevent floor coating contact. D. When coving floor coating up vertical concrete walls, curbs, bases or wainscots,use masking tape or other suitable material to keep a neat level edge at top of cove. E. Provide epoxy penetrating sealer at locations indicated on Plans. 3.20 EPDXY FLOOR TOPPING A. Surfaces to receive epoxy floor topping: Apply wood float finish unless recommended otherwise by epoxy floor topping manufacturer. Clean surface and apply epoxy floor topping in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. Thickness of topping: 1/8 inch. B. Rooms with concrete curbs or bases: Continue application of floor coating on curb or base to its juncture with masonry wall. Rooms with solid concrete walls or wainscots: apply 2-inch-high coverage of floor coating on vertical surface. 5/2013 03300-30 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE C. Mask walls, doors, frames and similar surfaces to prevent floor coating contact. D. When coving floor coating up vertical concrete walls, curbs,bases or wainscots,use masking tape or other suitable material to keep a neat level edge at top of cove. E. Finished surface shall be free of trowel marks and dimples. F. Provide epoxy floor topping at locations indicated on Plans. 3.21 SEALER/DUSTPROOFER A. Where sealer or sealer/dustproofer is indicated on Plans,just prior to completion of construction, apply coat of specified clear sealer/dustproofing compound to exposed interior concrete floors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.22 NONSLIP FINISH A. Apply float finish as specified. Apply two-thirds of required abrasive aggregate by method that ensures even coverage without segregation and re-float. Apply remainder of abrasive aggregate at right angles to first application,using heavier application of aggregate in areas not sufficiently covered by first application. Re-float after second application of aggregate and complete operations with troweled finish. Perform finishing operations in a manner that will allow the abrasive aggregate to be exposed and not covered with cement paste. B. Provide nonslip finish at locations indicated on Plans. 3.23 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 301- 99:Specifications for Structural Concrete-IP and under provisions of Sections 01440 —Inspection Services and Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services. B. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of Work. D. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. E. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 50 cu yds or less of concrete or as directed by the Engineer. F. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting,cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. 5/2013 03300-31 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE G. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. H. Provide the results of alkalinity tests of concrete used in sanitary structures. Provide one test for each structure. These tests shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory. Perform the test on the concrete covering reinforcing steel on the inside of the pipe or structure. Alkalinity tests are to be in accordance with Encyclopedia of Industrial Chemical Analysis, Vol. 15, Page 230, Interscience Publishers Division, John Wiley and Sons. 3.24 PATCHING A. Allow Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Engineer upon discovery. C. Patch imperfections in accordance with ACI 301-99:Specifications for Structural Concrete - IP. 3.25 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Engineer. C. Do not patch, fill,touch-up,repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Engineer for each individual area. 3.26 CURING A. Comply with ACI 308.1-98:Standard Specifications for Curing Concrete. Cure by preventing loss of moisture, rapid temperature change and mechanical injury for a period of 7 curing days when Type II or IP cement has been used and for 3 curing days when Type III cement has been used. Start curing as soon as free water has disappeared from the concrete surface after placing and finishing. A curing day is any calendar day in which the temperature is above 50 degrees F for at least 19 hours. Colder days may be counted if air temperature adjacent to concrete is maintained above 50 degrees F. In continued cold weather, when artificial heat is not provided, removal of forms and shoring may be permitted at the end of calendar days equal to twice the required number of curing days. However, leave soffit forms and shores in place until concrete has reached the specified 28-day strength, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. B. Cure formed surfaces not requiring rub-finished surface by leaving forms in place for the full curing period. Keep wood forms wet during the curing period. Add water as 5/2013 03300-32 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE needed for other types of forms. Or, at Contractor's option, forms may be removed after 2 days and curing compound applied. C. Rubbed Finish: 1. At formed surfaces requiring rubbed finish, remove forms as soon as practicable without damaging the surface. 2. After rub-finish operations are complete, continue curing formed surfaces by using either approved curing/sealing compounds or moist cotton mats until normal curing period is complete. D. Unformed Surfaces: Cure by membrane curing compound method. 1. After concrete has received a final finish and surplus water sheen has disappeared, immediately seal surface with a uniform coating of approved curing compound, applied at the rate of coverage recommended by manufacturer or as directed by the Engineer. Do not apply less than 1 gallon per 180 square feet of area. Provide satisfactory means to properly control and check rate of application of the compound. 2. Thoroughly agitate the compound during use and apply by means of approved mechanical power pressure sprayers equipped with atomizing nozzles. For application on small miscellaneous items,hand-powered spray equipment may be used. Prevent loss of compound between nozzle and concrete surface during spraying operations. 3. Do not apply compound to a dry surface. If concrete surface has become dry, thoroughly moisten surface immediately prior to application. At locations where coating shows discontinuities,pinholes or other defects, or if rain falls on a newly coated surface before film has dried sufficiently to resist damage, apply an additional coat of compound at the specified rate of coverage. 3.27 CURING MASS CONCRETE A. Observe the following additional restrictions when curing mass concrete. 1. Minimum curing period: 2 weeks. 2. When ambient air temperature falls below 32 degrees F, protect surface of concrete against freezing. 3. Do not use steam or other curing methods that will add heat to concrete. 4. Keep forms and exposed concrete continuously wet for at least the first 48 hours after placing, and whenever surrounding air temperature is above 90 degrees F during final curing period. 5/2013 03300-33 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 5. During 2-week curing period,provide necessary controls to prevent ambient air temperature immediately adjacent to concrete from falling more than 30 degrees F in 24 hours. 3.28 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Time Limits: 1. When repair of surface defects or finishing is required before concrete is aged, forms on vertical surfaces may be removed as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations. 2. Remove top forms on sloping surfaces of concrete as soon as concrete has attained sufficient stiffness to prevent sagging. Loosen wood forms for wall openings as soon as this can be accomplished without damage to concrete. Leave formwork for water-retaining structures in place for at least 2 days. Formwork for non-water-retaining columns, walls, sides of beams and other formwork components not supporting weight of concrete may be removed after 12 hours, provided concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations, and provided removal of forms will not disturb members supporting weight of concrete. 3. Forms and shoring supporting weight of concrete or construction loads: Leave in place until concrete has reached minimum strength specified for removal of forms and shoring. Do not remove such forms in less than 4 days. B. Circular Paper or Spiral Tube Forms: Follow manufacturer's directions for form removal. Take necessary precautions to prevent damage to concrete surface. When removal is done before completion of curing time,replace form,tie in place,and seal to retard escape of moisture. C. Removal Strength: 1. Control Tests: Suitable strength-control tests will be required as evidence that concrete has attained specified strength for removal of formwork or shoring supporting weight of concrete in beams, slabs and other structural members. Furnish test cylinders and data to verify strength for early form removal. a. Field-cured Test Cylinders: When field-cured test cylinders reach specified removal strength,formwork or shoring may be removed from respective concrete placements. b. Laboratory-cured Test Cylinders: When concrete has been cured as specified for structural concrete for same time period required by laboratory-cured cylinders to reach specified strength, formwork or shoring may be removed from respective concrete placements. 5/2013 03300-34 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Determine length of time that concrete has been cured by totaling the days or fractions of days,not necessarily consecutive,during which air temperature surrounding concrete is above 50 degrees F and concrete has been damp or thoroughly sealed against evaporation and loss of moisture. 2. Compressive Strengths: The minimum concrete compressive strength for removal of formwork supporting weight of concrete is 75 percent of specified minimum 28-day strength for class of concrete involved. 3.29 RESHORING A. When reshoring is permitted, plan operations in advance and obtain the Engineer's approval of such operations. While reshoring is under way, keep live load off new construction. Do not permit concrete in any beam, slab, column or other structural member to be subjected to combined dead and construction loads in excess of loads permitted for developed concrete strength at time of reshoring. B. Place reshores as soon as practicable after form-stripping operations are complete but in no case later than end of day on which stripping occurs. Tighten reshores to carry required loads without over stressing construction. Leave reshores in place until tests representative of concrete being supported have reached specified strength at time of removal of formwork supporting weight of concrete. C. Floors supporting shores under newly-placed concrete: Leave original supporting shores in place, or re-shore. Locate reshores directly under shore position above. Extend reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute weight of newly- placed concrete, forms and construction live loads in such manner that design superimposed loads of floors supporting shores are not exceeded. 3.30 FORM REUSE A. Do not reuse forms that are worn or damaged beyond repair. Thoroughly clean and recoat forms before reuse. For wood and plywood forms to be used for exposed smooth finish,sand or otherwise dress concrete contact surface to original condition or provide form liner facing material. For metal forms, straighten, remove dents and clean to return forms to original condition. 5/2013 03300-35 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE TABLE 03100A TOLERANCES FOR FORMED SURFACES CONCRETE IN BUILDINGS** For any For any Maximum Variation Variation In 10-foot 20-foot for Entire From length length or Dimension any bay Lines and Surfaces of Columns, 1/4" - - - 1" Plumb or Piers, Walls and Arrises Specified Exposed Corner Columns, Control - - - 1/4" 1/2" Batter Joint Grooves, and Other Conspicuous Lines Slab Soffits, Ceilings, Beam Soffits, 1/4" 3/8" 3/4" Level of and Arrises (measured before Specified removal of shores), Grade Exposed Lintels, Sills, Parapets, - - - 1 4" 1/2" Horizontal Grooves and Other Conspicuous Lines Drawing Position of Linear Building Lines, - - - 1/2" 1" Dimensions Columns, Walls and Partitions Size and Location of Sleeves, Floor - - - - - - ±1/4" Openings and Wall Openings Cross Section of Columns, Beams, - - - - - - +1/2", -1/4" Slabs, and Walls Footings* in Plan - - - - - - +2", -1/2" Footing Misplacement or Eccentricity - - - - - - 2% of Width in Direction of Error(the lesser of) or 2" Footing Thickness Decrease - - - - - - 5% Footing Thickness Increase - - - - - - No Limit Step Rise in Flight of Stairs - - - - - - ±1/8" Step Tread in Flight of Stairs - - - - - - ±1/4" Consecutive Step Rise - - - - - - ±1/16" Consecutive Step Tread - - - - - - ±1/8" *Footing tolerances apply to concrete dimensions only, not to positioning of vertical reinforcing steel, dowels, or embedded items **Includes water and wastewater process structures 5/2013 03300-36 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE TABLE 03100B TOLERANCE FOR FORMED SURFACES CONCRETE IN BRIDGES, WHARVES AND MARINE STRUCTURES Variation From Variation In Maximum Plumb of Specified Surfaces of columns, piers and walls 1/2" in 10' Batter Level or Top surfaces of slabs See Section 03345 Specified Grade Top surfaces of curbs and railings 3/16" in 10' Drawing Cross section of columns, caps, walls, beams, and f1/2", -1/4" Dimensions similar members Thickness of deck slabs ±1/4", -1/8" Size and location of slab and wall openings +1/2" Footings in plan +2, -1/2" Footing misplacement or eccentricity in direction 2% of width or 2" of error(the lesser of) Footing thickness decrease 5% Footing thickness increase No limit Step rise in flight of stairs +1/8" Step tread in flight of stairs ±1/4" Consecutive step rise ±1/16" Consecutive step tread ±1/8" 5/2013 03300 -37 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.31 PROTECTION A. Protect concrete against damage until final acceptance by the Owner. B. Protect fresh concrete from damage due to rain, hail, sleet or snow. Provide such protection while the concrete is still plastic and whenever such precipitation is imminent or occurring. C. Do not backfill around concrete structures or subject them to design loadings until all components of the structure needed to resist the loading are complete and have reached the specified 28-day compressive strength, except as authorized otherwise by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 5/2013 03300 -38 of 38 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SECTION 09915 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. High performance industrial coatings (HPIC). 2. Minimum surface preparation requirements. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unit Price. No separate payment will be made for this item. Include the cost in associated items for this project. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D4258— Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. b. D4259—Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete. c. D4261 — Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete Unit Masonry for Coating. d. D4262 — Standard Test Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned or Etched Concrete Surfaces. e. D4263 — Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. f. E84 — Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. NACE International (NACE). a. RP0188 Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates b. RP0287 Field Measurements of Surface Profile of Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel Surfaces Using Replica Tape 3. National Association of Pipe Fabricators (NAPF): a. 500-03-04—Abrasive Blast Cleaning for Ductile Iron Pipe. b. 500-03-05 —Abrasive Blast Cleaning for Cast Ductile Iron Fittings. ARKK Standard—Aug 2016 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS 4. National Bureau of Standards (NBS): a. Certified Coating Thickness Calibration Standards. 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 101 —Life Safety Code. 6. National Sanitation Foundation International (NSF). a. Standard 61 Drinking Water Components 7. Steel Door Institute/American National Standards Institute (SDI/ANSI): a. A250.10 — Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria For Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors. 8. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): a. PA 2—Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages. b. SP 1 — Solvent Cleaning. c. SP 2—Hand Tool Cleaning. d. SP 3 —Power Tool Cleaning. e. SP 16 — Brush-off Blast Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steels, and Non-ferrous Metals. 9. The Society for Protective Coatings/NACE International (SSPC/NACE): a. SP 5/NACE No. 1 —White Metal Blast Cleaning. b. SP 6/NACE No. 3 —Commercial Blast Cleaning. c. SP 7/NACE No. 4—Brush-off Blast Cleaning. d. SP 10/NACE No. 2—Near-White Blast Cleaning. e. SP 12/NACE No. 5 — Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and Other Hard Materials by High and Ultrahigh Pressure Water Jetting Prior to Recoating. f. SP 13/NACE No. 6—Surface Preparation of Concrete. B. Qualifications: C. Shop Applicator Qualifications: 1. Coating manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide written statement attesting that applicator has been instructed on proper preparation, mixing and application procedures for coatings specified. 2. Applicators shall have minimum of 5 years experience in application of similar products on similar project. D. Field Applicator Qualifications 1. The manufacturer shall provide written certification that the coating Contractor's supervisor and each applicator performing Work on the project have been trained and approved by the manufacturer to apply the selected coating system. ARKK Standard-Aug 2016 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS 2. A written certification from the Contractor stating that they are qualified and experienced in the application of the specified coating systems. 3. Field coating applicator shall provide SSPC QP 1 Certification. E. Miscellaneous: 1. Each paint system shall be provided through one (1) manufacturer unless noted otherwise. 2. Coating used in all corridors and stairways shall meet requirements of NFPA 101 and ASTM E84. F. Deviation from specified mil thickness or product type is not allowed without written authorization of Owner's representative. G. Material shall not be thinned unless approved, in writing, by paint manufacturer's authorized representative. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous. B. Corrosive Environment: Immersion in, or not more than 6 IN above, or subject to condensation, spillage or splash of a corrosive material such as water, wastewater, or chemical solution; or exposure to corrosive, caustic or acidic agent, chemicals, chemical fumes, chemical mixture, or solutions with pH range of 5 to 9. C. Immersion Surface: 1. Any surface immersed in water or some other liquid. 2. Surface of any pipe, valve, or any other component of the piping system subject to condensation including the pipe support system. D. Paint includes the following: 1. High performance industrial coatings (HPIC) include: Epoxies, urethanes, vinyl ester, waterborne vinyl acrylic emulsions, acrylates, silicones, alkyds, acrylic emulsions and any other coating listed as a HPIC. E. HPIC: High performance industrial coatings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01300 — Submittals for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Field Applicator experience qualifications. a. Field coating applicator shall provide SSPC QP 1 Certification for HPIC products in Corrosive and Highly Corrosive Environments. ARKK Standard-Aug 2016 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS 3. Shop Applicator Qualifications a. The Shop Coating Applicator shall provide SSPC QP 3 Certification or the coating manufacturer's certification for selected coating system. 4. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's application instructions. c. Manufacturer's surface preparation instructions. d. If products being used are manufactured by Company other than listed in the MATERIALS Article of this Specification Section, provide complete individual data sheet comparison of proposed products with specified products including application procedure, coverage rates and verification that product is designed for intended use. e. Contractor's written plan of action for containing airborne particles created by blasting operation and location of disposal of spent contaminated blasting media. f. Coating manufacturer's recommendation on abrasive blasting. g. Manufacturer's recommendation for universal barrier coat. h. Manufacturer's recommendation for providing temporary or supplemental heat or dehumidification or other environmental control measures. 5. Manufacturer's statement regarding applicator instruction on product use. 6. Certification that High Performance Coating Systems proposed for use have been reviewed and approved by Senior Corrosion Specification Specialist employed by the coating manufacturer. B. Samples: 1. Manufacturer's full line of colors for Owner's Representative's preliminary color selection. 2. After preliminary color selection by Owner's Representative provide two (2) 3 x 5 IN samples of each final color selected. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver in original containers, labeled as follows: 1. Name or type number of material. 2. Manufacturer's name and item stock number. 3. Contents, by volume, of major constituents. 4. Warning labels. 5. VOC content. ARKK Standard-Aug 2016 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS 1.7 WARRANTY A. The Contractor and coating manufacturers shall warrant the coating system applications against defects and workmanship after final acceptance of the Work for a period of 5 years. The Contractor shall perform all Work and supply all equipment and materials associated with the repair of failures identified in the warranty inspection at no cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, only the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. High performance industrial coatings: a. Tnemec. b. Carboline Protective Coatings. 2.2 MATERIALS A. For unspecified materials such as thinner, provide manufacturer's recommended products. B. Paint Systems - General: 1. P =prime coat. 2. Fl, F2 . . . Fn = first finish coat, second finish coat . . . . nth finish coat, color as selected by Owner's representative. C. HPIC products listed in the MATERIALS Article, Paint Systems paragraph are manufactured by Tnemec. 1. Products of other listed manufacturers are acceptable for use providing the product is of the same generic resin, requires comparable surface preparation, has comparable application requirements, meets the same VOC levels or better, does not exceed TCEQ Chapter 115.453 VOC limits, provides the same finish and color options and will withstand the atmospheric conditions of the location where it is to be applied. D. Paint Systems (Systems not shown are not used): System One— 100% Solids Epoxy—Non-stainless steel Piping inside Wet Well: One Coat: Tnemec Series 435 Perma-Glaze applied at 40.0 to 50.0 dry mils System Two—Traditional Epoxy System—All other piping: First Coat: Tnemec Series 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline applied at 4.0 to 6.0 dry mils Stripe Coat: Tnemec Series 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline applied by brush to all nuts, bolts, edges, corners and other difficult to coat areas. Second Coat: Tnemec Series 104 H.S. Epoxy applied at 10.0 to 12.0 dry mils ARKK Standard-Aug 2016 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. General: 1. Verify that atmosphere in area where painting is to take place is within paint manufacturer's acceptable temperature, humidity and sun exposure limits. a. Provide temporary heating, shade and/or dehumidification as required to bring area within acceptable limits. 1) Provide temporary dehumidification equipment properly sized to maintain humidity levels required by paint manufacturer. 2) Provide clean heat with heat exchanger type equipment sufficient in size to maintain temperature on a 24 HR basis. a) Vent exhaust gases to exterior environment. b) No exhaust gases shall be allowed to vent into the space being painted or any adjacent space. 2. Prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions and this Specification Section unless noted otherwise in this Specification Section. a. Where discrepancy between coating manufacturer's instructions and this Specification Section exists, the more stringent preparation shall be provided unless approved otherwise, in writing, by the Owner's Representative. 3. Remove all dust, grease, oil, compounds, dirt and other foreign matter which would prevent bonding of coating to surface. 4. Adhere to manufacturer's recoat time surface preparation requirements. a. Surfaces that have exceeded coating manufacturer's published recoat time and/or have exhibited surface chalking shall be prepared prior to additional coating in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. 1) Minimum SSPC SP 7/NACE No. 4 unless otherwise approved by Owner's Representative. B. Protection: 1. Protect surrounding surfaces not to be coated. 2. Remove and protect hardware, accessories, plates, fixtures, finished work, and similar items; or provide ample in-place protection. C. Prepare and paint before assembly all surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly. D. Wood: 1. Sandpaper smooth, then dust. 2. Seal all knots, pitch and resinous sapwood after priming coat has dried. ARKK Standard—Aug 2016 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS 3. Putty nail holes and minor defects to match wood color. E. Ferrous Metal: 1. Prepare ductile iron pipe in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations and NAPF. a. All piping, pumps, valves, fittings and any other component used in the water piping system that requires preparation for painting shall be prepared in accordance with requirements for immersion service. 1) Pipe: NAPF 500-03-04. 2) Fittings: NAPF 500-03-05 b. Prepare all areas requiring patch painting in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer and NAPF. c. Remove bituminous coating per piping manufacturer, paint manufacturer and NAPF recommendations. 1) The most stringent recommendations shall apply. 2. Complete fabrication, welding or burning before beginning surface preparation. a. Chip or grind off flux, spatter, slag or other laminations left from welding. b. Remove mill scale. c. Grind smooth rough welds and other sharp projections. 3. Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1 or detergent and low-pressure water clean in accordance with SSPC SP 12/NACE No. 5 all surfaces scheduled to receive additional SSPC surface preparation. 4. Surfaces subject to corrosive or highly corrosive environment and all surfaces subject to immersion service: a. Near-white blast clean in accordance with SSPC SP 10/NACE No. 2. 5. All interior and exterior structural steel not included in corrosive, highly corrosive or immersion service surfaces: a. Minimum commercial blast clean in accordance with SSPC SP 6/NACE No. 3. 6. Surfaces subject to high temperatures. a. Heat in excess of 600 DegF: SSPC SP 10/NACE No. 2. b. Heat in excess of 200 DegF but less than 600 DegF: SSPC SP 6/NACE No. 3. 7. Surfaces of steel joists and steel trusses: a. Commercial blast clean the major portion of the truss in accordance with SSPC SP 6/NACE No. 3. b. Power tool or hand tool clean tight connection areas and other difficult to access areas in accordance with SSPC SP 2 or SSPC SP 3. 8. Steel surfaces scheduled to receive SYSTEM#24 or#35:9 ARKK Standard—Aug 2016 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS a. White metal blast clean in accordance with SSPC SP 5/NACE No. 1. b. Provide 2-1/2 to 3 mil anchor profile for SYSTEMS #24 and#359. 9. All fusion bonded epoxy coated surfaces identified to be field painted: a. Remove all traces of gloss finish by sanding or by abrasive brush blasting. b. Clean surface after removing gloss finish to remove sanding or blasting residue. 10. Restore surface of field welds and adjacent areas to original surface preparation. 11. Black iron piping: Remove surface varnish by solvent or waterjet and detergent cleaning or brush-off blast cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP 7/NACE No. 4. F. Hollow Metal: 1. Clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1 or SSPC SP 12/NACE No. 5 and in accordance with hollow metal manufacturer. G. Galvanized Steel and Non-ferrous Metals: 1. Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1 followed by brush-off blast clean in accordance with SSPC SP 16 to remove zinc oxide and other foreign contaminants. a. Provide uniform 1 mil profile surface. H. Abrasive blast clean the following equipment or surfaces regardless of previous finish, if any. I. Gypsum Wallboard and Abuse Resistant Panels: 1. Repair minor irregularities left by finishers. 2. Avoid raising nap of paper face on gypsum wallboard. 3. Verify moisture content is less than 8 percent before painting. 4. Provide all special preparation required for SC application. J. Concrete: 1. Cure for minimum of 28 days. 2. Verify that concrete surfaces have been cleaned and that voids have been patched in accordance with Specification Section 03 31 32 — Concrete Finishing and Repair of Surface Defects. a. Concrete surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with ASTM D4258. 3. Mechanically abrade concrete surfaces in accordance with ASTM D4259 as recommended by coating manufacturer. 4. Abrasive blast concrete surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 13/NACE No. 6 to provide profile recommended by coatings manufacturer in accordance with ICRI Technical Guideline 310.2 Concrete Surface Profile 4. 5. Test pH of surface to be painted in accordance with ASTM D4262. ARKK Standard-Aug 2016 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS a. If surface pH is not within coating manufacturer's required acceptable range, use methods acceptable to coating manufacturer as required to bring pH within acceptable range. b. Retest pH until acceptable results are obtained. 6. Verify that moisture content of surface to be painted is within coating manufacturer's recommended acceptable limits. a. Test moisture content of surface to be coated in accordance with ASTM D4263. b. After remedial measures have been taken to lower or raise moisture content, retest surface until acceptable results are obtained. K. Concrete Unit Masonry: 1. Cure for minimum of 28 days. 2. Remove all mortar spatters and protrusions. 3. Verify that concrete unit masonry surfaces have been cleaned in accordance with Specification Section 04 22 00—Concrete Masonry and ASTM D4261. 4. Test pH of surface to be painted in accordance with ASTM D4262. a. If surface pH is not within coating manufacturer's required acceptable range, use methods acceptable to coating manufacturer as required to bring pH within acceptable limits. b. Retest pH until acceptable results are obtained. 5. Verify that moisture content of surface to be painted is within coating manufacturer's recommended acceptable limits. a. Test moisture content of surface to be coated in accordance with ASTM D4263. b. After remedial measures have been taken to lower or raise moisture content, retest surface until acceptable range is obtained. 6. Provide all special preparation required for SC application. L. Metal Surface Preparation by Abrasive Blasting: 1. All abrasive-blasted ferrous metal surfaces shall be inspected immediately prior to application of paint coatings. a. Inspection shall be performed to determine cleanliness and profile depth of blasted surfaces and to certify that surface has been prepared in accordance with these Specifications. 2. Schedule the abrasive blasting operation so blasted surfaces will not be wet after blasting and before painting. 3. Perform additional blasting and cleaning as required to achieve surface preparation required. a. Prior to painting, reblast surfaces allowed to set overnight and surfaces that show rust bloom. ARKK Standard-Aug 2016 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS b. Surfaces allowed to set overnight or surfaces which show rust bloom prior to painting shall be reinspected prior to paint application. 4. Profile depth of blasted surface: Not less than 1 mil or greater than 2 mils unless required otherwise by coating manufacturer. 5. The Field Coating Applicator shall abrasive blast the shop coated surfaces per SSPC SP7 prior to the application of the final coats. 6. The Field Coating Applicator shall not apply a coating on a bare steel surface that has not been prepared to the required SSPC SP6, SP10 or SP5 standard. Special attention shall be given to uncoated steel weld joints, coating holdbacks, and bare metal. 7. Provide compressed air for blasting that is free of water and oil. a. Provide accessible separators and traps. 8. Confine blast abrasives to area being blasted. a. Provide shields of polyethylene sheeting or other such barriers to confine blast material. b. Plug pipes, holes, or openings before blasting and keep plugged until blast operation is complete and residue is removed. 9. Protect nameplates, valve stems, rotating equipment, motors and other items that may be damaged from blasting. 10. Reblast surfaces not meeting requirements of these Specifications. 11. Abrasive blasting media may be recovered, cleaned and reused providing Contractor submits, for Owner's representative's review, a comprehensive recovery plan outlining all procedures and equipment proposed in reclamation process. 12. Properly dispose of blasting material contaminated with debris from blasting operation not scheduled to be reused. M. All Plastic Surfaces and Non-Ferrous Surfaces Except Galvanized Steel: 1. Sand using 80-100 grit sandpaper to scarify surfaces. 3.2 APPLICATION A. General: 1. Thin, mix and apply coatings by brush, roller, or spray in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. a. Application equipment must be inspected and approved in writing by coating manufacturer. b. Hollow metal shall be spray applied only. 2. Temperature and weather conditions: ARKK Standard-Aug 2016 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS a. Do not paint surfaces when surface temperature is below 50 DegF unless product has been formulated specifically for low temperature application and application is approved in writing by Owner's representative and paint manufacturer's authorized representative. b. Avoid painting surfaces exposed to hot sun. c. Do not paint on damp surfaces. 3. Immediately after surface has been inspected, apply structural steel and miscellaneous steel prime coat in the factory. a. Finish coats shall be applied in the field. b. Prime coat referred to here is prime coat as indicated in this Specification. 1) Structural steel and miscellaneous steel prime coating applied in factory (shop) as part of Fabricator's standard rust inhibiting and protection coating is not acceptable as replacement for specified prime coating. 4. Provide complete coverage to mil thickness specified. a. Thickness specified is dry mil thickness. b. All paint systems are "to cover." In situations of discrepancy between manufacturer's square footage coverage rates and mil thickness, mil thickness requirements govern. c. When color or undercoats show through, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish and color. 5. If so directed by Owner's Representative, do not apply consecutive coats until Owner's Representative has had an opportunity to observe and approve previous coats. 6. Apply materials under adequate illumination. 7. Evenly spread to provide full, smooth coverage. 8. Work each application of material into corners, crevices, joints, and other difficult to work areas. 9. Avoid degradation and contamination of blasted surfaces and avoid intercoat contamination. a. Clean contaminated surfaces before applying next coat. 10. Smooth out runs or sags immediately, or remove and recoat entire surface. 11. Allow preceding coats to dry before recoating. a. Recoat within time limits specified by coating manufacturer. b. If recoat time limits have expired re-prepare surface in accordance with coating manufacturer's printed recommendations. 12. Allow coated surfaces to cure prior to allowing traffic or other work to proceed. 13. Coat all aluminum in contact with dissimilar materials. ARKK Standard—Aug 2016 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS 14. When coating rough surfaces which cannot be backrolled sufficiently, hand brush coating to work into all recesses. 15. Backroll concrete and masonry surfaces with a roller if paint coatings are spray applied. B. Prime Coat Application: 1. Prime all surfaces indicated to be painted. a. Apply prime coat in accordance with coating manufacturer's written instructions and as written in this Specification Section. 2. Ensure field-applied coatings are compatible with factory-applied coatings. a. Ensure new coatings applied over existing coatings are compatible. b. Employ services of coating manufacturer's qualified technical representative. 1) Certify through material data sheets. 2) Perform test patch. c. If field-applied coating is found to be not compatible, require the coating manufacturer's technical representative to recommend, in writing, product to be used as barrier coat, thickness to be applied, surface preparation and method of application. d. At Contractor's option, coatings may be removed, surface re-prepared, and new coating applied using appropriate paint system listed in the MATERIALS Article, Paint Systems paragraph of this Specification Section. 1) All damage to surface as result of coating removal shall be repaired to original condition or better by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner. 3. Prime ferrous metals embedded in concrete to minimum of 1 IN below exposed surfaces. 4. Back prime all wood scheduled to be painted, prior to installation. 5. After application of primer to gypsum board surfaces, inspect surface and repair in accordance with the PREPARATION Article of this Specification Section. a. Re-prime repaired surfaces to uniform finish before application of finish coat(s). 6. Apply zinc-rich primers while under continuous agitation. 7. Ensure abrasive blasting operation does not result in embedment of abrasive particles in paint film. 8. Brush or spray bolts, welds, edges and difficult access areas with primer prior to primer application over entire surface. 9. Touch up damaged primer coats prior to applying finish coats. a. Restore primed surface equal to surface before damage. ARKK Standard-Aug 2016 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS 10. All surfaces of steel lintels and steel components of concrete lintels used in wall construction shall be completely painted with both prime and finish coats prior to placing in wall. C. Finish Coat Application: 1. Apply finish coats in accordance with coating manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with this Specification Section; manufacturer instructions take precedent over these Specifications. 2. Touch up damaged finish coats using same application method and same material specified for finish coat. a. Prepare damaged area in accordance with the PREPARATION Article of this Specification Section. 3.3 COLOR CODING A. Color and band piping in accordance with the SCHEDULES Article of this Specification Section. 1. Band piping using maximum of three (3) different colors at 20 FT maximum centers. 2. Factory painted piping shall be color banded in the factory per the Schedule in the SCHEDULE Article of this Specification Section. 3. Place bands: a. Along continuous lines. b. At changes in direction. c. At changes of elevation. d. On both sides of an obstruction (e.g., wall, ceiling) that painted item passes through. 4. Band width for individual colors (pipe diameter measured to outside of insulation, if applicable): a. Piping up to 8 IN DIA: 2 IN minimum. b. Piping greater than 8 IN up to 24 IN DIA: 4 IN minimum. c. Piping greater than 24 IN up to 48 IN DIA: 6 IN minimum. d. Piping greater than 48 IN DIA: 8 IN minimum. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor to provide protection for surfaces painted with epoxy coatings to prevent chalking. 1. Surfaces showing chalking will not be accepted regardless of condition of paint film. B. Maintain Daily Records: 1. Record the following information during application of each coat of paint applied: ARKK Standard-Aug 2016 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS a. Date, starting time, end time, and all breaks taken by painters. b. For exterior painting: 1) Sky condition. 2) Wind speed and direction. c. Air temperature. d. Relative humidity. e. Moisture content and surface temperature of substrate prior to each coat. f. Provisions utilized to maintain work area within manufacturer's recommended application parameters including temporary heating, ventilation, cooling, dehumidification and provisions utilized to mitigate windblown dust and debris from contaminating the wet paint film. g. Record environmental conditions, substrate moisture content and surface temperature information not less than once every four (4) hours during application. 1) Record hourly when temperatures are below 50 DegF or above 100 DegF. 2. Record the following information daily for the paint manufacturer's recommended curing period: a. Date and start time of cure period for each item or area. b. For exterior painting: 1) Sky conditions. 2) Wind speed and direction. c. Record environmental conditions not less than once every 12 hours. 1) Record once every four (4) hours when ambient temperature is below 35 DegF. d. Provisions utilized to protect each item or area and to maintain areas within manufacturer's recommended curing parameters. 3. Format for daily record to be computer generated. C. Measure wet coating with wet film thickness gages. D. Measure coating dry film thickness in accordance with SSPC PA 2 using a digital magnetic-type dry film thickness gauge, Elcometer 456, or equal. 1. Owner's Representative may measure coating thickness at any time during project to assure conformance with these Specifications. E. Measure surface temperature of items to be painted with surface temperature gage specifically designed for such. F. Measure substrate humidity with humidity gage specifically designed for such. G. Provide wet paint signs. ARKK Standard-Aug 2016 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS 3.5 CLEANING A. For every 100 square feet, or less, of surface blasted, the surface profile shall be tested with the use of Press-o-Film as manufactured by Testex, or other RP0287 approved equal, at locations to be determined by the INSPECTOR. The replica tape thickness shall be measured using a dial micrometer manufactured by Testex, or other ASTM D4417 Type C approved equal. For each test area, three replica tape tests shall be performed within a single test area 12 inches in diameter. For each test area, the three replica tape thickness values shall be recorded and must be within 10% of the coating manufacturer's recommended profile. B. Clean paint spattered surfaces. 1. Use care not to damage finished surfaces. C. Upon completion of painting, replace hardware, accessories, plates, fixtures, and similar items. D. Remove surplus materials, scaffolding, and debris. 3.6 OWNER TRAINING (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ARKK Standard—Aug 2016 RECOATING OF LIFT STATION PIPING SECTION 09920 RECOATING OF LIFT STATION PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 . Preparing surfaces and furnishing and applying the protective coating materials required for recoating of existing lift station piping, valves, and appurtenances. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unit Price: 1 . No separate payment will be made for protective coatings. Include payment for protective coatings in unit prices for items to which coatings are applied and as shown on the Bid Form. Contractor is responsible for all safety, ventilation, and dehumidification equipment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Paint, coatings, or finishes as used in this Section include surface treatments, emulsions, enamels, paints, epoxy resins, and other protective coatings, with the exceptions of galvanizing or anodizing, whether used as a pretreatment, primer, intermediate coat, or finish coat. B. DFT means minimum dry film thickness. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01350 - Submittals. B. Submit the following information prior to protective coating work: 1. Coating Materials List: List of coating materials naming the manufacturer and the coating number, keyed to the coating systems described in this Section. Submit the list prior to or at the time of sample submittal. 2. Paint Manufacturer's Information: For each coating system to be used, submit the following data: a. Paint manufacturer's data sheet for each product proposed, including statements on the suitability of the material for the intended use. b. Technical and performance information that demonstrates compliance with the system performance and material requirements. c. Paint manufacturer's instructions and recommendations on surface preparation and application. d. Compatibility of shop and field applied coatings, where applicable. 19-024 09920 - 1 RECOATING OF LIFT STATION PIPING e. Material Safety Data Sheet for each product used. C. Samples 1. Submit color samples of paint, finishes, and other coating materials. 1.5 WARRANTY INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE A. Warranty Inspection: 1. A warranty inspection may be conducted during the eleventh month following completion of coating and painting. The Contractor and a representative of the coating material manufacturer shall attend this inspection. 2. The Engineer may, by written notice to the Contractor, reschedule the warranty inspection to another date within the one-year correction period, or may cancel the warranty inspection altogether. Cancellation of the warranty inspection does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract Documents. 3. Repair defective work discovered during the warranty inspection in accordance with these Specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COATINGS CRITERIA A. Suitability: Use suitable coating materials as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Compatibility: In any coating system, use only compatible materials from a single manufacturer. Give particular attention to compatibility of primers and finish coats. If necessary, apply a barrier coat or tie coat between existing prime coat and subsequent field coats to ensure compatibility. C. Containers: Supply coating materials in sealed containers that plainly show the designated name, formula or specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacture, and name of manufacturer, all plainly legible at the time of use. D. Colors: Use colors and shades of colors of all coats of paint as indicated on the coating schedules. Make each coat of a slightly different shade to facilitate inspection of surface coverage of each coat. 19-024 09920 - 2 RECOATING OF LIFT STATION PIPING 2.2 COATING SYSTEMS A. The following protective coating manufacturers are allowed for this project: • Tnemec • Carboline Coating Schedule for recoating of Lift Station Piping: (1) Surface Preparation SSPC SP-7 (Sweep Blast / Brush off Blast), remove all rust. (2) Prime Coat Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT Epoxoline or approved equal (3) Stripe Coat Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT Epoxoline or approved equal applied by brush to all nuts, bolts, edges, corners and other difficult to coat areas (4) Top Coat Tnemec Series 104 H.S. 10.0 to 12.0 mils DFT Epoxy Color: Per drawings. Or approved equal All coating materials shall be confirmed by the manufacturer to be suitable for the proposed environment (damp, humid, and submerged). Intermediate Colors: To be different shade from top coat Total minimum dry film thickness for the system: 14.0 — 18.0 mils. Tnemec products shown to establish the basis of the design. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Require the protective coating manufacturer to furnish a qualified technical representative to visit the project site for technical support as may be necessary to resolve field problems attributable or associated with manufacturer's products. 3.2 WORKMANSHIP A. Use skilled craftsmen and experienced supervision. 19-024 09920 - 3 RECOATING OF LIFT STATION PIPING B. Apply coating to produce an even film of uniform thickness. Give special attention to edges, corners, crevices, and joints. Ensure thorough cleaning and an adequate thickness of coating material. Apply coatings to produce finished surfaces free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture, and finish. Effect complete hiding so that the addition of another coat would not increase the hiding. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and similar areas receive a film thickness equivalent to adjacent areas. Protect installations by use of drop cloths or other precautionary measures. C. If surfaces are damaged, clean, repair, and refinish to original condition. 3.3 STORAGE, MIXING, AND THINNING OF MATERIALS A. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Unless otherwise indicated, strictly comply with the coating manufacturer's printed recommendations and instructions for thinning, mixing, handling, applying, and protecting its coating materials, for preparation of surfaces for coating, and for all other procedures relative to coating. B. Use protective coating materials within the manufacturer's recommended shelf life. C. Storage and Mixing: Store coating materials under conditions recommended by the Material Safety Data Sheets. Keep coating materials thoroughly stirred, strained, and with uniform consistency during application. Do not mix coatings of different manufacturers. 3.4 PREPARATION FOR COATING A. Cleaning and Touch-up: Clean surfaces to receive protective coatings. Examine surfaces to be coated. Correct surface defects before application of any coating material. Touch up marred or abraded spots on shop-primed and on factory-finished surfaces prior to coating application. Verify that surfaces to be coated are dry and free of visible dust. B. Protection of Surfaces Not to be Coated: Protect surfaces which are not to receive protective coatings during surface preparation, cleaning, and coating operations. This specifically includes but is not limited to valve gears, valve pistons, pump moving parts, valve and pump stainless steel parts that are that are not to be recoated, nameplates, etc. C. Remove, mask or otherwise protect walls, hardware, lighting fixtures, switchplates, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces to be painted. Provide drop cloths to prevent coating materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. Protect the working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and coating operations. Mask openings in motors to prevent entry of coating or other materials. 19-024 09920 - 4 RECOATING OF LIFT STATION PIPING D. Do not damage adjacent work during blast cleaning operations. Conduct spray painting under carefully controlled conditions. Promptly repair any damage to adjacent work or adjoining property occurring from blast cleaning or coating operations. E. Protection of Painted Surfaces: Coordinate cleaning and coating so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly- coated surfaces. 3.5 SURFACE PREPARATION STANDARDS A. The following referenced surface preparation standards of the Steel Structures Painting Council form a part of this Specification: 1. Brush-off Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP7): All oil, grease, dirt, mill scale, rust, corrosion products, oxides, paint or other foreign matter have been completely removed from the surface by abrasive blasting, except for very light shadows, very slight streaks or slight discolorations caused by rust stain, mill scale oxides or slight, tight residues of paint or coating. At least 95% of each square inch of surface area shall be free of all visible residues, and the remainder shall be limited to the light discolorations mentioned above. 3.6 METAL SURFACE PREPARATION A. Select the type and size of abrasive to produce a surface profile that meets the coating manufacturer's recommendation for the particular coating and service conditions. As abrasives for submerged and severe service coating systems use clean, hard, sharp-cutting crushed slag. Do not use automated blasting systems for surfaces that will be in submerged service. Do not use metal shot or grit for surfaces that will be in submerged service, even if subsequent abrasive blasting is planned with hard, sharp-cutting crushed slag. B. Do not reuse abrasive except when an automated blasting system is used for surfaces that will be in nonsubmerged service. For automated blasting systems, use clean, oil-free abrasives. In the abrasive mix use at least 50 percent grit. C. Comply with the applicable federal, state, and local air pollution control regulations for blast cleaning. D. For air-blast cleaning supply compressed air at adequate pressure from well- maintained compressors equipped with oil and moisture separators which remove at least 95 percent of the contaminants. E. Clean surfaces of dust and residual particles of the cleaning operation using dry air-blast cleaning, vacuuming, or another approved method prior to painting. F. In enclosed areas and other areas where dust may settle, vacuum the surface clean and wipe it with a tack cloth. G. Remove damaged or defective coating by the specified blast cleaning to meet the clean surface requirements before recoating. 19-024 09920 - 5 RECOATING OF LIFT STATION PIPING 3.7 COATING APPLICATION A. Inspect cleaned surfaces and each coat prior to succeeding coats. Schedule inspections with the Engineer in advance. B. Paint blast-cleaned ferrous metal surfaces before rusting or other deterioration of the surface occurs. Limit blast cleaning to only those surfaces that can be coated in the same working day. C. Apply coatings in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and this Section, whichever has the most stringent requirements. D. Give special attention to edges, angles, weld seams, flanges, nuts and bolts, and other places where insufficient film thicknesses are likely occur. Use stripe painting for these areas. E. Give special attention to materials which will be joined so closely that proper surface preparation and application are not possible. Coat such contact surfaces prior to assembly or installation. F. Apply finish coats, including touch-up and damage repair coats, in a manner which will present a uniform texture and color matched appearance. G. Do not apply coatings under the following conditions: 1. Temperature outside of the manufacturer's recommended minimum and maximum range. 2. Dust or smoke laden atmosphere. 3. When the substrate or air temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dew point. 4. When air temperature is expected to drop below 40 degrees F or less than 5 degrees F above the dew point within 8 hours after application of coating. 5. When wind conditions are not calm. 3.8 CURING OF COATINGS A. Maintain curing conditions in accordance with the recommendations of the coating material manufacturer and this Section, whichever is the most stringent. Complete curing before placing the coating systems into service. 3.9 SHOP AND FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Give the Engineer a minimum of 3 days advance notice of the start of any field surface preparation work or coating application work, and a minimum of 7 days advance notice of the start of any shop surface preparation work. B. Perform surface preparation and coating applications in the presence of the Engineer, unless the Engineer has granted prior approval to perform such Work in his absence. 19-024 09920 - 6 RECOATING OF LIFT STATION PIPING C. Inspection by the Engineer, or the waiver of inspection of any particular portion of the work, does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with these Specifications. D. Erect and move scaffolding where requested by the Engineer to facilitate inspection. Provide additional illumination to light areas to be inspected. E. Inspection Devices: Until final acceptance of coatings, furnish inspection devices in good working condition for the detection of holidays and measurement of dry-film thicknesses of protective coatings. Make dry-film thickness gauges available for the Engineer's use while coating is being done, until final acceptance of such coatings. Provide the services of a trained operator of the holiday detection devices until the final acceptance of such coatings. Operate holiday detection devices in the presence of the Engineer. F. Film Thickness Testing: On ferrous metals, measure the dry-film coating thickness in accordance with the SSPC Paint Application Specification No. 2 using a magnetic-type dry-film thickness gauge such as Mikrotest Model FM, Elcometer Model 111/1EZ, or equal. Test each coat for the correct thickness. Do not take measurements until at least 8 hours after coating application. On non-ferrous metals and other substrates, measure the coating thicknesses at the time of application using a wet-film gauge. Provide Engineer with all testing results per Section 01 33 00 Submittals. G. Surface Preparation: Evaluation of blast-cleaned surface preparation work will be based upon comparison of the blasted surfaces with standard samples using NACE Standard TM-01-70. END OF SECTION 19-024 09920 - 7 SUMBERSIBLE AND DRY-PIT SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPS Section 11311 SUBMERSIBLE AND DRY-PIT SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submersible and/or dry-pit submersible sewage pumps complete and operational with motors, control equipment and accessories as shown and specified in the plans and specifications. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate with the Work related to this Section. 2. Coordinate pumps and motors with electrical work as specified in Electrical Specifications. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Comply as a minimum with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 3. Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA) 4. Hydraulic Institute. 5. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 6. National Electric Code (NEC) 7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 8. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) 19-024 11311-1 SUMBERSIBLE AND DRY-PIT SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPS 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish and install the submersible and/or dry-pit submersible, non-clog wastewater pumps capable of handling raw unscreened sewage in accordance with these Specifications and as shown on the Drawings. B. Number of pumps, minimum and maximum operating capacities, TDH, and other pump design data is tabulated on the Drawings. C. Pumps shall be designed for continuous operation without cavitation within the specified operating range. The pump shall have a minimum hydraulic efficiency of 50 percent at the rated capacity. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01350 - Submittal Procedures. B. Submit a list of not less than 5 installations where pumping equipment of the type and approximate size specified has been in successful operation for at least 5 years. C. Submit locations of the nearest permanent service headquarters of the pump and motor manufacturer for the size of pump and motor submitted. D. Submit descriptive literature, including a cross-sectional view of each pump and motor combination, which indicates materials of construction, weights, principal dimensions and other important details. E. Submit certified characteristic curves showing the head-capacity relationship, brake horsepower, NPSH requirements, pump efficiency (ratio of the water horsepower to brake horsepower) and pump speed. The curves shall be complete for the entire range of operation from shutoff to minimum head conditions. Submit manufacturer's calculation of radial and thrust bearing L-10 life at the head and flow indicated on the Drawings. F. If the proposed pumping equipment is supplied with electrical equipment and components of larger capacity than specified or shown on the Contract Documents, the shop drawings for the equipment listed in the following Sections shall be submitted in the same package as the shop drawings submitted for Section 16 — Electrical items. G. Manufacturer's Certifications: 1. Submit manufacturer's certification that he has carefully examined the Contract Documents in detail, including the arrangement and conditions of 19-024 11311-2 SUMBERSIBLE AND DRY-PIT SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPS proposed electrical, mechanical and structural systems affecting the performance of the pumping equipment units, and the detailed requirements of manufacturing and subsequent installation of the pumping equipment units. 2. Submit manufacturer's certification that there are no omissions, ambiguities or conflicts in the Contract Documents or in the pumping station piping layout that affects the pumping unit, as shown on the Drawings, which have not already been clarified in writing. 3. Submit manufacturer's certification that the running amperes of the motor will not exceed the nameplate rating of the motor under all expected operating conditions. 4. Submit manufacturer's certification that spare parts, seals, bearings, o-rings and power cable shall be available locally for models to be supplied. 5. Submit manufacturer's certification that motors are explosion proof and labeled so, approved by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or Factory Mutual (FM). H. Record Drawings: Submit record drawing under provisions of Section 01760 - Project Record Documents. Factory Tests for Submersible Wastewater Pumps: Submit 3 copies of certified test reports to the Engineer for review. 1. The pump manufacturer shall perform the following inspections and tests on each pump before shipment: a. Impeller, motor rating and electrical connections shall first be checked for compliance to the customer's purchase order. b. A motor and cable insulation test for moisture content or insulation defects shall be made. c. Prior to submergence, the pump shall be run dry to establish correct rotation and mechanical integrity. d. Each pump shall be run submerged in water. e. After running pump submerged in water, retest motor and cable insulation. 2. If tests do not meet performance specifications, Contractor shall correct deficiencies to provide the specified performance. 3. A written report stating the foregoing steps have been done must be supplied with each pump at the time of shipment. Submit test reports as per submittals per Section 01350—Submittal Procedures. 19-024 11311-3 SUMBERSIBLE AND DRY-PIT SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPS J. Factory Tests for Dry-Pit Submersible Pumps: Submit 3 copies of certified test reports as part of submittals per Section 01350—Submittal Procedures. 1. Tests shall be performed in accordance with the Test Code for Centrifugal Pumps in accordance with the Standards of the Hydraulic Institute. 2. Tests shall cover a range from shut-off to at minimum 20% beyond specified design capacity. Conduct test per above specification on all supplied pumps, generating a curve showing actual flow, head, BHP and hydraulic efficiency. 3. All testing must be conducted at the point of manufacture where corrections can be easily made if required. Conduct all tests in an "as installed" completely dry mode to simulate actual field conditions. Testing in a submerged or partially submerged mode is not adequate. H. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01730 - Operations and Maintenance Data. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All materials used shall be new, of high grade, and with properties best suited to the work required. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. Pumping equipment provided under this Section shall be a standard product in regular production by manufacturers whose products have proven reliable in similar service for at least 10 years. 2. Manufacturer shall satisfy the Owner that it is capable of the following: a. Providing local factory trained personnel to service the pumps and associated equipment when needed within a 24 hour period. b. Providing all needed spare parts for the pumps within a 24-hour period. 3. Provide a written manufacturer's certification that spare parts, seals, bearings, o-rings and power cable shall be available locally (Galveston County, Brazoria County, or Harris County, Texas) for models to be supplied. C. Coordination Responsibility 1. In order to ensure equipment compatibility, one manufacturer shall be responsible for providing all submersible and/or dry-pit submersible wastewater pumping equipment, including pump and motor, access frame and 19-024 11311-4 SUMBERSIBLE AND DRY-PIT SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPS guides as required by drawings. Guide rail system shall be 2 rail type system per pump as required by drawings. 2. The Contractor shall name a pump manufacturer, who will have responsibility for the function of the complete system in accordance with the intent of these Specifications. The named manufacturer shall be experienced in similar work. 3. Contractor shall retain overall responsibility for equipment coordination, installation, testing and operation. D. Substitution. The engineering design is based on a certain manufacturer's equipment. If the Contractor's choice of equipment is approved but requires modifications to the lift station, equipment or piping for installation, the Contractor is responsible for submitting revised engineering design and drawings to make the proposed equipment compatible with the project, at no additional cost to the City. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver equipment to site, store and protect all equipment under provisions of Section 01630 -Product Options and Substitutions. B. Store all equipment off the ground in enclosed shelter. C. The pump cable end shall be sealed with a high quality protective covering to make it impervious to moisture or water seepage from submersion or other causes prior to electrical installation. 1.07 EVALUATION AND SELECTION A. The City reserves the right to select any equipment which is deemed to be in its best interest. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01770—Contract Closeout. B. Pump manufacturer shall furnish to the City a warranty written expressly from the manufacturer to the City, covering workmanship and material for 5 years or 10,000 hours of operation under normal use and service. The warranty shall cover 100 percent of parts and labor for at least one full year. The warranty period shall commence on the day of initial operation for City's beneficial use. Warranty shall be in printed form and previously published as the manufacturer's Standard Warranty for all similar units manufactured. Pumps repaired under warranty will be returned to the job site freight pre-paid, at no additional cost to the City. 19-024 11311-5 SUMBERSIBLE AND DRY-PIT SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPS PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The pump manufacturer shall be Flygt Pumps, or pre-approved equal pump currently in active usage and having a high standard and history of performance in the Owner's wastewater collection system. B. Listing as an acceptable manufacturer will not relieve the manufacturer from conforming to Contract Specifications. 2.02 PUMP CONSTRUCTION A. Casing 1. Major pump components shall be of fine grained gray cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 30 or better, with smooth surfaces devoid of blow holes and other irregularities. Surfaces coming into contact with sewage, other than stainless steel shall be protected by an approved sewage resistant coating. 2. Mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be machined and fitted with nitrile rubber o-rings. Fitting shall be such that sealing is accomplished by metal-to-metal contact between machined surfaces. This will result in controlled compression of nitrile rubber o-rings without the requirement of a specific torque limit. No secondary sealing compounds, rectangular gaskets, elliptical o-rings, grease or other devices shall be used. 3. Pump suction flange shall be drilled to ANSI standard, class 125. B. Power Cable 1. The cable entry water seal design shall preclude specific torque requirements to ensure a watertight and submersible seal. The cable entry shall be sealed by an elastomer grommet, epoxy potting material, or a combination of both. The cable entry sealing system shall provide strain relief for the terminal connections and allow access to the terminal connections without adversely affecting the integrity or function of the seal system. 2. Cables shall be oil, grease and abrasion resistant, and meet applicable standards. The outer jacket shall be polyurethane or other material equally suitable for immersion in wastewater. 3. Cables shall be capable of operating on either 230 volt or 460 volt, 3 phase service and under continuous submergence without loss of watertight integrity to a depth of 65 feet. 19-024 11311-6 SUMBERSIBLE AND DRY-PIT SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPS 4. No parallel power cables are acceptable unless they are size#1/0 or larger. 5. Motors 7.5 HP and over shall have reconnectable terminal blocks. All leads shall be numbered. C. Submersible Motor 1. The pump motor shall be a NEMA Design B squirrel-cage, induction, shell type design, housed in an oil-filled or air-filled watertight chamber. The stator winding and stator leads shall be insulated with moisture resistant Class F insulation which will resist a temperature of 155 degrees C (311 degrees F). The use of bolts, pins or other fastening devices requiring penetration of the stator housing shall be rejected. The rotor bars and short circuit rings shall be of aluminum. The motor shall be designed for continuous duty, capable of sustaining a minimum of 15 starts per hour, evenly spaced. The pump/motor shall be capable of operating at liquid temperature of 104 degrees F per FM requirements-without overheating or operating in the service factor. Motor shall be non-overloading over the entire range of the operating curve within the nameplate HP. A performance chart shall be provided showing curves for torque, current, a minimum service factor of 1.15, input/output kw and efficiency. 2. The motor shall be UL listed or FM approved as explosion-proof, suitable for NEC Class I, Division 1, Group C and D environments. 3. Each unit shall be provided with an adequately designed cooling system totally self-contained with no external mechanical devices. Pumps shall be designed to operate continuously with the fluid level at the top of the pump volute. 4. Maximum motor speed shall be 1800 rpm for pumps with discharge diameter greater than or equal to 6-inches. 5. For sizes 20 HP and smaller, the motor shall be equipped with dual voltage connections for 230/460 volts. 6. Thermal sensors shall be used to monitor stator temperatures. The stator shall be equipped with 3 thermal switches, embedded in the end coils of the stator winding (one switch in each stator phase). These shall be used in conjunction with and supplemental to external motor overload protection and wired to the control panel. 7. For motor sizes larger than 100 HP, an independent thermal switch shall be included to monitor the lower motor bearing temperature. 19-024 11311-7 SUMBERSIBLE AND DRY-PIT SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPS 8. The pump shall be equipped with moisture sensors in the oil-filled seal chamber to indicate seal leakage. Motors larger than 20 HP shall be equipped with a leakage sensor to detect water in the stator chamber. D. Shaft: For each submersible pump, the shaft shall be one piece of AISI type 420 stainless steel, or heat-treated carbon steel C 1035 protected by a stainless steel shaft sleeve. For each dry-pit submersible pump, the shaft shall be carbon steel, C 45 N with replaceable ASTM A276 Type 420 shaft protection sleeve or the entire shaft to be ASTM A276 Type 420 with an ASTM A276 Type 420 shaft protection sleeve. The shaft shall be of sufficient diameter to assure rigid support of the impeller and to prevent excessive vibration at all speeds. E. Pump Seal: Each pump shall be provided with a tandem mechanical shaft seal system. The upper seal of the tandem set of seals shall operate in an oil chamber located just below the stator housing. This set shall contain one stationary tungsten- carbide ring and one positively driven rotating carbon (or better) ring, and functions as an independent secondary barrier between the pumped liquid and the stator housing. The lower seal of the tandem set of seals functions as the primary barrier between the pumped liquid and the oil housing. This set shall consist of a stationary ring and a positively driven rotating ring both of which shall be silicon carbide or tungsten carbide. Shaft seals without positively driven rotating members or conventional double mechanical seals containing either a common single or double spring action between upper and lower seal faces shall not be acceptable. F. Bearings: Bearings shall be permanently lubricated ball or roller type rated in accordance with AFBMA for an L-10 duty life of at least 80,000 hours at the rated capacity. G. Impeller: 1. The impeller shall be of fine grained gray cast iron, Class 30 or better, dynamically or statically balanced, double shrouded non-clogging design having a long throughlet without acute turns. The impeller shall be capable of handling 3 inch minimum diameter solids, fibrous materials, heavy sludge and other matter found in normal sewage application. The impeller hub shall be accurately fitted and mechanically secured to the motor shaft. 2. The volute shall be of a single piece, concentric or non-concentric design, and shall have smooth fluid passages large enough at all points to pass any size solids which can pass through the impeller. The volute bottom shall be of a suction bell design for pumps with 12-inch discharge and larger for submersible pumps. 19-024 11311-8 SUMBERSIBLE AND DRY-PIT SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPS 3. A replaceable wear ring shall be installed to provide efficient sealing between the volute and impeller. The wear rings shall consist of AISI Series 300 or better heat-treated stainless steel. For pumps 10 HP and below the pump shall be equipped with brass or nitrite rubber volute wear ring only. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Access Frames and Covers (Only when shown on the plans for installation or replacement) 1. Halliday Products Series H2R, U.S. Foundry Series AHD or AHS, or equal. 2. For watertight service, Halliday Products Series H2W, U.S. Foundry Series THD or THS, or equal. 3. Aluminum access frames and covers shall be provided by the pump supplier. Fasteners, hinges and other hardware shall be type 316 stainless steel. 4. The frame shall be extruded aluminum with an integral seat and anchor flange. Door leafs shall be 1/4-inch thick aluminum floor plate reinforced to H-20 live load with 30 percent impact factor per AASHTO specifications. 5. The access door shall be equipped with a flush cast aluminum drop handle which does not protrude above the cover surface and an automatic hold open arm with a red vinyl release grip, that automatically holds the door in a 90 degree open position utilizing a stainless steel pin at the point where the door meets the hold open arm. 6. Hinges shall be stainless steel with stainless steel tamperproof hardware. Doors shall be equipped with a stainless steel, watertight slamlock with a threaded aluminum plug, removable outside handle and an inside release handle. The slamlock must latch onto a stainless steel catch bolted to the frame. 7. Doors shall also include a recessed padlock assembly that consists of a cast aluminum enclosure that is sized to restrict access by bolt cutters, a stainless steel staple for a padlock and a hinged stainless steel cover which does not protrude above cover surface. 8. Doors shall be equipped with stainless steel spring operators for lift assist and to retard downward motion. All parts of the spring operator shall be stainless steel or aluminum and to ensure visual inspection. Spring operators shall be open type. The spring operators shall be engineered and installed so that in the event of slamlock failure the door will remain closed. The force required 19-024 11311-9 SUMBERSIBLE AND DRY-PIT SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPS to open any one door leaf shall be a minimum of 5 pounds and a maximum of 20 pounds. 9. Apply bituminous paint on all areas that come in contact with concrete. 10. Exposed frame and door surfaces shall be painted dark green or as approved by the Engineer. 11. A written 10-year material and/or workmanship warranty on all components shall be provided. B. Pump Guide System: Pump manufacturer shall provide a guide rail system complying with the following requirements: 1. Type 316 stainless steel rails,replaceable without man entry into the wetwell. 2. Lower bracket integral with pump support/discharge fitting. 3. Type 316 stainless steel upper bracket bolted to access cover frame. 4. Type 316 stainless steel intermediate 316 SS brackets as shown on the Drawings, if required. C. Bolts, Studs and Nuts 1. All bolts, studs and nuts shall have American National form right-hand machine cut threads which shall be in conformity with the current ANSI B1.1, "Screw Threads", Coarse Thread Series, unless otherwise specified. 2. Bolt heads and nuts shall be semi-finished and shall be in conformity with ANSI B 18.2, "Wrench-Head Bolts and Nuts and Wrench Openings", Heavy Series,unless otherwise specified. All nuts shall be hexagonal in shape. 3. Anchor bolts, flange bolts, studs and nuts shall be Type 316 stainless steel in conformity with ASTM A276. 2.04 HATCH SAFETY NET 1. When called on the plans, furnish an OSHA approved hatch safety net for the lift station wet well hatch. 2. Hatch safety net shall include a rail mounted safety net system conforming to ANSI A10.11, designed for floor access hatches. 19-024 11311-10 SUMBERSIBLE AND DRY-PIT SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPS 3. The safety net system shall provide protection during the initial opening of this hatch and maintain protection after access has been gained. 4. The safety net shall slide on guide rails to facilitate entry and then reposition to prevent fall through. The rails shall be a minimum of PA-inch diameter, Schedule 40 aluminum pipe slide rails fabricated from aluminum alloy 6061- T6. 5. Provide corner brackets of cast aluminum with minimum ultimate tensile strength of 40 ksi. 6. Provide pear-shaped slide rings and eye corner hooks fabricated from type 316 stainless steel. 7. The safety net shall be 3''A-inch reinforced diamond mesh made of DuPont's Dacron polyester fiber tested to withstand a 17,500-foot pound force. The net shall have a minimum breaking strength of 1,200 pounds. The netting shall be treated for resistance to ultraviolet light, abrasion and moisture. The netting shall also be treated with a fire retardant. The fire retardant shall conform to the National Fire Protection Association Small Scale Test, Federal Test No. 191, Method No. 5903.1. 2.05 PUMP PROTECTION SYSTEM A. Manufacturer shall furnish a complete pump monitoring and protection system consisting of an intrinsically safe solid state monitoring system to be installed in the motor starter cubicle, and independent probes integral to the pump/motor wired to a sealed cable entry terminal box for connection of submersible control cables. B. Monitoring unit shall be solid state, intrinsically safe system designed for mounting within the motor starter cubicle. Monitoring system shall accept inputs from the sensors specified and shall output independent contacts which close to alarm each condition, or separate independent output terminals suitable for direct connection to interposing relays for alarm contact development. Provide a separate N.C. alarm contact, rated at 120V, 5A inductive, which opens on any failure. Monitor system shall be suitable for operation from a 24VAC unregulated, unlimited power supply. Provide any additional equipment or appurtenances required to provide current and voltage limited intrinsically safe installation as specified. The monitoring system shall accept separate isolated N.O. contacts which close to indicate pump running and to reset after pump trip. C. Sensors shall be independently wired to the monitoring system. Provisions for the following sensors for each pump: 1. Stator leak(one required). 19-024 11311-11 SUMBERSIBLE AND DRY-PIT SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPS 2. Stator temperature for pumps over 100 HP (one per phase, field test and connect to highest reading obtained). 3. Bearing temperature (one required). 2.06 SHOP PAINTING A. Pump motor size up to 100 HP. 1. Pump Exterior: a. Pre-treatment. b. Primer. One coat of alkyd resin primer, 1.6 mils minimum. c. Finish. Chloric rubber paint, 2.4 mils minimum. 2. Machine Finished Surfaces: a. Machined parts are cleaned to remove all dirt and grease. b. Cleaning is done so as not to affect primer or deteriorate adherence to finish paint. c. Storage and transport is carried out in such a way that rust attack on machined surfaces does not occur. d. At assembly, surfaces are coated with a corrosion preventive paint. B. Pump motor size greater than 100 HP. 1. Pump Exterior: a. Pre-treatment. Sandblast cleaning and removal of all oil and dust. b. Primer. One coat of alkyd resin primer, 1.6 mils minimum. c. Finish coat. Two coats of chloric rubber paint, 2.1 mils each coat. 2. Machine finished surfaces: a. Machined parts are cleaned to remove all dirt and grease. b. Cleaning is done so as not to affect primer or deteriorate adherence to finish paint. c. Storage and transport is carried out in such a way that rust-attack on machined surfaces does not occur. d. At assembly, surfaces are coated with a corrosion preventive paint. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation of the pumping equipment shall conform to the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and reviewed shop drawings. B. Field Tests for Submersible Pumps: 19-024 11311-12 SUMBERSIBLE AND DRY-PIT SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPS 1. Each pump will be subjected to a 6-hour field operational test before acceptance as follows: a. The unit under test shall be properly installed in the wet well, firmly upon its discharge connection after determination of(a) proper service voltage is being supplied and (b) proper rotation of the impeller. No cooling by forced or circulated air shall be allowed. b. Capacity Test: On four occasions, wet well shall be filled with liquid to an elevation sufficient to allow each single pump to operate for 3 minutes, independent of the control regime. Time required to pump down known volume shall be measured as evidence of each pump's capacity. All portions of the force main must have been constructed and tested prior to this test. c. Snore Tests: Snore is defined as that state when the pump is alternately pumping liquid and air and usually occurs when the pump pumps the liquid down to expose its inlet. The unit(s) under test shall be submerged with just enough liquid to accomplish "snore" and allowed to run two times for 10 minutes minimum. C. Start-up Data: Contractor shall complete and submit the start-up records and maintenance data sheets. END OF SECTION 19-024 11311-13 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Section 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic mechanical requirements specifically applicable to Division 15 Sections, in addition to Division 1 - General Requirements. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI: American National Standards Institute. B. ARI: American Refrigeration Institute. C. ASHRAE: American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers. D. ASME: American Society for Mechanical Engineers. E. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials. F. AWWA: American Water Works Association. G. MSS: Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry. H. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers'Association. I. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association. J. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'National Association. K. UL: Underwriters'Laboratories, Inc. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01350 - Submittal Procedures. B. Submittals as specified in individual sections. C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems,products, and accessories in a single submittal. 19-024 15050-1 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALSAND METHODS D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Protection: Conform to National Fire Prevention Association Code. B. Plumbing: Conform to National Plumbing Code. C. Obtain permits, and request inspections from authority having jurisdiction on of this Project. 1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings,unless prevented by Project conditions. B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Engineer before proceeding. 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Not Used. PART2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION 19-024 15050-2 PUMP STATION PIPING Section 15053 PUMP STATION PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping for wastewater lift station. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI A21.10,AWWA C110 -Ductile Iron Fittings 3 in. through 48 in., for water and other liquid. B. ANSI B36 - Stainless Steel Pipe. C. AWWA C151 -Ductile Iron Pipe, centrifugally cast in metal molds or sand-lined molds for water or other liquids. D. ANSI A21.15, AWWA C115 -Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges. E. ANSI B16.1 Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. F. AWWA C111, ANSI A21.11 -Rubber Gasket Joints. G. AWWA C600 -Hydrostatic Testing. H. AWWA C606 -Grooved and Shouldered Joints. I. ANSI B1.1 Screw Threads. J. ASTM A193 -Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service. K. ASTM A194 - Carbon and Alloy-Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High-Temperature Service. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Sections 01350—Submittals and Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. B. Submit detailed drawings on pipe,joints, gaskets, fittings, flange coupling adapters, and appurtenances. 19-024 15053-1 PUMP STATION PIPING C. Submit shop drawings indicating dimensions, layout of piping, elevations, intersections, connections, support system, etc. D. Submit manufacturer's Certification of Compliance with ANSI, AWWA and other Standards listed herein. E. Submit description of proposed testing methods, procedures and apparatus and test reports for each system. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications 1. Piping and appurtenances provided under this Section shall be the standard product in regular production by manufacturers whose products have proven reliable in similar service for at least 5 years. 2. Insofar as possible all piping and appurtenances of the same specific type shall be the product of one single manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Have products delivered, stored and protected under provisions of Section 01600 -Material and Equipment. PARTS2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Wastewater Pipe—Above ground wastewater pressure pipe associated with this project is Ductile Iron Pipe, with internal coatings for wastewater force mains as specified in Section 02634 (Protecto-401), except where called differently on the Plans. All pump discharge piping within the lift station wet well (and protruding thereof as shown on the Drawings) shall be Type 304 or Type 304L Stainless Steel with flanged joints as specified in Section 02613. 1. Joints: Threaded flanges and rubber gaskets. 2. Bolts, studs and nuts: ASTM A-316 stainless steel. 3. Flanges: Same material as pipe and screwed onto the pipe. Use screwed-on flanges attached to the pipe by the pipe manufacturer or pipe manufacturer's authorized fabricator. 4. After flange attachment,have flange and pipe re-faced so that the end of the pipe is even with the face of the flange and both are perpendicular to the axis of the pipe. 19-024 15053-2 PUMP STATION PIPING 5. All flanged joints shall be hydrostatically tested after fabrication to a pressure rating of 300 psi minimum. All flanged joints shall be marked (Tested at 300 psi) and notarized certification papers supplied to the purchaser. 6. Align bolt holes on both flanges at the end of each piece of pipe. 7. Where cap screws or stud bolts are required, incorporate tapped holes for such cap screws or stud bolts in the flanges. 8. Performance: Use pipes and fittings designed for an internal working pressure range of-10 to+150 psi. A. Flanged Coupling Adapter: 3. Bolts, studs and nuts: Type 316 stainless steel B. Grooved Couplings: Grooved couplings conforming to AWWA C606 may be used for exposed piping outside of the wet well. 1. Bolts and Nuts: Type 316 Stainless Steel. 2. Gaskets: Flush seal type, compatible with the fluid, according to the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Pipe Wall Thickness: Wall thickness of grooved piping shall conform to the coupling manufacturer's recommendations to suit the highest expected pressure. 4. Equipment Connections: Equipment connections shall be rigid-type grooved couplings unless thrust restraint is provided by other means. 5. Require the manufacturer to verify correct choice and installation of couplings, gaskets, and workmanship to assure correct installation. C. Air Release Piping: Schedule 40, ANSI B36 stainless steel with ANSI B1.20.1 threaded joints. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Check dimensions shown on the Drawings prior to installation of Work. Notify the Engineer promptly of any conflicts or errors. B. Run pipe lines straight and true in alignment, grade and location as shown on the Drawings. C. Install piping through walls and floors as shown on the Drawings. 19-024 15053-3 PUMP STATION PIPING 3.02 PIPE IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Not used. 3.03 TESTING A. Flush pipes clean. Tighten connections to stop any visible leaks. B. Test piping in accordance with Section 4-Hydrostatic Testing, AWWA C600. C. Test piping to a pressure of 150 percent of the maximum possible discharge pressure of the pumps. 3.04 EXTERNAL COATINGS A. See Section 02634—Ductile Iron Pipe and Section 09915 —Painting and Protective Coatings. For external coating of new above-ground ductile iron pipe,use System Two—Traditional Epoxy System (2 part system plus stripe coat, Carboline or Tnemic products). B. For recoating of existing lift station piping, refer to Section 09920 Carboline or Tnemic products), same manufacturer and color as item A above. END OF SECTION 19-024 15053-4 VALVES AND GATES FOR PUMP STATION Section 15101 VALVES AND GATES FOR PUMP STATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Valves, gates and accessories for exposed, submerged and other types of piping for pump station. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI B16.1 - Cast lion Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. B. AWWA C509 - Resilient Seated Gate Valves. C. AWWA C508 - Check Valves. D. AWWA C500 - Gate Valves. E. AWWA C517—Plug Valves. F. ASTM A126 - Gray lion Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. G. ASTM A395 -Ductile Iron Castings. H. ASTM A48 - Gray lion Castings. I. ASTM A193 -Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature Service. J. ASTM A194 - Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure and High Temperature Service. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications 1. Valves and appurtenances provided under this Section shall be the standard product in regular production by manufacturers whose products have proven reliable in similar service for at least 5 years. 2. Insofar as possible all valves of the same specific type shall be the product of one manufacturer. 19-024 15101-1 VALVES AND GATES FOR PUMP STATION 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Sections 01350 - Submittals and 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. B. Shop Drawings 1. Submit for review detailed drawings, data and descriptive literature on valves and appurtenances, including: a. Dimensions. b. Size. c. Materials of construction. d. Weight. e. Protective coating. f. Actuator weight, where applicable. g. Calculations for actuator torque, where applicable. h. Wiring diagram,where applicable. 2. Submit manufacturer's valve sizing calculations for verification of sizing for air release valves, air and vacuum valves, and surge relief valves. C. Manufacturer's Certifications 1. Submit manufacturer's certificates of compliance with ANSI, AWWA and other listed standards. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01730 - Operations and Maintenance Data. B. Submit a detailed operation and maintenance manual for valves and appurtenances provided under this Section. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Have products delivered, stored and protected under provisions of applicable specification. B. Store valves and appurtenances off the ground in enclosed shelter. 19-024 15101-2 VALVES AND GATES FOR PUMP STATION PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BASIC REQUIREMENTS A. Mark and identify valves in conformance with standards, these Specifications or to the manufacturer's standard. B. Bolts, studs and nuts to be Type 316 stainless steel. C. End connections of valves shall be flanged and drilled to ANSI Class 125 unless otherwise specified. D. For handwheel operators on valves 4-inches or larger where located more than 5 feet above the operating floor, provide chain and chainwheel or extension operators. Use chainwheels fabricated of malleable cast iron with chain guides. Provide stainless steel chains of a length to extend to within 5 feet of the operating floor. E. To exterior surfaces of valves, apply a shop coating in accordance with Section 09915 — Painting and Protective Coatings. 2.02 CHECK VALVES A. Check Valve shall be swing check valves (Lever&weight) and shall be as follows: • APCO Series 6100. • Pratt Series 9001 • Golden Anderson Figure 25-DXH. • Milliken Series 9001 • Val-Matic Series 7900S2 B. Materials: • Body, cover, disc, levers: Cast iron or cast steel. • Seat: Bronze or stainless steel. • Seat ring: Bronze or rubber(Buna-N). • Hinge: Stainless steel. • Cushion cylinder: Metallic corrosion resistant material. • Design Requirements: • Seat ring: Replaceable. • Hinge: Extend out both sides with lever and weight. • Cushion: Oil type with adjustable speed control. 19-024 15101-3 VALVES AND GATES FOR PUMP STATION 2.03 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES Acceptable Manufacturers: • DeZurik • Pratt • Milliken. • Val-Matic. • Victaulic. Materials: • Body: Cast-iron ASTM A126, Class B. • Body Bearing: 316L Stainless Steel • Plug: One-piece construction ductile iron,ASTM A536 65-45-12 or cast iron, ASTM A126 Class B. • Operator: Handwheel • Plug facing: Grease and/or petroleum-resistant resilient Neoprene or Buna-N compound, 7( Type A durometer hardness per ASTM D2240. • All shaft bearings shall be of stainless steel, furnished with permanently-lubricated bearing surfaces. • Valve seats: Welded-in overlay of 90 percent nickel, minimum Brinell hardness of 200, (minimum 1/8 IN thick). • Stem seal: Nitrile butadiene packing or Buna-N dual U-cups or bronze cartridge double 0- rings with lower grit seal 0-ring per AWWA C504, Section 3.7. 2.04 AIR/VACUUM RELEASE VALVES Acceptable Manufacturers: • Valve shall be ARI model D-26 Combination Air and Vacuum Valve, size as shown on the drawings, stainless steel body and internals,NPT connections PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 19-024 15101-4 VALVES AND GATES FOR PUMP STATION A. Install valves and specialties in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to permit intended performance. B. Support and anchor valves and gates in accordance with Section 15140 - Pipe Hangars, Supports and Restraints. C. Eccentric plug valves shall be installed according to the following: 1. Position the valves with the stem in the horizontal direction. 2. In horizontal pipelines,position the vales so that the plug swings upward when opening to permit flushing of solids. 3. Orient the vales to prevent the valve bodies from filling up with solids when closed; however, orient the valves such that the pressure differential forces the plug against the seat in cases where the pressure differential across a closed valve will exceed 25 psi. 3.02 PAINTING A. Paint non-stainless specialties in accordance with Section 15053 —Pump Station Piping and Section 09915 —Painting and Protective Coatings. 3.03 TESTING A. Test valves using a hydrostatic pressure test in accordance with AWWA C-600. B. Test valves and specialties in place. Correct defects in valves, specialties or connections. END OF SECTION 19-024 15101-5 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND RESTRAINTS Section 15140 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND RESTRAINTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors. B. Equipment bases and supports. C. Sleeves and seals. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME B31.1 -Power Piping, Sections 120 and 121 of ASME B31.1. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01350 - Submittal Procedures and Section 15050 -Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. B. As a minimum, submit the following items: 1. A layout of the systems including location on fixed and movable joints. 2. Details of design and fabrication of joints. 3. Details of support brackets, cradles, pads, thrust resisting elements, and other supporting elements. 4. Other pertinent elements necessary for a complete installation. 5. Design calculations for submitted items. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide pipe supports as shown on the design drawings. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 19-024 15140-1 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND RESTRAINTS A. Hang piping inside structures supported from the floor or racked adjacent to walls. B. Provide inserts cast in concrete walls or slabs for hanging and supporting pipe. If materials not galvanized or cadmium plated,paint them with primer before installation. C. Design fabricate, and install support components in general conformance with Sections 120 and 121 of ANSI B31.1, Power Piping, except as modified in this Section. 3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support, brace, and anchor interior piping to prevent movement in any direction because of pressure,temperature, flow, or water hammer, except at properly located expansion joints and fittings. END OF SECTION 19-024 15140-2 Technical Specifications: Division 16 : Electrical City of Pearland PEARLAND Sr. ta() Electrical Technical Specifications (Division 16) for Construction of Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation Pearland, Texas .: OFTf•q �l JON—PAUL A. DIXON j ®�P 0. 112808 •:�i Ido • ./6C.% E 3-3 9b- March 2020 ,p♦ BAIRD ,IDGI LROY &DIXON TBPE Registration No. 16575 Baird Gilroy&Dixon, LLC 9711 S. Mason Rd. Ste 125 #326 Richmond,Texas 77407 (281)529-5005 TABLE OF CONTENTS ELECTRICAL No. of Section Title Pages DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16012 Electrical Work 4 16060 Electrical Demolition 3 16100 Basic Materials and Methods 22 16110 Raceways and Boxes 31 16119 Underground Ducts and Pull Boxes 5 16122 600-volt Power Cable 4 16126 Instrumentation Cable 5 16131 Device, Pull and Junction Boxes 3 16140 Wiring Devices 3 16150 Electric Motors 7 16170 Grounding and Bonding 6 16195 Electrical Identification 8 16211 Natural Gas Engine Generator and Controls 11 16475 Overcurrent Protective Devices 7 16496 Automatic Transfer Switch 7 16980 Natural Gas Service Entrance 3 16982 Natural Gas Distribution For Generators 19 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation ELECTRICAL WORK SECTION 16012 ELECTRICAL WORK PART 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work shall include providing materials and equipment required for installation of complete and functioning electrical system as specified and as shown on the drawings. B. This section is an integral part of all Specification Sections related to electrical, control and instrumentation construction under this contract. Conditions of this section are paramount to all other conditions in applicable sections and shall supersede all other conditions and requirements. C. Electrical Control and Instrumentation Plans & Specifications are representative of the design intent and may not contain minute details normally associated with normally accepted electrical construction, as described in applicable codes or as described in manufacturer's literature. Contractor shall provide all appurtenances normally associated with a particular equipment or device, and as required for a properly operating system. 1.02 MAJOR ITEMS OF WORK AS FOLLOWS A. Installation of Pump Controls B. Installation of Automatic Transfer Switch C. Installation of Natural Gas Generator 1.03 PLANT CONTROL SYSTEM A. The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete motor control panel. The control panel shall include but shall not be limited to all circuit breakers, motor starters, indicating lights, selector switches, surge protectors, phase failure relays, elapsed time meters, alarm horn, push button, control transformers, power supplies, pressure switches, interlock wiring, terminal blocks, nameplates, and all other associated items required to provide a workable system. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. B. Where submittals for a particular equipment, device or material item vary from that specified or shown on plan drawings, and where that item is not specifically noted as acceptable and, where installation of submitted item results in improper or undesirable operation of the system, Contractor shall be liable for removal and/or replacement of that item with the item specified or shown on plan drawings at no additional cost to Owner. M:6/23/2015 16012 - 1 /4 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation ELECTRICAL WORK 1.05 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES A. Electrical Contractor shall coordinate electrical power, telephone, data or special purpose line installation with utility companies. Within 30 days after award of contract, Electrical contractor shall contact utility company and owner and shall request service needed. B. It is Electrical Contractors sole responsibility to assure that utility company and owner are notified and are kept aware of requirements. C. Contractor shall provide all conduit, conductors and termination equipment as needed for utilities and shall coordinate with utility companies for installation requirements and shall provide installation constructed according to the utility company standards whether or not such is shown in detail or plans. D. Electrical Contractor shall review all sections of the plans including Civil, Structural, Mechanical, Instrumentation, Process, Architectural, and Electrical and shall note all electrical and/or requirements for devices and equipment shown or implied, and shall provide service accordingly for a complete operating electrical system. E. Electrical Contractor shall provide all programming set-up, adjustments and testing of devices or equipment included under this contract unless specifically excluded or unless equipment is not provided by Electrical Contractor. F. General Contractor is specifically responsible for coordination of all electrical systems, devices and equipment provided or installed under this contract and shall assure that all requirements by all trades are met such as to insure a complete and operating electrical, control, process or instrumentation system. G. Electrical Contractor shall be experienced with all types of electrical systems covered under this contract. No work shall be undertaken where Contractor's firm, project supervisors and project electrical workers have not had recent experience in similar projects in area or project location. Contractor will be required to furnish proof of experience where requested by Owner or Engineer or their Representatives. H. General Contractors Project Manager or his Assistant shall be familiar with types of electrical construction required by this project in order to determine that all subcontractors work in conformance with the plans and specifications. I. Contractor shall assure that all systems have been properly installed, adjusted and tested prior to final inspection, unless, Engineer has been duly notified in writing that certain equipments are not ready for final testing and such is acceptable with Engineer. J. Additional site visits, inspections, and tests conducted by Engineer due to systems not being ready at designated time of final inspection may result in charges to Contractor by Engineer to pay for additional time of electrical inspectors not covered in Electrical Engineers scope of work. All charges will be at Engineer's standard rates. K. Contractor shall fully inspect all motors and nameplates, controls, conduit, wiring devices and other items before starting work, ordering materials or submitting shop drawings in M.6/23/2015 16012 - 2 /4 P. 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation ELECTRICAL WORK order to verify existing conditions are as shown on plans and shall immediately notify Engineer of any discrepancies between plans & specifications and existing conditions. Failure to do so may result in responsibility for any required changes in construction. L. At completion of project and before final inspection, Contractor shall provide the Electrical Engineer with full size blue prints, red-lined to reflect the As-Built electrical installation. Any variation from plans shall be shown on each applicable plan sheet. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials provided under all sections of the specifications shall be new and the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment. All materials shall conform to the National Electrical Code and shall be approved and listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories. Materials described by manufacturer's name and catalog number are selected to set a definite standard of design and quality to be required. There is not any intention to discriminate against a product of another manufacturer, which is equally durable in construction, similar in design, and will serve the purpose for which it is intended. Within 30 days after award of the contract and before any materials and equipment are placed on order, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a complete list including catalog numbers and descriptive matter, of all materials and equipment he proposes to provide. B. Materials and equipment specifications are general in coverage and may contain reference to construction items that apply in only particular situations and may not apply as a general rule for materials installed on this project. 2.02 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Electrical plans and specifications are not intended to discriminate against any particular manufacturer. Specific values shown for a particular manufacturer's product may vary slightly for another product. The Electrical Engineer reserves the right to interpret the electrical specifications and to make judgment as to acceptance of a product, regardless of minute details in the specifications or on the Plans. B. Specifications shall be reviewed for applicability of materials under certain conditions and in certain environments and, where not shown otherwise on plan drawings. These application directions shall be adhered to. C. Where a particular reference on drawing plans does not conform to standard acceptable construction methods for a particular type project, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer and request a clarification before ordering materials or starting construction. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP M:6/23/2015 16012 - 3 /4 P:3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation ELECTRICAL WORK A. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with current NEC and local codes. Conduits exposed to the weather shall be PVC coated rigid galvanized steel (RGS) unless noted otherwise on plans. Conduit placed underground shall be schedule 40 PVC unless noted otherwise on plans. B. A fish wire shall be left in all conduits in which the permanent wiring is not installed. C. All fixtures, switch, and receptacle locations shall be approved by Engineer. D. Refer to other sections of this specification for controls. Under this section of the specifications, the Contractor shall install the control devices and provide control wiring switches, outlet boxes, and shall make all final connections. Control wiring and interlocks shall conform to wiring diagrams furnished by equipment manufacturers. E. The Contractor shall provide services of his Engineer or a factory trained technician to instruct plant-operating personnel for a period of at least one (1) full day after completion of the contract work. 3.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. All underground conduits shall be buried to a minimum depth of 24-inches below finished grade. All trenches shall be uniform width and shall be backfilled and compacted to 95% that of original density. Any damage to underground conduits caused by other Contractors shall be repaired by this Contractor and shall be compensated accordingly by the party or parties responsible for the damage. 3.03 CLEAN UP A. The Contractor shall upon completion of the work, remove all materials, empty containers, and any other materials that are not incorporated into the work. END OF SECTION M:6/23/2015 16012 - 4 /4 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland ELECTRICAL Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation DEMOLITION SECTION 16060 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical Demolition 1.02 REFERENCES A. Temporary wiring of systems to maintain operation of facilities while undergoing modifications and demolition shall he provided in accordance with: 1. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA), No.70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), Article No. 305- Temporary Wiring 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Annotate existing drawings to sequence the demolition of systems, equipment removal and temporary hook-ups. B. Schedule with Engineer or required shut-downs to accommodate system demolition and installation of temporary facilities. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown Drawings. B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. C. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Engineer before disturbing existing installation. D. By beginning demolition, installer accepts existing conditions and warrants that he will maintain service to equipment and items not scheduled or indicated for removal, and that he will return to the Owner all items and systems in good operating condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work. As specified in individual Sections. 2.02 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION A. The temporary electrical wiring and facilities shall be designed and constructed in strict compliance with NEC-Article No. 305. M. 3/30/2016 16060 - 1 / 3 P.3/2/2020 City of Pearland ELECTRICAL Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation DEMOLITION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. B. Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company to provide continuous service to operating equipment. C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must he performed on energized equipment or circuits. Use personnel experienced in such operations. D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from the Engineer at least one week before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. 3.02 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. 1. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. 2. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. 3. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets, which are not removed. 4. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. 5. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. 6. Repair adjacent construction and finished damaged work. 7. Maintain access to existing installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. 8. Extend existing installations using materials and methods as specified for new work. 3.03 DISPOSAL AND SALVAGE A. Salvage electrical and instrumentation equipment removed from existing facilities for reuse as applicable. M:3/30/2016 16060 - 2 / 3 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland ELECTRICAL Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation DEMOLITION B. Material and equipment which can be reused or salvaged remains the property of the Owner unless specifically indicated in the Specifications or Drawings or as designated by the Engineer. C. Materials and equipment which cannot be reused or salvaged will be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. 3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused. B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces amid check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement. END OF SECTION M: 3/30/2016 16060 - 3 / 3 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland BASIC MATERIALS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND METHODS SECTION 16100 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Raceway Systems 2. Wire, Cables and Connectors 3. Wiring Devices 4. Motor Starters 5. Motor and Circuit Disconnects 6. Fuses 7. Panelboards 8. Transformers 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 16 - Electrical Specifications that apply to the requirements of this project. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this section for Engineer's approval. B. Product Data: 1. Submit for disconnects, motor starters, panelboards, circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, transformers, and mini-power centers. 2. Product data sheets with printed installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit for motor starters. 2. Show enclosure dimensions, nameplate nomenclature, electrical ratings, and thermal unit schedule. 3. Wiring diagrams and schematics. D. Approval of equipment supplied in this section is contingent upon Contractor verification of available fault current from electric utility. 1. Notify Engineer if available fault current is higher than specified equipment. E. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data: 1. Maintenance data for materials and products for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual. M: 6/24/2015 16100 — 1 /22 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland BASIC MATERIALS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND METHODS 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC): Components and installation shall comply with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70. C. Where materials or installation methods in this section conflict with other sections, those particular sections shall have precedence unless otherwise indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAY SYSTEMS A. Galvanized rigid steel conduits (GRS): 1. Manufacturers: a. Allied Tube & Conduit b. Wheatland Tube c. Republic Conduit d. Columbia-MBF 2. Manufacturer's standard lengths and size. 3. Protected inside and out by hot dipped galvanized or electro-galvanized coating. B. Plastic conduit (PVC): 1. Manufacturers: a. Prime Conduit b. Cantex c. CertainTeed 2. Standard lengths and sizes. 3. Schedule 40 or 80, heavy wall rigid plastic (PVC) conduit manufactured to NEMA TC2 standards, UL listed, and as required by current NEC. 4. Rated for 90C cable. M: 6/24/2015 16100 -2 / 22 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland BASIC MATERIALS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND METHODS C. PVC coated galvanized rigid steel conduit (PVC-GRS): 1. Manufacturers: a. Perma-Cote — Robroy Industries b. KorKap — Robroy Industries c. Plasti-Bond — Robroy Industries d. Ocal —Thomas & Betts 2. NEMA RN1. 3. Galvanized rigid steel conduit with PVC coating. 4. Full weight 40-mil thick PVC coating, bonding to galvanized metal shall be stronger than plastic tensile strength. D. Flexible conduit: 1. Manufacturers: a. Flexsteel b. Anaconda c. American Flexible Conduit 2. Galvanized flexible steel. 3. Standard conduit sizes. 4. Minimum Size: '/2-in. E. Liquidtight flexible conduit: 1. Manufacturers: a. O-Z/Gedney Company b. Flex-Guard, Inc. c. Anaconda d. American Flexible Conduit e. Liquatite 2. Galvanized flexible steel. 3. Standard conduit sizes. 4. Minimum Size: %-in. 5. Heavy wall PVC jacket. F. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Appleton Electric Company b. Steel City, American Electric c. Oz-Gedney Company d. Thomas & Betts e. Carlon M: 6/24/2015 16100 — 3 /22 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland BASIC MATERIALS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND METHODS 2. Steel or malleable iron, zinc galvanized or cadmium plated. 3. Do not use set screw or indentor type fittings. 4. Do not use aluminum or die cast fitting. 5. GRS Connectors and Couplings: a. Threaded b. Insulated throat c. Gland compression type d. Rain and concrete type 6. Flexible Conduit Connectors and Couplings: a. Threaded b. Grounding type c. Insulated throat d. Gland compression type 7. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit Fittings: a. Liquidtight b. Threaded c. Grounding type d. Insulated throat e. Gland compression type 8. Expansion Joints: a. Conduit expansion fittings complete with copper bonding jumper, Crouse- Hinds Type XJ. b. Conduit expansion/deflection fittings with copper bonding jumper, Crouse- Hinds Type XD. 9. Seals: a. Wall entrance, Appleton Type FSK or FSC. 10. Drain Fittings: a. Automatic Drain Breather. (1) Explosionproof. (a) Safe for Class I, Groups C and D. (b) Capable of passing minimum 25cc water/min and minimum 0.05 cu ft air/min at atmospheric pressure. M: 6/24/2015 16100 —4 /22 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland BASIC MATERIALS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND METHODS b. Condensate Drain: (1) Conduit outlet body, Type T. (2) Threaded, galvanized plug with 3/16-in. drilled holed through plug. 11. Hazardous Areas: a. Explosionproof. b. Horizontal seal fittings, Crouse-Hinds Type EYS. c. Vertical seal fittings, Crouse-Hinds Type EYD. d. Vertical seal fittings shall have drain plug. G. Boxes: 1. Manufacturers: a. Interior Outlet Boxes: (1) Appleton Electric Company (2) Raco (3) Steel City, American Electric (4) Crouse-Hinds (5) Hubbell b. Weatherproof Outlet Boxes: (1) Appleton Electric Company (2) Crouse-Hinds Company (3) O-Z/Gedney Company (4) Perfect-Line, American Electric c. Junction and Pull Boxes: (1) Hoffman Engineering Company (2) Keystone Columbia, Inc. (3) Electromate d. Outlet Boxes - Flush Mounted: (1) Wall Outlets: Square corner, galvanized masonry type with internally mounted ears or 4-in. sq. with raised cover having square corners and internally mounted ears. (2) Ceiling Lighting Fixture Outlet Boxes: 4-in. sq. galvanized box with raised cover set flush with finished surface, complete with 3/8-in. fixture stud. e. Outlet Boxes - Surface Mounted: (1) General Use: 4-in. sq. with raised device cover. (2) Weatherproof: Cast galvanized with threaded hub. M: 6/24/2015 16100 — 5 / 22 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland BASIC MATERIALS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND METHODS (3) Hazardous Locations: Cast galvanized approved for classification of area. f. Junction and Pull Boxes: (1) Fabricate from code gauge galvanized steel, with covers held in place by corrosion resistant machine screws. (2) Size as required by code for number of conduits and conductors entering and leaving box. (3) Provide with welded seams where applicable, and equip with corrosion resistant nuts, bolts, screws, and washers. (4) Finish with rust inhibiting primer. 2.02 WIRES, CABLES, AND CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Wire and Cable: a. Collier b. Southwire c. Rome Cable d. Houston Wire and Cable e. Beldon f. Dekoron 2. Connectors: a. Burndy b. Thomas and Betts c. Blackburn, American Electric B. Copper wire only. C. 600v insulation (ASTM standard compounds) and color-code conductors for low voltage (secondary feeders and branch circuits) as required by current NEC. 1. Type THWN Stranded: Single conductor No. 14 AWG minimum for branch circuit and feeder conductors size No. 8 AWG and smaller. 2. Type XHHW Stranded: Single conductor for branch circuits, feeders, and service conductors larger than No. 8 AWG. 3. Provide grounding conductor when run with circuit conductors with same insulation as circuit conductors. 4. Type UE Stranded: Single conductor for under-ground direct burial. M: 6/24/2015 16100 — 6 / 22 P. 3/2/2020 City of Pearland BASIC MATERIALS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND METHODS 5. Type THWN Stranded: Single conductor No. 12 AWG minimum for 120v control wiring and No. 14 AWG minimum for graphic indication, nonshielded instrumentation and other control wiring operating at less than 120v, unless otherwise indicated. a. Provide high-density polyethylene jacketed multi-wire cable assemblies in underground conduit or duct. 6. Polyethylene insulated, tinned copper (19 by 27) stranding, No. 16 AWG, two conductors cabled with aluminum polyester electrostatic shielding, stranded tinned copper drain wire, and chrome vinyl outer jacket for interference sensitive instrumentation wiring. a. Additional high-density neoprene jacket on cables installed below ground and in duct encasements. 7. Vinyl insulated, tinned copper, solid, twisted pair, cabled conductors and silver gray vinyl jacket for telephone inter-communications. a. Up to 4 conductors/cable, 22 AWG solid wire. b. Over 4 conductors/cable, 24 AWG solid wire. c. Provide high-density polyethylene jacketed multi-wire cable assemblies in underground conduit or duct. D. Joints, Taps, and Splices: 1. Joints, Taps, and Splices in Conductors No. 10 AWG and Smaller: UL listed compression spring-type solderless connectors with plastic cover. 2. Joints, Taps, and Splices in Conductors No. 8 AWG and Larger: Solderless two or four-bolt compression type connectors of type that will not loosen under vibration or normal strains. 3. Terminations: Compression-type crimp lugs. 2.03 WIRING DEVICES A. Manufacturers: 1. Arrow-Hart, Inc. 2. Hubbell Wiring Device Division 3. Pass and Seymour, Inc. 4. Appleton Electric Company 5. Sierra Electric 6. Crouse-Hinds Company B. Fabricated Devices: 1. Factory fabricated, specification grade wiring devices in type, color, and electrical rating for service indicated. 2. Wiring devices of one manufacturer. M: 6/24/2015 16100 — 7 / 22 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland BASIC MATERIALS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND METHODS C. Switches: 1. General Use Lighting Switches: 20-amp toggle, equal to Hubbell No. 1221-I series. 2. Switches controlling equipment, operation of which is not evident from switch position, shall include flush neon pilot light in conjunction with proper switch. Each switch shall be complete with engraved plate to identify equipment being controlled (white letters on black, 1/8-in. high minimum). D. Receptacles: 1. General use duplex receptacles: NEMA No. 5-20R, grounding type, 20-amp Hubbell No. 5362 Specification Grade. 2. Special purpose receptacles. E. Ground-fault circuit interrupter receptacles (GFCI): 1. Ratings: 120-vac., 20-amp. 2. Tripping Requirement: UL Class A. 3. Construction: a. Shallow depth. b. Line and load terminal screws. c. Noise suppression. d. Feed through. e. Standard duplex wall plates shall fit. f. NEMA 5-20R configuration. 4. Meet requirements of UL 943 ground-fault circuit interrupters. F. Wiring Device Plates and Covers: 1. Wall plates for wiring devices with ganging and cut outs as indicated, provided with metal screws for securing plates to devices, screw heads colored to match finish of plate. 2. Plates for Flush Mounted Devices: Equal to Sierra P line specifications grade Type No. 430 brushed stainless steel or color as selected by Owner. 3. Telephone outlet configuration to match telephone outlet jack or cable. 4. Device plates for surface mounted Type FS or FD boxes to be Type FSK galvanized steel. 5. Device plates for surface mounted, 4-in. sq. boxed to be 1/2-in. raised galvanized steel covers. 6. Weatherproof plates and covers for exterior devices or devices in damp locations to be galvanized gray cast malleable with gasketed, lift cover plate. M: 6/24/2015 16100 — 8 / 22 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland BASIC MATERIALS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND METHODS G. Explosionproof Devices: 1. Wiring devices for use in hazardous areas shall be explosionproof approved for Class I, Division 1, Group D areas. 2. Receptacles: Appleton Cat. No. EFS B175-2023M, Crouse-Hinds Cat. No. ENR 21201 or equal NEMA 5-20R. 3. Plugs: Match receptacles. Furnish 1 plug for each receptacle installed. 4. Switches: Appleton EFS series, Crouse-Hinds EDS series or equal. 2.04 MOTOR STARTERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Allen Bradley 2. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer 3. General Electric 4. Siemens 5. Square D B. Manual Starters: 1. Minimum short circuit withstand rating in combination with motor circuit protective device shall be 10,000 symmetrical amps, unless indicated otherwise. C. Manual Motor Starter Construction: 1. Quick make and break toggle action. 2. Double break silver alloy contacts. 3. 1 piece melting alloy type thermal overload units. 4. Starter inoperative unless thermal unit in position. 5. Padlock provision. 6. Pilot light. 7. NEMA standards for size and hp rating. D. Magnetic Starters: 1. Minimum short circuit withstand rating in combination with motor circuit protective device shall be 22,000 symmetrical amps or as otherwise indicated. E. Magnetic Motor Starter Construction: 1. Mounted in vertical position, gravity dropout. 2. Double break silver alloy contacts. 3. Molded coil. 4. Contacts and/or coil replacement without removing starter from enclosure or power wiring from starter. 5. Straight through wiring. M: 6/24/2015 16100 - 9 / 22 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland BASIC MATERIALS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND METHODS 6. Overload Relay: a. 1 piece thermal unit construction. b. One melting alloy type overload relay per phase, manually reset. c. Interchangeable thermal units. d. Thermal units must be in place to operate starter. e. Replaceable overload relay circuit contacts. f. Trip at 6 times LRC in 20 sec. 7. Overload relay submersible pumps and hermetically sealed motors: a. Same as above except trip at 6 times LRC in 3 to 5 sec. 8. NEMA standards for size and hp rating. 9. NEMA Size 1 minimum. F. 2-Speed Motor Starters - (Where Applicable): 1. Provide separate winding type with two 3-pole starters unless otherwise specified. 2. For remote 2-stage thermostat control, provide cutout of low speed signal on high speed operation. G. Reduced Voltage Motor Starter Construction - (Where Applicable): 1. Closed transition autotransformer type, 2-coil construction with 50%, 65%, and 80% starting voltage taps. H. Combination Starter- (Where Applicable): 1. Combination Starters: a. Motor circuit protector type. b. Three-pole, three-phase NEMA size as indicated with three melting alloy overload relays. c. Hand-Off-Auto selector switch. Control Circuits: 1. Voltage not to exceed 120v. 2. Control transformer mounted in starter enclosure. 3. Fuses on one secondary line. 4. One secondary line grounded. 5. Transformer sized for device, accessories connected thereto, and 25% extra capacity minimum. J. Controls: 1. Reset button mounted in enclosure cover. M: 6/24/2015 16100 — 10/22 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland BASIC MATERIALS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND METHODS 2. Heavy duty, oil-tight green push to test pilot lights mounted in enclosure cover when indicated. 3. Heavy duty, oil-tight pushbuttons and selector switches mounted in enclosure when indicated. 4. 6-digit type elapsed time meters in tenths of hr mounted in enclosure cover when indicated. K. Enclosures: 1. Manual Starters: a. General-purpose flush mounted in finished areas. b. NEMA 1-in unfinished areas. c. NEMA 4 outdoors and wet locations. 2. Magnetic Starters: a. NEMA 12 indoors. b. NEMA 4 outdoors and wet locations. 2.05 MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer 2. General Electric 3. Siemens 4. Square D B. Enclosed Circuit Breaker Construction: 1. Dual cover interlock. 2. External trip indication. 3. Provisions for control circuit interlock. 4. Padlock provisions for padlock in Off position. 5. Handle attached to box, not cover. 6. Handle position indicates On, Off or Tripped. 7. Provisions for insulated or groundable neutral. C. Permanent Trip Circuit Breakers: 1. Thermal and magnetic protection. 2. Magnetic protection only in combination with motor starters and motor circuit protectors (MCP). 3. Single magnetic trip adjustment. 4. Single-handle common trip, 2 and 3-poles (handle ties not acceptable). 5. Push to trip test button. 6. Bolt on type. 7. Quick make and break toggle action. 8. Handle trip indication. M: 6/24/2015 16100 — 11 /22 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland BASIC MATERIALS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND METHODS 9. Handle position indication, On, Off, and Tripped centered. 10. UL listed for type of wire specified. 11. UL listed short circuit rating (integrated equipment rating). a. Up to 240v: 10,000 RMS symmetrical amp minimum. b. Up to 480v: 14,000 RMS symmetrical amp minimum. D. Safety Switches: 1. NEMA heavy duty Type HD. 2. Dual cover interlock. 3. Visible blades. 4. Provisions for control circuit interlock. 5. Pin type hinges. 6. Tin-plated current carrying parts. 7. Quick make and break operator mechanism. 8. Handle attached to box, not cover. 9. Handle position indication, On in up position and Off in down position. 10. Padlock provisions for up to 3 padlocks in Off position. 11. UL listed lugs for type and size of wire specified. 12. Spring reinforced fuse clips for Class R fuses. 13. Provisions for insulated or groundable neutral. 14. UL listed short circuit rating 200,000 RMS amp with Class R fuses. E. Enclosures: 1. Indoor: NEMA 12 code gauge steel with rust inhibiting primer and baked enamel finish. 2. Outdoor: NEMA 4 code gauge zinc coated steel with baked enamel finish. 2.06 FUSES A. Manufacturers: 1. Bussmann 2. Mersen 3. Littlefuse B. 250-V Fuses: 1. Class RK 1, 1 end rejection or to fit mountings specified, 1/10 to 600-amps, 200,000-amp interrupting rating. a. Bussmann Low-Peak. LPN-R, dual element, time delay with short circuit protection for motor, transformer, welder, feeder, and main service protection. C. 600-V Fuses: 1. Class RK1, 1 end rejection or to fit mountings specified, 1/10 to 600-amps, 200,000-amp interrupting rating. M: 6/24/2015 16100 — 12 /22 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland BASIC MATERIALS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND METHODS a. Bussmann Low-Peak: LPS-R, dual element, time delay with short circuit protection for motor, transformer, welder, feeder and main service protection. 2. Class L, bolt in, 601 to 6,000-amps, 200,000-amp interrupting rating. a. Bussmann HI-CAP: KRP-C, time delay for overload and short circuit protection for motor, transformer, feeder, and main service protection. 3. Class CC, fast acting, single element, 1/10 to 30-amps, 200,000-amp interrupting rating. a. Bussmann Limitron: KTK-R, UL listed for motor control circuits, lighting ballasts, control transformers, and street lighting fixtures. D. Spare Fuses: 1. 10%, minimum of 3, of each type and rating of installed fuses. E. Spare Fuse Cabinet: 1. Cabinet: Wall-mounted, 18ga minimum steel unit with full-length, recessed piano- hinged door with key coded cam lock and pull. 2. Size: Provide for orderly storage of spare fuses of this project plus 15% spare capacity, minimum. 3. Finish: Gray baked enamel. 4. Cabinet Door: Bear legend in stenciled 1 '/2-in. high letters, "Spare Fuses". 2.07 PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer 2. General Electric 3. Siemens 4. Square D B. Panelboard Ratings: 1. UL listed short circuit rating (integral equipment rating): a. Up to 240v: 10,000 RMS symmetrical amp minimum. b. Up to 480v: 14,000 RMS symmetrical amp minimum. C. Panelboard Construction: 1. Main breaker or main lugs only, per panelboard schedule. 2. Molded case circuit breakers. M. 6/24/2015 16100 - 13 /22 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland BASIC MATERIALS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND METHODS 3. Terminals: a. UL listed for type of wire specified. b. Anti-turn solderless compression type. 4. Bussing: a. Distributed phase sequence type. b. 225-amps, 98% conductivity hard drawn copper or as shown on panelboard schedule. c. Copper. d. Mounting hardware behind usable space. 5. Gutters adequate for wire size used, 4-in. minimum. 6. Boxes: a. Code gauge galvanized steel. b. Without knockouts. 7. Fronts: a. Rust inhibiting primer, baked enamel finish. b. Dead front safety type. c. Concealed hinges. d. Flush stainless steel cylinder tumbler type locks with spring loaded door pulls. e. Circuit Directory: (1) Suitable for complete descriptions. (2) Clear plastic cover. (3) Typewritten card. 8. Special features as indicated. 9. Engraved laminated nameplate: a. Stock melamine plastic laminate. b. Legend in black letters on white face and punched for mechanical fasteners. c. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, with '/-in. high lettering on 1 %-in. high label (2-in. high where two lines are required). Text shall match terminology and numbering of Contract Documents and Shop Drawings. D. Panelboard Circuit Breakers: 1. Thermal and magnetic protection. 2. Single-handle common trip, 2 and 3-poles (handle ties not acceptable). 3. Bolt on type unless otherwise specified. M: 6/24/2015 16100 — 14 / 22 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland BASIC MATERIALS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND METHODS 4. Quick make and break toggle action. 5. Handle trip indication. 6. Handle position indication, On, Off, and Tripped centered. 7. UL listed for type of wire specified. 8. UL listed short circuit rating (integrated equipment rating). a. Up to 240v: 10,000 RMS symmetrical amp minimum. b. Up to 480v: 14,000 RMS symmetrical amp minimum. 9. UL SWDL switching duty on 120v circuits for switched circuits. 10. Switch neutral common trip per NEC 514-5 for fuel pumps. 2.08 TRANSFORMERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer 2. General Electric 3. Siemens 4. Square D B. Materials and Equipment: 1. Dry type, air-cooled. 2. Insulation: a. Below 30kVa: Class F or better, having 1150C rise, average maximum over 400C ambient temperature. b. 30kVa and Above: Class H or better, having 1500C rise, average maximum over 400C ambient temperature. 3. Copper windings. 4. Cores: High grade, non-aging, sheet silicone steel laminations having core- plating insulation on both sides of each lamination. 5. Terminal boards. 6. Taps: Two 2 1/2% taps above and below. 7. Overload Capacity: Not less that 10% for intermittent operation. 8. Size: kVa as indicated. 9. Transformers shall be quiet type for installation in areas of low ambient noise levels. Maximum sound levels shall not exceed NEMA standards. 10. Cabinets: Sheet steel, phosphatized having one prime coat and two finish coats of baked enamel. M: 6/24/2015 16100 — 15 / 22 P. 3/2/2020 City of Pearland BASIC MATERIALS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND METHODS a. Wall mounting brackets through 75kVa when indicated as wall mounted. 11. Nameplate: Metal nameplate listing manufacturer's name, serial number, type, class, kVa voltage, frequency, and showing internal wiring diagram. 12. Comply with UL 506. 2.09 MINI-POWER CENTER (Where Applicable) A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer 2. General Electric 3. Siemens 4. Square D 5. Or approved equal B. Materials and Equipment: 1. UL listed, 10,000 AIC rated. 2. NEMA 3R enclosure with padlock provision. 3. 240v, 30A, 2-pole single phase primary main circuit breaker. 4. 5kva 240-120/240v encapsulated core and coil assembly. 5. 240v, 25A, 2-pole single phase secondary main circuit breaker. 6. 4-20A single pole branch circuit breakers. 7. Neutral bar grounded to case. 8. Ground bar with terminals. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install products in accordance with current NEC, manufacturer's instructions, applicable standards, and recognized industry practices to ensure products serve intended function. 3.02 RACEWAY SYSTEMS A. Complete conduit installation prior to installing cables. B. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, use rigid galvanized steel conduit for general wiring. C. Provide watertight conduit system where installed in wet places, underground or where buried in masonry or concrete. D. Use PVC coated rigid steel conduit when conduit is run below slabs on grade or in earth, unless otherwise specified. 1. Exterior underground conduit shall be minimum of 1-in., buried at depth of not less than 24-in. below grade. M: 6/24/2015 16100 — 16 /22 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland BASIC MATERIALS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND METHODS 2. Provide conduits or ducts terminating below grade with means to prevent entry of dirt or moisture. E. Use rigid galvanized steel conduit. F. Conduit shall be run concealed except exposed surface conduit may be installed where concealment found to be impractical or impossible, and only with approval of Engineer. G. Continuous from outlet to outlet and from outlets to cabinets, junction or pull boxes. H. Enter and secure to boxes ensuring electrical continuity from point of service to outlets. I. Conduit runs extending through areas of different temperature or atmospheric conditions or partly indoors and partly outdoors shall be sealed, drained, and installed in manner preventing drainage of condensed or entrapped moisture into cabinets, motors or equipment enclosures. J. Run conduits within concrete structures parallel to each other and spaced on center of at least three times conduit trade diameter with minimum 2-in. concrete covering. K. Route conduit runs above suspended acoustical ceilings not interfering with tile panel removals. L. Secure conduit in-place with not less than 1 malleable corrosion-proof alloy strap or hanger, 8-ft of conduit. 1. Do not use perforated strapping. M. Connections to Motors and Equipment Subject to Vibration: 1. Flexible steel conduit not over 3-ft long or where exposed in mechanical and utility areas and not subjected to moisture, dirt, and fumes. 2. Liquidtight flexible conduit not over 3-ft long where exposed in finished areas or where subject to moisture, dirt, fumes, oil, corrosive atmosphere, exposed or concealed, with connectors to ensure liquidtight, permanently grounded connection. Locate where least subject to physical abuse. N. Use double locknuts and insulated bushings with threads fully engaged. O. Connectors at fixture bodies and boxes shall be rigidly secured with galvanized lock nut and bushing. P. Cap conduits after installation to prevent entry of debris. Q. Use explosionproof fittings and seals in hazardous areas in accordance with current NEC. R. Install conduit expansion fittings complete with bonding jumper in following locations. 1. Conduit runs crossing structural expansion joint. M: 6/24/2015 16100 - 17 / 22 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland BASIC MATERIALS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND METHODS 2. Conduit runs attached to two separate structures. 3. Conduit runs where movement perpendicular to axis of conduit may be encountered. S. Install 4-ft 0-in. to 6-ft 0-in. flexible steel conduit drops from independent junction box mounted above ceiling and accessible from below ceiling to recessed ceiling mounted equipment. Allow for positioning of equipment to tile increments. T. Multi-outlet raceway system: 1. Mount to surface with approved support clips. 2. Do not pinch wires. 3. Remove metal burrs and sharp edges. 4. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 BOXES A. Install knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. B. Locate boxes to ensure accessibility of electrical wiring. C. Secure boxes rigidly to surface or solidly embed boxes in concrete or masonry. Do not support from conduit. D. Do not burn holes, use knockout punches or saw. E. Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation such as mounting brackets, fixture studs, cable clamps, and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes compatible with outlet boxes being used and meeting requirements of individual wiring situations. F. Verify exact location of outlets. G. Minor modification in location of outlets and equipment is considered incidental up to distance of 10-ft with no additional compensation, provided notification of modification is given prior to roughing in of outlet. H. Flush outlets shall have edges or plaster flush with finished wall or ceiling surfaces so plates can be drawn tightly to wall or ceiling surfaces. I. Mounting height as follows: 1. Switches: 48-in. above floor. 2. AC Receptacles and Telephone Outlets: 12-in. above floor or 6-in. above counters, counter back-splashes, and baseboard radiators in finished areas, 48- in. above floor in unfinished areas. 3. Wall Bracket Lighting Fixtures: 8-in. above mirrors or 6-ft 6-in. above floor. 4. Pushbuttons: 48-in. above floor. M: 6/24/2015 16100 — 18 /22 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland BASIC MATERIALS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND METHODS 5. Motor Starters and Disconnect Switches: 60-in. above floor. 6. Thermostats: 60-in. above floor. 7. Bells and Horns: 8-ft 0-in. above floor. 8. Clocks: 8-ft 0-in. above floor. J. Do not install boxes back to back or through wall. Offset outlet boxes on opposite sides of wall, minimum 12-in. K. Where emergency switches occur adjacent to normal light switches, install in separate boxes in accordance with current NEC and device plate color coding separation. L. Lighting Fixture Outlet Boxes: 1. Securely mount with approved type bar hangers spanning structural members to support weight of fixture. 2. Do not support from conduit. 3. Equip with 3/8-in. fixture stud and tapped fixture ears. M. Floor boxes: 1. Adjust box to align with finish floor. 2. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. N. Fire rated through floor fittings: 1. Spacing and location as indicated. 2. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 WIRE AND CABLE A. Run wire and cable in conduit unless otherwise indicated. B. On branch circuits, use standard colors. C. Each tap, joint or splice in conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall be taped with 2 half- lap layers of vinyl plastic electrical tape and finish wrap of color coding tape, where required by code. D. Run ground wire with power circuits; conduit shall not be grounding path. E. Provide separate conduit systems for the following: 1. Exit lights. 2. Line voltage control. 3. Low voltage control. 4. Shielded instrumentation. M. 6/24/2015 16100 — 19 / 22 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland BASIC MATERIALS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND METHODS 5. Telephone and sound system. 6. Utility telephone cables. 7. As required by current NEC. F. Where power cables and instrument/signal cables enter and pass through same manhole, handhole or distribution box, steel barrier or steel conduit separation shall be maintained to avoid magnetic interaction between power cables and instrumentation conductors. In manholes and handholes, provide Type C conduit outlet body with 3/16- in. holes drilled in bottom for drainage. G. Run instrumentation cable into control cabinets or MCC only if terminated therein. H. Terminate control, instrumentation, and communication cables on terminal strips in separate terminal cabinets located near conduit entrances of buildings. I. Color Coding: Conductors for lighting and power wiring as indicated below. Phase 120/240v 1 Phase 240/120v 3 Phase 480/277v 3 Phase A Black Black Brown B Red Orange Purple C Blue Yellow Travelers Pink Pink Red Neutral White White Gray Ground Green Green Green J. Color coding for intrinsically safe systems shall be light blue. 3.05 JOINTS, TAPS, AND SPLICES A. Where pre-insulated spring connectors are used for motor and equipment connections, tape connector to wire to prevent loosening under vibration. B. Each tap, joint or splice in conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall be taped with two half-lap layers of vinyl plastic electrical tape and finish wrap of color coding tape where required by code. C. Cable splices shall be made only in manholes, handholes, wireways, distribution boxes, and junction boxes. 3.06 WIRING DEVICES A. Do not install devices until wiring is complete. B. Do not use terminals on wiring devices (hot or neutral) for feed-through connections, looped or otherwise. Make circuit connections by using wire connectors and pigtails. C. Install gasket plates for devices or system components having light emitting features such as switch with pilot light and dome lights. Where installed on rough textured surfaces, seal with black self-adhesive polyfoam. M: 6/24/2015 16100 — 20 / 22 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland BASIC MATERIALS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND METHODS D. Ground receptacles with insulated green ground wire from device ground screw to bolted outlet box connection. E. Install GFCI receptacles as required by current NEC. 3.07 MOTOR STARTERS A. Examine area to receive motor starters to ensure adequate clearance for starter installation. B. Install on equipment rack in MCC or anchor firmly to wall or structural surface. 3.08 MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS (Where Applicable) A. Locate disconnect switches as required by current NEC. B. Provide control circuit interlock as required by current NEC. C. Overcurrent protective devices: 1. Install fuses just prior to energizing equipment. 2. Locate circuit breakers. 3.09 PANELBOARDS A. Flush or surface mount. B. Support panel cabinets independently to structure with no weight bearing on conduits. C. Install recessed panelboards to allow cover to be drawn tight against wall to provide neat appearance. D. Install panelboards so top breaker is not higher than 6-ft 0-in. above floor. E. Adjacent panel cabinets shall be same size and mounted in horizontal alignment. F. Install typewritten directory in each panelboard, accurately indicating rooms or equipment being served after final circuit changes have been made to balance circuit loads. G. Install two spare 1-in. conduits from top of each flush mounted panelboard to area above ceiling for future use. On flush mounted panelboards located on first and higher level floors, provide two spare 1-in. conduits from bottom of panelboard to ceiling area of floor below for future use. 3.10 TRANSFORMER A. Install wall mounted transformers on prefabricated brackets designed for that purpose. B. Install floor mounted transformers on 4-in. high concrete housekeeping pads. C. Tighten bus connections and mechanical fasteners. D. Adjust voltage taps for required system voltage and check grounding requirements. M: 6/24/2015 16100 - 21 /22 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland BASIC MATERIALS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND METHODS 3.11 MINI-POWER CENTERS (Where Applicable) A. Install on prefabricated brackets designed for the purpose. B. Tighten bus connections and mechanical fasteners. C. Adjust voltage taps for required system voltage and check grounding requirements. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Control Circuits, Branch Circuits, Feeders, Motor Circuits, and Transformers: 1. Megger check of phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation levels: a. Do not megger check solid state equipment. 2. Continuity. 3. Short circuit. 4. Operational check. B. Wiring Devices. 1. Test receptacles with Hubbell 5200, Woodhead 1750 or equal tester for correct polarity, proper ground connection, and wiring faults. 3.13 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Motor Starters and Disconnects: 1. Adjust covers and operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. 2. Tighten wire and cable connections. 3. Verify overcurrent protection thermal unit size with motor nameplate to provide proper operation and compliance with current NEC. 4. Clean interior of enclosures. 5. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. B. Circuit Breakers: 1. Adjustable settings shall be set to provide selective coordination, proper operation, and compliance with current NEC. END OF SECTION M: 6/24/2015 16100 — 22 / 22 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Material and installation requirements for: a. Conduits. b. Conduit fittings. c. Conduit supports. d. Wireways. e. Outlet boxes. f. Pull and junction boxes. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 1 — General Requirements 2. Section 16119 — Underground Ducts & Pull Boxes 3. Section 16140 —Wiring Devices 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Underfloor Conduits. 1. Conduits which run underground within perimeter of building walls under building floor. This may consist of one conduit, or several conduits grouped together. B. Duct Bank Conduits 1. Conduits which run underground outside perimeter of building walls. This may consist of one conduit, or several conduits grouped together. C. Underground Conduits 1. Underground conduits are both under floor conduits and duct bank conduits. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Division 1 — General Requirements for requirements for mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data: a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section. M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 1 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES 3. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Identify dimensional size of pull and junction boxes to be used. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. B. Referenced Standards: 1. Aluminum Association (AA). 2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A123, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. b. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. c. D2105, Standard Test Method for Longitudinal Tensile Properties of "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Tube. d. D2564, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. e. F512, Standard Specification for Smooth-Wall Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit and Fittings for Underground Installation. 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. RN 1, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC). c. TC 2, Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit. d. TC 3, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 2 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association/American National Standards Institute (NEMA/ANSI): a. C80.1, Electric Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC). b. C80.3, Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT). c. C80.5, Electrical Aluminum Rigid Conduit. d. OS 1, Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC) 7. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 1, Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit. b. 6, Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit— Steel. c. 50, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations. d. 360, Standard for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. e. 467, Grounding and Bonding Equipment. f. 514A, Metallic Outlet Boxes. g. 514B, Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings. h. 651, Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings. 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing — Steel. j. 870, Standard for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings. k. 886, Standard for Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 1660, Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit. C. Comply with NECA "Standard of Installation." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufactures are M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 3 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES acceptable: 1. Rigid metallic conduits: a. Allied Tube and Conduit Corporation. b. Triangle PWC Inc. c. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. d. Wheatland Tube Company. e. LTV Steel Company. f. EASCO Aluminum. g. Indalex. h. VAW of American, Inc. 2. PVC coated rigid metallic conduit and repair kits: a. Calbond b. KorKap c. Perma-Cote d. Rob-Roy Ind. e. Raychem "GelTek" tape. f. Thomas & Betts 0-Cal g. NEC Black Guard 3. Rigid non-metallic conduit: a. Carlon. b. Cantex. c. Heritage Plastics. d. Osburn Associates. e. Prime Conduit f. Champion Fiberglass. g. United Fiberglass of America, Inc. 4. Flexible metallic conduit: a. AFC Cable Systems. b. Anamet, Inc. c. Carlon. d. Electri-Flex. e. Flexible Metal Hose Company. f. International Metal Hose Company. g. Triangle PWC Inc. h. LTV Steel Company. 5. Flexible non-metallic conduit. a. Carlon b. Carflex. 6. Wireway: a. Hoffman Engineering Company. M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 4 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES b. Weigmann. c. Square D. 7. Conduit fittings and accessories: a. Appleton. b. Carlon. c. Cantex. d. Crouse-Hinds. e. Killark. f. Osburn Associates. g. OZ Gedney Company. h. RACO. Steel City. j. Thomas and Betts. 8. Support systems: a. Unistrut Building Systems. b. B-Line Systems Inc. c. Kindorf. d. Minerallac Fastening Systems. e. Caddy. 9. Outlet, pull, and junction boxes: a. Appleton. b. Crouse-Hinds. c. Killark. d. OZ Gedney Company. e. Steel City. f. RACO. g. Bell. h. Hoffman Engineering Company. Wiegmann. j. B-Line Circle AW. k. Adalet. Rittal. 10. Anti-seize compound: a. Crouse-Hinds 2.02 RIGID METALLIC CONDUITS A. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-RGS): 1. Nominal 40 mil Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) exterior coating: a. Coating: Bonded to hot-dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit conforming to NEMA/ANSI C80.1. M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 5 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES b. The bond between the PVC coating and the conduit surface: Greater than the tensile strength of the coating. 2. Nominal 2 mil, minimum, urethane interior coating. 3. Urethane coating on threads. 4. Conduit: Epoxy prime coated prior to application of PVC and urethane coatings. 5. Female Ends: a. Have a plastic sleeve extending a minimum of 1 pipe diameter or 2 in, whichever is less beyond the opening. b. The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the conduit to be used with it. 6. Standards: NEMA/ANSI C80.1, UL 6, NEMA RN 1. B. PVC-Coated Rigid Aluminum Conduit (PVC-RAC): 1. Nominal 40 mil Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) exterior coating: a. Coating: Bonded to rigid aluminum conduit conforming to NEMA/ANSI C80.1. b. The bond between the PVC coating and the conduit surface: Greater than the tensile strength of the coating. 2. Nominal 2 mil, minimum, urethane interior coating. 3. Urethane coating on threads. 4. Conduit: Epoxy prime coated prior to application of PVC and urethane coatings. 5. Female Ends: a. Have a plastic sleeve extending a minimum of 1 pipe diameter or 2 in, whichever is less beyond the opening. b. The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the conduit to be used with it. 6. Standards: NEMA/ANSI C80.1, UL 6, NEMA RN 1. C. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS): 1. Mild steel with continuous welded seam. 2. Metallic zinc applied by hot-dip galvanizing or electro-galvanizing. M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 6 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES 3. Threads galvanized after cutting. 4. Internal coating: Backed lacquer, varnish, or enamel for smooth surface. 5. Standards: NEMA/ANSI C80.1, UL 6. 6. Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RAC) is an acceptable alternative to RGS. D. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1. Mild steel with continuous welded seam. 2. Metallic zinc applied by hot-dip galvanizing or electro-galvanizing. 3. Internal coating: Baked lacquer, varnish, or enamel for a smooth surface. 4. Standards: NEMA/ANSI C80.3, UL 797. E. Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RAC): 1. AA Type 6063 aluminum allow, T-1 temper. 2. Maximum copper content of 0.10 percent. 3. Extruded, seamless. 4. Standards: NEMA/ANSI C80.5, UL 6. 2.03 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT A. Schedules 40 (PVC-40) and 80 (PVC-80) 1. Polyvinyl-chloride (PVC) plastic compound which includes inert modifiers to improve weatherability and heat distribution. 2. Rated for direct sunlight exposure. 3. Fire retardant and low smoke emission. 4. Shall be suitable for use with 90 DegC wire and shall be marked "maximum 90 DegC". 5. Standards: NEMA TC 2, UL 651. B. Fiberglass: 1. Epoxy based resin system using an anhydride curing agent. 2. Continuous E-glass roving. 3. Winding angle approximately 54.75 degrees. M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 7 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES 4. Halogen free additive for flame spread and smoke control. 5. Ultraviolet inhibitor: Carbon black. 6. Two (2) step curing process. 7. Tensile strength: 9000 psi per ASTM D2105. 8. Integral bell and spigot. 9. Conduits and fittings to be joined with an epoxy adhesive creating a water tight connection. 10. Standard: UL 1684. 2.04 Flexible Conduit A. Flexible Galvanized Steel Conduit (FLEX): 1. Formed of continuous, spiral wound, hot-dip galvanized steel strip with successive convolutions securely interlocked. 2. Standard: UL 360. B. PVC-Coated Flexible Galvanized Steel (liquid-tight) Conduit (FLEX-LT): 1. Core formed of continuous, spiral wound, hot-dip galvanized steel strip with successive convolutions securely interlocked. 2. Extruded PVC outer jacket positively locked to the steel core. 3. Liquid and vaportight. 4. Standard: UL 360. C. Flexible non-metallic (liquid-tight) conduit (FLEX-NM): 1. Formed of a helically wound spiral of rigid PVC reinforcement embedded within a flexible PVC wall. 2. Layered construction with a smooth seamless inner core of flexible PVC that is bonded to a covering of flexible PVC. 3. Between the layers is a woven nylon mesh for reinforcement. 4. Standard: UL1660 2.05 Wireway A. General: 1. Suitable for lay-in conductors. M. 5/17/2019 16110 - 8 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES 2. Designed for continuous grounding. 3. Covers: a. Hinged or removable in accessible areas. b. Non-removable when passing through partitions. c. Finish: Rust inhibiting primer and manufacturer's standard paint inside and out except for stainless steel type. d. Standards: UL 870, NEMA 250. B. General Purpose (NEMA 1 rated) Wireway: 1. 14 or 16 gage steel without knockouts. 2. Cover: Non-gasketed and held in place by captive screws. C. Raintight (NEMA 3R rated) Wiring Trough: 1. 14 or 16 gage galvanized steel without knockouts. 2. Cover: Non-gasketed and held in place by captive screws. D. Watertight (NEMA 4X rated) Wireway: 1. 14 gage type 304 or 316 stainless steel bodies and covers without knockouts and 10 gage stainless steel flanges. 2. Cover: Fully gasketed and held in place with continuous piano hinge with three- point latch. 3. Flanges: Fully Gasketed and bolted. E. Dusttight (NEMA 12 rated) Wireway: 1. 14 gage steel bodies and covers without knockouts and 10 gage steel flanges. 2. Cover: Fully gasketed and held in place with continuous piano hinge with three- point latch. 3. Flanges: Fully gasketed and bolted. 2.06 CONDUIT FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES A. Fittings for use with RGS: 1. General: a. In hazardous locations, provide fittings listed for use in Class I, Groups C M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 9 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES and D locations. 2. Locknuts: a. Threaded steel or malleable iron. b. Gasketed or non-gasketed. c. Grounding or non-grounding type. 3. Bushings: a. Threaded, insulated metallic. b. Grounding or non-grounding type. 4. Hubs: Threaded, insulated and gasketed metallic for raintight connection. 5. Couplings: a. Threaded straight type: Same material and finish as the conduit with which they are used on. b. Threadless type: Gland compression or self-threading type, concrete tight. 6. Unions: Threaded galvanized steel or zinc plated malleable iron. 7. Conduit bodies (ells and tees): a. Body: Zink plated cast iron with threaded hubs. b. Standard and mogul size. c. Cover: 1) Clip-on type with stainless steel screws. 2) Gasketed or non-gasketed galvanized steel, zinc plated cast iron. 8. Conduit bodies (round): a. Body: Zinc plated cast iron. b. Cover: Threaded screw on type, gasketed, galvanized steel, zinc plated cast iron. 9. Sealing fittings: a. Body: Zinc plated cast iron with threaded hubs. b. Standard and mogul size. c. With or without drain and breather. M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 10/ 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES d. Fiber and sealing compound: UL listed for use with the sealing fitting. B. Fittings for use with RAC: 1. General: a. In hazardous locations, provide fittings listed for use in Class I, Groups C and D locations. 2. Locknuts: a. Threaded stainless steel. b. Gasketed or non-gasketed. c. Grounding or non-grounding type. 3. Bushings: a. Threaded, insulated metallic. b. Grounding or non-grounding type. 4. Hubs: Threaded, insulated and gasketed metallic for raintight connection. 5. Couplings: a. Threaded straight type: Same material and finish as the conduit with which they are used on. 6. Unions: Threaded copper free cast aluminum. 7. Conduit bodies (ells and tees): a. Body: Copper free cast aluminum with threaded hubs. b. Standard and mogul size. c. Cover: 1) Clip-on type with stainless steel screws. 2) Gasketed or non-gasketed copper free cast aluminum. 8. Conduit bodies (round): a. Body: Copper free cast aluminum. b. Cover: Threaded screw on type, gasketed, copper free cast aluminum. 9. Sealing fittings: a. Body: Copper free cast aluminum with threaded hubs. b. Standard and mogul size. M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 11 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES c. With or without drain and breather. d. Fiber and sealing compound: UL listed for use with the sealing fitting. C. Fittings for use with PVC-RGS: 1. The same material and construction as those fittings listed under paragraph "Fittings for use with RGS" and coated as defined under paragraph "PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-RGS). D. Fittings for use with PVC-RAC: 1. The same material and construction as those fittings listed under paragraph "Fittings for use with RAC" and coated as defined under paragraph "PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-RGS). E. Fittings for use with EMT: 1. Connectors: a. Straight, angle and offset types furnished with locknuts. b. Zinc plated steel. c. Insulated gland compression type. d. Concrete and raintight. 2. Couplings: a. Zinc plated steel. b. Gland compression type. c. Concrete and raintight. 3. Conduit bodies (ells and tees): a. Body: Copper free aluminum with threaded hubs. b. Standard and mogul size. c. Cover: 1) Screw down type with steel screws. 2) Gasketed or non-gasketed galvanized steel or copper free aluminum. 4. Standard: UL 514B M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 12 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES F. Fittings for use with FLEX: 1. Connector: a. Zinc plated malleable iron. b. Squeeze or clamp type. 2. Standard: UL 514B. G. Fittings for use with FLEX-LT and FLEX-NM: 1. Connector: a. Straight or angle type. b. Metal construction, insulated and gasketed. c. Composed of locknut, grounding ferrule and gland compression nut. d. Liquid tight. 2. Standards: UL 467, UL 514B. H. Fittings for use with Rigid Non-Metallic PVC Conduit: 1. Coupling, adapters, and conduit bodies: a. Same material, thickness, and construction as the conduits with which they are used. b. Homogeneous plastic free from visible cracks, holes, or foreign inclusions. c. Bore smooth and free of blisters, nicks or other imperfections which could damage the conductor. 2. Solvent cement for welding fittings shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the conduit and fittings. 3. Standards: ASTM D2564, NEMA TC3, UL 651, UL 541B. Fittings for use with Rigid Non-Metallic Fiberglass Conduit: 1. Coupling and adapters shall be of the same material, thickness, and construction as the conduit. 2. Epoxy adhesive for joining conduits and fittings shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the conduit and fittings and shall provide a water tight connection. 3. Standard: UL 1684. J. Weather and Corrosion Protection Tape: 1. PVC based tape, 10 miles thick. M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 13 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES 2. Protection against moisture, acids, alkalis, salts and sewage and suitable for direct bury. 3. Used with appropriate pipe primer. 2.07 ALL RACEWAY AND FITTINGS A. Mark Products: 1. Identify the nominal trade size on the product. 2. Stamp with the name or trademark of the manufacturer. 2.08 OUTLET BOXES A. Metallic Outlet Boxes: 1. Hot-dip galvanized steel. 2. Conduit knockouts and grounding pigtail. 3. Styles: a. 2 IN x 3 IN rectangle. b. 4 IN square. c. 4 IN octagon. d. Masonry/tile. 4. Accessories: a. Flat blank cover plats. b. Barriers. c. Extension, plaster or tile rings. d. Box supporting brackets in stud walls. e. Adjustable bar hangers. 5. Standards: NEMA/ANSI OS 1, UL 514A. B. Cast Outlet Boxes: 1. Zinc plated cast iron or die-cast copper free aluminum with manufacturer's standard finish. 2. Threaded hubs and grounding screw. 3. Styles: a. "FS" of"FD". b. Single or multiple gang and tandem. c. "EDS" or "EFS" for hazardous locations. M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 14 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES 4. Accessories: 40 mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior coating. 5. Standards: UL 514A, UL 886. C. Non-metallic Outlet Boxes: 1. Polyvinyl-chloride (PVC) plastic compound. 2. Rated for direct sunlight exposure. 3. Fire retardant and low smoke emission. 4. Suitable for use with 90 DegC wire. 5. Styles: a. "FS" or"FD". b. Single or multiple gang. 6. Standard: UL 514A, NEMA TC 3. D. See Specification 16140 for wiring devices, wallplates, and cover plates. 2.09 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. NEMA 1 Rated: 1. Body and cover: 14 gage minimum, galvanized steel or steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturer's standard paint inside and out. 2. With or without concentric knockouts on four (4) sides. 3. Flat cover fastened with screws. B. NEMA 3R Rated: 1. Body and cover: 14 gage minimum steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturer's standard paint inside and out. 2. No knockouts. 3. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth. 4. Door with hinge and latch C. NEMA 4X Rated (metallic): 1. Body and cover: 14 gage type 304 or 316 stainless steel. 2. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth. M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 15 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES 3. No knockouts. 4. External mounting flanges. 5. Door with oil-resistant gasket. D. NEMA 4X Rated (non-metallic): 1. Body and cover: Ultraviolet light protected fiberglass-reinforced polyester boxes. 2. No knockouts. 3. External mounting flanges. 4. Hinged door with quick release latches and padlocking hasp. 5. Door with oil resistant gasket. E. NEMA 7 and NEMA 9 Rated: 1. Cast gray iron allow or copper-free aluminum with manufacturer's standard finish. 2. Drilled and tapped openings or tapered threaded hub. 3. Cover bolted down with stainless steel bolts or threaded cover with neoprene gasket. 4. External mounting flanges. 5. Grounding lug. 6. Accessories: 40 mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior coating. F. NEMA 12 Rated: 1. Body and cover: a. 14 gage steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturer's standard paint inside and out. b. Type 5052 H-32 aluminum, unpainted. 2. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth. 3. No knockouts. 4. External mounting flanges. 5. Non-hinged cover held closed with captivated cover screws threaded into sealed wells or hinged cover held closed with stainless steel screws and clamps. 6. Flat door with oil resistant gasket. M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 16 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES G. Miscellaneous Accessories: 1. Rigid handles for covers larger than 9 SF or heavier than 25 LBS. 2. Split covers when heavier than 25 LBS. 3. Weldnuts for mounting optional panels and terminal kits. 4. Tamper proof screws. 5. Terminal blocks: Screw-post barrier-type, rated 600 volt and 20 ampere minimum. H. Standards: NEMA 250, UL 50 2.10 SPECIAL PURPOSE BOXES A. Pedestal-Type Floor-Mounted or Counter-Mounted Duplex Receptacles: 1. Horizontal design housing with threaded conduit fittings in base with satin chromium finish. B. Flush in Floor Duplex Receptacles: 1. Dual level, full adjustable box with power fittings and brass carpet flange. 2.11 SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Multi-conduit Surface or Trapeze Type Support and Pull or Junction Box Supports: 1. Material Requirements. a. Galvanized steel: ASTEM A123 or ASTM A153. b. Stainless steel: AISI Type 304 or 316. c. PVC coated galvanized steel: ASTM A123 or ASTM A153 and 20 mil PVC coating. d. Aluminum: AA Type 6063-T6. e. Fiberglass: Fire-retardant polyester or vinylester resin, ASTM E84, UL 94. B. Single Conduit and Outlet Box Support Fasteners: 1. Material Requirements: a. Zinc plated steel. b. Stainless steel, Type 304 or 316. c. Malleable iron. d. PVC coated malleable iron or steel: 20 mil PVC coating. M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 17 / 31 P. 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES e. Steel protected with zinc phosphate and oil finish. 2.12 RACEWAY/DUCT SEALING COMPOUND A. Use with explosion-proof fittings to separate hazardous areas from non-hazardous areas: 1. UL Listed compound 2. Crouse-Hinds Chico or approved equal. 3. Use fiber dam for vertical installation. B. All other areas: 1. Non-hardening, putty-like consistency workable at temperatures as low as 35 F. 2. Compound shall not slump at temperature of 300 F and shall readily adhere to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and common metals. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAY INSTALLATION — GENERAL A. Shall be in accordance with requirements of: 1. NFPA 70- NEC. 2. Manufacturer's instructions. B. Size of Raceways: 1. Raceway sizes are shown on Drawings. If not shown on the Drawings, then size in accordance with NFPA 70. 2. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, the minimum raceway size shall be: a. Conduit: 1 IN. b. Wireway: 2-1/2 IN x 2-1/2 IN. C. Field Bending and Cutting of Conduits: 1. Utilize tools and equipment recommended by the manufacturer of the conduit, designed for the purpose and the conduit material to make all field bends and cuts. 2. Do not reduce the internal diameter of the conduit when making conduit bends. 3. Prepare tools and equipment to prevent damage to the PVC coating. Use strap wrenches only to tighten joints in PVC-RGS. Replace all conduit and fittings with damage to the PVC coating, such as cuts, nicks, and threader chuck jaw marks. M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 18 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES 4. Degrease threads after threading and apply a zinc rich paint. 5. Deburr interior and exterior after cutting. D. Male threads of conduit systems shall be coated with an electrically conductive anti- seize compound. E. The protective coating integrity of conduits, fittings, outlet, pull and junction boxes and accessories shall be maintained. 1. Repair galvanized components utilizing a zinc rich paint. 2. Repair painted components utilizing touch up paint provided by or approved by the manufacturer. 3. Repair PVC coated components utilizing a patching compound, of the same material as the coating, provided by the manufacturer of the conduit; or a self- adhesive, highly conformable, cross-linked silicon composition strip, followed by a protective coating of vinyl tape. a. Total nominal thickness: 40 mil. 4. Repair surface which will be inaccessible after installation prior to installation. F. Remove moisture and debris from conduit before wire is pulled into place. 1. Pull mandrel with diameter nominally 1/4 IN smaller than the interior of the conduit, to remove obstructions. 2. Swab conduit by pulling a clean, tight-fitting rag through the conduit. 3. Tightly plug ends of conduit with tapered wood plugs or plastic inserts until wire is pulled. G. Only nylon or polyethylene rope shall be used to pull wire and cable in conduit systems. H. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Leave not less than 12 IN of slack at each end of the pull wire. I. Where portions of a raceway are subject to different temperatures and where condensation is known to be a problem, as in cold storage areas of buildings or where passing from the interior to the exterior of a building, the raceway shall be sealed to prevent circulation of warm air to colder section of the raceway. J. Fill openings in walls, floor, and ceilings and finish flush with surface. 1. Where penetrating CMU block walls, repair with cementitious grout and paint to match. 2. Where conduit terminates at a cable tray system, fit conduit with an insulated bushing. M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 19 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES 3. When conduits are passing through a firewall or fire-rated floor into different rooms, cabinets, or enclosures, use a fire-rated seal. K. Install explosion-proof seals in conduit runs crossing or entering a hazardous classified area. Install CSBE removable sealing fittings to seal submersible pump cables in the wet well and at the first junction box outside the well. L. Conduit Stub-ups 1. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of bends is not visible above finished slab. 2. Transition underground conduit to aboveground conduit at 90 DEG elbow where conduit transitions from horizontal to vertical conduit. 3. Where RGC or RAC is in contact with earth or concrete, wrap conduit with corrosion protective tap to 4 IN above finished grade. 4. Stub-up connections: Extend conduits for connection to freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs, and set flush with finished floor. 3.02 RACEWAY ROUTING A. Raceways shall be routed in the field unless otherwise indicated. 1. Conduit and fittings shall be installed, as required, for a complete system that has a neat appearance and is in compliance with all applicable codes. 2. Run in straight lines parallel to or at right angles to building lines. 3. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. Provide adequate headroom. 4. Do not route conduits: a. Through areas of high ambient temperature or radiant heat. b. In suspended concrete slabs. 5. Conduit shall not interfere with, or prevent access to, piping, valves, ductwork, or other equipment for operation, maintenance and repair. 6. Provide pull boxes or conduit bodies as needed so that there is a maximum of 270 degrees of bends or 3-90 degree bends in the conduit run or in long straight runs to limit pulling tensions. 7. Make changes in direction of conduit using elbows or fittings. Do not use pull boxes to make direction changes unless specifically designated otherwise. B. All rigid conduits within a structure shall be installed exposed except as follows: M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 20 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES 1. As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Concealed above gypsum wall board or acoustical tile suspended ceilings. 3. Concealed within stud frame, poured concrete, concrete block and brick walls of an architecturally finished area. 4. Embedded in floor slabs or buried under floor serving equipment in non- architecturally finished areas that are not locate on or near a wall or column and the ceiling height is greater than 12 FT. 5. Embedded in floor slabs or buried under floor slabs where shown on the Drawings or with the Engineer's permission. C. Maintain minimum spacing between parallel conduit and piping runs in accordance with the following when runs are greater than 30 FT: 1. Between instrumentation and telecommunication: 1 IN. 2. Between instrumentation and 125 V, 48 V, and 24 Vdc: 2 IN. 3. Between instrumentation and 600 V and less AC power or control: 12 IN. 4. Between instrumentation and greater than 600 Vac power: 12 IN. 5. Between telecommunication and 125 V, 48 V, and 24 Vdc: 2 IN. 6. Between telecommunication and 600 V and less AC power or control: 6 IN. 7. Between telecommunication and greater than 600 Vac power: 12 IN. 8. Between 125 V, 48 V, and 24 Vdc and 600 V and less AC power or control: 1 IN. 9. Between 125 V, 48 V, and 24 Vdc and greater than 600 V power or control: 2 IN. 10. Between process, gas, air, and water pipes: 6 IN. D. Conduits shall be installed to eliminate moisture pockets. 1. Where water cannot drain to openings, provide drain fittings in the low spots of the conduit run. E. Conduit shall not be routed on the exterior of structures except as specifically indicated on the Drawings. F. Where sufficient room exists within the housing of roof-mounted equipment, the conduit shall be stubbed up inside the housing. G. Provide all required openings in walls, floors, and ceilings for conduit penetration. 1. Repair penetrations to existing condition or better. M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 21 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES H. Conduit embedded in columns and floor slabs or buried under slab-on-grade: 1. Run in the most direct, practical route. 2. Not to be installed under equipment pads unless approved by Engineer. 3. No crossovers unless approved by Engineer. 4. To be backfilled with concrete during the installation of the slab-on-grade or to be placed, backfilled, and compacted in the slab subgrade, as indicated on drawings. 5. Secured in place to prevent movement during the backfill and pour. Conduits and accessories embedded in concrete where shown on the Drawings: 1. Shall not be considered to replace structurally the displaced concrete except as indicated in the following: a. Conduit and fittings shall not displace more than 4 percent of the area of the cross-section of a column on which stress is calculated or which is required for fire protection. b. Size and locate sleeves or conduits passing through floors, walls, or beams so as not to significantly impair the strength of the construction. c. Sleeves or conduits passing through floors, walls or beams may be considered as replacing the displaced concrete structurally in compression. 1) Shall not be exposed to rusting or other deterioration. 2) Nominal inside diameter shall not exceed 2 IN. 3) Minimum spacing: 3 DIA OC. 2. Shall not be larger in outside diameter than one-third the thickness of the slab, column, or beam. 3. Shall have a minimum spacing of 3 DIA OC. 4. In reinforced concrete construction: a. Conduit shall not be run in beams. b. Place conduit after reinforcing steel has been laid. c. The reinforcement steel shall not be displaced by the conduit. d. Provide a minimum of 1-1/2 IN of cover over conduit, excluding surface finish. e. Conduits parallel to main reinforcement shall be run near the center of the M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 22 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES wall. f. Conduits perpendicular to main reinforcement shall be run midway between wall or slab supports. 3.03 RACEWAY APPLICATIONS A. Permitted Raceway Types Per Area Designations (unless specifically indicated on Drawings): 1. Dry areas: a. RGS. b. RAC. 2. Wet areas: a. RGS. b. RAC. 3. Exterior Corrosive areas (includes, but not limited to wastewater project sites): a. PVC-RGS. b. PVC-RAC. 4. Interior Corrosive areas (includes, but not limited to chemical rooms): a. PVC-40. b. PVC-80. c. Fiberglass. d. As indicated on drawings. B. Permitted Raceway types per Routing Locations: 1. In stud framed walls: a. EMT. 2. In concrete block or brick walls: a. PVC-40. 3. Above acoustical tile ceilings: a. EMT. b. NEMA 1 rated Wireway. 4. Embedded in poured concrete walls and floors: a. PVC-40 b. PVC-80 c. Fiberglass M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 23 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES d. PVC-RGS when emerging from concrete into areas designated as exterior and corrosive. 5. Beneath floor slab-on grade: a. PVC-40 b. PVC-80 c. Fiberglass 6. Direct buried conduits and ductbanks: a. PVC-40. b. PVC-80. c. Fiberglass. d. 90 degree elbows for transition to above grade: 1) PVC-RGS. 2) Fiberglass. e. Long sweeping bends greater than 15 degrees. 1) PVC-RGS. 2) Fiberglass. 7. Concrete encased ductbanks: a. PVC-40. b. PVC-80. c. Fiberglass. d. 90 degree elbows for transition to above grade: 1) PVC-RGS. 2) Fiberglass. e. Long sweeping bends greater than 15 degrees. 1) PVC-RGS. 2) Fiberglass. C. FLEX conduits shall be installed for connections to light fixtures, HVAC equipment and other similar devices above the ceilings. 1. The maximum length shall not exceed: a. 6 FT to light fixtures. b. 3 FT to all other equipment. M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 24 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES D. FLEX-LT and FLEX-NM conduits shall be installed as the final conduit connection to light fixtures, dry type transformers, motors, electrically operated valves, instrumentation primary elements, and other electrical equipment that is liable to vibrate. 1. The maximum length shall not exceed: a. 6 FT to light fixtures. b. 3 FT to motors. c. 2 FT to all other equipment. E. NEMA 1 Rated Wireway: 1. Surface mounted in electrical rooms. 2. Surface mounted above removable ceilings tiles of an architecturally finished area. F. NEMA 3R Wiring Trough: 1. Surface mounted in exterior, non-corrosive locations. G. NEMA 4X Rated Wireway: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as corrosive. H. NEMA 12 Rated Wireway: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as dry in architecturally and non- architecturally finished areas. 3.04 CONDUIT FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES A. Conduit Seals: 1. Install in conduit systems located in hazardous areas as required by the NEC or as shown on Drawings. B. Rigid non-metallic conduit and fittings shall be joined utilizing solvent cement. 1. Immediately after installation of conduit and fitting, the fitting or conduit shall be rotated 1/4 turn to provide uniform contact. C. Install Expansion Fittings: 1. Where conduits are exposed to the sun and conduit run is greater than 200 FT. 2. Elsewhere as identified on the Drawings. D. Install Expansion/Deflection Fittings: 1. Where conduits enter a structure. M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 25 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES a. Except electrical manholes and handholes. b. Except where the duct bank is tied to the structure with rebar. 2. Where conduits span structural expansion joints. 3. Elsewhere as identified on the Drawings. E. Threaded connections shall be made wrench-tight. F. Conduit joints shall be watertight: 1. Where subjected to possible submersion. 2. In areas classified as wet. 3. Underground. G. Terminate Conduits: 1. In metallic outlet boxes: a. RGS and RAC: 1) Conduit hub and locknut. 2) Insulated bushing and two (2) locknuts. 3) Use grounding type locknut or bushing when required by NEC. b. EMT: Compression type connector and locknut. 2. In NEMA 1 rated enclosures: a. RGS and RAC: 1) Conduit hub and locknut. 2) Insulated bushing and two (2) locknuts. 3) Use grounding type locknut or bushing when required by NEC. b. EMT: Compression type connector and locknut. 3. In NEMA 12 rated enclosures: a. Watertight, insulated and gasketed hub and locknut. b. Use grounding type locknut or bushing when required by NEC. 4. In NEMA 3R, 4 and NEMA 4X rated enclosures: a. Watertight, insulated and gasketed hub and locknut. 5. In NEMA 7 and NEMA 9 rated enclosures: a. Into an integral threaded hub. M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 26 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES 6. When stubbed up through the floor into floor mounted equipment: a. With an insulated grounding bushing on metallic conduits. b. With end bells on non-metallic conduits. H. Threadless couplings shall only be used to join new conduit to existing conduit when the existing conduit end is not threaded and it is not practical or possible to cut threads on the existing conduit with a pipe threader. 3.05 CONDUIT SUPPORT A. Permitted multi-conduit surface or trapeze type support system per area designations and conduit types: 1. Dry or wet and/ or hazardous areas: a. Galvanized system consisting of: Galvanized steel channels and fittings, nuts and hardware and conduit straps. b. Aluminum system consisting of: Aluminum channels, fittings and conduit clamps with stainless steel nuts and hardware. c. Stainless steel system consisting of: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel channels and fittings, nuts and hardware and conduit straps. 2. Corrosive areas: a. PVC coated steel system consisting of: PVC coated galvanized steel channels and fittings and conduit clamps with stainless steel nuts and hardware. b. Fiberglass system consisting of: Fiberglass channel and fittings, and conduit clamps with stainless steel nuts and hardware. c. Stainless steel systems consisting of Type 304 or 316 stainless steel channels and fittings, nuts and hardware and conduit straps. 3. Conduit type shall be compatible with the support system material. a. Galvanized steel system may be used with RGS and EMT. b. Stainless steel system may be used with RGS, PVC-RGS and RAC. c. PVC coated galvanized steel system may be used with PVC-RGS, RAC, PVC-40, PVC-80, and Fiberglass. d. Aluminum system may be used with RAC and PVC-RGS. e. Fiberglass system may be used with PVC-40, PVC-80, PVC-RGS, and Fiberglass. M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 27 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES B. Permitted single conduit support fasteners per area designations and conduit types: 1. Architecturally finished areas: a. Material: Zinc plated steel, or steel protected with zinc phosphate and oil finish. b. Types of fasteners: Spring type hangers and clips, straps, hangers with bolts, clamps with bolts, and bolt on beam clamps. c. Provide anti-rattle conduit supports when conduits are routed through metal studs. 2. Dry or wet and/or hazardous areas: a. Material: Zinc plated steel, stainless steel and malleable iron. b. Types of fasteners: Straps, hangers with bolts, clamps with bolts, and bolt on beam clamps. 3. Corrosive areas: a. Material: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel or PVC coated malleable iron or steel. For indoor corrosive areas, non-metallic PVC or fiberglass straps may be used. b. Types of fasteners: Straps, hangers with bolts, clamps with bolts, and bolt on beam clamps. 4. Conduit type shall be compatible with the support fastener material. a. Zinc plated steel, steel protected with zinc phosphate and oil finish and malleable iron fasteners may be used with RGS and EMT. b. Stainless steel system may be used with RGS, PVC-RGS, and RAC. c. PVC coated fasteners may be used with PVC-RGS, RAC, PVC 40, and PVC-80. d. Non-metallic fasteners may be used with PVC-40, PVC-80, and fiberglass. C. Conduit Support General Requirements: 1. Maximum spacing between conduit supports per NEC. 2. Support conduit from the building structure. 3. Do not support conduit from process, gas, air, water piping or other conduits. 4. Provide hangers and brackets to limit the maximum uniform load on a single support to 25 LBS or to the maximum uniform load. Recommended by the M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 28 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES manufacturer if the support is rated less than 25 LBS. a. Do not exceed the maximum concentrated load recommended by the manufacturer on any support. b. Conduit hangers: 1) Continuous threaded rods combined with struts or conduit clamps: Do not use perforated strap hangers and iron bailing wire. c. Do not use suspended ceiling support systems to support raceways. d. Hangers in metal roof decks: 1) Utilize fender washers. 2) Not extend above top of ribs. 3) Not interfere with vapor barrier, insulation, or roofing. 5. Conduit support system fasteners: a. Use sleeve-type expansion anchors as fasteners in masonry wall construction. b. Do not use concrete nails and powder-driven fasteners. 3.06 OUTLET, PULL, AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install approved thread grease on all plugs prior to installation. 3. Fill unused punched-out tapped, or threaded hub openings with insert plugs. Size boxes to accommodate quantity of conductors enclosed and quantity of conduits connected to the box. B. Outlet Boxes: 1. Permitted uses of metallic outlet boxes: a. Housing of wiring devices: 1) Recessed in all stud framed walls and ceilings. 2) Recessed in poured concrete, concrete block, and brick walls of architecturally finished areas and exterior building walls. b. Pull or junction box: 1) Above gypsum wall board or acoustical tile ceilings. M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 29 / 31 P. 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES 2) Above 10 FT in an architecturally finished area where there is no ceiling. 2. Permitted uses of cast outlet boxes: a. Housing of wiring devices surface mounted in non-architecturally finished dry, wet, corrosive, and hazardous areas. b. Pull and junction box surface mounted in non-architecturally finished dry, wet, and corrosive areas. 3. Permitted uses of non-metallic outlet boxes: a. Housing of wiring devices surface mounted in non-architecturally finished corrosive areas. b. Pull and junction boxes mounted in non-architecturally finished corrosive areas. 4. Mount devices outlet boxes where indicated on the Drawings and at the following heights: a. Light switch (to center): 48 IN. b. Receptacle in architecturally finished areas (to center): 18 IN. c. Receptacle on exterior wall of building (to center): 18 IN. d. Receptacle in non-architecturally finished areas (to center): 48 IN. e. Telephone outlet in architecturally finished areas (to center): 18 IN. f. Telephone outlet for wall-mounted phone (to center): 54 IN. g. Pushbutton or selector switch control station (to center): 48 IN. 5. Set device outlet boxes plumb and vertical to the floor. 6. Outlet boxes recessed in walls: a. Install with appropriate stud wall support brackets or adjustable bar hangers so that they are flush with the face of the wall. b. Locate in ungrouted cell of concrete block with bottom edge of box flush with bottom edge of block and flush with the face of the block. 7. Place barriers between switches in boxes with 277 V switches on opposite phases. 8. Back-to-back installations are not permitted. 9. When an outlet box is connected to a PVC coated conduit, the box shall also be PVC coated. C. Pull and Junction Boxes: M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 30 / 31 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland RACEWAYS AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BOXES 1. Install pull or junction boxes in conduit runs where indicated or required to facilitate pulling of wires or making connections. a. Make covers of boxes accessible. 2. Permitted uses of NEMA 1 enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted above removable ceiling tiles of an architecturally finished area. b. Pull or junction box surface in a non-architecturally finished area. 3. Permitted uses of NEMA 3R enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in dry and wet areas, unless stated otherwise in Drawings. 4. Permitted uses of NEMA 4X metallic enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in areas designated as wet and/or corrosive. 5. Permitted uses of NEMA 4X non-metallic enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in indoor areas designated as wet and/or corrosive where used with PVC-40 or PVC-80 conduit. 6. Permitted uses of NEMA 7 enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in Class I hazardous areas. 1) Provide PVC coating in corrosive areas when PVC-RGS conduit is used. 7. Permitted uses of NEMA 9 enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in Class II hazardous areas. 1) Provide PVC coating in corrosive areas when PVC-RGS conduit is used. 8. Permitted uses of NEMA 12 enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in areas designated as dry. END OF SECTION M: 5/17/2019 16110 - 31 / 31 P. 3/2/2020 City of Pearland UNDERGROUND DUCTS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND PULL BOXES SECTION 16119 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND PULL BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ducts 2. Duct banks 3. Pull Boxes 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. C2-93 - National Electrical Safety Code. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Duct: General term for electrical conduit and other raceway, either metallic or nonmetallic, specified for use underground, embedded in earth or concrete. B. Duct Bank: Group of two or more ducts in continuous run between two points. C. Underfloor Conduits. 1. Conduits which run underground within perimeter of building walls under building floor. This may consist of one conduit, or several conduits grouped together. D. Duct Bank Conduits 1. Conduits which run underground outside perimeter of building walls may consist of 1 conduit, or several conduits grouped together. E. Underground Conduits 1. Underground conduits are both underfloor conduits and duct bank conduits. F. Pull boxes: Below-the-surface enclosure in connection with ducts into which people reach, but do not enter, for purpose of installing, operating, or maintaining equipment or wiring. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. B. Submittals are not required if Contractor supplies materials or equipment of specified or named manufacturers. If Contractor proposes substitutions to material or equipment of specified or named manufacturers, submittals identified below are required. M: 6/24/2015 16119 - 1 / 5 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland UNDERGROUND DUCTS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND PULL BOXES 1. Product data. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturers of precast pull boxes shall be firms regularly engaged in manufacturing factory-fabricated pull boxes, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 yrs. B. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC): Components and installation shall comply with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store precast concrete units at site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible. B. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordination of Work: 1. Coordinate layout and installation of pull boxes with final arrangement of ducts as influenced by actual final location of other utilities in field. 2. Coordinate elevations of duct and raceway entrances into pull boxes with final profiles of ducts and raceways as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and buildings. 3. Establish locations and elevations to suit field conditions and assure duct banks run drain to pull boxes, or as shown on Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. Conform to Raceways, Section 16110. M: 6/24/2015 16119 - 2 / 5 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland UNDERGROUND DUCTS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND PULL BOXES 2.02 DUCT BANK ACCESSORIES A. Duct Supports: Rigid PVC spacers selected to provide minimum duct spacings and concrete cover depths indicated, while rigidly supporting ducts during concreting. 2.03 PULL BOXES AND ACCESSORIES A. Frames and Covers: Cast iron conforming to ANSI C2, Rule 323. Furnish with cast-in legend, "Electric" or "Signal" as appropriate. Cover-to-frame bearing surfaces machined. B. Sump Frame and Grate: Comply with FS RR-F-621, Type VII for frame, Type I for cover. C. Pulling Eyes in Walls: Eyebolt with rebar fastening insert. 2-in. dia eye, 1-in. by 4-in. long bolt. Working load embedded in 6-in., 4,000 psi concrete: 13,000-lbs. minimum tension. 2.04 MASONRY (Not Applicable) 2.05 PRECAST MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES (Not Applicable) 2.06 RACEWAY/DUCT SEALING COMPOUND A. Compound: 1. Non-hardening, putty-like consistency workable at temperatures as low as 35 F. 2. Compound shall not slump at temperature of 300 F and shall readily adhere to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and common metals. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WIRING METHOD A. General: Install ducts for wiring runs indicated. Provide sizes as indicated. 3.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Excavation: Cut trenches neatly and uniformly, and slope uniformly to required pitch. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF DUCTS A. Slope: Pitch ducts to drain towards manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Minimum slope shall be 4-in. in 100-ft. Where necessary to achieve this between manholes, slope ducts from high point in run to drain in both directions. B. Curves and Bends: Use manufactured elbows for stub-ups at equipment and at building entrances. For other curves and bends, except as otherwise indicated, use manufactured long sweep bends with minimum radius of 25ft. in both horizontal and M: 6/24/2015 16119 - 3 / 5 P. 3/2/2020 City of Pearland UNDERGROUND DUCTS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND PULL BOXES vertical directions. C. Make joints in ducts and fittings watertight in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane. D. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support on plastic separators coordinated with duct size and required duct spacing, and install in accordance with following: 1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, and secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel in such way as to form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. 2. Reinforcing: Reinforce duct banks. Size and arrange reinforcing steel as indicated on Drawings. 3. Concreting: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct bank application. Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation unless approved by Engineer. Where more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in vertical plane and continue duct bank reinforcing minimum of 18-in. beyond termination of pour. 4. Forms: Walls of trench may be used to form side walls of duct bank provided soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions. Use forms where soil is not self-supporting. 5. Minimum Clearances: As Indicated on Drawings. 6. Depth: Except as otherwise indicated, top of duct bank shall be 24-in. below finished grade, minimum, in non-traffic areas, and 30 in. below finished grade, minimum, in vehicular traffic areas. E. Stub-ups: Duct stub-ups to equipment shall be rigid steel, PVC-coated rigid steel, or rigid aluminum type conduit matching the above ground conduit requirements for the area. PVC conduit is not permitted to be used. For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete pads, steel conduit shall extend minimum of 5-ft. away from edge of pad. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for purpose and encased concrete. 1. For galvanized rigid steel and aluminum conduit, wrap all portions of the conduit exposed to soil or concrete to 4" above finished grade with corrosion protection tape. F. Sealing: For ducts to be wired in this Project, provide temporary closure at terminations. For spare ducts, seal bore of ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs as required to withstand 15 psi minimum hydrostatic pressure. G. Pulling Cord: Provide 100-lb test nylon cord in ducts including spares. H. Marker Tape: Provide plastic marker tape over ducts at 12 in. below finished grade. M: 6/24/2015 16119 - 4 / 5 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland UNDERGROUND DUCTS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation AND PULL BOXES 3.04 INSTALLATION OF PULL BOXES, GENERAL A. General: 1. Provide pull boxes of sizes, shapes, and locations as indicated. 2. Determine final elevation of ducts as influenced by possible adjustments in other utilities and surface features and discovery of underground obstructions before installing pull boxes. Obtain Engineer's approval for pull boxes installation adjustments necessitated by obstructions. 3. Install units plumb and level and with orientation and depth coordinated with arrangement of connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. B. Elevation: 1. Pull Boxes: Install flush with grade. C. Drainage: Install drains in bottom of units where indicated. Arrange to coordinate with drainage provisions as indicated or specified. 3.05 CLEANING AND RESTORATION A. Clean Ducts: Clean full length of ducts with a round bristle brush with dia 114-in. greater than internal diameter of duct. B. Clean Pull Boxes: Clean internal surfaces of manholes including sump. Remove foreign material. 3.06 RESTORATION A. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades except as otherwise indicated. B. Where sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. C. Restore all areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work to their original condition. D. Include necessary top soiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, or mulching. E. Restore disturbed paving as indicated. END OF SECTION M: 6/24/2015 16119 - 5 / 5 P. 3/2/2020 City of Pearland 600-VOLT POWER Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation CABLE C. Insulation: Insulate each conductor as specified on the 600 Volt Power Cable Data Sheets to meet the requirements of Part 3 of ICEA S-61-402, S-66-524 or S-68-516. The insulation thickness shall match the dimensions listed in Section 3.2, Table 3-1 of ICEA S-61-402, S-66-524 or S-68-516, as specified on the data sheets. D. Jacket: 1. When power cables are to be enclosed in conduit, ducts or in other raceway systems, multiconductor power cables shall be of the non-metallic type and shall be covered by an overall nonmetallic jacket as specified on the Data Sheets, which complies with the requirements of Section 4.4 of ICEA S-66-524 or S-68- 516, Section 4.3 of ICEA S-61-402, or Table 21-5 of Part 21 of UL 83. 2. Single-conductor cables shall have a jacket thickness which meets the requirements of Table 4-4 of Part 4 of ICEA S-66-524, Table 4-2 of Part 4 of ICEA S-68-516, or Table 4-2 or 4-6 of Part 4 of ICEA S-61-402. Multi-conductor cables shall have a jacket thickness, which complies with Table 4-7 of Part 4 of ICEA S-66-524, Table 4-2 of Part 4 of ICEA S-68-516, Table 4-5 of Part 4 of ICEA S-68-516, or Table 4-6 of Part 4 of ICEA S-61-402, unless otherwise specified on the data sheets. E. Armor: When power cables are to be exposed in a cable tray, cable channel or other cable support systems, the multiconductor power cables shall be protected by an interlocked metal armor made of galvanized steel which meets the requirements of paragraph 4.5 of ICEA S-68-516 or S-66-524 unless otherwise specified on the data sheets. An over-all jacket shall be provided as specified in the data sheets. F. Cable Marking: Print cable marking information on the overall cable jacket at 2-foot intervals. Use a permanent printing method color with a sharply contrasting the jacket color. Identify individual conductors as specified on the data sheets in conformance with Part 5 of ICEA S-61-402, S-66-524, and S-68-516. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Complete cable raceway systems, underground duct banks, and cable support systems before installing cables. B. Verify sizing of raceways and pullboxes to ensure proper accommodation for the cables. C. Check the length of the cable raceway system against the length of cable on the selected reel. D. Do not install or work on PVC insulated or jacketed cables in temperatures below 32 degrees F. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Cable in Conduit and Ductbank: M: 3/28/2018 16122 - 3 /4 P:3/2/2020 City of Pearland 600-VOLT POWER Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation CABLE 1. Clean conduits of all foreign matter before cables are pulled. 2. Install cables in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the National Electrical Code (NEC), Chapter 3 - Wiring Methods and Materials. Do not exceed maximum wire tension, maximum insulation pressure and minimum bending radius. 3. Pull cables into conduits using adequate lubrication to reduce friction. Lubricants must not be harmful to the conductor insulation. B. Cable in Tray: 1. Install medium voltage (5 Kv and 15 Kv) and 600V cables in separate trays or separated cables by a barrier in a single tray in accordance with NEC 318-6(f). 2. Install cables in trays in a neat and orderly manner. Tie cables to the tray rungs at approximate 15-foot intervals by use of cable ties. 3. Only one layer of 3-conductor No. 4/0 AWG and larger 600-volt power cables are allowed in a cable tray per NEC 318-9(a). 4. Using cable ties, make a triplex of single conductors used for 3-phase systems. Install in cable tray in accordance with NEC 318-10. C. Preparation for Termination: 1. Make up 600-volt power cable terminations and splices with heat shrinkable sleeves and seals. 2. Use crimp-on terminal lugs and connectors for all sizes of conductors. 3. Use crimp-on lugs with long barrel and two-hole tongues, except in places where terminations space is limited. D. Tests: 1. Before connecting the cables, test insulation integrity. 2. Use a 500 VDC megohmmeter and perform the cable insulation test in accordance with the operating instructions. E. Termination: 1. After the 600-volt cable has been tested with satisfactory results, terminate the cable at both ends to designated terminal points. 2. Tighten connection bolts with a torque wrench to specified torque levels. END OF SECTION M: 3/28/2018 16122 - 4 /4 P:3/2/2020 City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation CABLE SECTION 16126 INSTRUMENTATION CABLE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specifications for instrumentation cable. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1. ASTM B3: Soft or Annealed Copper Wires. 2. ASTM B8: Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium Hard, Soft. 3. ASTM B33: Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes. B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), IEEE 383-2.5: IEEE Standard for Type Test of Class IE Electric Cables, Field Splices, and Connections for Nuclear Power Generating Stations. C. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA): 1. ICEA S-61-402: Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy (NEMA WC-5). 2. ICEA S-66-524: Cross-Linked-Thermosetting-Polyethylene-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy (NEMA WC-7). 3. ICEA S-68-516: Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy (NEMA WC-8). D. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): 1. UL 44: Rubber Insulated Wires and Cables. 2. UL 83: Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cables. E. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA), NFPA No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), Chapter No. 3 - Wiring Methods and Materials, Article 725 - Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 Remote Control, Signaling, and Power-Limited Circuits. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under the provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals: 1. Completed engineer's data sheets from this specification or manufacturer's data sheets, cut sheets, and catalog data. 2. Installation, terminating and splicing procedure (including bending radius and pulling tension data). M:4/17/2019 16126 - 1 / 5 P:3/2/20 City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation CABLE 3. Instruction for handling and storage. 4. Dimensions and weight. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tests: 1. Cable shall be tested at the factory to confirm that the cable complies with requirements of ICEA Section 7.7.9 of S-66-524 or 7.5.9 of S-68-516. Refer to data sheet for additional test requirements. 2. Where applicable, the cable shall meet the requirements of the vertical tray flame test as described in IEEE 383-2.5. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Ship cable on manufacturer's standard reel sizes unless otherwise specified. Where cut lengths are specified, mark reel footage accordingly. Each reel shall contain one continuous length of cable. Reels shall be of the type specified on the data sheets. Provide impact protection by wood lagging or suitable barrier across the traverse of the reel. Provide moisture protection by manufacturer's standard procedure or heat shrinkable self-sealing end caps applied to both ends of the cable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Alpha Wire Corporation B. Belden Division, Cooper Industries, Inc. C. Cablec Continental Cables Company D. Dekoron Wire & Cable, LLC E. General Cable Company F. Manhattan Electric Cable Corporation G. Okonite Company 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Design: Provide cable with the following design characteristics. The cable shall consist of multiple conductors. The cable assembly shall be UL listed, flame, oil and sunlight resistant, and certified for continuous operation at the temperature specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets in wet or dry locations while installed in underground duct, conduit, or cable tray. The number and size of conductors supplied in each cable shall correspond to the quantities specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets. Each conductor shall be individually insulated. Pairs and triads shall have conductors, which are twisted together with a drain wire, shielded, and covered with a jacket. Multi- pair/triad cables shall consist of the required number of electrically isolated, shielded pairs or triads, which are bundled together and covered by an overall jacket as specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets. B. Conductors: Provide conductors which are Class B, concentric stranded, annealed tinned copper whose physical and electrical properties comply with ASTM B3, B8 or B33 M:4/17/2019 16126 - 2 / 5 P: 3/2/20 City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation CABLE and Part 2 of ICEA S-61-402, S-66-524, or S-68-516, unless otherwise specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets. C. Insulation: Each conductor shall be insulated as specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets in compliance the requirements of Part 3 of ICEA S-61-402, S-66-524, or S-68-516. The average insulation thickness shall not be less than the dimensions shown in Table 7-32 or 7.5.1 of ICEA S-66-524 or S-68-516 for 600-volt insulation unless otherwise specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets. The minimum insulation thickness shall not be less than 90 percent of the value given in the table. D. Drain Wire: Provide drain wire which is Class B, seven-stranded, tin-coated copper in accordance with ASTM B3, B8, or B33 and as specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets. The drain wire shall not be less than two AWG sizes smaller than the insulated conductor's size, except for multiple pair triad drain wires, which shall not be less than the insulated conductor size. E. Shielding: Provide shielding consisting of laminated, nonburning, mylar-backed aluminum tape applied helically around a twisted pair or triad with the aluminum side in continuous contact with the drain wire unless otherwise specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheet. Wrap the tape around each twisted pair or triad with a 25 percent minimum overlap unless otherwise specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets. F. Jacket: The physical and electrical properties of the jacket used to cover single or multi-pair or triad cables shall meet the requirements of section 7.7.7 or ICEA S-66-524 or section 7.5.6 of ICEA S-68-516. Jacket material is specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets. The jacket thickness shall be equal to the dimensions shown in Table 7-33 or 7.5.2 of ICEA S-66-524 or S-68-516. The jacket material is specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets. The jacket thickness shall be equal to the dimensions shown in Table 7-33 or 7.5.2 of ICEA S-66-524 or S-68-516. G. Armor: Where requested, use instrumentation cables protected by an interlocked metal tape armor coating made of galvanized steel which meets the requirements of paragraph 4.5 of ICEA S-68-516 or S-66-524, unless otherwise specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets. H. Conductor Identification: Use individual conductors in single-pair and single-triad cables which are color coded black and white; and black, white and red, respectively. Multi- pair-triad cables shall have one conductor in each pair or triad colored white, and all other conductors are color coded in sequence according to Table L-2 of Appendix 2 of ICEA S-66-524, and as specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets. I. Cable Marking: Print cable-marking information on the jacket of each cable at 2-foot intervals. Use a permanent printing method with color sharply contrasting the jacket color. See the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets for the minimum information required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Complete cable raceway systems, underground duct banks and cable support systems before installing cables. M:4/17/2019 16126 - 3 / 5 P:3/2/20 City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation CABLE B. Verify sizing of raceways and pullboxes to ensure proper accommodation for the cables. C. Check the length of the cable raceway system against the length of cable on the selected reel. D. Do not install or work on PVC insulated or jacketed cables in temperatures below 32 degrees F. E. Clean conduits of foreign matter before cables are pulled. F. Provide at least 30 percent spare conductors or pairs. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Cable in Conduit and Ductbank 1. Install cables in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and NEC Article 725 - Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 Remote Control, Signaling and Power Limited Circuits. Do not exceed maximum wire tension, maximum insulation pressure and minimum bending radius. 2. Pull cables into conduits using adequate lubrication to reduce friction. Lubricants must not be harmful to the conductor insulation or cable jacket. 3. Conduits carrying low-level signal cables shall be PVC-coated rigid steel. B. Cable in Tray: Install instrument and signal cable in cable tray only when the tray is dedicated for this type cable and cables are approved for tray installation. C. Termination: 1. Do not splice conductors. For termination use crimp-on type ring tongue non- insulated tin-plated copper lugs. 2. For shielded control cable, terminate the shield and ground it at one end only, preferably at the control panel end for instrument and communication cable and at the supply end for electronic power cables. Shield on ungrounded cable end to be wrapped cylindrically around cable end and thoroughly insulated with Scotch 33 electrical tape. Grounded end to be of sufficient length to reach ground screw or terminal strip and insulated with transparent tubing. 3. If splicing is required, maintain shield continuity by jumpering the ground shield across connection point where it is broken at junction boxes, or other splice points. Insulate these points from ground. 4. Mark wiring on both ends with circuit numbers or loop tag numbers. Heat shrink wire markers after the ring tongue terminal has been installed. Extend the marker over the crimp or base of the terminal. D. Tests: 1. Before connecting the cables, test insulation integrity and conductor continuity. M:4/17/2019 16126 - 4 / 5 P: 3/2/20 City of Pearland 600-VOLT POWER Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation CABLE SECTION 16122 600-VOLT POWER CABLE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specifications for 600-volt power cable. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM B3: Soft or Annealed Copper Wires. 2. ASTM B8: Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium Hard, Soft. 3. ASTM B33: Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes. B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), IEEE 383-2.5: IEEE Standard for Type Test of Class IE Electric Cables, Field Splices, and Connections for Nuclear Power Generating Stations. C. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA): 1. ICEA S-61-402: Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy (NEMA WC-5). 2. ICEA S-66-524: Cross-Linked-Thermosetting-Polyethylene-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy (NEMA WC-7). 3. ICEA S-68-516: Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy (NEMA WC-8). D. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): 1. UL 44: Rubber Insulated Wires and Cables. 2. UL 83: Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cables. E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), Chapter No.3 - Wiring Methods and Materials. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under the provisions of Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: 1. Completed engineer's data sheets 2. Completed manufacturer's data sheets 3. Manufacturer's cut sheets, catalog data 4. Installation, terminating and splicing procedure 5. Instruction for handling and storage 6. Dimensions and weight M: 3/28/2018 16122 - 1 /4 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland 600-VOLT POWER Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation CABLE 7. Conformance certificate 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tests: 1. Cable shall be tested at the factory to confirm that the cable complies with requirements of Part 6 of ICEA S-61-402, S-66-524 or S-68-516. Refer to data sheet for additional test requirements. 2. Where applicable, the cable shall meet the requirements of the vertical tray flame test as described in IEEE 383-2.5 1.05 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Ship cable on manufacturer's standard reel sizes unless otherwise specified. Where cut lengths are specified, mark reel footage accordingly. Each reel shall contain one continuous length of cable. Reels shall be of the type specified on the data sheets. Provide impact protection by wood lagging or suitable barrier across the traverse of the reel. Provide moisture protection by manufacturer's standard procedure or heat shrinkable self-sealing end caps applied to both ends of the cable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES A. Alan Wire B. American Insulated Wire Corporation C. Cerro Wire D. General Cable Company E. Houston Wire & Cable F. Okonite Company G. Interstate Wire Company H. Southwire I. Service Wire Company J. Encore Wire 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Design: Provide cable with the following design characteristic. Cable shall be UL 44 or UL 83 listed, rated 600 volts and certified for continuous operation at the temperature as specified on the 600 Volt Power Cable Data Sheets while installed in underground duct, conduit, or cable tray. Cables shall be single-conductor or multi-conductor (with ground) as specified on the data sheets. B. Conductors: Provide conductors which are Class B, concentric stranded, annealed copper coated, unless otherwise specified on the data sheets, with physical and electrical properties conforming to ASTM B3, B8 or B33 and Part 2 of ICEA S-61-402, S- 66-524, or S-68-516. The number and size of conductors supplied in each cable shall correspond to the quantities specified on the data sheets. M: 3/28/2018 16122 - 2 /4 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation CABLE 2. Test shielded cable shields with an ohmmeter for continuity along the length of the cable and for shield continuity to ground. 3. Connect shielded instrumentation cables to a calibrated 4-20 milliamp DC signal transmitter and receiver. Test at 4,12, and 20 milliamp transmitter settings. 4. Test each electrical circuit after permanent cables are in place to demonstrate that the circuit and connected equipment perform satisfactorily and that cables are free from improper grounds and short circuits. E. Termination: After the instrumentation cable has been tested with satisfactory results, the cable can be terminated at both ends to their designated terminal points. END OF SECTION M:4/17/2019 16126 - 5 / 5 P: 3/2/20 City of Pearland DEVICE, PULL AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation JUNCTION BOXES SECTION 16131 DEVICE, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specifications for device, pull, and junction boxes. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/National Electrical Manufacturers Association (ANSI/NEMA). 1. FB1 - Fittings and Support for Conduits and Cable Assemblies 2. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum) B. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA), NFPA70 - National Electrical Code (NEC) - Article 370 - Outlet Device, Pull and Junction Boxes, Conduit Bodies and Fittings. C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. 50 - Safety Cabinets and Boxes 2. 508 - Safety Industrial Control Equipment 3. 514B - Safety Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes 4. 886 - Safety Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous Areas 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. B. Manufacturer's cut sheets, catalog data C. Instruction for handling and storage 1. Installation instructions 2. Dimensions and weights M: 6/24/2015 16131 - 1 / 3 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland DEVICE, PULL AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation JUNCTION BOXES 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Pack and crate boxes to permit ease of handling and to provide protection from damage during shipping, handling and storage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cast Device Boxes 1. Appleton Electric Company 2. Crouse-Hinds, Division of Cooper Industries 3. Killark Electric Manufacturing Company 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Device Boxes 1. Provide UL-approved boxes designed and manufactured to house electrical devices like receptacles and switches, and in conformance with NEMA FB1 and NEC Article 370. 2. Supply boxes that are hot-dip galvanized on cast iron suitable for corrosive and 0 wet atmosphere. B. Hardware 1. Mounting Hardware: Stainless steel 2. Conduit Connectors: Watertight as manufactured by Myers Hubs, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Review the drawings and determine how many boxes of each kind are required and check if supplied quantity is sufficient. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Boxes described in this specification shall be used both in dry and wet, corrosive areas, both inside and outside locations. B. Install boxes in accordance with NEC Article 370 in locations indicated on the Drawings. M: 6/24/2015 16131 - 2 / 3 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland DEVICE, PULL AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation JUNCTION BOXES C. Install junction and pull boxes in readily accessible places to facilitate wire pulls, maintenance and repair. D. Plug unused conduit openings. E. Make conduit connections to sheet metal boxes with watertight conduit connectors. END OF SECTION M: 6/24/2015 16131 - 3 / 3 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation WIRING DEVICES SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specifications for wiring devices including: 1. Receptacles. 2. Wall switches. 3. Wall plates and cover plates. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/National Electrical Manufacturers Association (ANSI/NEMA): 1. NEMA WD1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices. 2. NEMA WD6 - Dimensional Requirements. B. Federal Specifications (WC-596F). C. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), Articles 210 Branch Circuits, 250 Grounding and 410, Paragraphs 56, 57 and 58. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval: 1. Manufacturer's product literature and specifications including dimensions, weights, certifications and instructions for handling, storage and installation. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Pack and crate devices to permit ease of handling and protect from damage during shipping, handling and storage. M: 5/9/2017 16140 - 1 / 3 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation WIRING DEVICES PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Bryant Electric B. Crouse-Hinds, Arrow Hart Division C. Hubbel Inc. Wiring Devices Division D. Leviton Manufacturing Company E. Pass & Seymour/Legrand. 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Standards: Conform to NEMA WD1 for general requirements and NEMA WD6 for dimensional requirements. B. Manufacture devices to heavy-duty industrial specification grade with brown nylon bodies (orange for isolated-ground receptacles) back and side wiring provisions and green-colored grounding screws. C. Receptacles: 1. Duplex-type receptacles: Rated 20 amps at 120 volts. 2. Contacts: Brass or phosphor bronze. 3. Receptacle grounding system: Extend to the mounting strap unless isolated ground is indicated or required. 4. GFI or GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter) receptacles: Provide feed-through type with test and reset button. D. Wall Switches: 1. Toggle switches: Rated 20 amps at 120/277 volts AC rated for both resistive and inductive loads. 2. Contacts: Silver cadmium oxide construction to prevent sticking, welding and excessive pitting. E. Cover Plates: 1. Receptacles: a. In outdoor areas, provide cover plates of cast metal, in-use type with stainless steel hardware. M: 5/9/2017 16140 - 2 / 3 P. 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation WIRING DEVICES b. In indoor, corrosive and/or wet areas, provide cover plates of polycarbonate type with stainless steel hardware. c. All other plates: Type 302 stainless steel. 2. Wall Switches a. In outdoor or corrosive or wet locations, provide cover plates of cast metal, gasketed with spring-loaded hinged covers and stainless steel hardware. b. All other plates: Type 302 stainless steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify that device boxes are correctly placed. B. Verify that the correct quantity, size and type of wires are pulled to each device box. C. Verify that wiring has been checked at both ends. D. Prepare wire ends for connection to devices. E. Inspect each wiring device for defects. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install switches with OFF position down. D. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. E. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper. F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductors clockwise around screw terminals. G. Install cover plates on switch, receptacle and blank outlets in finished areas. H. Energize and test devices for proper operation. END OF SECTION M: 5/9/2017 16140 - 3 / 3 P. 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation ELECTRIC MOTORS SECTION 16150 ELECTRIC MOTORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Description of Work: 1. Motors furnished under other sections of these specifications as part of equipment items shall conform to requirements of this section except as noted otherwise in that section or indicated otherwise on Drawings or schedules. 2. Submersible well motor shall be supplied in accordance with other sections of this specification. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): NEMA MG 1-1978 - Motors and Generators. B. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): IEEE Standard 112-1978 - Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. C. Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA): AFBMA Standards for Ball and Roller Bearings and Balls. D. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): Standard of Installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification in accordance with Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures. B. Include motor submittal as part of equipment submittal for equipment specified in other sections. C. Include identification of equipment by name and tag number as indicated in Specifications or on Drawings. D. Submit in accordance with General Conditions and other applicable sections of the Contract Documents: 1. Complete nameplate data in accordance with NEMA standards. 2. Full load power factor and maximum correction capacitor kVA for motors 5 hp and larger. 3. Nominal efficiency in accordance with IEEE 112 for motors 5 hp and larger. 4. Motor dimensions and frame size. 5. Manufacturer's printed data on each motor type being provided to indicate M. 6/24/2019 16150 - 1 / 7 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation ELECTRIC MOTORS compliance with specified performance and construction. 6. Service manual to include storage and alignment instructions. 7. For motors installed in VFD service provide maximum allowable installation distance data. E. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01782 — Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Quality Control: 1. Perform individual motor test on motors over 1 hp. 2. Test shall be standard NEMA routine production test in accordance with MG 1- 12.51, and consisting of following: a. No load running current. b. Locked rotor current. c. High potential test. d. Bearing inspection. 3. For motors in VFD service, perform additional tests in accordance with NEMA MG1 part 31. 4. Provide motor data to motor control center (MCC) or motor starter supplier at time MCC is ordered to assure coordination of overcurrent protective devices. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 3. Local codes and ordinances. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Use of manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for purpose of establishing standard of quality and general configuration desired. B. Unless otherwise specified, meet or exceed following: 1. Motor Efficiency a. For motors 3/4 to 40 hp, provide motor efficiency greater than 87 percent (87%) required as measured in accordance with IEEE Standard 112 Test Method E. M:6/24/2019 16150 - 2 / 7 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation ELECTRIC MOTORS b. For motors over 40 hp, provide motor efficiency greater than 93.6 percent (93.6%) required as measured in accordance with IEEE Standard 112 Test Method E. c. Motor efficiency to be in compliance with Energy Independence and Security Act of 2007 and have a nominal full load efficiency that is not less than as defined in NEMA MG-1 (2006) Table 12-11. 2. Motors 1/2 hp and Larger: 3-ph, 60 Hz, 230/460 V. a. Squirrel cage type, NEMA B. b. Motor Housing and Bearing Brackets: Cast grey iron with tensile strength of 30,000 psi. Do not provide rolled steel and aluminum. c. Secure bearing brackets to motor cast iron housing. Do not use bolt- clamping methods. d. Provide dual voltage windings, 230/460 V for motors 40 hp or less. 3. Motors Less than 1/2 hp: 1-ph, 60 Hz, 115/230 V. Use single phase motors of the resistance split-phase type and equipped with thermal protectors for motors smaller than 1/6 horsepower. For motors 1/6 horsepower to '/2 horsepower, provide single phase motors of NEMA Design N capacitor start type, with dual voltage windings, 115/230 V. 4. Suitable for continuous operation with line voltage variation within 10% of rated voltage. 5. Suitable for continuous operation in 40°C ambient with 80°C temperature rise. 6. Copper motor windings. C. Design for frequent starting. D. Provide internal, 120 Vac, heaters sized per manufacturer's recommendations based on use and location. E. Where used in conjunction with electronic variable speed drive units such as VFDs, coordinate with drive equipment manufacturer to provide a matched motor and drive system. Failure to do so will result in any additional charges to be paid by Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. F. Contractor to coordinate motors and MCC to assure starter, MCP and breaker sizes are compatible. Where required by high efficiency or high inrush motor design criteria, all devices shall be adjusted as required. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. U.S. Motors B. Marathon M:6/24/2019 16150 - 3 / 7 P:3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation ELECTRIC MOTORS C. General Electric D. Siemens E. Or equal as pre-approved by Engineer 2.03 ENCLOSURES A. Open Dripproof(ODP): Indoor areas where clean, dry, and well ventilated. B. Weather Protected I (WPI): Indoor or outdoor areas where exposed to moisture or dirt. C. Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC): Indoor or outdoor areas where exposed to moisture or dirt. 2.04 INSULATION A. Use motor insulation that will sustain temperature rises according to NEMA MG-1, 12.41 for fractional horsepower motors and according to NEMA MG-1, 12.42 for integral horsepower motors. B. Unless otherwise required, use a NEMA MG-1, 1.65, Class "F" insulation system made of nonhygroscopic material. C. In addition, provide two (2) epoxy dip and bake applications to windings as suitable for Gulf Coast Environment. D. Provide motor insulation system in VFD service suitable to meet higher voltage and to conform to NEMA MG-1, part 31. 2.05 BEARINGS A. Ball or roller bearing type at manufacturer's option, unless specified in equipment sections of specifications. B. Support side thrust loadings. C. Regreaseable with alamite fittings extended to accessible location for Frame 250 and larger. D. AFBMA B10 bearing life rated (flexible coupled) at 50,000 hrs. E. Isolate thrust bearings from motor currents with insulated sleeve or coating. 2.06 SPEED A. As specified under equipment section. 2.07 TORQUE A. Breakdown torque shall be 200% or more of maximum torque load placed on motor shaft. B. Provide necessary WK2 curves for special loads to coordinate with motors. M:6/24/2019 16150 - 4 / 7 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation ELECTRIC MOTORS C. Supply special motors where load requirements exceed standard design. 2.08 SLIDE RAILS AND SOLE PLATE A. As required for application. 2.09 SINGLE PHASE FRACTIONAL HP MOTORS A. Capacitor or open split phase start, unless otherwise specified. 2.10 THREE PHASE MOTORS A. Provide horizontal or vertical squirrel cage induction motors for standard duty. B. Full voltage starting or as specified in equipment sections of Specifications or on Drawings. 2.11 SERVICE FACTOR A. Unless otherwise noted all motors shall be 1.15 service factor. 2.12 SUBMERSIBLE ELECTRIC MOTOR A. Motor: 1. The motor shall be constructed of material suitable for their application from the standpoints of corrosion resistance and mechanical performance. 2. The motor shall be of the squirrel-cage induction type, suitable for across the line starting, designed to directly couple to the bottom of the pump utilizing a NEMA flange. It shall be capable of continuous operation under water at the specified conditions. 3. The motor shall be designed for water filling, water-cooling, and water lubrication. Oil or grease lubricated motors are not acceptable. 4. The stator shall be hermetically sealed canned type consisting of a core of resin- impregnated windings within a watertight stainless steel enclosure. 5. The motor shall be filled with a mixture of water and propylene glycol, equipped with a diaphragm for pressure equalization, and a check valve to allow water into the motor. 6. The motor temperature shall be rated no higher than the allowable operating temperature of the motor thrust, radial bearings, and upthrust bearings and in no case shall it exceed the temperature rating of the insulation class used to wind the motor. 7. The bearings shall be of ample capacity to carry the weight of all parts plus the maximum hydraulic thrust generated by the submersible vertical turbine pump. 8. Suitable precautions shall be taken to restrict sand, silt, or foreign material from entering the motor. M:6/24/2019 16150 - 5 / 7 P. 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation ELECTRIC MOTORS 9. The maximum motor diameter and the minimum inside diameter of the well's conductor casing shall be in such relationship that under any operating condition the water velocity past the motor does not exceed 12 ft. per second and not less than 0.5 ft. per second. 10. Motors to have service factor of 1.15. 11. Where Design B, high inrush, type motors are provided, pump vendor shall submit for approval prior to Bidding. Where these motors are furnished, pump vendor is to coordinate with electrical equipment vendor. Failure to do so will be fully at cost of vendor at no cost to Owner. B. SUBMERSIBLE CABLE 1. Pump cable shall be sized to limit the voltage drop to no more than 5%. The flat cable shall consist of 3 or more separate insulated conductors, plus a ground or a single flat cable assembly consisting of 3 or more insulating conductors, plus a ground. Each conductor shall be insulated by plastic insulation or synthetic rubber suitable for continuous immersion in water. 2. Individual conductors and/or cable assembly must be jacketed with an oil- and- water resistant synthetic rubber, metal, or other suitable mechanically protective material. 3. The flat cable shall have sufficient conductor area to meet the ICEA code for operation in air. The connecting electrical cable from the starting equipment to the surface plate shall comply with local codes or the NEC, whichever governs. 4. The flat cable shall be secured to the column pipe at 10-foot intervals with stainless steel clamps. 5. For every 50 feet of setting, 3 foot of extra flat cable shall be supplied plus an additional 10 feet beyond the surface plate shall be supplied. 6. The electrical conductors shall be protected by a corrosion resistant mechanical shield where they pass the pump bowl. 7. All cable fittings and terminals shall be watertight at the pressure encountered in use. 8. Cables shall not be spliced from point of entry into motor to point of exit at well head. 2.13 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACCESSORIES A. Provide additional motor accessories as indicated on the plans. B. Motor winding and bearing embedded RTD's shall be 100 ohm platinum unless specifically stated otherwise on the plans. C. For motors with VFDs, provide motor with three normally closed temperature actuated switches installed in the connection end turns of the motor windings. Install one switch for each phase and wire the switches in series. Motor manufacturer shall calibrate M:6/24/2019 16150 - 6 / 7 P.3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation ELECTRIC MOTORS switches to open at motor shutdown temperature. D. For motors with VFDs and at horsepower rating of 50 HP and above, provide a shaft grounding ring to insulate motor bearings from shaft currents on drive end, AEGIS SGR, or pre-approved equal. E. For motors with VFDs and at horsepower rating of 100 HP and above, provide a shaft grounding ring to insulate motor bearings from shaft currents on drive end, AEGIS SGR, or pre-approved equal and insulate opposite end bearings with insulated sleeve or coating. F. When dual motor space heaters are indicated on the plans, connection terminals for these space heaters shall be routed to a single connection point. G. Vibration switches, where required shall be manual reset unless specifically stated otherwise on the plans. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA "Standard of Installation," and recognized industry practices. 3.02 ALIGNMENT A. Contractor furnishing motor shall be responsible for alignment. B. Check alignment of motors prior to startup. C. Motors over 50 hp shall have alignment and balance checked using test equipment specially designed for this purpose. END OF SECTION M:6/24/2019 16150 - 7 / 7 P:3/2/2020 City of Pearland GROUNDING AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BONDING SECTION 16170 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding electrodes and conductors B. Equipment grounding conductors C. Bonding D. Power system grounding E. Communication system grounding F. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding G. Control equipment grounding 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM B3: Soft or Annealed Copper Wires 2. ASTM B8: Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium Hard, Soft 3. ASTM B33: Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. IEEE 142-82: Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems 2. IEEE 383-2.5: IEEE Standard for Type Test of Class IE Electric Cables, Field Splices, and Connections for Nuclear Power Generating Stations. C. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): 1. UL 83: Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cables 2. UL 467: Grounding and Bonding Equipment D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), NFPA No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), Article No. 250 - Grounding. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under the provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's cut sheets and catalog data 2. Installation, terminating and splicing procedure 3. Instruction for handling and storage 4. Dimensions and weight B. Submittals after construction M:6/24/2015 16170 - 1 / 6 P. 3/2/2020 City of Pearland GROUNDING AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BONDING 1. Report of field tests and observations certified by Contractor. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tests: 1. Use insulated cable conforming to requirements of the vertical tray flame test as described in IEEE 383-2.5. 2. Test grounding system in the field in accordance with procedures outlined in Part 3 - Execution. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Ship grounding cable on manufacturer's standard reel sizes unless otherwise specified. Where cut lengths are specified, mark reel footage accordingly. Each reel shall contain one continuous length of cable. Provide impact protection by wood lagging or suitable barrier across the traverse of the reel. Pack and crate other materials specified to withstand normal abuse during shipping, handling and storage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cable: 1. American Insulated Wire Company 2. Houston Wire & Cable 3. General Cable Company 4. Okonite Company 5. Interstate Wire Company 6. Southwire 7. Encore Wire B. Ground Rods and Connectors: 1. Blackburn 2. Copperweld 3. Thomas & Betts C. Exothermic Connections: 1. Burndy Corporation (Therm-O-Weld) 2. Erico Products (Cadweld) D. Grounding Connectors: 1. Burndy Corporation 2. O.Z. Gedney 3. Thomas & Betts M:6/24/2015 16170 - 2 / 6 P:3/2/2020 City of Pearland GROUNDING AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BONDING 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Design: 1. Provide grounding cable and materials with the following characteristics: a. Use a grounding system designed in accordance with NEC Article No. 250 - Grounding, and the IEEE 142-82 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems. B. Materials: 1. Use grounding conductors, bare or insulated, which are manufactured and tested in accordance with applicable standards ASTM B3, ASTM B8 and ASTM B33. 2. Where specified on Drawings, provide a main ground loop of No. 4/0 AWG, Class C stranded, bare copper cable. Small groups of isolated equipment may be grounded by a No. 2 AWG minimum insulated conductor connected to the main loop. Generally, taps shall be sized as follows: a. Main ground loop or grid: #4/0 minimum b. Switchgear, motor control centers and power transformers: #4/0 c. Motors 200 hp and above: #4/0 d. Power panels - AC and DC: #2/0 e. Control panels and consoles: #2 f. Building columns: #4/0 g. Fencing posts: #2/0 3. Where single conductor insulated grounding conductors are called for, use 600- volt insulation. Use ground conductors identified with green insulation or green tape marking. 4. Supply identifying ribbon which is PVC tape, 3 inches wide, red color, permanently imprinted with "CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW" in black letters as specified in Section 16195, Electrical Identification. 5. Utilize flexible copper braid across hinged chain link or fence gates to bond the movable portion to the grounded fence post. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Complete site preparation and soil compaction before trenching and driving ground rods for the underground grid. B. Verify from Drawings the exact location of stub-up points for grounding of equipment, fences and building or steel structures. M:6/24/2015 16170 - 3 / 6 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland GROUNDING AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BONDING 3.02 CONSTRUCTION CRITERIA A. Install the main ground loop at a depth of at least 30 inches below earth surface. Connect the ground loop to ground rods and to tap connections to form a complete system as indicated on the electrical Drawings. The Contractor shall give special attention to the grounding of service equipment, structures and fences to comply with the NEC, local authorities and the serving utility company. B. Electrical equipment, buildings, tanks, and other structures and equipment shall be grounded as indicated on the Drawings. Where ground rods are required, the rods shall be 10 feet long, 3/4-inch diameter, copper-clad steel ground rods, or as specified on the Drawings. Rods shall be driven vertically, and the top of the rods shall be a minimum of 18 inches below finished grade, or as specified on the Drawings. C. Local pushbutton and selector switch stations, two-wire control devices, disconnect switches, lighting transformers, panelboards, operator panels, benchboards, and the enclosures of other electrical apparatus shall be grounded through an equipment grounding conductor run with the power supply or control circuit conductors or shall be grounded as shown on the Drawings. D. Ground medium voltage motors, in addition to the grounding conductors in the motor feeder cable, with a separate No. 4/0 AWG cable to motor frame. E. Motors having power supplied by multiconductor cable shall be grounded by a separate grounding conductor in the cable and where supplied by single conductor cable in conduit by a grounding conductor pulled in the conduit. Connect ground conductors to the ground bus in the motor control center and to the ground terminal provided in the motor conduit box. F. Do not ground the insulated bearing pedestals of large motors. G. Connect ladder-type cable trays to the grounding electrode system. H. Install a warning ribbon approximately 12 inches below finished grade directly above the ground grid. I. Connect fence posts of chain link and metal fences to the main ground loop at least every 50 feet. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Equipment Grounding: 1. Make grounding connections to surfaces, which are dry and cleaned of paint, rust, oxides, scales, grease and dirt to ensure good conductivity. Clean copper and galvanized steel to remove oxide before making welds or connections. 2. Use the exothermic welding process for below-grade grounding connections, except at ground rods. Use mechanical connectors or thermal connections for above-grade grounding connections as shown on the Drawings. M:6/24/2015 16170 - 4 / 6 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland GROUNDING AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BONDING 3. Make grounding connections to electrical equipment, vessels, mechanical equipment and ground rods in accordance with the Drawings. 4. Ground tanks and vessels by making connections to integral structural supports or to existing grounding lugs or pads, and not to the body of the tank or vessel. 5. Leave ground connections to equipment visible for inspection. Protect them with PVC non-metallic conduit as indicated on the Drawings. 6. Make connections to motor frames and ground buses with lugs attached to the equipment by means of bolts. Do not use motor anchor bolts or equipment housing for fastening lugs of grounding cable. 7. Where the wiring for lighting systems consists of single conductor cables in conduit, provide each conduit with an equipment-grounding conductor. Use a grounding conductor with green colored insulation and ground equipment in the lighting system. B. Raceway and Support Systems Grounding: 1. Install raceway, cable rack or tray and conduit so that it is bonded together and permanently grounded to the equipment ground bus, according to the Drawings. Connection to conduit may be grounding bushing or ground clamp. 2. Install raceway at low voltage motor control centers or other low voltage control equipment so that it is bonded and grounded, except that any conduit which is effectively grounded to the sheet metal enclosure by bonding bushing or hubs need not be otherwise bonded. 3. Where a grounding conductor is run in or on a cable tray, bond the grounding conductor to each section of cable tray with a cable tray ground clamp. 4. Where only grounding conductor is installed in a metal conduit, bond both ends of the conduit to the grounding conductor. 5. Provide flexible "jumpers" around raceway expansion joints. Use copper bonding straps for steel conduit. Install jumpers across cable tray joints, which have been parted to allow for expansion and any hinged cable tray connections. C. Fences and Gates: 1. Ground fences, fence posts and gates to the underground grid as shown on the Drawings. D. Power System Grounding: 1. Solidly ground the secondary neutral of the main power supply transformer either to the ground grid or through an impedance. See Drawings for details. 2. Solidly ground the neutral of lighting, instrument and control transformers. E. Cable Armor and Shields: M:6/24/2015 16170 - 5 / 6 P:3/2/2020 City of Pearland GROUNDING AND Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation BONDING 1. For shielded control cable, terminate and ground the shield at one end only, preferably at the control panel end for instrument and communication cable and at the supply end for electronic power cables. Maintain shield continuity by jumpering the ground shield across connection point where it is broken at junction boxes, or other splice points. Insulate these points from ground. 2. Connect the ground wire in power cable assemblies at each terminal point to a ground bus, if available, or to the equipment enclosure. Do not carry these ground wires through a "doughnut" current transformer (CT) used for ground fault relaying; do carry ground leads from stress cones through CTs. Ground power cable armor and shield at each terminal point. F. Test Wells: 1. Provide access (test wells) for testing the ground grid system at one or several ground rod locations. Make test wells of a pipe surrounding the rod and connections with a cover placed on top at grade level. See Drawings for details. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test: 1. Perform ground resistance tests after underground installation and connections to building steel are complete, unless otherwise noted on applicable Drawings. 2. Make tests at each ground test well using a "fall of potential" test method. Each ground test well shall not exceed a maximum resistance of 5 ohms. Where measured values exceed this figure, install additional ground rods as required to reduce the resistance to the specified limit. B. Inspection: 1. Inspection of the grounding system by the Engineer and the local Code Inspector must take place before the grid trenches are backfilled. 3.05 RESTORATION A. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades except as otherwise indicated. B. Where sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other Work to their original condition. D. Include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, or mulching. E. Restore disturbed paving as indicated. END OF SECTION M:6/24/2015 16170 - 6 / 6 P:3/2/2020 City of Pearland ELECTRICAL Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. B. Product Data: 1. Submit for each type of product specified. C. Samples: 1. Submit for each color, lettering style, and or graphic representation required for identification materials, samples of labels and signs. D. Miscellaneous: 1. Schedule of identification nomenclature to be used for identification signs and labels. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70. B. Comply with ANSI C2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAY AND CABLE LABELS A. Manufacturer's Standard Products: 1. Where more than one type is listed for specified application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single type for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, or as specified elsewhere. B. Conform to ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for legend and minimum length of color field for each raceway or cable size. M: 10/27/2015 16195 - 1 / 8 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland ELECTRICAL Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION 1. Color: Black legend on orange field. 2. Legend: Indicates voltage. C. Adhesive Labels: 1. Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive vinyl. Legend is over-laminated with clear, wear and chemical resistant coating. D. Pre-tensioned, Wraparound Plastic Sleeves: 1. Flexible, preprinted, color-coded, acrylic bands sized to suit diameter of line it identifies and arranged to stay in place by pre-tensioned gripping action when placed in position. E. Colored Adhesive Tape: 1. Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3-mils thick by 1 to 2-in. wide (0.08-mm thick by 25 to 51-mm wide). F. Underground Line Warning Tape: 1. Permanent, bright-colored, continuous printed, vinyl tape with following features: a. Size: Not less than 6-in. wide by 4-mils thick (152-mm wide by 0.102-mm thick). b. Compounded for permanent direct burial service. c. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. d. Printed Legend: Indicates type of underground line. G. Tape Markers: 1. Vinyl or vinyl cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters. H. Aluminum, Wraparound Marker Bands: 1. Bands cut from 0.014-in. (0.4-mm) thick aluminum sheet, with stamped or embossed legend, and fitted with slots or ears for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors. I. Plasticized Card Stock Tags: J. Vinyl cloth with preprinted and field printed legends. Orange background, except as otherwise indicated, with eyelet for fastener. K. Aluminum Faced Card Stock Tags: 1. Wear resistant, 18-point minimum card stock faced on both sides with embossable aluminum sheet, 0.002-in. (0.05-mm) thick, laminated with moisture M: 10/27/2015 16195 - 2 / 8 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland ELECTRICAL Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION resistant acrylic adhesive, and punched for fastener. Preprinted legends suit each application. L. Brass or Aluminum Tags: 1. Metal tags with stamped legend, punched for fastener. Dimensions: 2 by 2-in. (51 by 51-mm) by 0.05-in. (1.3-mm). 2.02 ENGRAVED NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS A. Manufacturer's Standard Products: 1. Where more than one type is listed for specified application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single type for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, or as specified elsewhere. B. Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate, 1/16-in. (1.6-mm) minimum thick for signs up to 20-sq. in. (129-sq. cm), 1/8-in. (3.2-mm) thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved Legend: Black letters on white face. 2. Punched for mechanical fasteners. C. Baked Enamel Signs for Interior Use: 1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size as indicated or as otherwise required for application. 1/4-in. (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. D. Exterior, Metal Backed, Butyrate Signs: 1. Wear resistant, non-fading, preprinted, cellulose acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-in. (1-mm), galvanized steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to application. 1/4-in. (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. E. Fasteners for Plastic Laminated and Metal Signs: 1. Self-tapping stainless steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless steel machine screws, with nuts, flat washers and lock washers. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Cable Ties: 1. Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, 1 piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties with following features: a. Minimum Width: 3/16-in. (5-mm). b. Tensile Strength: 50-lb (22.3 kg) minimum. c. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 185°F (Minus 4 to 85°C). d. Color: As indicated where used for color-coding. M: 10/27/2015 16195 - 3 / 8 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland ELECTRICAL Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION B. Paint: 1. Alkyd-urethane enamel. Primer as recommended by enamel manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install identification devices according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install labels where indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Lettering, Colors, and Graphics: 1. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and or designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations used in Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project. D. Sequence of Work: 1. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completion of finish work. E. Self Adhesive Identification Products: 1. Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before applying. F. Identify feeders over 600 V with "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" in black letters 2-in. (51- mm) high, stenciled with paint at 10-ft (3-m) intervals over continuous, painted orange background. Identify following: 1. Entire floor area directly above conduits running beneath and within 12-in. (305- mm) of basement or ground floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space. 2. Wall surfaces directly external to conduits concealed within wall. 3. All accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around conduits in vertical shafts, exposed in building, or concealed above suspended ceilings. 4. Entire surface of exposed conduits. G. Install painted identification as follows: 1. Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before painting. 2. Prime Surfaces: a. For galvanized metal, use single component, acrylic vehicle coating formulated for galvanized surfaces. For concrete masonry units, use M: 10/27/2015 16195 -4 / 8 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland ELECTRICAL Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION heavy duty, acrylic resin block filler. For concrete surfaces, use clear, alkali resistant, alkyd binder type sealer. 3. Apply one intermediate and one finish coat of silicone alkyd enamel. 4. Apply primer and finish materials according to manufacturer's instructions. H. Identify Raceways and Exposed Cables of Certain Systems with Color Banding: 1. Band exposed and accessible raceways of systems listed below for identification. a. Bands: Pre-tensioned, snap around, colored plastic sleeves; colored adhesive tape; or combination of both. Make each color band 2-in. (51- mm) wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of 2 color markings in contact, side by side. b. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-ft (15 m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-ft (7.6 m) in congested areas. c. Colors: As follows: (1) Fire Alarm System: Red. (2) Fire Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow. (3) Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue. (4) Security System: Blue and yellow. (5) Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue. (6) Telecommunications System: Green and yellow. Install Caution Signs for Enclosures Over 600 V: 1. Use pressure sensitive, self-adhesive label indicating system voltage in black, preprinted on orange field. Install on exterior of door or cover. J. Install Circuit Identification Labels on Boxes: 1. Label externally as follows: a. Exposed Boxes: Pressure sensitive, self-adhesive plastic label on cover. b. Concealed Boxes: Plasticized card stock tags. c. Labeling Legend: Permanent, waterproof listing of panel and circuit number or equivalent. K. Identify Paths of Underground Electrical Lines: 1. During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal, and communications lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker located directly above line at 6 to 8-in. (150 to 200-mm) below finished grade. Where multiple lines installed in common trench or concrete envelope do not exceed an overall width of 16-in. (400-mm), use single line marker. M. 10/27/2015 16195 - 5 / 8 P. 3/2/2020 City of Pearland ELECTRICAL Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION a. Install line marker for underground wiring, both direct buried and in raceway. L. Color Code Conductors: 1. Secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors throughout secondary electrical system. a. Field applied, color coding methods may be used in lieu of factory coded wire for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG. (1) Colored, pressure sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for distance of 6-in. (150-mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last 2 turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1-in. (25-mm)wide tape in colors as specified. Adjust tape bands to avoid obscuring cable identification markings. 2. Colored cable ties applied in groups of 3 ties of specified color to each wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3-in. (76-mm) from terminal and spaced 3- in. (76-mm) apart. Apply with special tool or pliers, tighten to snug fit, and cut off excess length. System Voltage A B C Neutral 120/240 Volt 1 Ph/3w Black Red White 120/208 Volt 3Ph/4w Black Red Blue White 120/240 Volt 3Ph/4w Black Orange Blue White 277/480 Volt 3Ph/4w Brown Purple Yellow Gray Motor Control 1 Black 2 Red 3 Blue Ground Green M. Power Circuit Identification: 1. Use metal tags or aluminum wraparound marker bands for cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull boxes, junction boxes, manholes, and switchboard rooms. a. Legend: 1/4-in. (6.4-mm) steel letter and number stamping or embossing with legend corresponding to indicated circuit designations. b. Fasten tags with nylon cable ties; fasten bands using integral ears. N. Apply identification to conductors as follows: 1. Conductors to Be Extended in Future: Indicate source and circuit numbers. 2. Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor with source, voltage, circuit number, and phase. Use color coding for voltage and phase indication of secondary circuit. M: 10/27/2015 16195 - 6 / 8 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland ELECTRICAL Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION 3. Multiple Control and Communications Circuits in Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor by its system and circuit designation. Use consistent system of tags, color-coding, or cable marking tape. O. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs and stencils as follows: 1. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where indicated or required to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor items. 2. Emergency Operating Signs: a. Install engraved laminate signs with white legend on red background with minimum 3/8-in. (9-mm) high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, and or emergency operations. P. Install identification as follows: 1. Apply equipment identification labels of engraved plastic laminate on each major unit of equipment, including central or master unit of each system. This includes communication, signal, and alarm systems, unless units are specified with their own self-explanatory identification. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text with 1/2-in. (13-mm) high lettering on 1-1/2-in. (38-mm) high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use lettering 2-in. (51-mm) high. Use white lettering on black field. Apply labels for each unit of following categories of equipment: a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. c. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. d. Electrical substations. e. Motor control centers. f. Motor starters. g. Push button stations. h. Power transfer equipment. Contactors. j. Remote controlled switches. k. Dimmers. Control devices. m. Transformers. n. Inverters. o. Rectifiers. p. Frequency converters. q. Battery racks. r. Power generating units. s. Telephone switching equipment. t. Clock/program master equipment. u. Call system master station. v. TV/audio monitoring master station. w. Fire alarm master station or control panel. M: 10/27/2015 16195 - 7 / 8 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland ELECTRICAL Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION x. Security monitoring master station or control panel. 2. Apply designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for disconnect switches, breakers, push buttons, pilot lights, motor control centers, and similar items for power distribution and control components above, except panelboards and alarm/signal components where labeling is specified elsewhere. For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules with explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker. END OF SECTION M: 10/27/2015 16195 - 8 / 8 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS ENGINE Rehabilitation GENERATOR AND CONTROLS SECTION 16211 NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section specifies the furnishing and installation of a packaged electric generating plant. B. The packaged, natural gas engine-electric generating plant shall be pre-wired, pre- piped, assembled, and aligned on a single skid type base. The packaged system of new, unused equipment of the manufacturer's latest design includes all necessary instruments, devices, switches, and other appurtenances for proper operation of the unit: supplies steel safety guards around all external rotating parts, and provides a unit on which adjustments, repairs, and normal maintenance are possible without the use of special tools. The supplier will be responsible for the proper performance of the complete unit and support systems. C. All equipment provided shall be manufactured by a single source of supply, and supplied by a manufacturer who has been continuously engaged in the manufacture of industrial grade Power System products for a minimum of 25 years. The manufacturer shall have test facilities available to test the proposed equipment and demonstrate the equipment will meet the project specifications. 1.02 GUARANTEE A. All systems and components supplied under this specification shall be guaranteed against defective material, poor workmanship, design deficiencies, and failure during normal usage for a minimum of 12 months after the date of acceptance by Engineer. Vendor shall make necessary corrections to all deficiencies noted within this time, without expense to purchaser. Satisfactory warranty documents must be provided. 1.03 STANDARDS AND CODES A. All material and equipment supplied under this specification shall be designed, assembled, and tested in full compliance with the latest edition of the following codes and standards: 1. NEC - National Electric Code 2. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 3. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories 4. NEMA - National Electronic Manufacturers Association 5. ASA - American Standards Association 6. ANSI - American National Standards Institute 7. NFPA— National Fire Protection Association 1.04 All components used shall be UL labeled or listed whenever such recognition is M: 10/14/2019 16211 - 1 / 11 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS ENGINE Rehabilitation GENERATOR AND CONTROLS available. 1.05 DRAWINGS AND DATA A. The following items shall be submitted with vendor's proposal: 1. Outline dimensions and weights. 2. Descriptive literature describing the standard series specified (not a one-of-a-kind fabrication). 3. Drawing submittal schedule with approval allowance requirements. 4. Shipping time after receipt of order. 5. Exceptions and clarifications to this specification. 6. Factory testing procedures. 7. Submit manufacturer's detailed sizing report indicating compliance with the parameters and load starting sequence as indicated in Section 2.02. Genset size indicated in Section 2.02B is allowed only if manufacturer's sizing report produced by generator manufacturer's representative indicates full compliance with all aspects of the parameters and loads listed in section 2.02. B. The following items are required of the successful bidder prior to manufacture: 1. Certified dimensional drawings showing weight, outline dimensions, bolting and drilling details, clearances for installation, operation and maintenance, and required ventilation. 2. Elevation views, showing and identifying all items furnished and section views as required to locate all components. 3. Bill of material describing all components and recommended spare parts with pricing and delivery. 4. Brochures on engine, generator, muffler, batteries, charger, control panel, and any accessory equipment showing ratings, construction features, and performance characteristics. 5. Schematic and wiring diagrams of the electrical system showing all factory wiring and clearly indicating wiring and voltage of any electrical strip heaters. Also, submit fully detailed inter-connection drawings indicating each individual connection to any remote equipment, including a separate connection drawing to show point to point electrical wiring connections. 6. Submit documentation indicating compliance or certification with EPA emission requirements. M: 10/14/2019 16211 - 2 / 11 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS ENGINE Rehabilitation GENERATOR AND CONTROLS 7. Submit documentation for sound test data, based on free field environment. 1.06 SUBMITTALS AFTER MANUFACTURE 1. Factory and Field Tests - Provide each factory and field test report on the actual packaged electric generating plant provided, indicating results for all tests described herein. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals - Two weeks prior to final inspection, provide the manufacturer's operation and maintenance manuals pertaining directly to the unit provided. Include the following information: a. Project record drawings clearly indicating operating features and including as-built shop drawings, outline drawings, schematic and wiring diagrams. b. Instructions for erection and alignment, including tolerances and preparation for use. 3. EPA Emissions certification test reports. a. For all EPA compliant listed units, provide digital copy of 3rd party test report necessary for EPA certification. b. File all required documentation with the EPA and TCEQ on behalf of the Owner. 1.07 LOAD VERIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Utility service connection, service voltage, and connected loads for the facility are derived from original construction documents and updated with modifications and improvements made over the history of the facilities. B. The accuracy of this pre-existing documentation is crucial to the successful sizing and installation of natural gas powered standby generator systems. C. Verification of this information is required by the electrical contractor prior to generator procurement: 1. Coordinate with facility operator a visit to each facility. 2. Verify existing service voltage, phases, and connection type. 3. Verify existing and proposed horsepower and running amps for each connected load. 4. Utilize a latching ammeter to verify inrush starting current for each connected load. Note that generator sizing for each facility is based on NEMA Code G motors and has resulted in the max motor starting KVA as listed in the applicable sections of this specification. Any connected load with a higher inrush (starting) M: 10/14/2019 16211 - 3 / 11 P. 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS ENGINE Rehabilitation GENERATOR AND CONTROLS current than that required by a NEMA Code G classification could result in a corresponding increase in that facilities' max motor starting KVA required and be above and beyond that required in the specification, resulting in a larger generator rating. D. Any verified information that differs from ratings and specified equipment as indicated in the plans and specifications should be brought to the attention of the engineer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Natural Gas Engine Driven Generator Set, complete with accessories, shall be: 1. Kohler 2. Generac B. Engines shall be: 1. Kohler 2. Generac 2.02 RATINGS A. VOLTAGE AND CONNECTION —480V/277V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, 60 Hertz, 0.8 Power Factor. B. POWER —60KW, 75KVA C. LOADS & STARTING SEQUENCE — Generator set shall be capable of starting the following loads in the sequence shown: 1. Lighting and control loads of 15KVA, single phase. 2. One 12 HP motor, 1.15 service factor, code letter H, full voltage starting. 3. One 12 HP motor, 1.15 service factor, code letter H, full voltage starting. 4. One 12 HP motor, 1.15 service factor, code letter H, full voltage starting. D. Generator shall be capable of starting loads in the above sequence with not more than 20% instantaneous terminal voltage drop, and not more than 10% sustained terminal voltage drop with the specified KVA load at near zero power factor applied to the generator set. See section 1.04 A 7. E. Generator shall be capable of starting loads in the above sequence with not more than 5% instantaneous terminal frequency drop. See section 1.04 A 7. F. Site operating parameters shall be 100 ft. altitude and an ambient temperature of 95 M: 10/14/2019 16211 - 4 / 11 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS ENGINE Rehabilitation GENERATOR AND CONTROLS degrees F. G. Contractor will be responsible for verifying generator operations by executing procedures in the generator checklist attached to this specification. The checklist includes a load bank test. 2.03 ENGINE A. Type - Liquid cooled, natural gas fired engine, either naturally aspirated or turbocharged. 4-cycled engine required, or as approved by the ENGINEER. B. Rating - Provide an engine with brake horsepower not less than required by the full load rating of the generator, including losses, and with all accessories attached. C. Speed - The engine speed will be suitable for direct connection to the generator without exceeding engine manufacturer's published curves. Speed must not exceed 1800 PRM. D. BMEP - The engine BMEP will not exceed 351 PSI, when producing rated load. Piston speed shall be 2250 feet per minute or less. E. Construction: 1. Replaceable liners. 2. Two (2) valves per cylinder. 3. Full pressure lube system with crank shaft driven oil pump. 4. Unit injectors. 5. Full flow replaceable oil filter. 6. Primary and secondary fuel oil filters. 7. Replaceable fuel transfer pump suitable for a maximum of 4 feet suction lift. 8. Oil bath or dry type air intake cleaner. F. Starting System 1. Heavy duty, battery driven electric starter motor. 2. A fully charged 24 volt lead acid, impact resistant, storage battery or batteries mounted on the unit. Make battery capacity sufficient for four cranking cycles at firing speed of 10 seconds duration each, with 15 seconds rest periods- Provide all battery cables, connections, electrolyte, and a hydrometer. G. Cooling System - The generator set will be furnished with a unit mounted radiator having sufficient capacity for cooling the engine when delivering full rated horsepower at the design ambient. The fan is to be engine driven pusher type. An immersion heater shall be furnished in the jacket water system. H. Exhaust System - High degree, critical-rated stainless steel muffler and/or catalytic converter assembly with maximum silencing capacity mounted on unit. Include a suitable length of flexible exhaust tubing for mounting between engine and muffler. When V type engines are used, a wye type flex will be furnished. All exhaust equipment M: 10/14/2019 16211 - 5 / 11 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS ENGINE Rehabilitation GENERATOR AND CONTROLS and hardware mounted to the exterior of the generator enclosure shall be stainless steel. I. Fuel System 1. Designed for natural gas fuel. 2. Full flow replaceable element fuel filter. 3. Fuel connection lines between tank and engine. J. Governor- Provide governor of the electric type, Woodward, Onan or an approved equal, to maintain frequency stability at any constant load, including no load, within plus or minus 1/4 percent, and to maintain frequency regulation between no load steady state and full load steady within .5 percent. K. Battery Charger- A static, solid state type battery charger unit which automatically controls the charge rate. Include a charging rate ammeter, thermal overload circuit and transformer. The charge shall be suitable for operation at 120 volts single phase, 60 Hertz. The maximum charging time to bring the batteries up to full charge will be 12 hours. Mount charger on unit, using adequate vibration devices. Charger shall be of the dual rate type. L. Emissions — Engines used in proposed generator set to be certified to comply with current US EPA and any applicable TCEQ air quality regulations at the project location and time of installation. 2.04 GENERATOR A. Type - Furnish a direct coupled, synchronous, brushless type generator with amortisseur windings, revolving field, exciter, and built-in static rectifier and statically regulated excitation system. B. Insulation System - Class H, minimum, with temperature rise limited to 105C over a 40C ambient under the application of full plant load conditions. C. Instantaneous Voltage Dip - Less than 15 percent when sequenced load is applied to the unit. D. Voltage Stability - Maintain within plus or minus 1 percent of rated voltage at any constant from no load to full load. E. Voltage Regulation - Maintain within plus or minus 1 percent deviation from rated voltage between no load steady state and full load steady state. F. Enclosure - Weatherproof, with locking side panels, unless otherwise specified. G. Coupling - From engine, drive rotor through a semi-flexible coupling to ensure permanent alignment. H. Strip Heaters - Provide thermostatically controlled, low surface temperature space heaters to prevent condensation. M: 10/14/2019 16211 - 6 / 11 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS ENGINE Rehabilitation GENERATOR AND CONTROLS Generator Set Control and Protection - Provide comprehensive monitoring and control system integral to the Generator Set control to guard the electrical integrity of the alternator and power system. Provide single and 3-phase fault current regulation, so that downstream protective devices have the maximum current available to quickly clear fault conditions, without subjecting the alternator to potentially catastrophic failure conditions. Include provisions to either prevent over voltage due to single phase faults, or to shut down the generator set if line to neutral voltage on any phase exceeds 115% for more than 0.5 seconds. Submittals shall demonstrate that the protective device provides proper protection for the alternator by a comparison of the trip characteristic of the breaker with the thermal damage characteristic of the alternator. Field circuit breakers shall not be acceptable for generator overcurrent protection. 2.05 CONTROL PANEL A. General — Provide a control panel mounted to unit which includes, but is not limited to, the following instruments and protective devices. 1. A C ammeter. 2. Phase selector switch. 3. Current transformers. 4. A C voltmeter. 5. Automatic solid state voltage regulator. 6. Rheostat for adjusting voltage plus or minus 5 percent of rated voltage. 7. Engine Malfunction Warning Lights: a. Low oil pressure. b. High water temperature. c. Engine overcrank. d. Engine overspeed. 8. Frequency meter. 9. Non-resettable elapsed time meter with a 9,999.9 hour maximum indication. 10. Coolant temperature gage. 11. Oil pressure gage. 12. Main circuit breaker. 13. Combination alarm-shutdown system with manual reset and indicating lights for high engine temperature, low oil pressure, engine overspeed, and engine fail-to- M: 10/14/2019 16211 - 7 / 11 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS ENGINE Rehabilitation GENERATOR AND CONTROLS start. Include an additional set of contacts for remote alarms. 14. Manual start/stop switch for control of engine. 15. Alarm dry contact closures as follows: a. Low oil pressure b. High water temperature c. Engine overcrank d. Engine run 16. Remote control contacts as follows: Engine start via transfer switch (which will include power transfer). 17. Provide latest electronic control panel at engine and with remote control panel at transfer switch. Remote panel to have full functions. B. All interface wiring connections shall be made in the control panel. C. Control panel heater- Provide thermostatically controlled, low surface temperature space heaters to prevent condensation. D. Remote alarm annunciator— Comply with NFPA 110. An LED labeled with proper alarm conditions shall identify each alarm even and a common audible signal shall sound for each alarm condition. E. Generator shall include Modbus TCP/IP communications protocol for integration of generator with Owner's control system. Provide RJ-45 ethernet connection. Where necessary, contractor shall provide serial to ethernet convertor. 2.06 ENGINE START/STOP CONTROLS A. The engine controls shall be provided with bypassing of the low oil pressure shutdown circuitry during start-up. B. If unit fails to start in an appropriate time (normally 30 seconds), the starting circuit shall shut down for an appropriate time (approximate 10 seconds) and then repeat the start cycle. If the unit still fails to start after approximately four start attempts, the overcrank alarm shall activate and the starting circuit shall shut down. C. The engine start/stop control shall be static solid state. 2.07 BASE A. Mount the assembled packaged unit on a base of welded structural steel, box type construction. Prime all exposed metal parts with a rust inhibitor and finish in durable machinery enamel. B. Vibration isolators shall be of the steel spring type. M: 10/14/2019 16211 - 8 / 11 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS ENGINE Rehabilitation GENERATOR AND CONTROLS 2.08 WEATHERPROOF SOUND ATTENUATING HOUSING The enclosure shall meet the following criteria: rigidity wind test equal to 100 MPH (ASCE 7-05, Exposure C), roof load equal to 40 lbs. per sq. ft., and rain test equal to 4" per hour. A. Construction 1. Provide an overall weatherproof prefabricated steel or aluminum enclosure. Instruments, controls, and battery system shall be mounted within enclosure. 2. Doors — Hinged with padlocking provisions. Restraint/Hold back hardware to keep door open at 180 degrees during maintenance. Rain lips over all doors. 3. Panels — Removable side panels, when equipped, shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. 4. Louvers — Equipped with bird screen to permit air circulation when engine is not running while excluding bird and rodents. 5. Hardware —All hardware and hinges shall be stainless steel. 6. Mounting Base — Suitable for mounting on housekeeping pad. B. Engine Cooling 1. Housing shall provide ample airflow for engine generator operation at rated load in an ambient temperature of 40 deg C. The enclosure shall not exceed the generator manufacturer's recommendations for total external static pressure to ensure adequate airflow for cooling and combustion. C. Sound Performance 1. Reduce the sound level of the engine generator while operating at full load to a maximum of 75 dBA measured at any location 23 feet (7 meters) from the engine generator in a free field environment. D. Painting 1. Prime all exposed metal parts with a suitable rust inhibitor applied to the clean, bare metal, followed by two coats of an epoxy paint of powder-coated and baked for exterior weather. E. Site Provisions 1. The complete assembly of engine generator, and enclosure shall be designed to be lifted into place as a single unit. F. Miscellaneous Accessories: 1. Lighting Panelboard — For generators larger than 200 kW or when indicated on the drawings, provide a factory installed 120/240 Volt, single-phase panelboard with a minimum main breaker rating of 60 Amps inside the generator enclosure. The panel shall be mounted in accordance with NEC working space requirements. All generator 120/240 Volt components shall be factory wired to the panelboard. 2. Interior Lighting — For generators 150kW and larger, provide two (2) 120V fluorescent strip, compact fluorescent, or LED fixtures rated vapor-tight, wet location, and high ambient temperature. Provide two (2) 3-way switches, one on M: 10/14/2019 16211 - 9 / 11 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS ENGINE Rehabilitation GENERATOR AND CONTROLS each side. 3. Receptacle — Provide one (1) 125V, 20A, Duplex GFI receptacle in a weatherproof FS box with a weatherproof cover mounted internally to the enclosure. The receptacle shall be mounted in accordance with NEC requirements. The circuit shall be wired locally when a single-phase panelboard is provided with the generator. G. Contractor to coordinate with manufacturer on housing size prior to constructing concrete pad. 2.09 TESTING A. Units shall be factory tested under design conditions. Purchaser, at his option, may witness test. Vendor shall give one (1) week notice before test is made. 2.10 FIELD TESTS A. Perform field tests at the site after installation is complete and in the presence of the Owner's representative. B. Perform on site resistive load bank testing to the full capacity of the generator set for a minimum of two (2) continuous hours. Verify adequate generator cooling, fuel flow, metering, and operation. Contractor shall contact Engineer at least 48 hours prior to commencement of testing. C. Perform sequence start-up of plant and demonstrate compliance with specifications. D. Provide 3rd party emissions testing required for EPA certification for all EPA compliant listed units. Provide copies of the reports to Engineer and file all required paperwork with the EPA and TCEQ necessary for certification. E. Perform natural gas line pressure testing in accordance with NFPA 54 in the presence of the Owner's representative and provide documentation to the Engineer before introducing natural gas into the system. Contractor shall contact Engineer at least 48 hours prior to commencement of testing. 2.11 TRAINING A. The equipment supplier shall provide training for the facility operating personnel covering operation and maintenance of the equipment provided. The training program shall be not less than 4 hours in duration and the class size shall be limited to 3 persons. Training date shall be coordinated with the facility owner. 2.12 SERVICE AND SUPPORT M: 10/14/2019 16211 - 10 / 11 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS ENGINE Rehabilitation GENERATOR AND CONTROLS A. The manufacturer of the generator set shall maintain service parts inventory at a central location which is accessible to the service location 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. B. The generator set shall be serviced by a local service organization that is trained and factory certified in generator set service. Within 50 mile of the job site, the supplier shall maintain; a minimum of 6 factory trained and qualified field technicians; a proper supply of spare parts for the supplied equipment; a shop with overhaul capabilities; and be able to provide 24 hour, 7 day per week, 365 day per year field service capability. C. The manufacturer shall maintain model and serial number records of each generator set provided for at least 20 years. END OF SECTION M: 10/14/2019 16211 - 11 / 11 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland OVERCURRENT Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation PROTECTIVE DEVICES SECTION 16475 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Overcurrent protective devices (OCPDs) rated 600 V and below and switching devices commonly used with them. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 1. NEMA AB1-86 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70-90 - National Electrical Code (NEC). C. Underwriters Laboratory (UL): 1. UL 98-87 - Enclosed and Dead Front Switches. 2. UL 486A-80 - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors. Seventh Edition. 3. UL 489-86 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures. Seventh Edition. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Overcurrent Protective Device (OCPD): Device operative on excessive current that causes and maintains interruption of power in circuit it protects. B. Ampere-Squared-Seconds: Expression of available thermal energy resulting from current flow. With regard to current-limiting fuses and circuit breakers, ampere-squared-seconds during fault current interruption represents energy allowed to flow before fuse or breaker interrupts fault current within its current limiting range. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. M: 3/31/2016 16475 - 1 / 7 P. 3/2/2020 City of Pearland OVERCURRENT Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation PROTECTIVE DEVICES 2. Terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Components and Installation: a. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code (NEC)." b. Local codes and ordinances. C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain similar OCPDs from single manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES (OCPDs), GENERAL A. General: Provide OCPDs in indicated types, as integral components of panelboards, switchboards, and motor control centers; and also as individually enclosed and mounted single units. 2.02 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Manufacturers except as indicated: 1. Square D 2. General Electric 3. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer 4. Siemens 5. Or approved equal B. UL 489 and NEMA AB 1. C. Construction: Bolt-in type, except breakers in load-center-type panelboards and breakers 225-ampere frame size and larger may be plug-in type if held in place by positive locking device requiring mechanical release for removal. D. Tripping Device: Quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanism with inverse-time delay and instantaneous overcurrent trip protection for each pole. E. Adjustable Instantaneous Trip Devices: Factory adjusted to low-trip-setting current values. F. Enclosure for Switchboard or Panelboard Mounting: Suitable for panel mounting in M: 3/31/2016 16475 - 2 / 7 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland OVERCURRENT Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation PROTECTIVE DEVICES switchboard or panelboards where indicated. G. Enclosure for Switchboard or Motor Control Center Mounting: Provide individual mounting where indicated. H. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type 1 enclosure, as indicated or required to suit environment where located. I. Combination Circuit Breakers and Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters: UL 943 arranged for sensing and tripping for ground-fault current in addition to overcurrent and short-circuit current. 1. Match features and module size of panelboard breakers and provide clear identification of ground fault trip function. 2. Trip Setting for Ground Fault: 4 to 6 milliamperes, listed and labeled as Class A, Type 1 device. 3. Trip Setting for Ground Fault: 30 milliamperes. J. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Arranged to limit let-through ampere-squared-seconds during fault conditions to value less than ampere-squared-seconds of one-half-cycle wave of prospective symmetrical fault current. Circuit breaker shall use no fusible devices in its operation. Current-limiting characteristic shall be in addition to normal time-delay and instantaneous-trip characteristics and other features as indicated. K. Circuit Breakers With Solid-State Trip Devices: Provide indicated circuit breakers with solid-state trip devices having following features: 1. Ambient Compensation: Trip device insensitive to temperature changes between minus 20C and plus 55C. 2. Adjustability: Breaker ratings and trip settings shall be changeable by operation of controls on front panel of breaker, by change of plug-in element without removing breaker from mounting, or by combination of 2 methods. 3. Ground-Fault Tripping: Adjustable for pick-up and time-delay values. Provide for indicated units. 4. Provide clear plastic shield limiting access to rating plug and adjustments on solid state trip circuit breaker. Seal by attaching sealing wire through hole in posts provided. With wire seal installed, circuit breaker rating plug and adjustments shall not be "readily accessible." M: 3/31/2016 16475 - 3 / 7 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland OVERCURRENT Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation PROTECTIVE DEVICES 2.03 INSULATED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D 2. General Electric 3. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer 4. Siemens 5. Or approved equal B. UL 489 and NEMA AB 1. C. Ratings: Continuous-current, interrupting, and short-time-current ratings, and voltage and frequency ratings as indicated. D. Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating mechanism with following features: 1. Moving Contacts Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator. E. Circuit-Breaker Trip Devices: Solid-state overcurrent trip device system that includes 1 integrally mounted current transformer or sensor per phase, release mechanism, and following features: 1. Functions: Long-time-delay, short-time-delay, and instantaneous-trip functions, which are independent of each other in both action and adjustment. 2. Temperature compensation to assure accuracy and calibration stability from minus 20°C to plus 55°C. 3. Field-adjustable, time-current characteristics. 4. Current Adjustability: Effected by operating controls on front panel or by changing plug-in elements or current transformers or sensors. 5. Three bands for long-time- and short-time-delay functions marked "minimum," "intermediate," and "maximum." 6. Five pickup points, minimum, for long-time- and short-time-trip functions. 7. Six pickup points, minimum, for instantaneous-trip functions. 8. Ground fault protection with at least 3 short-time-delay settings and 37 trip-time- delay bands. Adjustable current pickup. M: 3/31/2016 16475 - 4 / 7 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland OVERCURRENT Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation PROTECTIVE DEVICES 9. Trip Indication: Labeled lights or mechanical indicators on trip device shall indicate type of fault causing breaker trip. If lights are used, integral power source shall maintain indication for 60 hrs, minimum. F. Auxiliary Contacts for Remote Indication: Where remote indication of breaker position is indicated, provide spare auxiliary switch in addition to other auxiliary switches required for normal breaker operation. Spare auxiliary switch shall consist of 2 Type "a" and 2 Type "b" stages (contacts), wired to terminal block in breaker housing. G. Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Include following: 1. Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least 2 padlocks on each breaker to secure its enclosure and prevent movement of draw out mechanism. 2. Operating Handle: Provide 1 for each manually operated breaker. No handle ties are permitted. 3. Electric Close Button: Provide 1 for each electrically operated breaker. 4. Indicating Lights: Contacts for"Breaker Open" and "Breaker Closed,"for main and bus tie circuit breakers, and for other indicated breakers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONNECTIONS A. Check connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings for tightness. B. Tighten field-connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torqueing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.02 GROUNDING A. Provide equipment grounding connections for individually mounted OCPD units as indicated and as required by NEC. Tighten connectors to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding. B. Ground in accordance with Section 16452. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: 1. Reports: Prepare certified written reports on tests and observations. Report defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Include complete records of repairs and adjustments made. M: 3/31/2016 16475 - 5 / 7 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland OVERCURRENT Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation PROTECTIVE DEVICES 2. Labeling: Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort, apply label to tested components indicating test results, date, and responsible person. 3. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least 1 week's advance notification. 4. Pretesting: Upon completing installation of system, perform following preparations for tests: a. Make insulation resistance tests of OCPD buses, components, and connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits. b. Make continuity tests of circuits. c. Include full updating on final system configuration and parameters where they supplement or differ from those indicated in original Contract Documents. d. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and testing of OCPDs. 5. Visual and mechanical inspection: Include following inspections and related work. a. Overcurrent-Protective-Device Ratings and Settings: Verify indicated ratings and settings to be appropriate for final system arrangement and parameters. Where discrepancies are found, test organization shall recommend final protective device ratings and settings. Use accepted revised ratings or settings to make final system adjustments. b. Inspect for defects and physical damage, NRTL labeling, and nameplate compliance with current single line diagram. c. Exercise and perform operational tests of mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual. d. Check tightness of electrical connections of OCPDs with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values. e. Clean OCPDs using manufacturer's approved methods and materials. f. Verify installation of proper fuse types and ratings in fusible OCPDs. 6. Electrical Tests: Include following items performed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions: a. Insulation resistance test of OCPD conducting parts. Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms is not acceptable. b. Verify trip unit reset characteristics for insulated-case circuit breakers. c. Make adjustments for final settings of adjustable-trip devices. d. Activate auxiliary protective devices such as ground fault or undervoltage relays, to verify operation of shunt-trip devices. e. Check stored-energy charging motors for proper operation of motor, mechanism, and limit switches. f. Check operation of electrically operated OCPDs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. M: 3/31/2016 16475 - 6 / 7 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland OVERCURRENT Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation PROTECTIVE DEVICES g. Check key and other interlock and safety devices for operation and sequence. Make closing attempts on locked-open and opening attempts on locked-closed devices including moveable barriers and shutters. 7. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest. Verify by system tests that specified requirements are met. 3.04 CLEANING A. Upon completion of installation, inspect OCPDs. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. END OF SECTION M: 3/31/2016 16475 - 7 / 7 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation TRANSFER SWITCH SECTION 16496 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Delayed transition automatic transfer switches to automatically transfer between normal and standby power sources. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC) B. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 1. NEMA ICS 2-447- AC Automatic Transfer Switches C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1. UL 1008 - Standard for Automatic Transfer Switches 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. B. Manufacturer shall submit shop drawings for review, which shall include the following, as a minimum: 1. Descriptive literature 2. Plan, elevation, side, and front view arrangement drawings, including overall dimension, weights and clearances, as well as mounting or anchoring requirements and conduit entrance locations. 3. Schematic diagrams. 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. Accessory list. M: 3/23/2018 16496 - 1 / 7 P. 3/2/2020 City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation TRANSFER SWITCH PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Zenith B. ASCO C. Onan D. Kohler E. Russelectric F. Eaton G. Pre-approved equal 2.02 CONSTRUCTION A. General: 1. The delayed transition automatic transfer switch shall be furnished as shown on the drawings. Voltage and continuous current ratings and number of poles shall be as shown. Switches shall be UL listed in accordance with UL-1008. 2. The transfer switch shall be mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure for indoors and NEMA 4X S.S. for outdoors, unless otherwise indicated. Enclosures shall be fabricated from 12-gauge steel. The enclosure shall be sized to exceed minimum wire bending space required by UL 1008. Outdoor enclosures shall have no exposed controls. 3. The transfer switch shall be equipped with an internal welded steel pocket, housing an operations and maintenance manual. 4. The transfer switch shall be top and bottom accessible. 5. The main contacts shall be capable of being replaced without removing the main power cables. 6. The main contacts shall be visible for inspection without any major disassembly of the transfer switch. 7. All bolted bus connections shall have Belleville compression type washers. 8. When a solid neutral is required, a fully rated bus bar with required AL-CU neutral lugs shall be provided. 9. Control components and wiring shall be front accessible. All control wires shall be multiconductor 18 gauge 600-volt SIS switchboard type point to point harness. All control wire terminations shall be identified with tubular sleeve-type markers. 10. The switch shall be equipped with 90 degrees C rated copper/aluminum solderless mechanical type lugs. M:3/23/2018 16496 - 2 / 7 P:3/2/2020 City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation TRANSFER SWITCH 11. The complete transfer switch assembly shall be factory tested to ensure proper operation and compliance with the specification requirements. A copy of the factory test report shall be available upon request. 12. Transfer time shall be of sufficient duration to allow motor run controls to drop out or, Contractor shall provide additional time delay controls to accomplish this function. B. Automatic Transfer Switch: 1. The transfer switch shall be double throw, actuated by two electric operators momentarily energized, and connected to the transfer mechanism by a simple over center type linkage. 2. The normal and emergency contacts shall be positively interlocked mechanically and electrically to prevent simultaneous closing. Main contacts shall be mechanically locked in both the normal and emergency positions without the use of hooks, latches, magnets, or springs, and shall be silver-tungsten alloy. Separate arcing contacts with magnetic blowouts shall be provided on all transfer switches. Interlocked, molded case circuit breakers or contactors are not acceptable unless specifically shown on plans. 3. The transfer switch shall be equipped with a safe external manual operator, designed to prevent injury to operating personnel. The manual operator shall be front accessible and shall provide "quick make-quick break" operation, offering the same contact to contact transfer speed as the electrical operator to prevent switching the main contacts slowly. The external manual operator shall be UL listed for operation, under load, from the outside of the transfer switch while the door is closed. C. Automatic Transfer Switch Controls: 1. The transfer switch shall be equipped with a microprocessor based control system, to provide all the operational functions of the automatic transfer switch. The controller shall have two asynchronous serial ports. The controller shall have a real time clock with Nicad battery back-up. 2. The CPU shall be equipped with self diagnostics, which perform periodic checks of the memory I/O and communication circuits, with a watchdog/power fail circuit 3. The controller shall use industry standard open architecture communication protocol for high speed communications to other controllers and to a master 4. The controller shall include Modbus TCP/IP communications protocol for integration of ATS with Owner's control system. Provide RJ-45 ethernet connection. Where necessary, contractor shall provide serial to ethernet convertor. Communication port shall allow interface to either the manufacturer's or the owner's furnished remote supervisory control. 5. The controller shall have password protection required to limit access to qualified and authorized personnel. M: 3/23/2018 16496 - 3 / 7 P:3/2/2020 City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation TRANSFER SWITCH 6. The controller shall include a 20 character, LCD display, with a keypad, which allows access to the system. 7. The controller shall include three-phase over/under voltage, over/under frequency, phase sequence detection and phase differential monitoring on both normal and emergency sources. 8. The controller shall be capable of storing the following records in memory for access either locally or remotely: a. Number of hours transfer switch is in the emergency position (total since record reset). b. Number of hours emergency power is available (total since record reset). c. Total transfer in either direction (total since record reset). d. Date, time, and description of the last four source failures. e. Date of the last exercise period. f. Date of record reset. D. Sequence of Operation: 1. When the voltage on any phase of the normal source drops below 80% or increases to 120%, or frequency drops below 90%, or increase to 110%, or 20% voltage differential between phases occurs, after a programmable time delay period of 0-9999 seconds factory set at 3 seconds to allow for momentary dips, the engine starting contacts shall close to start the generating plant. 2. The transfer switch shall transfer to emergency when the generating plant has reached specified voltage and frequency on all phases. 3. After restoration of normal power on all phases to a preset value of at least 90% to 110% of rated voltage, and at least 95% to 105% of rated frequency, and voltage differential is below 20%, an adjustable time delay period of 0-9999 seconds (factory set at 300 seconds) shall delay retransfer to allow stabilization of normal power. If the emergency power source should fail during this time delay period, the switch shall automatically return to the normal source. 4. After retransfer to normal, the engine generator shall be allowed to operate at no load for a programmable period of 0-9999 seconds, factory set at 300 seconds. E. Automatic Transfer Switch Accessories: 1. Programmable three phase sensing of the normal source set to pickup at 90% and dropout at 80% of rated voltage and overvoltage to pickup at 120% and dropout out at 110% of rated voltage. Programmable frequency pickup at 95% and dropout at 90% and over frequency to pickup at 110% and dropout at 105% of rated frequency. Programmable voltage differential between phases, set at 20%, and phase sequence monitoring. 2. Programmable three phase sensing of the normal source set to pickup at 90% and dropout at 80% of rated voltage and overvoltage to pickup at 120% and dropout out at 110% of rated voltage programmable frequency pickup at 95% M:3/23/2018 16496 -4 / 7 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation TRANSFER SWITCH and dropout at 90% and over frequency to pickup at 110% and dropout at 105% of rated frequency. Programmable voltage differential between phases set at 20%, and phase sequence monitoring. 3. Time delay for override of momentary normal source power outages (delays engine start signal and transfer switch operation). Programmable 0-9999 seconds. Factory set at 3 seconds, if not otherwise specified. 4. Time delay to control contact transition time on transfer to either source. Programmable 0-9999 seconds, factory set at 10 seconds. 5. Time delay on retransfer to normal, programmable 0-9999 seconds, factory set at 300 seconds if not otherwise specified, with overrun to provide programmable 0- 9999 second time delay, factory set at 300 seconds, unloaded engine operation after retransfer to normal. 6. Time delay on transfer to emergency, programmable 0-9999 seconds, factory set at 10 seconds. 7. A maintained type load test switch shall be included to simulate a normal power failure, keypad initiated. 8. A remote type load test switch shall be included to simulate a normal power failure, remote switch initiated. 9. A time delay bypass on retransfer to normal shall be included. Keypad initiated. 10. Contact, rated 10 Amps 30 volts DC, to close on failure of normal source to initiate engine starting. 11. Contact, rated 10 Amps 30 volts DC, to open on failure of normal source for customer functions. 12. Light emitting diodes shall be mounted on the microprocessor panel to indicate: switch is in normal position, switch is in emergency position and controller is running. 13. A plant exerciser shall be provided with (10) 7 day events, programmable for any day of the week and (24) calendar events, programmable for any month/day, to automatically exercise generating plant programmable in one minute increments. Also include selection of either "no load" (switch will not transfer) or"load" (switch will transfer) exercise period. Keypad initiated. 14. Provision to select either "no commit" or "commit" to transfer operation in the event of a normal power failure shall be included. In the "no commit position," the load will transfer to the emergency position unless normal power returns before the emergency source has reach 90% of it's rated values (switch will remain in normal). In the "commit position" the load will transfer to the emergency position after any normal power failure. Keypad initiated. 15. Two auxiliary contacts rated 10 Amp, 120 volts AC (for switches 100 to 800 amps) 15 amp, 120 volts AC (for switches 1000 to 4000 amps), shall be mounted M:3/23/2018 16496 - 5 / 7 P.3/2/2020 City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation TRANSFER SWITCH on the main shaft, one closed on normal, the other closed on emergency. Both contacts will be wired to a terminal strip for ease of customer connections. 16. A three phase digital LCD voltage readout, with 1% accuracy shall display all three separate phase to phase voltages simultaneously, for both the normal and emergency source. 17. A digital LCD frequency readout with 1% accuracy shall display frequency for both normal and emergency source. 18. An LCD readout shall display normal source and emergency source availability. 19. Contacts for"Transfer Impending", adjustable 0-120 SEC. F. Ratings: 1. Delayed transition automatic transfer switches shall have the following 3 cycle short circuit closing and withstand as follows: a. RMS Symmetrical Amperes 480 VAC Current Limiting Amperes Closing and Withstand Fuse Rating 100-400 42,000 200,000 600-800 65,000 200,000 1000-1200 85,000 200,000 1600-4000 100,000 200,000 2. During the 3 cycle closing and withstand tests, there shall be no contact welding or damage. The 3 cycle tests shall be performed without the use of current limiting fuses. The test shall verify that contacts separation has not occurred, and there is contact continuity across all phases. Test procedures shall be in accordance with UL-1008, and testing shall be certified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 3. When conducting temperature rise tests to UL-1008, the manufacture shall include post-endurance temperature rise tests to verify the ability of the transfer switch to carry full rated current after completing the overload and endurance tests. 4. The microprocessor controller shall meet the following requirements: a. Storage conditions - 25 degrees C to 85 degrees C b. Operation conditions - 20 degrees C to 70 degrees C ambient c. Humidity 0 to 99% relative humidity, noncondensing d. Capable of withstanding infinite power interruptions e. Surge withstand per ANSI/IEEE C-37.90A-1978 5. Manufacturer shall provide copies of test reports upon request. G. Manufacturer: M: 3/23/2018 16496 - 6 / 7 P:3/2/2020 City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation TRANSFER SWITCH 1. The transfer switch manufacturer shall employ a nationwide factory-direct, field service organization, available on a 24-hour a day, 365 days a year, call basis. 2. The manufacture shall include an 800 telephone number, for field service contact, affixed to each enclosure. 3. The manufacturer shall maintain records of each transfer switch, by serial number, for a minimum 20 years. 2.03 Warranty: 1. Provide 5 year standard manufacturer's warranty consisting of 2 years parts and labor, and an additional 3 years of replacement parts. Warranty shall be "on site" and warranty service shall be available by the factory service department on an emergency basis if required. Depot or non site warranties are not acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Automatic Transfer Switches shall be provided with adequate lifting means for ease of installation of wall or floor mounted enclosures. B. Provide access and working space as indicated or as required. 3.02 ADJUSTMENTS A. Tighten assembled bolted connections with appropriate tools to manufacturer's torque recommendations prior to first energization. 3.03 START-UP AND TESTING A. Provide the services of a factory representative to check-out, test, and start-up the automatic transfer switch in conjunction with the standby generator. Fully function test the automatic transfer switch to verify proper operation. END OF SECTION M:3/23/2018 16496 - 7 / 7 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation SERVICE ENTRANCE SECTION 16980 NATURAL GAS SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Natural Gas Utility Charges: Natural Gas Utility charges for extension of distribution system to point of service termination and meters will be paid by Owner, except where bid allowance is indicated, or where specifically noted otherwise on plans or in other specifications. B. Temporary service disconnects at existing installations shall be paid for by Contractor. Prompt reconnection of service shall be coordinated by Contractor. All temporary disconnection and reconnection costs are to be paid for by Contractor. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Natural Gas Utility: Local Gas Company. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA No. 70— National Electrical Code (NEC). B. Gas Company Standards: 1. Installation shall strictly comply with current Gas Company Standards. Where plans conflict with Gas Company standards, contact Engineer for directions before starting work. Failure to do so is at Contractor's risk. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GAS SERVICE A. Gas Service Characteristics: 1. As indicated on Drawings and provided by Gas Utility. B. Gas Meter Location: Locate gas based on drawings from Gas Company. Do not install Gas equipment without this data statement and without confirming location with Gas Company and Engineer. Contact Engineer prior to construction. Provide submittal with layout of Gas Company's line, Owner's Gas line and generator for review by Engineer and Gas Company before starting construction. Send copy of Gas Company "Service Confirmation and Drawings" to Engineer for review. Any construction performed with Engineer's review is at Contractor's risk and expense. M: 3/9/2018 16980 — 1 / 3 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Confirmation of Gas Service: 1. Consult with Gas Utility to verify service information specified and shown on Drawings. Failure to do so may result in removal and replacement of service equipment at Contractor's cost. Do not start service installation work until "Service Confirmation" has been received from Gas Company and has been reviewed and approved in writing by the Engineer. 2. Include deviations required by Gas Utility from contract documents to comply with Gas Utility standards and requirements. Send drawing of final service arrangement for Engineer's review. Do not install service equipment until approved by Gas Company in writing. 3. Relocate service meter and structure up to twenty feet (20') to maintain clearance required by Gas Utility Company or to maintain other clearances. Coordinate exact point of service with Gas Company and locate customer service Gas line within distance of Gas Company line as per Gas Company Standards. Failure to coordinate location is at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost. B. Metering: 1. Consult with Gas Utility regarding service entrance requirements and metering equipment. Conform strictly to Utility Company standards. 2. Install metering equipment to meet standards and requirements of Gas Utility. C. Application for Gas Service. 1. Obtain required forms from Gas Utility. 2. Assist Owner in completion of forms and deliver completed forms to Gas Utility. Advise Owner of exact requirements. 3. Coordinate schedule for installation of electric service with Electric Utility. 4. Notify utility company in writing, within 30 days of project start date that permanent service will be required for this project. Specify date required and location of project. 5. Notify Engineer, in writing of date service applied for, date to be installed, Gas Company contact name and telephone number and copy of"Service Confirmation" as this information become available. Do not start construction of service without this report and without confirming service location with Engineer. 6. Contractor is responsible to see that service is connected according to the Gas Company standards. Final permanent service connection by Gas Company is M: 3/9/2018 16980 — 2 / 3 P:3/2/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation SERVICE ENTRANCE required before project is considered complete, before final acceptance, and before final payment is made. END OF SECTION M:3/9/2018 16980 — 3 / 3 P:3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Rehabilitation FOR GENERATORS SECTION 16982 NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION FOR GENERATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes piping, valves, and specialties for natural gas distribution from the Gas Utility Company to the generator. B. See Section 16980 Natural Gas Utility for final connection to Gas Utility Company's natural gas main. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Gas Main: Utility's natural gas piping. B. Gas Distribution: Piping from gas main to individual service-meter assemblies. C. Point of Delivery: Piping outlet from service-meter assembly. D. Natural Gas Piping: Piping that conveys natural gas from point of delivery to generator. E. PE: Polyethylene plastic 1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Working-Pressure Ratings: 1. Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include identification materials and devices; and pressure ratings, rated capacities, and settings for the following: 1. Service components. Include valves, regulators, and specialty fittings. 2. Piping specialties. B. Shop Drawings: Include pipe sizes, valves, regulators, gas meters, and specialties. Include details of service-meter assembly and underground piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping, adjacent utilities, and proximate structures. M:9/13/2019 16982 — 1 / 19 P:3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Rehabilitation FOR GENERATORS C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. D. Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. E. Maintenance Data: For service regulators, service meters, and specialty valves to include in maintenance manuals. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Distribution Components: Listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with requirements of utility supplying natural gas. C. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for natural gas piping systems. Include materials, installation, and testing. D. Comply with NFPA, "National Fuel Gas Code", for gas piping materials and components; installations; and inspection, testing, and purging. E. Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and legally dispose of liquids from drips in existing natural gas piping. B. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent damage and entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. C. Store valves and specialties with end protectors in place, unless necessary for inspection, then reinstall for storage. D. Store valves and specialties indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew- point temperature. Support off ground or pavement in watertight enclosures if outdoor storage is necessary. E. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt. F. Store plastic pipes and valves protected from direct sunlight. Support pipes to prevent sagging and bending. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located. M:9/13/2019 16982 — 2 / 19 P:3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Rehabilitation FOR GENERATORS B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner & Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. C. COORDINATION 1. Coordinate connection to gas main and meter assembly with utility. 2. Coordinate pipe materials, sizes, entry locations, and pressure requirements with natural gas piping. 3. Coordinate with other utility work. 4. Work Interruptions: Leave natural gas distribution piping in safe condition if interruptions occur while alterations or repairs are being made to existing gas piping. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends. 4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: a. Material Group: 1.1. b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings, and spiral-wound metal gaskets. e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel underground. M:9/13/2019 16982 — 3 / 19 P.3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Rehabilitation FOR GENERATORS 5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE. a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves. 6. Mechanical Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: (1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Division of Dresser, Inc. (2) Smith-Blair, Inc. b. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish. c. Buna-nitrile seals. d. Steel bolts, washers, and nuts. e. Coupling shall be capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. f. Steel body couplings installed underground on plastic pipe shall be factory equipped with anode. B. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11. 1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket-fusion type or ASTM D 3261, butt-fusion type with dimensions matching PE pipe. 2. PE Transition Fittings: Factory-fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11; and steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 3. Anodeless Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested. a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet. b. Casing: Steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black steel, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating covering. c. Aboveground Portion: PE transition fitting. d. Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection. e. Tracer wire connection. f. Ultraviolet shield. M:9/13/2019 16982 —4 / 19 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Rehabilitation FOR GENERATORS g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe. 4. Transition Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested. a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet connected to steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating for aboveground outlet. b. Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection. c. Bridging sleeve over mechanical coupling. d. Factory-connected anode. e. Tracer wire connection. f. Ultraviolet shield. g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe. 5. Plastic Mechanical Couplings,NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: (1) Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. (2) Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. (3) Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. b. PE body with molded-in, stainless-steel support ring. c. Buna-nitrile seals. d. Acetal collets. e. Electro-zinc-plated steel stiffener. 6. Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: (1) Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. (2) Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. M:9/13/2019 16982 — 5 / 19 P:3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Rehabilitation FOR GENERATORS (3) Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. b. Fiber-reinforced plastic body. c. PE body tube. d. Buna-nitrile seals. e. Acetal collets. f. Stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers. 7. Steel Mechanical Couplings: Capable of joining plain-end PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: (1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Division of Dresser, Inc. (2) Smith-Blair, Inc. b. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish. c. Buna-nitrile seals. d. Steel bolts, washers, and nuts. e. Factory-installed anode for steel-body couplings installed underground. 2.02 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Appliance Flexible Connectors: 1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. 4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating. 5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig. 6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 8. Maximum Length: 72 inches B. Y-Pattern Strainers: M:9/13/2019 16982 — 6/ 19 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Rehabilitation FOR GENERATORS 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for 2-inch (2") NPS and smaller; flanged ends for 2 1/2-inch (2 1/2") NPS and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2.03 JOINING MATERIALS A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F (540 deg C) complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited. 2.04 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services. B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, 2-inch (2") NPS and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33. 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller. 6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to 2-inches NPS shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body. C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, 2 1/2-inch (2 1/2") NPS and Larger: Comply with ASME B16.38. 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. M:9/13/2019 16982 — 7 / 19 P.3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Rehabilitation FOR GENERATORS 2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges. 3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body. D. One-Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable-stem packing threaded ends. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves 1 inch (1") NPS and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. E. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. M: 9/13/2019 16982 — 8 / 19 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Rehabilitation FOR GENERATORS e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves 1 inch (1") NPS and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. F. Two-Piece, Regular-Port Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. M:9/13/2019 16982 — 9 / 19 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Rehabilitation FOR GENERATORS 9. Listing: Valves 1 inch (1") NPS and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. G. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Lee Brass Company. b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Plug: Bronze. 4. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 6. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 7. Listing: Valves 1 inch (1") NPS and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. H. Cast-Iron, Nonlubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. b. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. c. Xomox Corporation; a Crane company. 2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B. 3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron. 4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. 5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas. M:9/13/2019 16982 — 10/ 19 P. 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Rehabilitation FOR GENERATORS 6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 8. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 9. 10. Listing: Valves 1 inch (1") NPS and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 11. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. Cast-Iron, Lubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Flowserve. b. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc. c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. d. Milliken Valve Company. e. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. f. R&M Energy Systems, A Unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc. 2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B. 3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron. 4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. 5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas. 6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 8. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 9. Listing: Valves 1 inch (1") NPS and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. J. Valve Boxes: 1. Cast-iron, two-section box. M:9/13/2019 16982 — 11 / 19 P:3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Rehabilitation FOR GENERATORS 2. Top section with cover with "GAS" lettering. 3. Bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5 inches (125 mm) in diameter. 4. Adjustable cast-iron extensions of length required for depth of bury. 5. Include tee-handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve nut or flat head, and with stem of length required to operate valve. 2.05 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. General Requirements: 1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators 2-inch (2") NPS and smaller; flanged for regulators 2 1/2-inch (2 1/2") NPS and larger. B. Service Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Actaris. b. American Meter Company. c. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. d. Invensys. e. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div. 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. 6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. M:9/13/2019 16982 — 12 / 19 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Rehabilitation FOR GENERATORS 8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. 12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psig. C. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: a. Actaris. b. American Meter Company. c. Eclipse Combustion, Inc. d. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. e. Invensys. f. Maxitrol Company. g. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div. 3. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 4. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 5. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 6. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. 7. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 8. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 9. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. M:9/13/2019 16982 — 13 / 19 P:3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Rehabilitation FOR GENERATORS 10. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 11. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 12. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. 13. Maximum Inlet Pressure: As required. 2.06 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Wilkins; a Zurn company; Model DUBI or comparable product by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Jomar International Ltd. e. Matco-Norca, Inc. f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: [125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C)] [150 psig (1035 kPa)] [250 psig (1725 kPa)]. c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Basis-of-Design 2. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Wilkins; a Zurn company; Model DUBI or comparable product by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Matco-Norca, Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 3. Description: M:9/13/2019 16982 — 14 / 19 P.3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Rehabilitation FOR GENERATORS a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. c. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg. d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Description: a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers. 2.07 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored yellow. 2.08 CONCRETE BASES (WHERE SHOWN ON PLANS) A. Concrete Bases: Precast, reinforced, made with 3000-psi minimum, 28-day compressive strength concrete; and 4 inches thick and 4 inches larger in dimension than supported item, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EARTHWORK A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in specifications. M:9/13/2019 16982 — 15 / 19 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Rehabilitation FOR GENERATORS 3.02 PREPARATION A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off gas to premises or piping section. B. Inspect natural gas piping according to NFPA 54 to determine that natural gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected. C. Comply with NFPA 54, Part 1, "Prevention of Accidental Ignition" Paragraph. 3.03 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same or higher than system pressure rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground Piping: Use the following: 1. 2-inch NPS and smaller: Steel pipe, butt-welding-type fittings, and welded joints. Joints for connection to threaded service regulators, service meters, and valves may be threaded. 2. 2-inch NPS and smaller: Steel pipe, malleable-iron fittings, and threaded joints. 3. 2 '/2-inch NPS and larger: Steel pipe, butt-welding-type fittings, and welded joints. Joints for connection to service regulators, service meters, and valves with flanged connections may be flanged. Joints for connection to service regulators, service meters, and valves with threaded connections 2 1/2 to 4-inch NPS may be threaded. C. Underground Piping: 1. PE pipe and fittings joined by heat fusion, or mechanical couplings; service-line risers with tracer wire terminated in an accessible location. 3.04 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. If specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Connections to Existing Gas Piping: Use valve and fitting assemblies made for tapping gas mains. 2. Underground: Do not use valves underground, install valves above ground only. 3. Above ground, 2-inch NPS and smaller: Lubricated, tapered plug valves or ball valves. 4. Above ground ,2 1/2-inch NPS and larger: Lubricated plug valves. 3.05 JOINT CONSTRUCTION M:9/13/2019 16982 — 16 / 19 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Rehabilitation FOR GENERATORS A. Refer to specifications for basic piping joint construction. B. Install unions, in piping 2-inch NPS and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment having threaded pipe connection. C. Install flanges, in piping 2 1/2-inch NPS and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection. 3.06 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install buried gas distribution piping at least 24 inches deep, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. Provide red, 12-inch wide marker tape 12 inches above gas piping. B. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing. 1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use minimum length nipple of three pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap. C. Install strainers on inset side of service regulators and valves. D. Terminate vent piping with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end. E. Install PE natural-gas piping per ASTM D 2774. 3.07 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install shutoff valves on branch connections to underground gas distribution piping. Install valves with valve boxes. B. Install metal shutoff valves on aboveground, gas distribution piping. C. Install aboveground, metal shutoff valves in accessible locations, protected from physical damage. Include metal tag indicating piping systems supplied, attached to valve with metal chain. 3.08 SERVICE-METER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATIONS A. Install service-meter assemblies aboveground. Provide precast concrete bases where shown on Plans. B. Installation of service meters is by Gas Company. Contractor shall coordinate and verify meter assembly will provide required gas pressure and volume rate (CFH). M:9/13/2019 16982 — 17 / 19 P:3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Rehabilitation FOR GENERATORS C. Install pressure-relief or pressure-limiting devices so they can be readily operated to determine if device is free, tested to determine pressure at which they will operate, and examined for leakage if closed. D. Terminate service-regulator vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end. 3.09 CONNECTIONS A. Connect gas distribution piping to natural gas source and extend to service-meter assemblies and points indicated. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges, as required for piping material. Connect to emergency generator as required. B. Connect to utility gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements. C. Connect to existing gas distribution main according to ASME B31.8. 3.10 ELECTRICAL BONDING AND GROUNDING A. Install aboveground, natural gas distribution piping upstream from equipment shutoff valves, electrically continuous, and bonded to grounding electrode according to NFPA 70. B. Do not use gas piping as grounding electrode. 3.11 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplates and signs on or near each service regulator, meter, and earthquake valve. 1. Text: Distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operation requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to name of identified unit. B. Warning Tapes: Arrange for installation of continuous, underground, detectable warning tape during backfilling of trenches for piping. C. Refer to specifications for warning tapes. 3.12 PAINTING A. Refer to specifications for field-painting requirements. At a minimum, remove any debris, corrosion, and loose factory coating prior to applying primer and paint. B. Use materials and procedures in specifications. Include "safety yellow" color, unless otherwise indicated. C. Paint exposed metal pipe, fittings, valves, and supports. D. Paint exposed metal regulators, meters, and supports, except units with factory-applied paint or protective coating. Restore damaged finish to original condition. M:9/13/2019 16982 — 18 / 19 P: 3/2/2020 City of Pearland Cullen Regional Lift Station Odor Control and NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Rehabilitation FOR GENERATORS 3.13 FIELD QUALTIY CONTROL A. Inspect, test, and purge natural gas distribution according to NFPA 54, Part 4, "Inspection, Testing, and Purging," and utility requirements. B. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until there are no leaks. C. Report test results in writing to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. D. Verify capacities and pressure ratings of service regulators, meters, and valves. E. Verify correct pressure settings for service regulators. 3.14 ADJUSTING A. Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and safety devices. END OF SECTION M:9/13/2019 16982 — 19 / 19 P:3/2/2020